Covidien PB980 Operator's Manual

Document

Puritan Bennett™

980 Series Ventilator

Operator's Manual

COVIDIEN, COVIDIEN with logo and Covidien logo are trademarks of Covidien. Third-party trademarks (“TM*”) belong to their respective owners.

The following list includes trademarks or registered trademarks of a Covidien entity in the United States and/or in other countries.

Argyle™, DAR™, F&P™, IE Sync™, PAV+™, Puritan Bennett™, Shiley™

Copyright Information

The information contained in this manual is the sole property of Covidien and may not be duplicated without permission. This manual may be revised or replaced by Covidien at any time and without notice. Ensure this manual is the most current applicable version. If in doubt, contact

Covidien’s technical support department or visit the Puritan Bennett™ product manual web page at: www.medtronic.com/covidien/support/product-manuals

Click Acute Care Ventilation > Puritan Bennett™ 980 Ventilator> then follow the prompts to select the desired manual.

While the information set forth herein is believed to be accurate, it is not a substitute for the exercise of professional judgment.

The ventilator should be operated and serviced only by trained professionals. Covidien’s sole responsibility with respect to the ventilator and software, and its use, is as stated in the limited warranty provided.

Nothing in this document shall limit or restrict in any way Covidien’s right to revise or otherwise change or modify the equipment (including its software) described herein, without notice. In the absence of an express, written agreement to the contrary, Covidien has no obligation to furnish any such revisions, changes, or modifications to the owner or user of the equipment (including its software) described herein.

Covidien is a Medtronic company. The names Covidien and Medtronic are used interchangeably throughout this manual.

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.2 Global Symbol Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

1.3 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

1.4 Obtaining Technical Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

1.5 Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1.6 Manufacture Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

1.7 Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

1.8 Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

2.2 Ventilator Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.3 Indications for Use/Intended Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

2.4 Contraindications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.5 Components List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

2.6 Product Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

2.7 Mounting Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

2.8 Battery Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.9 Graphical User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.10 GUI Controls and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

2.11 Breath Delivery Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

2.12 Additional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.13 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.14 Color Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2.15 Pneumatic Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.2 Safety Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.3 Product Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

3.4 Product Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

3.5 Product Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

3.6 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

3.7 Ventilator Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

3.8 Product Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

3.9 Installation Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

3.10 Operation Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

4 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.2 Ventilator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.3 Ventilator Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.4 User Interface Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

4.5 Ventilator Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

4.6 Predicted Body Weight (PBW) Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

4.7 Non-invasive Ventilation (NIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

4.8 Manual Inspiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.9 Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

4.10 Oxygen Sensor Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

4.11 Ventilator Protection Strategies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

4.12 Ventilator Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

5 Product Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.2 Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.3 Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.4 Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

5.5 Communication Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

5.6 Retrieving Stored Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

5.7 Display Configurability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

5.8 Printing Data or Screen Captures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

5.9 Connectivity to External Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

6 Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.2 System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.3 Environmental Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.4 Ventilator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

6.5 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

6.6 Monitored Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

7 Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

7.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

7.2 Ventilator Operational Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

7.3 Preventive Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

7.4 Surface Cleaning of Exterior Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

7.5 Component Cleaning and Disinfection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

7.6 Service Personnel Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

7.7 Safety Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

7.8 Inspection and Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

7.9 Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

7.10 Storage for Extended Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

8 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.2 Problem Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.3 How to Obtain Ventilator Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.4 Used Part Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.5 Ventilator Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

8.6 Diagnostic Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

9 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

9.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

9.2 General Accessory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

10 Theory of Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

10.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

10.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

10.3 Applicable Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200

10.4 Inspiration—Detection and Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

10.5 Exhalation—Detection and Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

10.6 Compliance and BTPS Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

10.7 Mandatory Breath Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

10.8 Spontaneous Breath Delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

10.9 A/C Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

10.10 SIMV Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

10.11 Spontaneous (SPONT) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

10.12 Apnea Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

10.13 Detecting Occlusion and Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

10.14 Respiratory Mechanics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

10.15 Ventilator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

10.16 Safety Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

10.17 Power On Self Test (POST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

10.18 Short Self Test (SST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

10.19 Extended Self Test (EST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

11 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

11.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

11.2 Measurement Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

11.3 Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

11.4 Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

11.5 Interface Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

11.6 Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

11.7 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

11.8 Manufacturer’s Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

11.9 Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

11.10 Essential Performance Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

12 Appendix BiLevel 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

12.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

12.3 Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

12.4 Setting Up BiLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

12.5 Using Pressure Support with BiLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

12.6 Manual Inspirations in BiLevel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

12.7 Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers in BiLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

12.8 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

12.9 Technical Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274

12.10 Mode Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

13 Appendix Leak Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

13.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

13.3 Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

13.4 Leak Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

13.5 Setting Up Leak Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

13.6 When Leak Sync is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

13.7 Technical Discussion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

14 Appendix PAV™+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

14.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

14.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

14.3 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

14.4 PAV+™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

14.5 Ventilator Settings and Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

15 Appendix NeoMode 2.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

15.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

15.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

15.3 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

15.4 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

15.5 Neonatal Door and Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

15.6 How to Empty the Condensate Vial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

15.7 How to Connect the Breathing Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

15.8 Ventilation Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

16 Appendix Proximal Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

16.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

16.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

16.3 Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

16.4 Proximal Flow Option Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

16.5 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

16.6 On-screen Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

16.7 Sensor Calibration and Sensor Line Purging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

16.8 SST Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

16.9 Disabling/Enabling the Proximal Flow Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

16.10 Using the Proximal Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

16.11 Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

16.12 Ranges, Resolutions, and Accuracies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

16.13 Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

17.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

17.2 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

17.3 Safety Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

17.5 Setting Up Trending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

17.6 Trend Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

17.7 Viewing Trended Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

17.9 Data Gaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

18 Appendix Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

18.1 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Figures

Figure 1.

GUI Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 2.

GUI Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Figure 3.

BDU Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Figure 4.

BDU Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Figure 5.

Installed Software Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

Figure 6.

Ventilator Right Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Figure 7.

Ventilator Left Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 8.

Pendant-mount Ventilator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Figure 9.

Ventilator Power Switch and AC Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Figure 10.

Service Mode Button (TEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Figure 11.

Sample Status Display During Normal Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 12.

Pneumatic Diagram (Compressor Shown) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Figure 13.

Pneumatic Diagram—Compressor and Prox Flow Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Figure 14.

Example of Freestanding Ventilator Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Figure 15.

Example of Pendant-mounted Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Figure 16.

Power cord Retainer on BDU (without spacers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Figure 17.

Power Cord Retainer on BDU (with spacers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Figure 18.

Connecting the Ventilator to the Gas Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Figure 19.

Adult/Pediatric Filter Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Figure 20.

Installing the Neonatal Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Figure 21.

Drain Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Figure 22.

Flex Arm Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Figure 23.

Bracket Installation on Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Figure 24.

Humidifier Installation to Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Figure 25.

Connecting the Adult or Pediatric Patient Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 26.

Connecting the Neonatal Patient Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Figure 27.

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Figure 28.

Proper Battery Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Figure 29.

Battery Compartment Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Figure 30.

Battery serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Figure 31.

Battery Charge Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Figure 32.

Battery Date of Manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Figure 33.

Service Mode Button (TEST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Figure 34.

Flow Sensor Requires Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Figure 35.

Calibrate The Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Figure 36.

Waiting to Begin Calibration and Calibration Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Figure 37.

Successful Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Figure 38.

SST Prompts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Figure 39.

Areas of the GUI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Figure 40.

Pushpin Icon - Unpinned State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Figure 41.

Pushpin Icon - Pinned State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Figure 42.

New Patient Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Figure 43.

Open Menu Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Figure 44.

New Patient setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Figure 45.

Apnea Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Figure 46.

Alarms Settings Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

Figure 47.

Alarm Screen During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Figure 48.

Vent Setup Button—“NIV” Indicating NIV Ventilation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 49.

⤒ T

I SPONT

Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114

Figure 50.

Default NIV Alarm Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 51.

Touch RM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Figure 52.

Touch the particular tab for the desired maneuver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Figure 53.

More Settings Screen with O

Sensor Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

Figure 54.

Incompatible USB Device Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Figure 55.

Comm Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Figure 56.

Port Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Figure 57.

Alarm Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Figure 58.

EVQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Figure 59.

EVQ Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Figure 60.

EVQ Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Figure 61.

Exhalation Valve Diaphragm Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Figure 62.

Exhalation Filter Seal Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 63.

Pressure Sensor Filter Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Figure 64.

Immersion Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Figure 65.

EVQ Reprocessing Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Figure 66.

Installing the Pressure Sensor Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Figure 67.

Installing the Pressure Sensor Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Figure 68.

Installing the Exhalation Filter Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 69.

Installing the Diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 70.

Installing the Diaphragm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Figure 71.

Installing the EVQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Figure 72.

Log Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

Figure 73.

Ventilator with Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Figure 74.

Additional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Figure 75.

General Feedback Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Figure 76.

Inspiration Using Pressure Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Figure 77.

Inspiration Using Flow Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 78.

Breath Activity During Time-triggered Inspiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 79.

Exhalation via the Airway Pressure Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Figure 80.

Typical Flow-cycled breath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Figure 81.

Square Flow Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Figure 82.

Descending Ramp Flow Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Figure 83.

Ideal Waveform Using Square Flow Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Figure 84.

Ideal Waveform Using Descending Ramp Flow Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Figure 85.

Ideal Waveform Using Pressure Control Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Figure 86.

ET Tube Target Pressure vs. Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Figure 87.

Tracheostomy Tube Target Pressure vs. Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

Figure 88.

No Patient Inspiratory Effort Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Figure 89.

Patient Inspiratory Effort Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Figure 90.

Combined VIM and PIM Breaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Figure 91.

Mandatory and Spontaneous Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Figure 92.

PIM Delivered Within Mandatory Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Figure 93.

PIM Not Delivered Within Mandatory Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Figure 94.

Apnea Interval Equals Breath Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Figure 95.

Apnea Interval Greater Than Breath Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Figure 96.

Apnea Interval Less Than Breath Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Figure 97.

Apnea Ventilation in SIMV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Figure 98.

Illustrated Modes and Breath Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Figure 99.

Spontaneous Breathing at P

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Figure 100.

BiLevel Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Figure 101.

BiLevel Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272

Figure 102.

BiLevel with Pressure Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Figure 103.

Spontaneous and Synchronous Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Figure 104.

APRV With Spontaneous Breathing at P

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Figure 105.

Enabling Leak Sync . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278

Figure 106.

GUI Screen when Leak Sync is Enabled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Figure 107.

Leak Sync Monitored Patient Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Figure 108.

Circuit Disconnect During VC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Figure 109.

Graphics displays in PAV+™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Figure 110.

EQUATION 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Figure 111.

EQUATION 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Figure 112.

EQUATION 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Figure 113.

EQUATION 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Figure 114.

EQUATION 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Figure 115.

Use of Default Lung Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Figure 116.

Installing the Neonatal Filter and Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Figure 117.

How to Connect the Breathing Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Figure 118.

CPAP Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Figure 119.

Proximal Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Figure 120.

Sample GUI screen Showing Proximal Flow Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Figure 121.

Message During Autozero and Purge Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Figure 122.

Attaching Proximal Flow Sensor to Ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Figure 123.

Enabling/Disabling the Proximal Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Figure 124.

Attaching the Proximal Flow Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Figure 125.

Manual Purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Figure 126.

Alarm Message—Prox Inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Figure 127.

Tables

Table 1.

Shipping Carton Symbols and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Table 2.

Safety Term Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Table 3.

Typical Packing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Table 4.

BDU Front Label Symbols and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

Table 5.

BDU Rear Label or Panel Symbols and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

Table 6.

Common Symbols Found on GUI or BDU Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

Table 7.

GUI Control Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Table 8.

GUI Visual Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Table 9.

Symbols and Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Table 10.

GUI Audible Indicator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Table 11.

Status Display Indicators and Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Table 12.

BDU Audible Indicator Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Table 13.

Color Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Table 14.

Patient Types and PBW Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Table 15.

Example of Battery End of Service Life Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Table 16.

Ventilator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Table 17.

SST Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Table 18.

Humidifier Volumes—Adult and Pediatric Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Table 19.

Humidifier Volumes—Neonatal Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Table 20.

SST Test Step Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Table 21.

Overall SST Outcomes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Table 22.

EST Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Table 23.

EST Test Step Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Table 24.

Overall EST Outcomes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Table 25.

Gestures and Their Meanings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Table 26.

Allowable Ventilator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Table 27.

Setting Up a Patient for NIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Table 28.

Invasive to NIV on Same Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Table 29.

NIV to Invasive on Same Patient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Table 30.

MISCA Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Table 31.

MISCF Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Table 32.

Alarm Descriptions and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Table 33.

Alarm Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Table 34.

Technical Alarm Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Table 35.

Technical Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Table 37.

Non-Technical Alarms and Suggested Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Table 38.

Operator Preventive Maintenance Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Table 39.

Surface Cleaning Agents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Table 40.

Component Cleaning Agents and Disinfection Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Table 41.

Service Preventive Maintenance Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Table 42.

Accessories and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Table 43.

Compliance Volume Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Table 44.

Pressure Adjustment Limits According to Patient Body Weight (PBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Table 45.

Spontaneous Breath Delivery Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Table 46.

Pressure Adjustment Limits According to Patient Body Weight (PBW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Table 47.

Inspiratory and Expiratory Pause Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Table 48.

Values for V

Based on Circuit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Table 49.

Peak Flow and Circuit Type (Leak Sync Disabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Table 50.

Modes and Breath Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Table 51.

Safety PCV Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Table 52.

Inspiratory Backup Ventilation Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

Table 53.

Performance Verification Equipment Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Table 54.

Physical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Table 55.

Pneumatic Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Table 56.

Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Table 57.

Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Table 58.

RS-232 Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Table 59.

Nurse Call Pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Table 60.

Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Table 62.

Alarm Settings Range and Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Table 63.

Patient Data Range and Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Table 64.

Delivery Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Table 65.

Monitoring (Patient Data) Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Table 66.

Computed Value Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Table 67.

Electromagnetic Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Table 68.

Electromagnetic Immunity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

Table 69.

Immunity to Proximity Fields RF Wireless Communications Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Table 70.

AIM Standard Test Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Table 71.

Table 72.

Table 73.

Maximum Leak Compensation Flow Based on Patient Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Table 74.

SENS

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279

Table 75.

Absolute limits for PAV+™ Monitored Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Table 76.

PAV+™ Work of Breathing Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Table 77.

Default PBW-based Resistance Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Table 78.

Table 79.

Allowable NeoMode Ventilator Settings and Ventilation Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

Table 80.

Humidifier Volumes—Neonatal Patients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

Table 81.

Delivered Volume Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Table 82.

Monitored Inspired Volume (V

) Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Table 83.

Monitored Exhaled Tidal Volume (V

) Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Table 84.

Proximal Flow Option Patient Data Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306

Table 85.

Proximal Flow Option SST Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308

Table 86.

Proximal Flow Sensor Volume Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Table 87.

Proximal Flow Sensor Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Table 88.

Proximal Flow Option Component Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Table 89.

Trended Ventilator Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Table 90.

Trended Patient Data Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Table 91.

Sampling Periods for Selected Time Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Table 92.

Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

1 Introduction

1.1 Overview

This manual contains information for operating the Puritan Bennett™ 980 (PB980) Series Ventilators. Before operating the ventilator system, thoroughly read this manual. The latest version of this manual is available on the

Internet at: www.medtronic.com/covidien/support/product-manuals

Click Acute Care Ventilation > Puritan Bennett™ 980 Ventilator, then follow the prompts to select the desired manual.

To order an additional copy of this manual, contact Covidien Customer Service or your local representative.

1.1.1 Related Documents

Documentation is available online at the URL above. Covidien makes available all appropriate information relevant to use and service of the ventilator. For further assistance, contact your local Covidien representative.

The Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Operator’s Manual – Provides basic information on operating the ventilator and troubleshooting errors or malfunctions. Before using the ventilator, thoroughly read this manual.

The Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual – Provides information to Medtronic-trained service technicians for use when testing, troubleshooting, repairing, and upgrading the ventilator.

This chapter contains the following:

• Symbol definitions

• Safety Information, including warnings, cautions, and notes

• Technical assistance information

• How to access on-screen help

• How to access warranty information

• Serial number interpretation

• Information regarding electromagnetic susceptibility

1.2 Global Symbol Definitions

Table 1

describes the symbols shown on the ventilator shipping cartons. Other symbols appearing on various labels are shown in

Chapter 2

Table 1.

Shipping Carton Symbols and Descriptions

Symbol

Serial number

Part number

Description

Manufacturer

This side up

Fragile

Table 1.

Shipping Carton Symbols and Descriptions (continued)

Symbol Description

Humidity limitations: 10% to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing (operation and storage)

Temperature limitations: 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F) (operation)

–20°C to 70°C (–4°F to 158°F) (storage)

Atmospheric pressure limitations: 70 kPa to 106 kPa (10.2 psi to 15.4 psi)

Keep dry

CSA certification mark that signifies the product has been evaluated to the applicable

ANSI/Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) and CSA standards for use in the U.S. and Can‐ ada.

U.S. federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

Refer to instruction manual.

1.3 Safety Information

Please pay close attention to warnings and their associated consequences, which could result in adverse events.

Adverse Events (Residual Risks):

Adverse events associated with the use of the PB980 ventilator in order of least to most clinically severe are: anxiety, delay of treatment, cross patient exposure to body fluids, oxygen saturation high, oxygen toxicity, bronchospasm, tissue damage/tissue trauma, hyperventilation, hypoventilation, thermal injury, electric shock, lung overinflation, infection, oxygen saturation low, hypoxia, barotrauma, respiratory failure, extubate (unplanned), cardiac arrest, asphyxia. Any serious incident that occurs in relation to the device (or its accessories where applicable) should be reported to Medtronic and to the national competent authority. The most frequent events are delay of treatment due to transfer to another ventilator (without harm), anxiety, and oxygen saturation low (recoverable without harm). The remaining harms are infrequent or rare.

1.3.1 Safety Term Definitions

This section contains safety information for users, who should always exercise appropriate caution while using the ventilator.

Table 2.

Safety Term Definitions

Term

WARNING

Caution

Note

Definition

WARNING

Warnings alert users to potential serious outcomes (death, injury, or adverse events) to the patient, user, or environment.

Caution

Cautions alert users to exercise appropriate care for safe and effective use of the prod‐ uct.

Note

Notes provide additional guidelines or information.

1.3.2 Warnings Regarding Fire Hazards

Warning: Explosion hazard—Do not use in the presence of flammable gases. An oxygen-rich environment accelerates combustibility.

Warning: To avoid a fire hazard, keep all components of the system away from all sources of ignition (such as matches, lighted cigarettes, flammable medical gases, or heaters). Oxygen-rich environments accelerate combustibility.

Warning: In case of fire or a burning smell, immediately take the following actions if it is safe to do so: disconnect the patient from the ventilator and disconnect the ventilator from the oxygen supply, facility power, and all batteries. Provide alternate method of ventilatory support to the patient, if required.

Warning: Replacement of batteries by inadequately trained personnel could result in an unacceptable risk, such as excessive temperatures, fire, or explosion.

Warning: To minimize fire hazard, inspect and clean or replace, as necessary, any damaged ventilator parts that come into contact with oxygen.

Warning: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) and potential fire hazard, do not use antistatic or electrically conductive hoses or tubing in or near the ventilator breathing system.

1.3.3 General Warnings

Warning: To ensure proper operation and avoid the possibility of physical injury, only qualified medical personnel should attempt to set up the ventilator and administer treatment with the ventilator.

Warning: In case of ventilator failure, the lack of immediate access to appropriate alternative means of ventilation can result in patient death. An alternative source of ventilation, such as a self-inflating, manually-powered resuscitator (as specified in ISO 10651-4 with mask) should always be available when using the ventilator.

Warning: Patients on mechanical ventilation should be monitored by clinicians for proper patient ventilation.

Warning: The ventilator system is not intended to be a comprehensive monitoring device and does not activate alarms for all types of conditions. For a detailed understanding of ventilator operations, be sure to thoroughly read this manual before attempting to use the ventilator system.

Warning: To prevent patient injury, do not use the ventilator if it has a known malfunction. Never attempt to override serious malfunctions. Replace the ventilator and have the faulty unit repaired by trained service personnel.

Warning: To prevent patient injury, do not make unauthorized modifications to the ventilator.

Warning: To prevent injury and avoid interfering with ventilator operation, do not insert tools or any other objects into any of the ventilator’s openings or ports.

Warning: The audio alarm volume level is adjustable. The operator should set the volume at a level that allows the operator to distinguish the audio alarm above background noise levels. See

Section 3.8.2.6, Alarm Volume, page 82

for instructions on alarm volume adjustment.

Warning: Do not pause, disable, or decrease the volume of the ventilator’s audible alarm if patient safety could be compromised.

Warning: If increased pressures are observed during ventilation, it may indicate a problem with the ventilator.

Check for blocked airway, circuit occlusion, and run SST.

Warning: The LCD panel contains toxic chemicals. Do not touch broken LCD panels. Physical contact with a broken LCD panel can result in transmission or ingestion of toxic substances.

Warning: If the graphical user interface (GUI) display/LCD panel is blank or experiences interference and cannot be read, check the patient, then verify via the status display that ventilation is continuing as set. Because breath delivery is controlled independently from the GUI, problems with the display will not, by themselves, affect

ventilation. The ventilator, however, should be replaced as soon as possible and repaired by qualified service personnel.

Warning: The Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator contains phthalates. When used as indicated, very limited exposure to trace amounts of phthalates may occur. There is no clear clinical evidence that this degree of exposure increases clinical risk. However, to minimize risk of phthalate exposure in children and nursing or pregnant women, this product should only be used as directed.

Warning: Although the 980 Series Ventilator meets the standards listed in

Chapter 11 , the internal lithium-ion

battery of the device is considered to be Dangerous Goods (DG) Class 9 - Miscellaneous, when transported in commerce. The 980 Series Ventilator and the associated lithium-ion battery are subject to strict transport conditions under the Dangerous Goods Regulation for air transport (IATA: International Air Transport Association),

International Maritime Dangerous Goods code for sea and the European Agreement concerning the International

Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) for Europe. Private individuals who transport the device are excluded from these regulations although for air transport some requirements may apply.

1.3.4 Warnings Regarding Environment of Use

Warning: Do not position the ventilator next to anything that blocks or restricts the gas inlet or cooling air circulation openings, gas exhaust port, fan intake, or alarm speaker, as this may:

• limit the air circulation around the ventilator, potentially causing overheating;

• limit the ventilator’s ability to exhaust patient exhaled gas leading to potential harm;

• limit the clinician’s ability to hear ventilator alarms.

Warning: To avoid injury, do not position the ventilator in a way that makes it difficult to disconnect the patient.

Warning: To ensure proper operation, do not position the ventilator in a way that makes it difficult to access the

AC power cord.

Warning: Do not use the ventilator in a hyperbaric chamber. It has not been validated for use in this environment.

Warning: Do not use the ventilator in the presence of strong magnetic fields. Doing so could cause a ventilator malfunction.

Warning: Do not use the ventilator during radiotherapy (i.e. cancer treatment using ionizing radiation), as doing so could cause a ventilator malfunction.

Warning: To avoid the risk of ventilator malfunction, operate the ventilator in an environment that meets

specifications. See Table 60, page 249

Warning: Do not use the ventilator as an EMS transport ventilator. It has not been approved or validated for this use.

1.3.5 Warnings Before Using Equipment

Warning: Before activating any part of the ventilator, be sure to check the equipment for proper operation and,

if appropriate, run SST as described in this manual. See Section 3.9.1.2, SST Test Sequence, page 86

Warning: Check for leaks in the ventilator breathing system by running SST prior to ventilating a patient.

Warning: Lock the ventilator’s casters during use to avoid the possibility of extubation due to inadvertent ventilator movement.

Warning:

The ventilator accuracies listed in Table 64 ,

Table 65 , and

Table 66

are applicable only under specified

operating conditions. See Table 60, page 249

for environmental specifications. If the ventilator is operated outside specified ranges, the ventilator may supply incorrect information and the accuracies listed in the aforementioned tables do not apply. A hospital biomedical technician must verify the ventilator is operated in the environmental conditions specified.

1.3.6 Warnings Regarding Electrical Power

Warning: To avoid the risk of electrical shock:

Use only Covidien batteries, adapters, and cables.

• Do not use batteries, adapters or cables with visible signs of damage.

• Do not touch internal components.

1.3.7 Warnings Regarding Ventilator Settings

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient, based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

Warning: Avoid nuisance alarms by applying appropriate alarm settings.

Warning: To prevent inappropriate ventilation, select the correct Tube Type (ET or Tracheostomy) and tube inner diameter (ID) for the patient’s ventilatory needs. Inappropriate ventilatory support leading to over-or under-ventilation could result if an ET tube or trach tube setting larger or smaller than the actual value is entered.

Warning: Setting expiratory volume alarms to OFF increases the risk of not detecting a low returned volume.

Warning: Setting any alarm limits to OFF or extreme high or low values can cause the associated alarm not to activate during ventilation, which reduces its efficacy for monitoring the patient and alerting the clinician to situations that may require intervention.

1.3.8 Warnings Regarding Hoses, Tubing, and Accessories

Warning: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) and potential fire hazard, do not use antistatic or electrically conductive hoses or tubing in or near the ventilator breathing system.

Warning: Adding accessories to or removing accessories from the ventilator breathing system (VBS) can change the pressure gradient across the VBS and affect ventilator performance. Ensure that any changes to the ventilator circuit configurations do not exceed the specified values for circuit compliance and for inspiratory or

expiratory limb total resistance. See Table 56, page 246 . If adding accessories to or removing accessories from the

VBS, always run SST to establish circuit compliance and resistance prior to ventilating the patient.

Warning: Use of a nebulizer or humidifier can lead to an increase in the resistance of inspiratory and exhalation filters. Monitor the filters frequently for increased resistance or blockage.

Warning: During transport, the use of breathing tubing without the appropriate cuffed connectors may result in the circuit becoming detached from the ventilator.

Warning: The added gas from an external pneumatic nebulizer can adversely affect spirometry, delivered O lead to an increase in exhalation filter resistance.

%, delivered tidal volumes, and breath triggering. Additionally, aerosolized particulates in the ventilator circuit can

Warning: Carefully route patient tubing and cabling to reduce the possibility of patient entanglement or strangulation.

Warning: Always use filters designed for use with the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator. Do not use filters designed for use with other ventilators. See

Table 42 for relevant filter part numbers.

Warning: To avoid liquid entering the ventilator, empty the expiratory condensate vial before fluid reaches the maximum fill line.

Warning: Accessory equipment connected to the analog and digital interfaces must be certified according to IEC

60601-1. Furthermore, all configurations shall comply with the system standard IEC 60601-1-1. Any person who connects additional equipment to the signal input part or signal output part of the ventilator system configures a

medical system, and is therefore responsible for ensuring the system complies with the requirements of the system standard IEC 60601-1-1. If in doubt, consult Medtronic Technical Services at 1 800 255 6774 or your local representative.

Warning: Do not use HMEs (heat and moisture exchangers) and heated humidifiers together. This may result in the HME absorbing water and becoming obstructed, resulting in high airway pressures.

1.3.9 Warnings Regarding Gas Sources

Warning: Do not use nitric oxide, helium or mixtures containing helium as high-pressure inlet gas sources with the ventilator. They have not been validated for use as primary gas sources and could result in compromised ventilation and monitoring.

Warning: To avoid the risk of ventilator malfunction, do not use the ventilator with anesthetic gases.

Warning: For proper ventilator operation, use only clean, dry, medical grade gases when ventilating a patient.

Warning: Use of only one gas source could lead to loss of ventilation or hypoxemia if that one gas source fails and is not available. Therefore, always connect at least two gas sources to the ventilator to ensure a constant gas supply is available to the patient in case one of the gas sources fails. The ventilator has two connections for gas sources: air inlet, and oxygen inlet.

Warning: Use of the ventilator in altitudes higher or barometric pressures lower than those specified could compromise ventilator operation. See

Table 60, page 249

for a complete list of environmental specifications.

Warning: The ventilator should be connected to a gas pipeline system compliant to ISO 7396-1:2007 because:

• Installation of the ventilator on a non-ISO 7396-1:2007 compliant gas pipeline system may exceed the pipeline design flow capacity.

• The ventilator is a high-flow device and can interfere with the operation of other equipment using the same gas source if the gas pipeline system is not compliant to ISO 7396-1:2007.

1.3.10 Warnings Regarding Infection Control

Warning: Patients receiving mechanical ventilation may experience increased vulnerability to the risk of infection. Dirty or contaminated equipment is a potential source of infection. It is recognized that cleaning, sterilization, sanitation, and disinfection practices vary widely among health care institutions. Always follow your hospital infection control guidelines for handling infectious material. Follow the instructions in this manual and your institution’s protocol for cleaning and sterilizing the ventilator and its components. Use all cleaning solutions and products with caution. Follow manufacturer’s instructions for individual cleaning solutions. See

Chapter 7 .

Warning: To prevent infection and contamination, always ensure inspiratory and exhalation bacteria filters are installed before ventilating the patient.

Warning: Never attempt to reuse single-use components or accessories. Doing so increases risk of cross-contamination and reprocessing of single-use components or accessories may compromise functionality leading to possible loss of ventilation.

1.3.11 Warnings Regarding Ventilator Maintenance

Warning: To ensure proper operation and avoid the possibility of physical injury, this ventilator should only be serviced by qualified technicians who have received appropriate Medtronic-provided training for the maintenance of this ventilator.

Warning:

Follow preventive maintenance according to specified intervals listed in these tables. See Table 38

and

Table 41 .

1.3.12 Cautions

Caution: To prevent possible equipment damage, ensure the casters are locked to prevent inadvertent movement of the ventilator during routine maintenance, or when the ventilator is on an incline.

Caution: Do not use sharp objects to make selections on the display or keyboard.

Caution: To ensure optimal performance, keep the GUI touch screen and keyboard clean and free from foreign

substances. See Table 39, page 175 .

Caution: To avoid moisture entering the ventilator and possibly causing a malfunction, Covidien recommends using a wall air water trap when using piped medical air from a facility-based air compressor.

Caution: Use only the cleaning agents specified. See

Table 39, page 175

for approved cleaning agents.

Caution:

Clean the compressor inlet filter according to the interval listed in Chapter 7 . See Table 38 .

Caution: Do not block cooling vents.

Caution: Ensure proper connection and engagement of exhalation and inspiratory filters.

Caution: Follow instructions for proper GUI and BDU (breath delivery unit) mounting as described in the

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Installation Instructions .

Caution: To prevent possible damage to electronic circuitry, do not connect the GUI to the BDU while power is applied.

Caution: Follow proper battery installation instructions as described in this manual.

Caution: When transferring the ventilator from storage conditions, allow its temperature to stabilize at ambient conditions prior to use.

Caution: Remove extended and primary batteries from ventilator prior to transporting in a vehicle. Failure to do so could result in damage to the ventilator.

1.3.13 Notes

Note: Federal law (U.S.A.) restricts the sale of this device except by or on the order of a physician.

Note: When using non-invasive ventilation (NIV), the patient’s actual exhaled volume may differ from the exhaled volume reported by the ventilator due to leaks around the noninvasive interface.

Note: When utilizing a closed-suction catheter system, the suctioning procedure can be executed using existing mode, breath type, and settings. To reduce potential for hypoxemia during the procedure, elevated delivered oxygen can be enabled using the Elevate O

control. See

Section 3.8.2.5, Elevate O

, page 81 .

1.4 Obtaining Technical Assistance

1.4.1 Technical Services

For technical information and assistance, to order parts, or to order an operator’s manual or service manual, contact Medtronic Technical Services at 1 800 255 6774 or a local Medtronic representative. The

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual includes information necessary to service or repair the ventilator when used by qualified service personnel.

When calling Medtronic Technical Services, or a local Medtronic representative, have the BDU and GUI serial numbers available, as well as the firmware version number of the ventilator system.

The ventilator’s configuration is available by touching the wrench icon on the GUI screen, then touching the Options tab. Have this information available whenever requesting technical assistance.

Medtronic

2101 Faraday Ave.

Carlsbad, CA 92008

Phone: 1 800 255 6774 option 4

Email: [email protected]

For online technical support, visit the SolvIT SM bennett.com/ and follow the prompts.

Center Knowledge Base at solvitcenter.puritan‐

The SolvIT Center provides answers to frequently asked questions about the ventilator system and other Puritan

Bennett products 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

1.4.2 On-screen Help

The ventilator is equipped with an on-screen help system that enables users to select an item on the screen and display a description of that item. Follow the procedure below to access and use on-screen help.

1.4.2.1 Accessing On-screen Help Topics

Help topics on the ventilator are called tooltips. If a tooltip is available, a glowing blue outline appears around the item in question.

To access tooltips

1. Touch the item in question for a period of at least 0.5 second, or drag the help icon (the question mark icon appearing at the lower right of the GUI screen) to the item in question.

A tooltip appears with a short description of the item. Most screen items have tooltips associated with them, providing the operator with access to a multitude of help topics.

2. Touch “more” on the dialog to display an expanded description.

3. Touch “close” to close the dialog, or let it fade away after 5 seconds.

Note: Dragging the help icon causes the tooltip to display in its unexpanded state.

Note: Dragging the help icon and pausing causes a tooltip to display. Continue dragging to another item to dismiss the last tooltip and display another tooltip.

1.4.2.2 Other Resources

Additional resources for information about the ventilator can be found in the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series

Ventilator Service Manual and appendices in this manual for BiLevel 2.0, Leak Sync, PAV+™, NeoMode 2.0,

Proximal Flow, and Trending functions.

1.5 Warranty Information

To obtain warranty information for a covered product, contact Medtronic Technical Services at 1 800 255 6774 or call a local Medtronic representative.

1.6 Manufacture Date

The graphical user interface (GUI) and breath delivery unit (BDU) each possess a specific year of manufacture applicable only for that assembly. These dates are contained in the serial numbers for each assembly or option. Serial numbers for the 980 Ventilator final units consist of 10 digits, in the following format:

35ZYYXXXXX

1 where

• 35 signifies the unit was manufactured in Galway, Ireland.

• Z represents the product code (B = breath delivery unit, G = GUI, C = DC compressor, P = Proximal Flow monitoring option). The product codes shown here are typically the most common. There may be other product codes shown in the serial number depending upon the particular option(s) purchased.

• YY is a two-digit year code that changes with each year.

• XXXXX is a sequential number that resets at the beginning of each new year.

Serial numbers are located on labels on the back panels of the GUI and BDU, and in various locations on product options.

1.7 Manufacturer

Covidien llc, 15 Hampshire Street, Mansfield, MA 02048 USA.

1.8 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The ventilator system complies with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2:2007, IEC 60601-1-2: 2014 (EMC Collateral

Standard) and AIM Standard 7351731 Rev 2.00.2017. Certain transmitting devices (cellular phones, two-way radios, cordless phones, paging transmitters, RFID devices, etc.) emit radio frequencies that could interrupt ventilator operation if operated in a range too close to the ventilator. Practitioners should be aware of possible radio frequency interference if portable devices are operated in close proximity to the ventilator.

The Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator requires special precautions to be taken regarding electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) and must be installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided in

Chapter 11 .

2 Product Overview

2.1 Overview

This chapter contains introductory information for the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator.

Notes:

• Items shown in bold-italic font are contained as entries in the glossary.

• Items shown in bold font are physical hardware features (e.g., to patient port, exhaust port)

• Alarms are shown in ALL CAPITAL letters.

Communication between the ventilator’s graphical user interface (GUI) and the breath delivery unit (BDU) occurs continuously via independent central processing units (CPUs) .

See

Figure 12, page 51 and

Figure 13, page 53 and their associated reference designators when reading the

following paragraphs.

Gas delivery starts with the ventilator connected to wall (or bottled) air and oxygen. Gas travels to the mix module where gas pressures are regulated by their respective proportional solenoid valves (PSOLs) . The PSOLs meter the gases according to the ventilator settings entered, then the gases flow through individual air and oxygen flow sensors into the mix manifold and accumulator for mixing. The individual gas pressures are continuously monitored both before and after they are mixed in the mix manifold and accumulator assemblies. The mixed gas then flows to the inspiratory pneumatic system where it flows through the breath delivery flow sensor and then the inspiratory PSOL for delivery to the patient.

Before the gas reaches the patient, it passes through an internal inspiratory bacteria filter, then through an external inspiratory bacteria filter attached to the ventilator’s gas outlet (the to patient port) where the breathing circuit is attached. When the gas returns from the patient, it flows through the expiratory limb of the breathing circuit, to the from patient port on the exhalation bacteria filter (which includes a condensate vial) before flowing through the exhalation flow sensor and exhalation valve (EV) . A gas exhaust port allows exhaled gas to exit the ventilator and flow to the room.

The ventilator recognizes the patient’s breathing effort using pressure triggering (P-Trig) or flow triggering

( ⩒ -Trig) . During pressure triggering, as the patient inhales, the airway pressure decreases and the inspiratory pressure transducer (PI) monitors this pressure decrease. When the pressure drops to at least the value of the pressure sensitivity (P

SENS

) setting, the ventilator delivers a breath. During flow triggering, the difference between inspiratory and expiratory flows is monitored. As the patient inhales, the exhalation flow sensor measures less flow, while the delivery flow sensor measurement remains constant. When the difference between the two measurements is at least the value of the operator-set flow sensitivity ( ⩒ the patient is not inhaling, any difference between delivered flow and expiratory flow is due to flow sensor inaccuracy or leaks in the ventilator breathing circuit. To compensate for leaks, which can cause autotriggering, the clinician can increase the ⩒

SENS

setting or enable Leak Sync.

SENS

) , the ventilator delivers a breath. If

Note: Leak Sync is a software function that is enabled by the clinician. Details on its operation are provided in

Chapter 13 .

A backup pressure triggering threshold of 2 cmH

O is also in effect. This provides enough pressure sensitivity to avoid autotriggering, but will still allow the ventilator to trigger with acceptable patient effort.

The exhalation valve controls positive end expiratory pressure (PEEP) using feedback from the expiratory pressure transducer (PE) . The valve controller also cycles the ventilator into the expiratory phase if the expiratory pressure measurement (P

) equals or exceeds the operator-set high circuit pressure limit. The P when the safety valve (SV) opens. If P

measures 110 cmH

measurement also controls

O or more in the ventilator breathing circuit, the safety valve opens, allowing the patient to breathe room air (if able to do so) through the valve.

2.2 Ventilator Description

The ventilator system is available in three models. All ventilators provide continuous ventilation to patients requiring respiratory support.

• Puritan Bennett™ 980 Pediatric–Adult Ventilator - The Pediatric–Adult model ventilates pediatric or adult patients with predicted body weights from 3.5 kg to 150 kg, and with tidal volumes from 25 mL to 2500 mL.

• Puritan Bennett™ 980 Neonatal Ventilator - The Neonatal model ventilates neonatal patients with predicted body weights from 0.3 kg to 7.0 kg, and with tidal volumes for mandatory volume-controlled breaths from 2 mL to 315 mL.

• Puritan Bennett™ 980 Universal Ventilator - The Universal model ventilates neonatal, pediatric, and adult patients with predicted body weights from 0.3 kg to 150 kg, and with tidal volumes for mandatory volume-controlled breaths from 2 mL to 2500 mL.

To ventilate neonatal patients on the Pediatric–Adult or Universal models, the NeoMode 2.0 software option is required. For details regarding the NeoMode 2.0 software option, see

Chapter 15 .

The estimated service life of the ventilator is approximately 10 years, provided the preventive maintenance schedule stated in the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual is followed; however, service life of individual units may vary.

The ventilator’s IEC 60601-1/EN 60601-1 classification is:

• Protection class I

• Type BF

• Mobile

• Internally powered

• IP 21 equipment

• Continuous operation

• Not suitable for use with flammable medical gases (not AP or APG)

See

Table 5, page 30

for a description of the meaning of the IP classification.

The ventilator system uses a graphical user interface (GUI ) and breath delivery unit (BDU) for entering patient settings and delivering breaths to the patient. The GUI contains electronics capable of transferring the clinician’s input (by touching the screen) to the BDU where pneumatic and electronic systems, respectively, generate the breathing parameters.

2.3 Indications for Use/Intended Purpose

The Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator is designed for use on patient population sizes from Neonatal (NICU) through Adult who require respiratory support or mechanical ventilation and weigh a minimum of 0.3 kg (0.66 lb).

It is suitable for service in hospital (institutions) and intra-hospital transport to provide continuous positive pressure ventilatory support using medical oxygen and compressed medical air from either an internal air compressor or external air sources to deliver oxygen concentrations of 21% to 100%. Ventilatory support can be delivered invasively or non-invasively, to patients who require the following types of ventilator support:

• Positive Pressure Ventilation, delivered invasively (via endotracheal tube or trach tube) or non-invasively (via mask or nasal prongs).

• Assist/ Control, SIMV or Spontaneous modes of ventilation.

Note: Intended typical usage may be defined to include the following for the ventilator system:

Hospital Use – Typically covers areas such as operating rooms, special procedure areas, intensive and critical care areas within the hospital and in hospital-type facilities. Hospital-type facilities include skilled nursing facilities, surgicenters, and sub-acute centers.

Intra-hospital transport – Includes transport of a patient within the hospital or hospital-type facility. All external hospital transportation (i.e. ambulance or aircraft) is excluded.

Note: Federal law (U.S.A) restricts the sale of this device except by or on the order of a physician.

2.4 Contraindications

Do not operate the ventilator in a magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) environment.

2.5 Components List

Note: The ventilator system has no components made of natural rubber latex.

Note: The components in the gas pathway that can become contaminated with bodily fluids or expired gases during both normal and single fault conditions are:

• External inspiratory filter

• Internal inspiratory filter

• Exhalation filter and condensate vial

• Exhalation valve assembly

The typical ventilator system ships with the packing list shown in

Table 3 . Depending upon the ventilator system

purchased, your list may vary.

Table 3.

Typical Packing List

Quantity

Item

Graphical user interface

Breath delivery unit

Inspiratory filter

Exhalation filter/condensate vial

Gas hoses (air and oxygen)

Standard caster base

DC compressor (optional)

Power cord

Operator’s manual CD

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Installation Instructions

Flex arm

Drain bag

Gold standard circuit (for running EST)

2.6 Product Views

2.6.1 GUI Front View

Figure 1.

GUI Front View

1 Display brightness key

2 Display lock key

3 Alarm volume key

4 Manual inspiration key

5 Rotary encoder (knob)

6 Inspiratory pause key

7 Expiratory pause key

8 Alarm reset key

9 Audio paused key

2.6.2 GUI Rear View

Figure 2.

GUI Rear View

See

Table 6, page 31

for symbols found on the GUI or BDU. The “Do Not Push” symbol found on the GUI, only, is shown in this table.

2.6.3 BDU Front View

Figure 3.

BDU Front View

1 Power switch

2 AC power indicator

3 Exhalation filter latch

4 Exhalation filter

5 Condensate vial

6 Status display

7 Internal inspiratory filter

8 Option connector panel door

Table 4.

BDU Front Label Symbols and Descriptions

Symbol

To patient port

From patient port

Description

Exhalation filter latch locked (down)/unlocked (up)

2.6.4 BDU Rear View

Figure 4.

BDU Rear View

1 DC compressor base (if the DC compressor is installed). If no compressor is present, the standard base is included.

2 Air inlet

3 Oxygen inlet

4 Labels indicating installed software options

5 Service mode button

6 Remote alarm port

7 Cylinder mount (optional)

Software option labels are applied to the grid located on the back of the ventilator, as shown in Figure 4 (item 4) and

Figure 5

(item 1).

Figure 5.

Installed Software Options

Table 5

lists the symbols and descriptions found on the BDU or base labels.

Table 5.

BDU Rear Label or Panel Symbols and Descriptions

Symbol Description

U.S. federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

User must consult instructions for use. Symbol is also found on “Do not obstruct” labels on both left and right sides of the ventilator, and on label indication supply gas connec‐ tions.

Keep away from fire or flame. Oxygen rich environments accelerate combustibility.

Atmospheric pressure limitations—The operational atmospheric pressure range 70 kPa to 106 kPa (10.2 psi to 15.4 psi).

Humidity limitations—The operational humidity limit range 10% to 95%.

Temperature limitations—The operational temperature limit range 10°C to 40°C (50°F to

104°F).

Type BF applied part.

IEC Ingress protection classification—Protected against ingress of fingers or similar objects and protected from condensation.

Explosive hazard. Do not use in the presence of flammable gases.

Authorized to bear the CSA certification mark signifying the product has been evaluated to the applicable ANSI/Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) and CSA standards for use in the US and Canada.

The ventilator contains components manufactured with phthalates.

Unsafe to use the ventilator in magnetic resonance imaging environments.

CB1

CB2

Potential equalization point (ground) (on AC panel).

BDU circuit breaker (on AC panel).

Compressor circuit breaker (on AC panel).

USB port (at rear of ventilator).

HDMI port (at rear of ventilator).

Service port (at rear of ventilator).

Service mode button (at rear of ventilator).

Remote alarm port (at rear of ventilator).

Table 5.

BDU Rear Label or Panel Symbols and Descriptions (continued)

Symbol Description

Ethernet connector (at rear of ventilator).

Serial port (at rear of ventilator).

Table 6.

Common Symbols Found on GUI or BDU Labels

Symbol Description

Do Not Push—Do not push on the GUI

Manufacturer—Name of the ventilator manufacturer.

Serial number.

Manufacture date—The manufacture date is contained in the serial number. See

Sec‐ tion 1.6, Manufacture Date, page 20 for details regarding interpretation of the serial num‐

ber.

WEEE—Proper waste disposal. Follow local governing ordinances regarding disposing of waste labeled with the WEEE symbol.

2.6.5 Ventilator Side Views

Figure 6.

Ventilator Right Side View

Figure 7.

Ventilator Left Side View

2.7 Mounting Configurations

The ventilator system can be mounted as a free-standing unit standing at the patient’s bedside; the BDU with the

GUI is mounted on a base with casters and includes a handle for ease of movement. The ventilator system may

also be purchased in a pendant-mount configuration, as shown in Figure 8

. Contact your local representative for more information.

Figure 8.

Pendant-mount Ventilator Configuration

2.8 Battery Backup

The ventilator system uses a battery to provide backup power in case AC power is lost. When operating on battery

power, the status display shows the “On Battery Power” image. See Table 11, page 44 for a description of the status

display images and messages. An optional, extended battery is available to lengthen the amount of time the ventilator can operate on battery power. See

Section 3.3.2.2, Using Battery Power, page 55 .

2.9 Graphical User Interface

There are two displays on the ventilator—the primary display (GUI) and the status display.

2.9.1 Primary Display

The GUI incorporates a 15 inch display that rotates throughout a 170° angle about a vertical axis in either direction.

The GUI can also be tilted up to 45° from vertical.

The clinician enters ventilation parameters via the GUI’s touch screen, also known as the ventilator’s primary display. The GUI’s keys activate other ventilator functions including screen brightness, display lock, alarm volume, manual inspiration, inspiratory pause, expiratory pause, alarm reset, and audio paused.

The GUI displays the following information depending on the state of the ventilator:

• Ventilator, apnea, and alarm settings

• Patient data

• Waveforms

• Current alarm banners

2.10 GUI Controls and Indicators

2.10.1 Control Keys

The GUI bezel has eight off-screen control keys as shown in

Table 7

Table 7.

GUI Control Keys

Key symbol Description

Display brightness key—Adjusts the GUI screen brightness. Press the key and turn the knob to adjust the brightness.

Display lock key—Actuates a lock to prevent inadvertent settings changes to the venti‐ lator (including the knob function) while the display is locked. The display lock is useful when cleaning the touch screen. Press the key again to unlock the display. Also use the

display lock key to reset the GUI touch screen as described in Section 2.10.2

Alarm volume key—Adjusts the alarm volume. The alarm volume cannot be turned off.

Manual inspiration key—In A/C, SIMV, and SPONT modes, delivers one manual breath to the patient in accordance with the current mandatory breath parameters. In BiLevel mode, transitions from low pressure (P

) to high pressure (P

) (or vice versa). To avoid breath stacking, a manual inspiration is not delivered during inspiration or during the

restricted phase of exhalation. See Section 10.7.5, Manual Inspiration, page 211 for infor‐

mation on the restricted phase of exhalation. The Manual inspiration key can be used to deliver mandatory breaths to the patient or to run an inspiratory pause maneuver in

SPONT mode. The manual inspiration key cannot be used to run an expiratory pause maneuver in SPONT mode.

Inspiratory pause key—Initiates an inspiratory pause maneuver, which closes the inspir‐ atory and exhalation valves and extends the inspiratory phase of a mandatory breath for the purposes of measuring end inspiratory pressure (P

I END pressure (P

), static compliance (C

STAT

) for calculation of plateau

), and static resistance (R

STAT

Expiratory pause key—Initiates an expiratory pause maneuver, which extends the expir‐ atory phase of the current breath to measure total PEEP (PEEP

Alarm reset key—Clears active alarms or resets high-priority alarms and cancels an active audio paused interval. An alarm reset is recorded in the alarm log if there is an active alarm.

DEVICE ALERT alarms cannot be reset.

Audio paused key—Pauses alarms for 2 minutes. Cancel the audio paused function by touching the on-screen Cancel button.

2.10.2 GUI Touch Screen Reset

On rare occasions, the GUI touch screen may become unresponsive. If you observe an unresponsive GUI, inaccurate GUI responses, or unintended GUI responses, reset the touch screen to restore proper touch screen functionality.

To reset the touch screen

1. Touch the display lock key on the GUI bezel to lock the screen.

The locked padlock icon appears on the screen and the display lock key illuminates.

2. Touch the display lock key again. Doing so displays a progress bar below the locked padlock icon, after which time the locked icon will “unlock,” indicating a successful GUI touch screen reset.

Alternatively, ensure that a patient is not connected to the ventilator and power cycle the ventilator.

Note: Do not touch the screen during the unlock period.

Note: The manual GUI touch screen reset described in this section is different than the automatic 30-second

transient reset of the GUI described in Table 11

2.10.3 Visual Indicators

Table 8

shows the GUI’s visual indicators. See

Figure 39, page 98 for area names.

The audio paused function has two visual indicators—the audio paused key on the GUI bezel glows yellow during an audio paused interval, and a visual countdown timer appears, showing the amount of time the audio paused interval has remaining.

Table 8.

GUI Visual Indicators

Symbol Description

Ventilator Setup (Vent Setup) button. Located at the lower left corner of the GUI.

Touch this button to open the ventilator setup screen.

Manual Event

Adult patient circuit indicator. Indicates adult circuit type tested during SST, and in use. Appears above the Vent Setup button.

Pediatric patient circuit indicator. Indicates pediatric circuit type tested during SST, and in use. Appears above the Vent Setup button.

Neonatal patient circuit indicator. Indicates neonatal circuit type tested during SST, and in use. Appears above the Vent Setup button.

Home icon. A constant access icon. See Figure 39, page 98

. Touch this icon to dismiss all open dialogs on the GUI screen. The display resumes showing the ven‐ tilator waveforms.

This text appears below the Home icon. Touching this text causes the manual event screen to appear, where a variety of events can be recorded for viewing in the

Trending layout. See

Chapter 17 for more information about events.

Alarms icon. A constant access icon. See Figure 39, page 98

. Touch this icon to display the alarm settings screen, which allows alarm limits to be changed.

Logs icon. A constant access icon. See

Figure 39, page 98 . Touch this icon to display

the logs screen, which contains tabs for Alarms, Settings, Patient Data, Diagnostics,

EST/SST status, General Event, and Service logs.

Elevate O

control. A constant access icon. See

Figure 39, page 98 . Touch this icon

to temporarily increase the delivered oxygen concentration by the percent dis‐ played in the Elevate O

dialog. The ventilator will deliver the elevated O

2 tration for 2 minutes and then return the O

concentration to the set O

For the 2-minute period, the Elevate O

2 value between 22% and 100% O

concen‐

% value.

concentration can be set to result in any

delivery. Touching “Extend” restarts the 2-minute interval. The Elevate O

function can be terminated prior to completion of the

2-minute interval by touching Stop. Any time the Elevate O entry is made to the patient data log.

control is activated, an

Screen capture icon. A constant access icon. See

Figure 39, page 98

. Touch this icon to capture the image displayed on the GUI screen. See

Section 5.4.1, GUI Screen

Capture, page 123

to read the complete procedure for capturing screen images.

Help icon. A constant access icon. See Figure 39, page 98

. Drag this icon to the item in question and release. A tooltip will appear describing the item’s function.

Table 8.

GUI Visual Indicators (continued)

Symbol Description

Unread items icon. When this icon appears overlaid on another icon or tab (the logs icon, for example) it indicates there are unread items at this location.

Configure icon. A constant access icon. See Figure 39, page 98

. Touch this icon to display the configure screen. Tabs with SST results, options, Comm setup, and date/ time change are displayed.

Pause icon. Located above the constant access icons. Touch this icon to pause the waveform graph.

Waveform layout icon. Located above the constant access icons area. Touch this icon to open the waveform layout dialog.

Grid lines icon. Located above the constant access icons area. Touch this icon to turn waveform grid lines on or off.

Maximize waveform icon. Located at the upper right portion of each waveform.

Touch this icon to enlarge the waveform to its maximum size.

Restore waveform icon. Restores waveform to its original size. Located at the upper right of the maximized waveform.

Pushpin icon – pinned state. When in the pinned state, prevents a dialog from closing (under certain conditions). Located in the upper right corner of the GUI on

the vent setup screen. See Figure 41, page 99

Pushpin icon – unpinned state. When the unpinned icon is touched, the pinned state becomes active. Located in the upper right corner of the GUI on the vent setup

screen. See Figure 40, page 99 .

Low priority alarm icon (appears on alarm banner).

Medium priority alarm icon (appears on alarm banner).

High priority alarm icon (appears on alarm banner).

Audio paused symbol. The audio paused symbol appears together with a 2-minute countdown timer in the constant access area when the audio paused key is pressed.

See Figure

Figure 39, page 98 .

2.10.4 On-screen Symbols and Abbreviations

Touch an on-screen symbol briefly (0.5 second) to display a tooltip on the GUI screen. The tooltip contains a definition of the symbol and other descriptive text, available with either short or long descriptions. The short description expands to show more information by touching “more” on the tooltip dialog or collapses by touching

“less”. The tooltip closes by touching “close” or fades in 5 seconds if left alone. Expanding the tooltip dialog prevents the tooltip from timing out. Touching outside the tooltip causes the dialog to close.

Table 9

summarizes the ventilator’s symbols and abbreviations.

Note:

Table 9

is subject to change.

Table 9.

Symbols and Abbreviations

Symbol or abbreviation

SENS

DYN

EEF

I END

LEAK

CIRC

LEAK

⩒

TE MAND

⩒

E TOT

E SPONT

TE SPONT

SENS

Definition

Apnea interval

Disconnect sensitivity

Dynamic compliance

Dynamic resistance

End expiratory flow

End inspiratory pressure

Exhalation leak

Monitored total circuit pressure

Exhalation leak at PEEP (Leak Sync enabled) as measured by the proximal flow sensor

Exhaled mandatory tidal volume

Exhaled minute volume

Exhaled spontaneous minute volume

Exhaled spontaneous tidal volume

Exhaled tidal volume

Expiratory sensitivity

Expiratory time

Flow pattern (ramp)

⩒

CIRC

⩒

SENS

⩒

TRIG

⩒

I:E

LEAK

3Tau

DRIVE

Flow pattern (square)

Monitored total inspiratory and expiratory flow

Flow sensitivity

Flow triggering

Monitored inspiratory and expiratory flow measured at the proximal airway

High pressure setting (in BiLevel)

Monitored circuit pressure throughout the breath cycle measured at the proximal airway

High pressure time (in BiLevel)

High pressure time to low pressure time ratio (in BiLevel)

Inspiratory time to expiratory time (I:E)

Inspiration compliance ratio

Inspiratory leak

Inspiratory time

Inspiratory time constant

Inspiratory pressure

Inspired tidal volume

Inspired tidal volume (when Leak Sync is enabled)

Driving Pressure

Table 9.

Symbols and Abbreviations (continued)

Symbol or abbreviation

PEEP

I PAV

MEAN

NIF

0.1

PAV

% Supp

PAV

TOT

WOB

TOT

PEAK

PEF

⩒

MAX

PSF

PEEP

%Leak

COMP

SENS

SUPP

P-Trig

TIY

TEY

TI MANDY

TI SPONTY

TLY f

Definition

Intrinsic PEEP (auto PEEP)

PAV-based intrinsic PEEP

Low pressure setting (in BiLevel)

Low pressure time (in BiLevel)

Mean circuit pressure

Negative inspiratory force

Oxygen percentage

Airway occlusion pressure at 100

PAV-based lung compliance

PAV-based lung elastance

Percent support setting for tube compensation and PAV+™

PAV-based patient resistance

PAV-based total airway resistance

PAV-based work of breathing of patient and ventilator during inspiration

Peak circuit pressure

Peak expiratory flow

Peak inspiratory flow

Peak spontaneous flow

Set or monitored positive end expiratory pressure

Percent leak

Plateau pressure

Plateau time

Compensation pressure

Pressure sensitivity

Pressure support level

Pressure triggering

Proximal inspired tidal volume

Proximal exhaled tidal volume

Proximal mandatory inspired tidal volume

Proximal spontaneous inspired tidal volume

Proximal inspired tidal volume with Leak Sync enabled

Respiratory rate or apnea respiratory rate

Rise time percent f/V

I SPONT

TOT

STAT

T CIRC

Spontaneous rapid/shallow breathing index

Spontaneous inspiratory time

Spontaneous inspiratory time ratio

Static compliance

Static resistance

Tidal volume

Monitored total inspiratory and expiratory volumes

Table 9.

Symbols and Abbreviations (continued)

Symbol or abbreviation

T Y

PEEP f

TOT

Definition

Monitored Inspiratory and expiratory patient volumes measured throughout the breath cycle measured at the proximal airway

Total PEEP

Total respiratory rate (monitored)

Vital capacity

Volume support

2.10.5 Audible Indicators

A tone sounds when a button on the GUI is touched, and also when settings are accepted. Audible indicators include pitched tones, beeps, and key clicks. Key clicks sound whenever a key on the GUI is pressed. Various tones annunciate patient alarms.

Note: Pressing the audio paused key pauses alarms for the 2-minute audio paused period.

Caregivers may choose to pause alarms by pressing the audio paused key.

A 2-minute countdown timer appears on the GUI during the audio paused interval. Cancel the audio paused function by touching Cancel.

Table 10.

GUI Audible Indicator Functions

Function

Low priority alarm tone

Medium priority alarm tone

High priority alarm tone

Soft bound tone

Hard bound tone (invalid entry)

Description

A series of two tones. Sounds when a low priority alarm occurs.

A repeating series of three tones. Sounds when a medium priority alarm occurs.

A repeating series of five tones. Sounds when a high priority alarm occurs.

One tone. Sounds when a soft bound is reached when making changes to ventilator settings. A soft bound is a selected value that exceeds or goes below its limit and requires acknowledgment to continue.

The invalid entry sound occurs when a hard bound is reached when making changes to ventilator settings. A hard bound defines the upper or lower limit of the setting, where the setting cannot be adjusted higher or lower.

The clinician enters ventilation parameters via the GUI’s touch screen. See Figure 1, page 26 . The keys activate other

ventilator functions. See

Table 7, page 35 .

2.11 Breath Delivery Unit

The breath delivery unit contains the hardware and software to enable the ventilator to provide patient support.

2.11.1 BDU Controls and Indicators

2.11.1.1 BDU Controls

Figure 9.

Ventilator Power Switch and AC Indicator

1 AC power indicator

2 On/Off switch

• On/Off switch—Lift the switch cover and turn the ventilator on or off.

• Service mode button—Press and release this button when the Covidien splash screen appears on the status

display after powering on the ventilator to enter Service mode. See Figure 10

, item 1.

Figure 10.

Service Mode Button (TEST)

1 Service mode button

Note: The Covidien splash screen shows the Covidien logo and appears momentarily as a banner on the status

display. See Table 11

for an image of the splash screen.

2.11.1.2 BDU AC Indicator

The status display and the AC power indicator are the only visual indicators on the BDU. The AC indicator illuminates green whenever the ventilator is connected to AC power. All other visual indicators on the ventilator

are on the GUI. See Section 2.11.1.4, Typical Status Display Indicators and Messages, page 43

for a description of the status display indicators and symbols. See the next section for a summary of the information appearing on the status display.

2.11.1.3 Status Display

The status display is a separate display located on the BDU. See Figure 3, page 28 , item 6. The status display provides

the following information according to the state of the ventilator:

During normal ventilation the status display shows:

• Current power source (AC or DC)

• Safe state status (safety valve open (SVO) or vent inop)

• Presence of primary and extended batteries and their charging status

• Relative available battery charge level

• Circuit pressure graph displaying pressure units, ⤒ P

PEAK

alarm setting and current P

PEAK

and PEEP values

• Connection of air and oxygen

• Ventilator operational hours

• Visual indication of current alarm volume setting

Note: The status display provides a redundant check of ventilator operation. If the GUI stops operating for any reason, ventilation continues as set.

Figure 11 shows a sample of the status display during normal ventilation (compressor option not installed).

Figure 11.

Sample Status Display During Normal Ventilation

1 Primary and extended battery status (presence or absence).

2 Alarm volume setting

3 Gas connection status

4 Power status

5 Measured peak circuit pressure (updated at the end of the current breath)

6 P

PEAK

alarm setting

7 Measured inspiratory pressure (changes as pressure changes)

8 Selected pressure units

9 Measured PEEP

During Service mode the status display shows:

• Ventilator serial number

• Ventilator operational time

• EST and SST history

• Power on self test (POST) status

• Hours until next preventive maintenance is due

• Gas pressure at the manifold inlets

See

Table 11 for status display possibilities.

2.11.1.4 Typical Status Display Indicators and Messages

Note: Status display images are shown without the optional DC compressor installed.

See

Table 11 for status display possibilities.

Table 11.

Status Display Indicators and Descriptions

Status display indicator or message Meaning

Splash screen. Appears when the ventilator’s power switch is turned on. When this image appears, press and release the TEST button at the back of the ventila‐ tor to enter Service mode.

POST failure. This image appears if a POST error occurs at ventilator startup, along with the error code (in this case a missing primary battery).

Failure of the exhalation flow sensor assembly ( EVQ ) during power on self test. Confirm proper installation of the exhalation flow sensor assembly and power cycle the ventilator. See

Section 7.5.3

for proper EVQ installa‐

tion instructions.

Failure of the EVQ during power on self test. Reinstall or replace the EVQ and run flow sensor calibration. See

Section 7.5.3

for proper EVQ installation instructions.

Table 11.

Status Display Indicators and Descriptions (continued)

Status display indicator or message Meaning

Prior to patient connection. The status display appears as shown when the patient has not been connected to the ventilator. Note the absence of P

PEAK ues.

and PEEP val‐

Stand-By state. The status display appears as shown when the ventilator is in Stand-By state.

Battery charged. The ventilator’s primary battery (in the right-most slot) is shown fully charged. The percentage indicator shows 100%.

Battery charging/discharging. Identifies that the ven‐ tilator’s primary battery is charging or discharging, and provides its relative capacity. If an extended battery is installed, the image shows a similar representation in the extended battery location (left-most receptacle).

Table 11.

Status Display Indicators and Descriptions (continued)

Status display indicator or message Meaning

Battery icon. Denotes the ventilator is operating on battery power when this image appears on any status display indicator. Alerts the operator there is insuffi‐ cient AC power to operate the ventilator. The indicator is replaced by the “on AC power” indicator when ade‐ quate AC power is restored.

On battery power. Alerts the operator there is insuffi‐ cient AC power to operate the ventilator. Ventilator is operating on battery power with greater than 10 minutes of capacity remaining. Note the appearance of the battery icon.

Low battery. Identifies that the ventilator’s primary bat‐ tery (right-most receptacle) is discharging and there are10 minutes or less of battery capacity remaining. A percentage indicator shows the remaining battery capacity. If an extended battery is installed, the image would show a similar representation in the extended battery location (left-most receptacle).

Critically low battery. Identifies that the ventilator’s pri‐ mary battery has less than 5 minutes of battery capacity remaining. A percentage indicator shows the remaining battery capacity. If an extended battery is installed, the image would show a similar representa‐ tion in the extended battery location.

Table 11.

Status Display Indicators and Descriptions (continued)

Status display indicator or message Meaning

Power failure. Alerts the user that the ventilator’s bat‐ tery is depleted or depletion is imminent. Replace pri‐ mary or extended battery with a fully charged batter or connect ventilator to AC power.

Battery inoperative. This image appears on the status display when a battery fault renders the battery inop‐ erative.

Battery not installed. This image appears when there is no primary battery installed, and renders ventilator inoperative. This image displays when the primary bat‐ tery is removed during ventilator operation.

GUI transient reset. Indicates there is a transient loss of communication between the BDU and the GUI. It occurs in the ventilator by design to maintain full GUI display functionality. During the GUI transient reset, ventilation continues as currently set, audible and vis‐ ual alarms are not annunciated, and the status display shows a count-down timer until the completion of the

GUI transient reset. The count-down timer lasts for approximately 30 s.

Table 11.

Status Display Indicators and Descriptions (continued)

Status display indicator or message Meaning

GUI failure. Indicates a loss of communication between the BDU and the GUI that cannot be recovered by the ventilator system. During the GUI failure, ventilation continues as currently set, audible and visual alarms are annunciated, and the status display shows “Display

Failed”. Replace the ventilator as soon as it is appropri‐ ate to do so. Service the ventilator prior to returning it for use on patients. Recommended actions for GUI fail‐ ure condition:

• Verify the patient’s respiratory and physiological stability.

• Confirm that the patient is receiving ventilatory support by observing expansion and contraction of the patient’s chest.

• Assess patient status by reviewing other monitor‐ ing indicators (e.g., oxygen saturation, heart rate, blood pressure, etc.).

• Transfer the patient to an alternate source of ven‐ tilation consistent with your institution’s protocol.

Ventilator inoperative (vent inop). Indicates the venti‐ lator is no longer capable of ventilating a patient and requires service. The alarm reset key cannot be used to restore function to the ventilator during a ventilator inoperative condition. Provide alternate means of ven‐ tilation immediately. Note the display of the safety valve open indicator.

Safety valve open (SVO) indicator. During SVO, the patient can breathe room air through the safety valve, to the extent the patient is able to breathe unaided. See

Section 4.11.6, Safety Valve Open (SVO), page 121 for

more information on the SVO state.

Table 11.

Status Display Indicators and Descriptions (continued)

Status display indicator or message Meaning

Backup ventilation (BUV) indicator. Indicates the ven‐ tilator has entered the backup ventilation state. See

Section 10.16.4, Background Diagnostic System, page 242

for a description of BUV.

On AC power indicator. When this image appears on any status display indicator, indicates the ventilator is operating on AC power.

Status display appearance when the ventilator is breathing in Normal mode. Note the appearance of the

AC power icon.

Air available indicator. When this image appears on any status display indicator, indicates the ventilator is con‐ nected to a pressurized air source.

available indicator. When this image appears on any status display indicator, indicates the ventilator is con‐ nected to a pressurized O

source.

2.11.1.5 BDU Audible Indicators

The continuous tone alarm is the only audible indicator in the BDU, and is described in

Table 12 .

Table 12.

BDU Audible Indicator Functions

Indicator

Continuous tone alarm (Imme‐ diate priority)

Description

A continuous tone annunciated when there is a Ventilator Inoperative (vent inop) condition. This alarm lasts for a minimum of 2 minutes.

2.11.2 Connectors

The ventilator incorporates the following connectors:

Ventilator outlet port (to patient) – A coaxial 15 mm (ID) / 22 mm (OD) conical connection to which the external inspiratory bacteria filter attaches.

Exhalation port (from patient) – The expiratory limb of the patient circuit attaches to the inlet of the exhalation bacteria filter. This port is compatible with a standard 22 mm (OD) conical connection.

Proximal flow sensor – A keyed pneumatic connector for the proximal flow sensor is provided with a locking feature to prevent inadvertent disconnection. The proximal flow sensor measures flow and pressure at the patient

wye. The proximal flow sensor is an optional sensor. Details on operation are provided in Chapter 16

Standard interface connectors – USB, HDMI, and Ethernet connectors are provided. The USB connector allows images to be captured on an external USB storage device and allows communication with an external patient monitor via serial-over-USB protocol, and the HDMI connector allows the GUI image to be displayed on an external video display device. The Ethernet connector is used by service personnel to upload new software and

options. See Section 5.5.1, Port Use, page 135

for more information. See

Section 5.4.3, Comm Port Configuration, page 125 for information on serial-over-USB data transfer when configuring Comm ports for external devices.

2.12 Additional Equipment

An optional DC compressor is available to provide compressed air in the event the wall or bottled air supply is lost or is unavailable. The compressor receives DC power from its own power supply if AC power is present. If there is no AC power available, the compressor is powered by its internal battery. The compressor interface printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) communicates with the breath delivery CPU PCBA. See the Compressor Operator’s

Manual Addendum for details regarding compressor operation.

Warning: Use of the compressor in altitudes higher or barometric pressures lower than those specified could

compromise ventilator or compressor operation. See Table 60, page 249

for environmental specifications.

2.13 Special Features

A Proximal Flow option is available. The proximal flow sensor is used to measure low flows and pressures

associated with neonatal ventilation. If the ventilator is configured with this option, see Chapter 16

for more information.

2.14 Color Definitions

Table 13

provides a legend to interpret gas colors in the pneumatic diagrams shown in Figure 12 and

Figure 13

Table 13.

Color Legend

Color or sym‐ bol

Description

High-pressure oxygen (NFPA 99 designation)

High-pressure air (NFPA 99 designation)

Mixed gases, including air

Table 13.

Color Legend (continued)

Color or sym‐ bol

Atmosphere

Vacuum

Water

Description

2.15 Pneumatic Diagrams

Note: Both the compressor and the Proximal Flow option are hardware options.

Figure 12 and

Figure 13

illustrate the ventilator’s pneumatics with and without the optional Proximal Flow option.

The Proximal Flow option is only for use with neonatal patients.

Figure 12.

Pneumatic Diagram (Compressor Shown)

1 Pressure switch, mix accumulator (PS1)

2 Solenoid valve, options supply (SOL2)

3 Pressure sensor, mix accumulator (P

)

4 Accumulator, mix (ACC

)

5 Tube, mix (T

)

6 Proportional solenoid valve, patient gas delivery (PSOL

)

7 Solenoid valve, BUV (SOL 3)

8 Safety valve (SV)

9 Pressure sensor, safety valve (P

)

10 Solenoid valve, inspiratory pressure sensor autozero (SOL4)

11 Pressure sensor, inspiratory (P

)

12 Pressure sensor, barometric (PA)

13 Vial, exhalation condensate (ECV)

14 Filter, exhalation (F4)

15 Flow sensor assembly, exhalation valve

16 Exhalation valve (EV)

17 Filter, exhalation pressure line (F5)

18 Solenoid valve, exhalation pressure autozero (SOL 5)

19 Pressure sensor, exhalation (PE)

20 Humidifier

21 Filter, external bacteria (F

)

22 Filter, internal bacteria (F

)

23 Check valve, patient gas delivery (CV

)

24 Sensor, oxygen (OS)

25 Restrictor, breath delivery bypass (R2)

26 Flow sensor, patient gas delivery (FS

)

27 Accumulator, compressor (ACC

)

28 Relief valve, compressor accumulator (RVCA)

29 Solenoid valve, compressor unload (SOL7)

30 Motor compressor (MC)

31 Heat exchanger, compressor (HE)

32 Filter, compressor air (F7)

33 Dryer, compressor

34 Filter, muffler (F6)

35 Check valve, compressor accumulator (CV

)

36 Pressure sensor, compressor accumulator (PC)

37 Check valve, oxygen (CVO

)

38 Check valve, air (CV

Air

)

39 Proportional solenoid valve, oxygen (PSOLO

)

40 Flow sensor, air (FS

Air

)

41 Proportional solenoid valve, air (PSOL

Air

)

42 Pressure sensor, air gas inlet (P

Air

)

43 Restrictor, wall air bleed outlet (R1)

44 Check valve, compressor air inlet (CV

Air

)

45 Filter bowl assembly, air (WT2)

46 Filter element, air (F2)

47 Check valve, wall air inlet (CV

WAir

)

48 Filter, oxygen impact (F1)

49 Filter element, oxygen (F3)

50 Pressure sensor, oxygen gas inlet (PO

)

51 Flow sensor, oxygen (FSO

)

52 Restrictor, prox flow (R4)

53 Relief valve, mix accumulator (RVMA)

54 Solenoid valve, mix accumulator purge(SOL1)

Figure 13.

Pneumatic Diagram—Compressor and Prox Flow Options

1 Restrictor, prox flow (R4)

2 Solenoid valve, prox flow (SOL 6)

3 Module, proximal flow system

4 Pressure sensor, prox flow accumulator (P

PROX

)

5 Humidifier

6 Wye, patient circuit

7 Sensor, proximal flow

8 Filter, neonatal exhalation

9 Condensate vial, neonatal expiratory

Note: Items enclosed by the dotted line represent components internal to the ventilator.

3 Installation

3.1 Overview

This chapter contains information for the installation and set up of the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator.

Before operating the ventilator system thoroughly read this operator’s manual.

Topics include:

• Safety reminders

• Ventilator setup

• Battery information

• Ventilator operating modes

• Preparing the ventilator for use

• Tests to perform prior to ventilating a patient

3.2 Safety Reminders

Warning: Explosion hazard—Do not use in the presence of flammable gases. An oxygen-rich environment accelerates combustibility.

Warning: To prevent electrostatic discharge (ESD) and potential fire hazard, do not use antistatic or electrically conductive hoses or tubing in or near the ventilator breathing system.

Warning: Use only gas supply hoses approved by Covidien. Other hoses may be restrictive and may cause improper ventilator operation.

Warning: To avoid possible injury, lock the ventilator’s casters prior to installing or removing ventilator components.

Caution: To ensure optimum performance, Covidien recommends preventive maintenance be performed by

qualified biomedical engineers per the schedule specified. See Table 41

Note: U.S. federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.

3.3 Product Assembly

3.3.1 How to Assemble Ventilator Components

Ventilator setup, including a successful EST, should have already been completed by qualified service personnel.

This manual does not include ventilator assembly instructions.

3.3.2 Product Power Sources

3.3.2.1 Using AC Power

The ventilator is normally AC-powered. See

Section 3.5.1, Connecting the Ventilator to AC Power, page 58 to connect

the ventilator to AC power.

3.3.2.2 Using Battery Power

Warning: Use only Covidien batteries. Using other manufacturer’s brands could result in the batteries operating the ventilator for less than the specified amount of time or could cause a fire hazard.

Warning: One primary battery must be installed at all times in the BDU’s primary battery slot for proper ventilator operation. The ventilator will not complete the startup process without the primary battery installed. See

Figure 29, page 71

to identify battery slots.

The ventilator’s primary battery must be installed by qualified service personnel (as it is shipped separately) before patient use. The ventilator will not complete power on self test (POST) if the battery is not present, and ventilation is prohibited. Ensure the battery is fully charged before placing the ventilator into service.

The ventilator employs a battery backup system if AC power becomes unavailable or drops below approximately

90 volts. A new, fully charged battery provides at least 1 hour of power to the ventilator assuming ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F) to 25°C (77°F), PBW=70 kg, and at factory default ventilator settings.

The battery back-up systems for the ventilator and compressor contain one primary battery each. Backup power is supplied to the ventilator in the event of an AC power loss.

One extended battery receptacle is available for the ventilator and one extended battery receptacle is available for the compressor. If both primary and extended ventilator and compressor batteries are present, these batteries can power the ventilator and compressor for 2 hours (1 hour for the primary battery and 1 hour for the extended battery) under the environmental conditions described above. When using battery power, the ventilator and compressor operate from their extended batteries, if present, first and then switch to the primary batteries. The ventilator and compressor primary and extended batteries are charged whenever the ventilator is plugged into

AC power (the ventilator does not have to be powered up). If the ventilator or compressor is operating on battery power, the status display shows which battery is in use and its charge level, and the remaining time the battery will operate before charging is required again.

3.3.2.3 Battery Charging

Batteries requiring charging are charged whenever the ventilator is connected to AC power, whether operating or not.

The ventilator and compressor charge their primary batteries first, then their extended batteries. The time required to charge a single battery (either primary or extended) is approximately 6 hours at room temperature whether the ventilator is turned off (but connected to AC power) or operating, but charging time can vary based on temperature or depletion state of the battery. The status display provides the batteries’ capacities.

Green LED bars located on the ends of both primary and extended batteries (if installed) scroll upwards indicating battery charging. A white LED bar represents the battery is in use and a round LED indicator illuminates red if there is a battery fault. When running on battery power, battery capacity is determined by the number of green LED bars illuminated. See

Figure 28, page 70

to view the LEDs. See Section 3.6.1.1, Primary Batteries, page 69 for information

on interpreting the battery capacity. Green LED bars do not scroll if the battery is not charging or is in use.

The compressor’s battery charging system (if a compressor is present) operates independently from the ventilator’s charging system and batteries are charged in parallel.

If a battery fault occurs, the fault is annunciated, charging of the faulty battery discontinues, but charging of any other non-faulty battery continues. A faulty battery will cause annunciation of the error and battery power will not be available from that battery.

The ventilator status display indicates the charge level of the installed batteries, the presence of one or more battery faults, and which battery is being charged.

The ventilator operates no differently when its batteries are charging than it does when the batteries are fully charged.

The ventilator continues operating as set when the ventilator switches from AC power to battery power and illuminates an indicator on the status display alerting the operator that the ventilator is now operating on battery power and AC POWER LOSS alarm annunciates. A medium priority alarm annunciates when the remaining run-time for the ventilator drops to 10 minutes and a high priority alarm annunciates when the remaining time drops to 5 minutes.

3.4 Product Placement

The ventilator is positioned standing on its casters next to the patient’s bedside, as shown in

Figure 14

, or if using

a pendant-mounted configuration, Figure 15

Move the ventilator using the handle encircling the BDU and roll the ventilator to the desired location.

Figure 14.

Example of Freestanding Ventilator Placement

Figure 15.

Example of Pendant-mounted Ventilator

VEN_10308_B

3.5 Product Connectivity

3.5.1 Connecting the Ventilator to AC Power

Note: Power outlet access and power cord position— Ensure that the power outlet used for the ventilator is easily accessible; disconnection from the outlet is the only way to completely remove power from the ventilator.

To connect the power cord to AC power

1. Plug the ventilator into a properly grounded power outlet rated for at least 15 A.

2. Verify the connection by checking the AC indicator below the power switch on the front of the BDU. See

Figure 9, page 41

for the power switch and AC indicator locations.

To connect the power cord to the ventilator

1. Remove the power cord retainer and connect the female end of the power cord to the ventilator’s power cord receptacle. See

Figure 16, page 58 and

Figure 17, page 59

2. Set hex nuts and spacers, if present, aside for reassembly.

3. Replace the power cord retainer, using the hex nuts and spacers removed during disassembly. See

Figure 16, page 58

or Figure 17, page 59

Note: Your ventilator may have either combination of power cord and retainer.

Use the power cord hook located at the back of the ventilator for power cord storage.

Warning: For proper ventilator operation, and to avoid the risk of electric shock, connect the ventilator to a grounded, hospital-grade, AC electrical outlet.

Figure 16.

Power cord Retainer on BDU (without spacers)

1 1/4 in. hex nuts

2 Power cord retainer

3 AC power cord

Figure 17.

Power Cord Retainer on BDU (with spacers)

1 1/4 in. hex nuts

2 Power cord retainer

3 AC power cord

4 Spacers

3.5.2 Connecting the Gas Supplies

The ventilator can be connected to hospital grade wall or bottled air and oxygen. See Figure 18, page 60 . Both air

and O

supply pressure ranges must be between 241.3 kPa to 599.8 kPa (35 psig and 87 psig) and the average flow requirement for both gases is 60 L/min at 280 kPa (40.61 psi). The transient will not exceed 200 L/min for ≥3 seconds.

Warning: Due to excessive restriction of the Air Liquide™, SIS, and Dräger™ hose assemblies, reduced ventilator performance levels may result when oxygen or air supply pressures <345 k Pa (50 psi) are employed.

Gas cross flow from one high pressure input port of one type of gas to another high pressure input port of a different gas will not exceed 100 mL/h under normal or single fault conditions. If, during a single fault condition, cross flow exceeds 100 mL/h, an audible alarm annunciates.

Table 36, page 150

for alarms that occur due to a loss of gas supplies.

To connect the gas sources

1. Connect the oxygen hose to the oxygen inlet fitting (item 1) as shown. Ensure use of a medical grade oxygen source.

2. Connect the air hose to the air inlet fitting (item 2) See Figure 18, page 60

Figure 18.

Connecting the Ventilator to the Gas Supplies

1 O

gas connection

2 Air gas connection

Warning: To prevent a potential fire hazard and possible damage to the ventilator, ensure the connections to the gas supplies are clean and unlubricated, and there is no water in the supply gas. If water is suspected, use an external wall air water trap to prevent damage to the ventilator or its components.

The ventilator system can be purchased with the following gas inlet fittings for both air and O

NIST, Air Liquide, SIS, and Dräger.

: BOC, DISS, female,

See

Table 42 for part numbers of gas hoses.

3.5.3 Filter Installation

The ventilator is shipped with internal and external inspiratory filters. See Table 42 for the part numbers of

exhalation filters. To prevent infection and contamination, both inspiratory and exhalation filters must be used with the ventilator.

Warning: To reduce the risk of infection, always use the ventilator with inspiratory and exhalation bacteria filters.

Warning: Do not attempt to use inspiratory or exhalation filters designed for use with ventilators other than the

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator. See Table 42

for relevant part numbers.

Warning: Refer to the filter’s instructions for use (IFU) for details such as cleaning requirements, filtration efficiency, proper filter usage, and maximum filter resistance, particularly when using aerosolized medications.

Caution: Ensure both inspiratory and exhalation filters are properly attached to the ventilator.

Note: Refer to the inspiratory filter IFU for information on proper use and handling of the filter.

To install the inspiratory filter

1. Attach the inspiratory filter to the to patient port.

2. Ensure the direction of flow arrow is pointing outward, toward the patient circuit’s inspiratory limb.

Note: Refer to the inspiratory filter IFU for information on proper use and handling of the filter.

Note: Refer to the exhalation filter IFU for information on proper use and handling of the filter and for emptying

the condensate vial for adult and pediatric patients. See Chapter 15

for information on emptying the condensate vial when using neonatal exhalation filters.

Warning: Do not reuse disposable inspiratory or exhalation filters, and dispose of the filters according to your institution’s policy for discarding contaminated waste.

To install the adult/pediatric exhalation filter

1. If necessary, remove the expiratory limb of the patient circuit from the exhalation filter.

2. Raise the exhalation filter latch to unlock (item 3). See Figure 19, page 62

This raises the exhalation valve assembly and allows the filter door to swing away from the ventilator.

3. Open the exhalation filter door.

4. Remove the existing filter.

5. Insert the new filter by sliding the filter along the tracks in the door. Ensure the from patient port aligns with the cutout in the door and points away from the ventilator.

6. Close the exhalation filter door.

7. Lower the exhalation filter latch to secure the filter.

Warning: Do not operate the exhalation filter latch during patient ventilation. Opening the latch during ventilation will result in a patient disconnect condition and corresponding alarm.

Note: To prevent EVQ misalignment and potential damage, ensure there is an exhalation filter in place any time the ventilator is transported from one location to another.

Figure 19.

Adult/Pediatric Filter Installation

1 Condensate drain port cap

2 Condensate drain port

3 Exhalation filter latch

4 Exhalation filter door

To install the neonatal exhalation filter adapter door

1. If necessary, remove the expiratory limb of patient circuit from the exhalation filter.

2. Lift the exhalation filter latch. See

Figure 20 (item 3).

3. Remove the existing exhalation filter door by lifting it off of the pivot pins.

4. Fit neonatal adapter door onto the pivot pins.

Figure 20.

Installing the Neonatal Filter

1 Neonatal exhalation filter

2 Neonatal adapter door

3 Exhalation filter latch

4 Filter door pivot pin

VEN_11162_A

Note: The condensate vial is removable for discarding accumulated liquid, by turning the vial clockwise to remove and counterclockwise to install.

To install the neonatal exhalation filter assembly

1. With the door still open, push the neonatal filter assembly straight up into the adapter.

2. Close the door.

3. Lower the exhalation filter latch.

4. Re-attach the expiratory limb of the patient circuit to the filter.

To use the drain bag

1. Remove the drain port cap from the exhalation filter condensate vial drain port.

2. Attach the drain bag tube to the condensate vial’s drain port.

3. Hang the drain bag on the holder located on the ventilator’s accessory rail, as shown in Figure 21, page 63

See

Table 42 for the part number of the drain bag holder.

Figure 21.

Drain Bag

VEN_11209_A

3.5.4 Flex Arm

Use the flex arm to support the patient circuit between the patient and the ventilator. See

Figure 22, page 64 ,

which illustrates flex arm installation into the sockets provided.

Figure 22.

Flex Arm Installation

To attach or remove the flex arm

1. Locate the threaded inserts in the ventilator’s handle.

2. Fasten the flex arm into one of the inserts.

3. Hang the patient circuit using the circuit management supports included with the flex arm.

4. Remove the flex arm by first removing the patient circuit, then unfastening the flex arm from the threaded fastener in the handle.

3.5.5 Humidifier

Use the humidifier to add heat and moisture to the inhaled gas. Connect the humidifier to a hospital grade electrical outlet. Choose the humidifier (type and volume appropriate for the patient). The humidifier may be

mounted with the humidifier bracket as shown in Figure 23, page 65

. See

Table 42 for the part number of the

humidifier bracket.

Warning: Selection of the incorrect humidifier type or volume during SST or during patient ventilation can affect the accuracy of delivered volume to the patient by allowing the ventilator to incorrectly calculate the compliance correction factor used during breath delivery. This can be a problem, as the additional volume required for circuit compressibility compensation could be incorrectly calculated, resulting in over- or under-delivery of desired volume.

Warning: To ensure proper compliance and resistance calculations, perform SST with the humidifier and all accessories used for patient ventilation installed in the ventilator breathing system.

Warning: Follow the humidifier manufacturer’s IFU when using a humidifier with patient ventilation.

Caution: Follow the humidifier manufacturer’s IFU for proper humidifier operation.

To install the humidifier bracket, attach it to the ventilator’s accessory rail by placing it behind the railing and fastening the bracket clamp to the bracket with four 5/32 inch hex screws, capturing the railing between the bracket and the clamp. Ensure that the humidifier mounting slots are facing outward from the ventilator.

Figure 23.

Bracket Installation on Rail

To install the humidifier

1. Slide the rear of the humidifier into the corresponding slot on the humidifier bracket, until it is fully seated.

See

Figure 24, page 66 . Some humidifiers slide into the narrow slot in the humidifier bracket, and some

humidifiers use the wide slot.

Figure 24.

Humidifier Installation to Ventilator

2. Fill the humidification system with water to the desired volume.

3. Install the chamber to the humidifier, connect the patient circuit, then run SST.

4. Plug the humidifier into a grounded, hospital-grade electrical outlet.

5. Turn the humidifier on.

Note: Complete instructions for the humidifier bracket and humidifier installation are given in the

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Humidifier Bracket Installation Instructions , which include humidifier bracket part numbers and descriptions.

3.5.6 Connecting the Patient Circuit

See

Figure 25, page 67 or

Figure 26, page 68

to connect the adult, pediatric, or neonatal patient circuits, respectively.

Warning: Use patient circuits of the lowest compliance possible with the ventilator system to ensure optimal compliance compensation and to avoid reaching the compliance compensation limit. See

Table 14 for circuit

types corresponding with predicted body weight (PBW).

Table 14.

Patient Types and PBW Values

Circuit type

Neonatal

Pediatric

PBW in kg (lb)

0.3 kg to 7.0 kg (0.66 lb to 15 lb)

7.0 kg to 24 kg (15 lb to 53 lb)

Adult 25 kg to 150 kg (55 lb to 331 lb)

Allowed but not recommended

Not applicable

3.5 kg to 6.9 kg and 25 kg to 35 kg

(7.7 lb to 15 lb and (55 lb to 77 lb)

7.0 kg to 24 kg

Table 14.

Patient Types and PBW Values (continued)

Circuit type PBW in kg (lb) Allowed but not recommended

(16 lb to 53 lb)

Note: Refer to the patient circuit’s IFU for information on proper use and handling and care and maintenance of the circuit.

A list of breathing system components and accessories is provided. See Table 42 . Use only Covidien components

and accessories in the patient circuit.

Follow your institution’s protocol for safe disposal of the patient circuit.

Follow the patient circuit’s IFU for cleaning and disinfection information for reusable circuits.

Orient the patient circuit by hanging the patient circuit on the circuit management supports provided with the flex arm.

Figure 25.

Connecting the Adult or Pediatric Patient Circuit

8 9

1 Humidifier

2 Inspiratory limb

3 Circuit wye

4 Expiratory limb

5 Condensate vial

4 3 2 1

6 From patient port

7 Exhalation filter

8 To patient port

9 Inspiratory filter

VEN_11168_A

Figure 26.

Connecting the Neonatal Patient Circuit

1 Humidifier

2 Patient circuit inspiratory limb

3 Circuit wye

4 Patient circuit expiratory limb

5 Condensate vial

6 From patient port

7 Neonatal exhalation filter (installed in adapter door)

8 To patient port

9 Inspiratory filter

Warning: Do not attempt to sterilize single-use circuits.

3.6 Batteries

3.6.1 Batteries

Warning: Use only Covidien batteries. Using other manufacturer’s brands or remanufactured batteries could result in the batteries operating the ventilator for less than the specified amount of time or could cause a fire hazard.

Warning: To reduce the risk of infection due to cross-contamination, using a damp cloth, disinfect the batteries with one of the solutions listed before installation and whenever transferring to or from another ventilator. During use, clean external surfaces of batteries as necessary. See

Table 39 . Do not spray disinfectant directly onto the

battery or its connector.

Warning:

Although the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Ventilator meets the standards listed in Chapter 11

, the internal lithium-ion battery of the device is considered to be Dangerous Goods (DG) Class 9 - Miscellaneous, when transported in commerce. As such, the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Ventilator and the associated lithium-ion battery are subject to strict transport conditions under the Dangerous Goods Regulation for air transport (IATA: International

Air Transport Association), International Maritime Dangerous Goods code for sea and the European Agreement

concerning the International Carriage of Dangerous Goods by Road (ADR) for Europe. Private individuals who transport the device are excluded from these regulations although for air transport some requirements may apply.

Warning: To avoid the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or burns, do not short circuit, puncture, crush, heat above 60°C, incinerate, disassemble the battery, or immerse the battery in water.

Caution:

Ensure that the batteries are oriented properly. See Figure 28, page 70

Figure 27.

Battery

1 Battery connector

3.6.1.1 Primary Batteries

The ventilator’s primary battery is located in the rearward battery receptacle on the right side of the BDU. The compressor’s primary battery is located in the rearward battery receptacle in the compressor base. See

Figure 29, page 71

. The primary battery may be “hot swapped,” that is it can be replaced while the ventilator is operating.

To install or replace the primary battery in the BDU or compressor

1. With the battery not installed in the ventilator, or if the ventilator is turned off and not connected to AC power, check the charge level by pressing the charge level button on the battery and verifying the charge level LEDs illuminate. See

Figure 28, page 70 for the location of the charge level button. Five green LED

segments illuminate, indicating ≥90% battery capacity. From bottom to top, the first LED indicates ≥10% capacity, the second LED indicates ≥25% capacity, the third LED indicates ≥50% capacity, and the fourth

LED indicates ≥75% capacity. An illuminated red LED at the top of the battery indicates a battery fault. If no

LEDs illuminate it means there is <10% battery capacity remaining.

2. If the charge level is sufficient, orient the battery as shown in

Figure 29, page 71 , face the front of the

ventilator and locate the battery compartments on the right side of the appropriate module. The receptacle

towards the rear of the ventilator houses the primary battery while the receptacle towards the front of the ventilator houses the extended battery.

3. The primary battery is fastened in place with a thumbscrew (item 3). Loosen the thumbscrew approximately four to five turns to allow battery installation.

4. Insert the battery and push into its receptacle all the way until it clicks, indicating it is latched. The battery will only fit into the slot one way.

Figure 28.

Proper Battery Orientation

1 White battery in-use LED

2 Red battery fault indicator

3 Green charge status LEDs

4 Charge level button

5. Tighten the thumbscrew to secure the battery and prevent the primary battery from being removed.

Note: Remove either primary battery by reversing the steps. After loosening the thumbscrew, slide the battery ejector to the left to eject the battery.

Figure 29.

Battery Compartment Locations

1 2

6 VEN_10278_B

1 BDU extended battery receptacle and ejector

2 BDU primary battery receptacle and ejector

3 BDU and compressor primary battery thumbscrews

4 Compressor primary battery receptacle and ejector

5 Compressor extended battery receptacle and ejector

6 BDU primary battery (positioned for installation)

3.6.1.2 Extended batteries

The extended battery receptacle is located forward of the primary battery. Like the primary battery, the extended battery may be hot swapped.

To install or remove an extended battery in either the BDU or compressor

1. Properly orient the battery as shown in

Figure 29, page 71 .

2. Push the battery into the forward receptacle in the BDU all the way until it clicks, indicating the battery is latched.

Note: Remove the battery by sliding the battery ejector to the left. The battery ejects itself from its receptacle. There is no thumbscrew for extended batteries.

Note: See

Section 3.3.2.3, Battery Charging, page 56 for battery charging information when batteries are

installed in the ventilator.

3.6.2 Battery Testing

To test the batteries

With the battery installed in the ventilator, push the battery charge level button located on the battery. A series of LEDs illuminates, indicating the charge level of the battery. When the bottom LED is illuminated, there is ≥10%

of full battery capacity. The next LED illuminates when there is ≥25% capacity. the third lamp illuminates when there is ≥50% capacity available. The fourth LED illuminates when there is ≥75% capacity, and when the top LED

is illuminated, it represents ≥90% capacity. See Figure 28, page 70

to view the battery test button and LEDs.

3.6.3 Battery Performance Test Results

Performance testing on a sample of new batteries and batteries charged and discharged at least 1000 times was completed to demonstrate that the ventilator’s LOW BATTERY alarms remain effective. Testing demonstrated that the batteries have a minimum of 10 minutes time remaining from the activation of the low battery alarm and a minimum of 5 minutes time remaining from the critically low battery alarm until ventilator shutdown. See

Table 11, page 44

for images of the Status Display during low battery and critically low battery conditions.

Performance testing on a sample of new batteries and batteries charged and discharged at least 1000 times was completed to demonstrate the expected run time of the ventilator on battery. This testing was performed for both typical ventilator settings and adult high demand ventilator settings.

The typical ventilator settings used were:

• Ventilator settings

– Assist/Control Ventilation with Volume Control (VC) mandatory type

– Tidal volume (V

)=500 mL

– Peak flow ( ⩒

MAX

)=30 L/min

– Respiratory rate (f )=20 1/min

– PEEP=8 cmH

– Oxygen concentration (FiO

)=60%

– Flow trigger ( ⩒ -Trig)=3 L/min

• Approximate respiratory monitored parameters during simulation

– Peak pressure (P

PEAK

)=27 cmH

– Plateau pressure (P

) during manual inspiratory pause =23 cmH

– Exhaled tidal volume (V

)= 442 mL (BTPS)

– Total respiratory rate (R

TOT

)=20 1/min

– I:E ratio =1:2

– PEEP=8 cmH

O / Total PEEP (PEEP

) during expiratory pause =8 cmH

– Exhaled minute volume ( ⩒

E TOT

)=8.84 L/min

• Adult high-demand ventilator settings

– Assist/Control Ventilation with Pressure Control (PC) mandatory type

– Inspiratory pressure (P

)=55 cmH

– Inspiratory time (T

)=0.55 s

– Respiratory rate (f )=60 1/min

– PEEP=35 cmH

– Oxygen concentration (FiO

)=60%

– Flow trigger ( ⩒ -Trig)=20 L/min

• Approximate respiratory monitored parameters during adult high-demand simulation

– Peak pressure (P

PEAK

)=90 cmH

– Plateau pressure (P

) during manual inspiratory pause =79 cmH

– Exhaled tidal volume (V

)=900 mL (BTPS)

– Total respiratory rate (R

TOT

)=60 1/min

– I:E ratio =1:1

– PEEP=39 cmH

O / Total PEEP (PEEP

) during expiratory pause =49 cmH

– Exhaled minute volume ( ⩒

E TOT

)=52 L/min

The run time does not vary significantly between typical and heavy load settings. The ventilator can be expected to run approximately 75 minutes at typical settings with new batteries. When running batteries nearing end of life

(batteries with 1000 charge/discharge cycles were used for this data) the run time can be expected to be approximately 55 minutes.

3.6.4 Battery Life

Battery life for both primary and extended batteries is approximately 3 years from the date of manufacture. Actual battery life depends on the history of use and ambient conditions. As the batteries age with use, the time the ventilator will operate on battery power from a fully charged battery will decrease. Replace the battery every 3 years or sooner if battery operation time is insufficient for your usage or if indicated in the GUI prompt area. The user is informed on the GUI prompt area that the battery is nearing the end of service life. The prompt occurs a minimum of 90 days ahead of end of life for nominal use conditions. The battery requiring replacement is identified in the System Communication Log.

Determine which battery is nearing the end of its service life by accessing the ventilator logs.

1. Touch the Logs icon in the constant access area of the GUI.

2. Touch Diagnostics.

3. Touch System Comm Log. For each impacted battery, there will be an entry like the example shown in

Table 15 , including the location of the battery and its serial number.

Table 15.

Example of Battery End of Service Life Log

Time/Date

HH:MM:SS

DD-Month-YYYY

HH:MM:SS

DD-Month-YYYY

HH:MM:SS

DD-Month-YYYY

HH:MM:SS

DD-Month-YYYY

Test/Event

Ventilator Primary battery is nearing end of service life

Ventilator Extended bat‐ tery is nearing end of serv‐ ice life

Compressor Primary bat‐ tery is nearing end of serv‐ ice life

Compressor Extended battery is nearing end of service life

Code

E00041

E00042

E00043

E00044

Notes

SN XXxxXXXXXX

3.6.5 Battery Manufacturing Date

The date of manufacture of the battery is contained in the serial number. The serial number is listed on the side of the battery near the connection point. The serial number consists of 10 alphanumeric characters and provides the following information: 2 character year, 2 character week, 2 character text character, and 4 character sequence.

See

Figure 30

Figure 30.

Battery serial number

1 Year

2 Week number (XX of 52)

3 Text

4 Build sequence number

3.6.6 Battery Disposal

The battery is considered electronic waste and must be disposed of according to local regulations.

Follow local governing ordinances and recycling plans regarding disposal or recycling of the battery.

3.6.7 Li-ion Battery Pack Handling, Storage and Replacement

3.6.7.1 Handling, Storage and Maintenance

Lithium-ion (Li-ion) battery packs (P/N 10086042) handling, storage and maintenance is recommended as follows:

• Battery packs should be installed in the ventilator or compressor (if the option is installed) while connected to AC Power to maintain charge, whether the ventilator is operating, in standby, or off.

• Battery packs not installed in a ventilator should have the charge level checked prior to use. This can be done

by pressing the charge level button. See Section 3.6

and

Figure 31

. It is recommended that battery packs displaying a charge level equivalent to one LED or fewer be fully charged prior to patient use.

• Battery pack life will be reduced if the battery pack is repeatedly allowed to fully deplete.

• Battery packs that display a red fault LED (noted in Section 3.6.7.2

) should not be used.

• Battery packs that are not installed in a ventilator should be stored in the orientation illustrated in Figure 31

and in Section 3.6

Note: For optimal battery life, it is recommended to store batteries below 25°C and charged to 2 LEDs or fewer.

3.6.7.2 Replacement and Disposal

Li-ion battery pack (P/N 10086042) replacement and disposal:

Section 3.6

, users are reminded to replace the battery pack every 3 years from date of manufacture and dispose of the battery packs according to local regulations. The date of manufacture is reflected within the serial number

sequence found on the battery pack. See Figure 32

for guidance on how to determine this date or follow the use-by date indicated on the battery pack labeling.

If a battery fault occurs, it will be indicated by an illuminated red fault LED or on the ventilator status display. If this occurs within 3 years from date of manufacture, contact our service experience group

([email protected]) to arrange for return and replacement of the battery pack.

Figure 31.

Battery Charge Level

1 White battery in use LED

2 Red battery fault indicator

Figure 32.

Battery Date of Manufacture

3 Green charge status LEDs

4 Charge level button

1 Year

2 Weak number (XX of 52)

3 Text

4 Build sequence number

3.7 Ventilator Operating Modes

3.7.1 Normal Mode

Normal mode is the default mode used for patient ventilation. The ventilator enters Normal mode after it has been turned on and POST completes, the ventilator is set up, and breath delivery parameters have been entered. The clinician may choose to select Quick Start which uses default values or institutionally configured breath delivery settings after PBW has been entered. Entry into Normal mode is not allowed if a primary battery is not detected

in the ventilator BDU, a major POST fault occurs, or there is an uncorrected major system fault, or uncorrected short self test (SST) or extended self test (EST) failures or non-overridden alerts.

During Normal mode, the omni-directional LED on the top of the GUI appears green in color, in a steadily lit state.

If an alarm occurs, the LED flashes in a color corresponding to the priority of the alarm. See Table 33, page 148

for details regarding alarm priority. If another alarm occurs concurrently with an existing alarm, the LED displays the color corresponding to the highest priority level. If the alarm de-escalates, the latched area (located on either side of the alarm LED indicator) of the alarm LED displays the color of the highest priority alarm while the center of the

LED displays the color of the current alarm’s priority. For more information on specific alarms, touch the logs icon in the constant access icons area of the GUI.

3.7.2 Quick Start

Quick Start is an extension of Normal mode, where institutionally configured default settings are applied after the patient’s PBW or gender and height are entered and Quick Start is touched to begin ventilation.

3.7.3 Stand-By State

Stand-By state can be used when the clinician needs to disconnect the patient for any reason (prior to transporting a patient, for example). The ventilator enters Stand-By state if a request is made by the clinician, a patient is disconnected within a fixed time period determined by the ventilator software, and the clinician confirms the patient has been disconnected intentionally. If a patient becomes disconnected from the patient circuit after the time period elapses, an alarm sounds and the patient-disconnect sequence is initiated. In Stand-By state, gas output is reduced to 10 L/min to limit gas consumption and to allow for detection of patient reconnection.

Stand-By state is available in all ventilation modes except during inspiratory and expiratory BUV , occlusion status cycling (OSC) , safety valve open (SVO) , or ventilator inoperative (vent inop) conditions.

Note: Do not block patient circuit wye while in Stand-By state. If the wye is blocked, the ventilator detects a patient connection and will attempt to resume normal ventilation.

To enter Stand-By state

1. Touch the Menu tab on the left side of the GUI. The menu appears.

2. Touch Stand-By. A Stand-By state pending dialog appears instructing the clinician to disconnect the patient circuit. A timer starts allowing 30 seconds to disconnect the patient.

3. Disconnect the patient circuit and confirm the disconnection by touching Confirm. A timer starts allowing

30 seconds for confirmation of disconnect.

To exit Stand-By state

Reconnect the patient circuit. The ventilator resumes ventilation at the settings in use before the disconnection.

The following ventilator setting becomes active during Stand-By state:

• Base flow is set to 10 L/min

During Stand-By state:

• The exhalation valve is open.

• Current ventilator settings are retained in memory.

• Flow sensors are monitored to detect patient reconnection.

• Patient-related alarms are temporarily suppressed, as described below.

• Ventilator settings can be changed, if desired, and will be applied upon patient reconnection.

• The ventilator displays an indicator that it is in Stand-By State, and a timer indicating the elapsed time the ventilator has been in Stand-By state.

• Ventilator background checks continue to be made.

The ventilator automatically exits Stand-By state when patient reconnection is detected, the clinician completes patient setup (if ventilation was mistakenly started before setup was complete), or the ventilator power is cycled.

Prior to entering Stand-By state, the ventilator measures pressure and flow in the patient circuit to determine if a patient is attached. If a patient is detected, the ventilator continues ventilation as set prior to the request, alerts the operator that Stand-By state is pending, and requests the patient be disconnected. A countdown timer appears alerting the operator of the time remaining to disconnect the patient. After the patient is disconnected, the ventilator requests confirmation of the disconnection.

When the ventilator enters Stand-By state, a message appears on the GUI, any active alarms are muted and reset and the associated alarm reset entries are logged in the Alarm Event Log. Alarm detection is suspended, and breath delivery is suspended while a bias flow is maintained for patient detection. During Stand-By state, the ventilator displays the elapsed time the patient has been without ventilation. As the ventilator maintains a bias flow for patient detection, it resumes ventilation at the previous settings when the patient is reconnected. There is no need to touch Exit Stand-By. Reconnecting the patient returns the ventilator to normal operation. During

Stand-By state, patient data values are not displayed and the LED located at the top of the GUI cycles between yellow and green. Entry into and exit from Stand-By state are recorded in the General Event log.

3.7.4 Service Mode

Warning: Before entering Service mode, ensure a patient is not connected to the ventilator. Ventilatory support is not available in Service mode.

Service mode is used for extended self test (EST), ventilator calibration, configuration, software upgrades, option installation (all of which must be performed by qualified service personnel), and for making adjustments to institutional settings. All information stored in the individual logs is available in Service mode. Service mode logs include:

• System Diagnostic

• System Comm.

• EST/SST Diagnostic

• Settings

• Alarms

• General Event

• Service

• Patient Data

See the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for details about Service mode logs.

A patient must not be attached to the ventilator when entering Service mode. Specific actions must be performed to enter this mode, prior to POST completion.

To access Service mode

1. Remove the ventilator from patient usage.

2. Turn the ventilator’s power switch on.

3. Press and release the Service mode button (TEST) at the back of the ventilator, when the Covidien splash

screen appears on the status display after powering on the ventilator. See Figure 33, page 78

. See Table 11

for an image of the splash screen. The ventilator prompts to confirm no patient is attached.

Figure 33.

Service Mode Button (TEST)

1 E

VEN_11246_D

1 Service mode button

4. Wait to enter Service mode.

5. Confirm that a patient is not connected to the ventilator by touching the corresponding button. The message SERVICE MODE VENTILATION SUPPORT IS NOT AVAILABLE appears on the graphical user interface.

6. Perform required service.

7. Turn off the ventilator to exit Service mode.

See the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for information on the keys that are disabled during EST.

In addition to allowing SST to be run, Service mode also allows configuration of various items.

Table 16 lists

institutionally and operator-configurable items.

3.8 Product Configuration

Warning: If the ventilator fleet in your institution uses multiple institutionally configured presets or defaults, there can be risks of inappropriate alarm settings.

The ventilator is shipped configured with factory defaults for new patient parameters which can be configured to suit institutional preferences. The operator may configure any desired parameter as long as this option has not been locked out and rendered unavailable. When configuring the ventilator, it displays the parameters associated with the operator’s last configuration.

Table 16

lists the factory-configured settings, the institutionally configurable settings, and the operator-configurable settings.

Table 16.

Ventilator Configuration

Feature Factory-config‐ ured

X Vital patient data banner

Large font patient data panel

Waveform lay‐ out

Display bright‐ ness (Light set‐ tings)

Alarm volume

Elevate O

2 trol

con‐

Date/time for‐ mat

Default mL/kg ratio

Institutionally configurable

Operator-con‐ figurable

Configured by circuit type

User lockable

X Cannot be changed in Nor‐ mal mode

New patient startup defaults

(including PBW, ventilation type, mode, manda‐ tory type, trig‐ ger type, O elevate O

)

Opacity

X X

3.8.1 Preparing the Ventilator for Use

Caution: Do not lean on the GUI or use it to move the ventilator. Doing so could break the GUI, its locking mechanism, or tip the ventilator over.

Prior to ventilating a patient, configure the GUI so it is capable of displaying all the desired parameters, information, and patient data. This eliminates the necessity for taking the patient off the ventilator, as configuration of many of the items requires the unit to be in Service mode.

To perform institutional configuration

1. Enter Service mode, and confirm no patient is attached by touching Confirm. See Section 3.7.4, Service Mode, page 77

for instructions on entering Service mode.

2. Touch Configuration at the top of the screen in Service mode. A list of buttons appears allowing configuration of the corresponding parameters.

3. See the next sections for specific instructions on institutional configuration of each parameter.

To return to factory default configuration

1. Enter Service mode, and confirm no patient is attached by touching Confirm. See Section 3.7.4, Service Mode, page 77

, for instructions on entering Service mode.

2. Touch Configuration at the top of the screen in Service mode. A list of buttons appears allowing configuration of the corresponding parameters.

3. Select the desired modified setting from the left-hand menu options.

4. Touch Default.

3.8.2 Configuring the GUI

The display can be configured in various ways. See Table 16, page 79

for the parameters that are factory-configured, institutionally configurable and operator-configurable. Once the factory- or institutionally configurable items have been configured, they remain the default values. Factory-configured values cannot be changed, however, if the parameters listed in the referenced table are institutionally configured, then those values remain in memory as default settings. If changes are made to operator-configurable parameters, they remain in memory during a ventilator power cycle as long as the same patient is set up when returned to ventilation. If a new patient is set up, the factory-configured values or institutionally configured values (if the parameter has been configured) are used.

No alarm settings are institutionally configurable, which prevents changes to factory default alarm settings.

However, the default mL/kg ratio is institutionally configurable, which can affect the default alarm setting values.

Always review the alarm defaults prior to beginning ventilation, and set appropriately.

3.8.2.1 Date and Time Format

The date and time may be configured to the institution’s preference. The time can be specified as 12-hour or

24-hour time in HH:MM:SS format with 1-hour and 1-minute resolutions, respectively. The date formats are:

• DD-MMM-YYYY where DD is a two-digit day format, MMM is a three-letter abbreviation for the month, and

YYYY is a four-digit representation of the year.

• MM-DD-YYYY where MM is a two-digit month format, DD is a two-digit day format, and YYYY is a four-digit representation of the year.

The settable date corresponds to the number of days in the set month and accounts for leap years.

To institutionally configure the ventilator’s date and time settings

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch Date and Time.

3. Touch the button corresponding to 12-hour or 24-hour time.

4. Touch Hour and turn the knob to enter the correct hour.

5. Repeat for the minutes, and am or pm.

6. Touch the button corresponding to the date format desired (DD-MM-YYYY or MM-DD-YYYY).

7. Touch Accept to confirm the date and time.

8. If done configuring parameters, exit Service mode.

3.8.2.2 Pressure Units

The ventilator’s pressure units can be configured for hPa o cmH

To institutionally configure pressure units

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch the vent setup button.

3. Touch the button corresponding to the desired pressure units.

4. If done configuring parameters, exit Service mode by touching Exit.

3.8.2.3 Screen Brightness and Keyboard Backlight (Light Settings)

To institutionally configure screen brightness and keyboard backlight

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch Light Settings. Sliders appear to adjust the screen brightness and keyboard backlight.

3. Move the sliders to increase or decrease the brightness and backlight levels. Alternatively, turn the knob to increase or decrease the brightness and backlight levels.

4. Touch Accept to apply the changes, or Cancel to revert to original settings.

5. If done configuring parameters, exit Service mode.

To adjust display brightness

1. Press the display brightness key.

2. Slide the brightness slider or turn the knob to adjust the brightness level.

3. Dismiss the slider by touching anywhere on the GUI screen or allow to time out in 5 seconds.

Note: Keyboard backlight (bezel key brightness) can only be adjusted in Service mode.

3.8.2.4 New Patient Setup Defaults

To institutionally configure new patient default settings

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch the button corresponding to adult, pediatric, or neonatal new patient defaults.

3. Touch the Ventilation Type, Mode, Mandatory Type, and Trigger Type buttons corresponding to the desired parameters.

4. Configure the default PBW and mL/kg ratio, Elevate O

2 knob.

and O

% by touching its button and turning the

5. Repeat for each patient type by selecting the corresponding button.

6. Touch Accept or Accept ALL when the default configuration is complete.

7. If done configuring parameters, exit Service mode.

3.8.2.5 Elevate O

Note: The Elevate O

control adds a percentage of O in any value between 22% and 100% O

delivery.

to the breathing mixture for 2 minutes. The additional percentage is shown on the icon in the constant access icon area. The Elevate O

concentration can be set to result

To adjust the amount of elevated O

delivered for 2 minutes

1. In the vent setup dialog in Normal mode, touch the Elevate O

GUI screen.

icon in the constant access icons area of the

The icon glows and a dialog appears with a countdown timer, Elev O

2 changes, and Extend, Stop, and Close buttons.

button highlighted and ready for

2. Turn the knob to increase or decrease the amount of oxygen by the amount shown on the button. The allowable range can result in any value between 22% and 100% O

delivery.

3. Touch Extend to extend the 2-minute interval. Touching Extend restarts the 2-minute countdown timer.

4. Touch Stop to stop additional oxygen from being delivered and dismiss the countdown timer.

The Elevate O

function follows these rules:

• If apnea ventilation occurs during the 2-minute interval, the apnea % O

2 configured amount.

delivery also increases by the

• During LOSS OF AIR SUPPLY or LOSS OF O

SUPPLY alarm conditions, the Elevate O progress, and is temporarily disabled until the alarm condition no longer exists.

function is canceled if in

• During Safety PCV, the Elevate O

control has no effect. During circuit disconnect and Stand-By states (when the ventilator is turned on but not ventilating) the Elevate O concentration, not the set oxygen concentration.

function affects the currently delivered oxygen

3.8.2.6 Alarm Volume

Warning: The audio alarm volume level is adjustable. The operator should set the volume at a level that allows the operator to distinguish the audio alarm above background noise levels.

To institutionally configure the alarm volume

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch Alarm Volume Defaults. A screen appears allowing configuration of the alarm volume by circuit type.

3. Slide the alarm slider for each circuit type (adult, pediatric, or neonatal) or turn the knob to configure the alarm volume. The volume settings range from 1 (minimum) to 10 (maximum).

4. If done configuring the alarm volume, exit Service mode.

To adjust alarm volume

1. Set the alarm volume by pressing the alarm volume key, then sliding the alarm volume slider or turning the knob.

The alarm values range from 1 (minimum) to 10 (maximum). The new volume change takes effect immediately.

2. Dismiss the slider by touching anywhere on the GUI screen or allow to time out in 5 seconds.

Note: A sample alarm tone sounds for verification at each volume level change. If necessary, re-adjust the alarm volume by moving the alarm volume slider to increase or decrease the volume.

Note: The alarm volume reverts to the institutionally configured default alarm volume or factory default if the ventilator’s power is cycled.

3.8.2.7 Vital Patient Data

Patient data are displayed in the Vital Patient Data banner. The operator can configure the banner for displaying

the desired patient data. See Figure 39, page 98

. A total of 14 values may be configured at one time, with eight values visible, and six more visible by scrolling the values using the left- and right- pointing arrows in the patient data area.

Two pages of additional patient data may be viewed by touching or swiping down on the patient data tab at the top of the GUI. Choose the respective buttons to view page one or page two. Additional patient data values may not be changed.

To institutionally configure patient data displayed on the GUI

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch Patient Data Defaults. Five layout preset buttons appear along with a list of parameters and descriptions.

3. Touch a preset button and individually select a parameter from the scrollable list below to appear in that preset’s vital patient data banner. Use the right- and left- pointing arrows to configure default values for all

3 available parameters. Additionally, touch the padlock icon above each patient data parameter on the data banner to allow (unlocked) or restrict (locked) operator configurablity of that parameter during normal ventilation.

4. When done configuring the selected preset, touch Accept and select another preset to configure, if desired.

5. Touch Defaults to return configuration to factory settings.

6. If done configuring parameters, exit Service mode by touching Exit.

To configure the patient data displayed on the GUI

1. Double-tap a patient data parameter at the top of the GUI screen. A menu of buttons appears identified with patient data parameters. The parameter at the location touched will be replaced with the new parameter of choice. To view more parameters, touch the left- or right- pointing arrows to reveal more parameters.

2. Touch the button corresponding to the replacement parameter. The existing parameter is replaced with the new parameter.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for as many parameters as desired.

3.8.2.8 Displaying Patient Data With a Larger Font

To improve visibility of patient data, a screen is available that appears with a larger font. Up to 14 data values may be displayed which include:

• Institutional default patient data values (if configured)

• Remaining user selected patient data values (up to 14, including waveforms and loops)

To institutionally configure the large font patient data defaults

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch Large Font Patient Data Defaults. Five layout presets appear along with a list of parameters and descriptions.

3. Touch a preset button and individually select a parameter for each of the desired patient data values.

4. Choose the desired scalar and loop waveforms for the large font patient data display. Waveform thumbnails appear in the three right-most cells of the large font data panel.

5. Touch any of the padlock icons along the right-most edge of the selected layout to prevent operator configurability of the selected row.

6. Touch Accept or Accept ALL when finished.

7. If factory defaults are desired for a preset, touch Defaults.

8. If done configuring parameters, exit Service mode by touching Exit.

To display the large font patient data panel

1. Swipe the vital patient data banner tab downward or touch the vital patient data tab. The additional patient data panel appears.

2. Swipe the additional patient data banner’s tab downward or touch the additional patient data banner’s tab.

Patient data appear in a larger font.

3. Swipe the large font patient data panel tab upward or touch the tab to return to the banner to its normal font size.

The large font patient data parameters are configured in the same way as described in the patient data configuration section above.

3.8.2.9 Waveforms

Green waveforms denote a mandatory inspiration, yellow waveforms denote exhalation, and orange waveforms denote a spontaneous inspiration.

The GUI can be configured to display up to three waveforms and two loops simultaneously in the waveform area.

See

Figure 39, page 98 . The allowable waveforms include flow vs. time, pressure vs. time and volume vs. time.

Allowable loops include pressure vs. volume and flow vs. volume. The waveforms display 60 seconds of information and can be shown in a redrawing format, or paused with the ability to enable a cursor to trace the waveform by turning the knob.

The ventilator-generated waveforms provide immediate and dynamic qualitative information to the clinician about the subtleties of ventilation in real time. In many cases the shape and character of the drawn graphics for volume, flow, and pressure can provide advanced and early warning to the clinician of potential problems such as air leaks, air-trapping, breath asynchrony, over-distension, and flow mismatching.

The scalar waveforms are not intended to represent a patient physiological parameter nor a qualifiable characteristic of gas (air and O

) delivered to, or removed from, the human body.

T CIRC

Symbol

⩒

CIRC

Definition

The V

T CIRC

waveform is reflective of the volume going into and out of the breathing circuit throughout the breath cycle. The volume values expressed by the VT CIRC waveform are not compensated for circuit compliance or BTPS.

The scale representing measured volume (mL) can be set from a minimum range of –1 mL to 2 mL to a maximum range of –2000 mL to 6000 mL.

⩒

CIRC

waveform displays the total inspiratory and expiratory flow throughout the breath cycle measured by the ventilator’s internal (inspiratory and expiratory) flow sensors. The flow values expressed by the waveforms are not compensated for circuit compliance or

BTPS.

The scale representing measured flow (L/min) can be set from a minimum range of –2 L/min to 2 L/min, to a maximum range of –200 L/min to 200 L/min.

CIRC

waveform displays the total circuit pressure at the wye of the breathing circuit throughout the breath cycle measured by the ventilator’s internal (inspiratory and expir‐ atory) pressure sensors.

The scale representing pressure (cmH

(cmH

O or hPa) can be set from a minimum range of –2

(cmH

O or hPa) to 10 (cmH

O or hPa) to a maximum range of –20 (cmH

Oor hPa).

O or hPa) to 120.

To institutionally configure waveforms and loops

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch Graph Defaults. Five layout presets appear along with a list of parameters and descriptions.

3. Touch a layout preset button. The parameter button outline glows, signifying that it can be changed. If more than one parameter can be changed, touch that parameter to make its outline glow.

4. Select the parameter from the list whose waveform is desired to appear on the waveforms screen.

5. Configure each of the graphic display layouts as described above.

6. Touch the padlock icon above each graphic layout to prevent operator configuration of the selected layout.

7. If factory defaults are desired for a preset, touch Defaults.

8. If done configuring parameters, exit Service mode by touching Exit.

To configure waveforms and loops

1. Touch the waveform layout icon, located below the displayed waveforms or the vent setup screen.

The icon glows and a menu of various waveform layouts appears.

2. Touch the desired waveform icons to display. The selected waveforms appear on the GUI screen and the dialog closes.

To change the axis scaling

1. Touch the desired waveform axis.

2. Turn the knob to change the value. For each axis, turn the knob to the right to decrease the values, and turn to the left to increase the values.

To pause waveforms

1. Touch the pause icon, located below the waveforms area.

The icon glows yellow and allows the breath to complete. A cursor appears and travels along the waveform while turning the knob, displaying the x- and y-axis values.

2. Touch the pause icon again to re-activate the waveform.

See

Section 5.4.1, GUI Screen Capture, page 123

for information on storing waveforms.

3.8.2.10 Opacity

To institutionally configure screen opacity

1. Perform steps 1 and 2 of the

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79 .

2. Touch the opacity icon.

3. Turn the knob to increase or decrease the opacity.

4. Touch the padlock icon at the right side of the screen to allow or prevent operator adjustment of the screen opacity.

5. Touch Accept to close the dialog.

To adjust the screen opacity

1. Touch the opacity icon. The icon glows when the opacity can be changed.

2. Turn the knob to increase or decrease the opacity.

Note: The opacity icon can be found on the vent setup screen and on any of the respiratory mechanics maneuvers screens.

3.9 Installation Testing

Fully charge the batteries before placing the ventilator into clinical use. See

Section 3.3.2.3, Battery Charging, page 56

for information on battery charging. See Section 3.6.1.1, Primary Batteries, page 69 for the meaning of battery charge

status LEDs and Figure 28, page 70

for the location of battery test switch and status LEDs.

Prior to connecting a patient to the ventilator for the first time, a qualified service technician must have calibrated the ventilator’s exhalation valve, flow sensors, and atmospheric pressure transducer and performed and successfully passed EST. See the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for instructions.

In addition, the clinician must also perform SST.

3.9.1 SST (Short Self Test)

Warning: Always disconnect the patient from the ventilator prior to running SST or EST. If SST or EST is performed while a patient is connected, patient injury may occur.

Warning: Check for circuit occlusion and run SST if increased pressures are observed during ventilation.

Warning: When changing any accessories in the patient circuit or changing the patient circuit itself, run SST to check for leaks and to ensure the correct circuit compliance and resistance values are used in ventilator calculations.

Note: When extending ventilator circuits for neonatal patients, the resulting ventilator breathing system (VBS) compliance may trigger a COMPLIANCE LIMITED V

alarm such that the VC+ or VS software will not continue to update the pressure target during breath delivery. In this case the user can change the breath type to pressure control (PC) or pressure support (PS).

When a patient is not attached to the ventilator, run SST to check the patient circuit for:

• Gas leaks

• Circuit compliance and resistance calculations

SST must be run under any of the following conditions:

• Prior to ventilating a new patient

• When replacing the patient circuit and exhalation filter

• When connecting a different patient circuit to the ventilator

• When changing the patient circuit type

• When installing a new exhalation filter

• When changing the humidification device type

• When adding accessories to or removing accessories from the breathing system (such as a humidifier or water trap)

• After installing a new exhalation flow sensor (see

Section 3.9.2, Flow Sensor Calibration, page 90

No external test equipment is required, and SST requires minimal operator participation.

Humidification type and volume can be adjusted after running SST, however the ventilator makes assumptions when calculating resistance and compliance if these changes are made without re-running SST. For optimal breath delivery, run SST after changing humidification type and humidifier volume.

SST results are recorded in the SST results log, viewable in Service mode and in Normal mode using the configuration (wrench) icon.

3.9.1.1 Required Equipment

• Proposed patient circuit for patient ventilation

• Accessories (water traps, etc.)

• Exhalation filter and condensate vial

• Humidifier, if applicable

• A number 1 stopper to block the patient airway at the patient wye

• Two gas sources (air and oxygen) connected to the ventilator at a pressure between 241.3 kPa and 599.8 kPa

(35 psi and 87 psi)

3.9.1.2 SST Test Sequence

To run SST

1. Ensure a patient is not connected to the ventilator.

2. So that the ventilator does not detect a patient connection, ensure that the breathing circuit wye is not attached to a test lung or covered in any way that would cause an increase in pressure at the wye.

3. Turn the ventilator on using the power switch located at the front of the BDU, below the status display. The ventilator runs POST when the power switch is turned on. Ensure the ventilator is operating on full AC power. Otherwise, SST test failures may result.

4. Wait at least 15 minutes to allow the ventilator to warm up and stabilize to ensure accurate results.

5. At the ventilator startup screen, touch SST or the configure icon (wrench) displayed in the lower right area of the GUI.

The SST history log appears along with Patient Setup, Run Leak Test, and Run All SST buttons.

6. Connect the patient circuit, filters/condensate vial, and all accessories to be used in patient ventilation.

Ensure the patient wye is not blocked.

7. Touch Run All SST to perform all SST tests or touch Run Leak Test to perform the SST Leak test of the ventilator breathing circuit.

8. Touch Accept to continue or Cancel to go back to the previous screen.

9. After accepting, touch the Circuit Type button corresponding to the patient circuit type used to perform

SST and to ventilate the patient (adult, pediatric, or neonatal).

10. Touch the Humidification Type button corresponding to the humidification type used for patient ventilation. If no humidifier is used, touch HME. If a humidifier is used, touch Humidification Volume and turn the knob to enter the volume. See

Table 18 for adult and pediatric patients or Table 19

for neonatal patients to determine the correct volume to enter.

11. Touch Accept to start SST.

12. Follow the prompts. Certain SST tests require operator intervention, and will pause indefinitely for a response. See

Table 17 and

Table 20 for a summary of the SST tests and test step results, respectively.

13. After each test, the ventilator displays the results. If a particular test fails, the test result appears on the screen and a choice to repeat the test or perform the next test is given. When all of the SST tests are complete, the

SST status screen displays the individual test results.

14. To proceed to patient set up, (if SST did not detect an Alert or failure) touch Exit SST, then touch Accept or cycle the ventilator’s power.

Table 17 lists the tests performed during SST.

Table 17.

SST Tests

Test step

SST Flow Sensor Cross Check Test

SST Exhalation Valve Performance

SST Circuit Pressure Test

SST Leak Test

SST Exhalation Filter Test

SST circuit Resistance Test

Function

Tests O

and air flow sensors

Calibrates the exhalation valve and creates a table for use during calculations

Exercises delivery PSOL.

Checks inspiratory and expiratory autozero solenoids.

Cross-checks inspiratory and expiratory pressure transducers at various pressures.

Tests ventilator breathing system for leaks

Checks for exhalation filter occlusion and exhalation com‐ partment occlusion.

Checks for inspiratory and expiratory limb occlusions, and calculates and stores the inspiratory and expiratory limb resistance parameters.

Table 17.

SST Tests (continued)

Test step

SST circuit Compliance Test

Function

Calculates the attached patient circuit compliance.

SST Prox (if the Proximal Flow option is installed) Verifies functionality of the proximal flow subsystem

Table 18.

Humidifier Volumes—Adult and Pediatric Patients

Manufacturer Model Description

Fisher & Paykel MR225

SST humidifier volume setting (mL)

300

Fisher & Paykel

Teleflex (Concha)

MR290

MR250

MR210

MR370

382-10

Ped, disposable, manual feed

Ped/adult disposable, auto‐ feed

Adult. disposable, manual feed

Adult. reusable, manual feed

ConchaSmart

380

480

725

300

Table 19.

Humidifier Volumes—Neonatal Patients

Manufacturer

Fisher & Paykel

Teleflex (Concha)

Model

MR290

382-10

Description

Neo/adult, disposable, autofeed

Concha Smart

SST humidifier volume setting (mL)

550

390

a If the following neonatal patient circuits are used with the Fisher & Paykel MR290 humidification chamber, enter 500 mL as the humidifier volume: • DAR neonatal patient circuit with single heated wire (DAR 307S9910)–for incubator use • DAR neonatal patient circuit with single heated wire (DAR 307/8682)–not for incubator use

Note:

For adult and pediatric patients, enter the humidifier volume shown in Table 18 . For neonatal patients, enter

the humidifier volume shown in

Table 19 .

3.9.1.3 SST Results

SST reports results for each individual test.Three status indicators identify the SST results and actions to take for each.

• Pass — The individual SST test has met its requirements.

• Alert — Alerts occur when the ventilator detects one or more non-critical faults.

• Failed — The individual SST test did not meet its requirements.

Table 20.

SST Test Step Results

Pass

Alert

Test status Meaning

Individual SST test passed

The test result is not ideal, but is not critical.

If SST is in progress, it halts further testing and prompts for decision.

Response

No need to do anything, unless prompted by the ventilator.

When the system prompts, touch one of these buttons:

Table 20.

SST Test Step Results (continued)

Test status

Failed

Meaning

The ventilator has detected a critical prob‐ lem and SST cannot complete until the ven‐ tilator passes the failed test.

• Repeat Test

• Next Test a

Response

• Exit SST

Eliminate leaks in the ventilator breathing system and re-run SST. Otherwise, service the ventilator and re-run SST.

a WARNING— Completing SST with an Alert status for an individual test produces an Override SST button. Overriding an

Alert in SST may result in ventilator performance outside of the stated specification for accuracy. Choose to override the

Alert status and authorize ventilation only when absolutely certain this cannot create a patient hazard or add to risks arising from other hazards. To override the alert, touch Override SST, then touch Accept.

3.9.1.4 SST Outcomes

When SST completes all of the tests, analyze the results.

Table 21.

Overall SST Outcomes

Final outcome

PASS

OVERRIDDEN

FAIL

Meaning

All SST tests passed.

The ventilator detected one or more faults.

Choose to override the ALERT status and authorize ventilation only when absolutely certain this cannot create a patient hazard or add to risks arising from other hazards.

One or more critical faults were detected.

The ventilator enters the SVO state and can‐ not be used for normal ventilation until SST passes.

Response

Touch Patient Setup to set up the patient for ventilation:

Check the patient circuit to determine the problem or restart SST with a different patient circuit.

If touching Override SST, observe the following warning:

Warning: Overriding an Alert in SST may result in ventilator performance outside of the stated specification for accuracy. Choose to override the ALERT status and authorize ventilation only when absolutely certain this cannot create a patient hazard or add to risks arising from other hazards.

A single circuit-leak test can be run without changing the SST outcome.

If a complete SST is interrupted and ventilation was allowed before starting SST, normal ventilation is allowed if all of the following conditions are met:

• SST did not detect any failures or alerts before the interruption

• No other errors that would prevent ventilation occurred

• There were no changes to the circuit type at the start of the interrupted SST

During SST, the ventilator displays the current SST status, including the test currently in progress, results of completed tests. Test data are available in Service mode where applicable or are displayed on the screen. The ventilator logs SST results, and that information is available following a power failure. The audio paused and alarm reset keys are disabled during SST, as well as the manual inspiration, inspiratory pause, and expiratory pause keys.

3.9.2 Flow Sensor Calibration

Note: After replacement of the exhalation flow sensor, the flow sensor calibration may be performed with the ventilator in Normal mode. It is not necessary for the ventilator to be in Service mode for this calibration.

Note: A gold standard test circuit (part number 4-018506-00) is required for calibrating the exhalation flow sensor.

After installing a new exhalation flow sensor, upon power-up and POST completion, the ventilator detects the new flow sensor. The GUI displays the messages shown in

Figure 34 alerting you that the flow sensor requires

calibration. For instructions on exhalation flow sensor installation, see Section 7.5.3, EVQ Replacement, page 185

Figure 34.

Flow Sensor Requires Calibration

To calibrate the flow sensor

1. Touch the SST button. The image shown in

Figure 35 appears, allowing calibration.

Figure 35.

Calibrate The Flow Sensor

2. Touch the Flow Sensor Calibration button. The ventilator prompts you to remove the inspiratory filter and

to connect the test tubing, as shown in Figure 36 .

Figure 36.

Waiting to Begin Calibration and Calibration Test Setup

3. Touch Accept, as shown in Figure 36 .

4. Calibration lasts approximately 8 1/2 minutes. When calibration passes, the screen shown in Figure 37

appears,

Figure 37.

Successful Calibration

5. Upon successful calibration, SST must be run. The GUI provides a button to run SST, as shown in

Figure 37

6. Touch the SST button. The screen shown in

Figure 38 appears.

Figure 38.

SST Prompts

7. Touch the Run All SST button, and follow the prompts as described in

Section 3.9.1.2, SST Test Sequence, page 86

Warning: Adding accessories to or removing accessories from the ventilator can change the pressure gradient across the VBS and affect ventilator performance. Ensure that any changes to the ventilator circuit configurations do not exceed the specified values for circuit compliance and for inspiratory or expiratory limb total resistance. See

Table 56, page 246

. If adding accessories to or removing accessories from the VBS, always run SST to establish circuit compliance and resistance prior to ventilating the patient.

3.9.3 Extended Self Test (EST)

The ventilator’s extended self test (EST) function is designed to verify the ventilator’s operational subsystem integrity.

All required software support to perform EST is resident on the ventilator. EST requires approximately 10 minutes to complete.

Note: SST is not part of the EST test suite. To determine patient circuit resistance and compliance, run SST.

3.9.3.1 EST Prerequisites

Follow all identified guidelines when performing EST. Inspect all equipment required for any self test to ensure it is not damaged in any way.

1. Collect all required equipment prior to performing any self test of the ventilator. Successful self test is not possible without the use of the listed equipment.

2. Disconnect the ventilator from the patient.

3. Fully charge the primary ventilator battery.

4. Connect the ventilator to AC power using the hospital-grade power cord until completion of any self test.

5. Ensure the ventilator is powered down.

6. Ensure both air and oxygen sources register pressure between 241 kPa to 599 kPa (35 psi and 87 psi).

To perform EST or to access additional service functions, the ventilator must be in Service mode. See

Section 3.7.4,

Service Mode, page 77 .

Note: While in the Service mode, normal ventilation is not allowed.

Warning: Always disconnect the ventilator from the patient before running EST. Running EST while the ventilator is connected to the patient can injure the patient.

Warning: A fault identified during this test indicates the ventilator or an associated component is defective.

Rectify the fault and perform any required repairs prior to releasing the ventilator for patient use, unless it can be determined with certainty that the defect cannot create a hazard for the patient, or add to the risks that may arise from other hazards.

Perform EST during any of the listed conditions:

• Prior to initial installation and first time usage of the ventilator

• Every 12 months

• Before any preventive maintenance

• Following ventilator service or repair

• As part of the ventilator’s routine performance verification

During EST, the ventilator displays the current EST status, including the test currently in progress, results of completed tests, and measured data (where applicable). The ventilator logs EST results, and that information is available following a power failure. The ventilator disables several offscreen keys located on the bezel of the GUI during EST:

• Audio paused

• Alarm reset

• Manual inspiration

• Inspiratory pause

• Expiratory pause

Run tests either as a group or as single tests for troubleshooting purposes.

3.9.3.2 Equipment for EST

• Covidien gold standard test circuit

• Number 1 stopper

• Air and oxygen sources, both at 241 kPa to 599 kPa (35 psi to 87 psi)

• An adult-sized exhalation filter

Note: Attempts to run EST with a neonatal filter can cause some EST tests to fail.

Note: If using Air Liquide™, Dräger™, and SIS air/oxygen hose assemblies, certain EST tests may fail when using supply pressures less than 345 kPa (50 psi) based on excessive hose restriction.

3.9.4 EST Test Sequence

Note: If the ventilator has not reached normal operating temperature from recent usage, allow it to warm up for at least 15 minutes in Service mode prior to running EST to ensure accurate testing.

To perform EST

1. Review and perform all self test prerequisites. See

Section 3.9.3.1, EST Prerequisites, page 93

2. Collect the appropriate equipment. See

Section 3.9.3.2, Equipment for EST, page 94

3. Access Service mode. See Section 3.7.4, Service Mode, page 77 .

4. Verify that all calibration tests under the Calibration tab have passed.

5. Touch the Self Test tab from the horizontal banner at the top of the monitoring screen.

6. Touch the EST tab from the menu options on the left side.

7. Touch Run All to run all tests in sequence or select the desired individual test.

8. Choose one of the available options: touch Accept to continue; touch Cancel to go back to the previous screen; or touch Stop to cancel EST.

9. Follow the prompt to remove the inspiratory filter and connect the gold standard circuit.

10. Touch Accept.

11. Follow prompts to complete EST. The EST tests require operator intervention, and will pause indefinitely for a response.

12. At the Disconnect O

prompt, disconnect the high pressure oxygen source.

13. At the Disconnect air prompt, disconnect the high pressure air source.

14. At the Connect air and O

prompt, connect both high pressure air and oxygen sources.

15. Touch Run All or select the desired individual test. After each test, the ventilator displays the results.

16. If a particular test fails, either repeat the test or perform the next test.

17. When all of the EST tests complete, review test results by touching each individual test listed on the left side of the GUI.

18. At the top of the GUI, touch Exit.

19. Touch Confirm at the prompt to return to normal ventilation mode. The ventilator reruns POST and then displays the ventilator startup screen.

Table 22.

EST Tests

EST test step

Zero Offset

Function Required user interaction

Follow prompts

Leak Test

Mix Leak

Tests inspiratory and expiratory pressure transducers and flow sensors at ambient pressure.

Determines ability of system to hold pressure.

Verifies integrity of the mix system.

Follow prompts

Table 22.

EST Tests (continued)

EST test step Function

Mix PSOL

Mix Accumulator

Circuit Pressure

Verifies mix PSOL function.

Verifies mix accumulator pressure sensor and overpressure switch function.

• Checks inspiratory and expiratory autozero solenoids.

• Cross-checks safety valve, inspiratory and expiratory pressure transducers at various pressures.

Flow Sensor Cross

Check Test

Delivery PSOL

Exhalation Valve (EV)

Loopback

Exhalation Valve (EV)

Pressure Accuracy

• Verifies the autozero solenoid’s function.

Verifies all flow sensors and PSOLs at specified flow volumes.

Verifies delivery PSOL current function.

Verifies exhalation valve.current and loopback current are within range.

Verifies current versus pressure values in flash memory correspond with actual installed exhalation valve.

Verifies the exhalation valve operates within specifications of the last exhalation valve calibration.

Exhalation Valve (EV)

Performance

Exhalation Valve (EV)

Velocity Transducer

Safety System

Verifies the velocity transducer is sending a signal and the control circuit recognizes it. It does not verify the quality of the signal.

Tests safety valve operation.

Backup Ventilation Verifies backup ventilation systems: mix, inspiratory, and exhala‐ tion.

Communication Verifies GUI communication ports function, both serial and Ether‐ net.

Internal Storage

LCD Backlight

Status Display

Verifies internal storage device function.

Verifies GUI LCD backlight intensity function.

• Verifies status display function.

• Verifies LCD function.

• Communicates with BD CPU.

GUI Audio

• Communicates with compressor, if installed).

Tests GUI alarm indicators, cycling through each alarm status indi‐ cation.

BD Audio Verifies BD audible alarm is functional. Also verifies power fail capacitor can operate loss-of-power alarm.

Rotary Knob Test Verifies knob rotation function.

Offscreen Key Test Verifies GUI bezel key function.

Ventilator Battery Tests ventilator battery and power distribution.

Run only if DC compressor installed

Compressor Battery Tests compressor battery function, as well as compressor power system and fan function.

Compressor Tests overall compressor operation: pressure transducer, fan, motor, and pressure relief valve.

Required user interaction

None

Follow prompts

Table 22.

EST Tests (continued)

EST test step Function

Compressor Leak Checks compressor system for leaks.

Compressor Per‐ formance

Tests compressor operational performance under load.

Required user interaction

None

3.9.5 EST Test Results

Table 23.

EST Test Step Results

Pass

Test status

ALERT

Failed

Meaning

Individual EST test passed

The test result is not ideal, but is not critical.

If EST is in progress, it halts further testing and prompts for decision.

EST not successfully passed.

Response

No need to do anything unless prompted by the ventilator

When the system prompts, select: Repeat

Test,

Next Test

a , or

Stop, then touch Accept.

Select:

Repeat Test,

Next Test

a , or

Stop, then touch Accept.

Run all EST tests.

NEVER RUN Test still requires successful PASS.

a WARNING— Completing EST with an ALERT status for an individual test produces an Override EST button. Choose to override the ALERT status and authorize ventilation only when absolutely certain this cannot create a patient hazard or add to risks arising from other hazards. To override the alert, touch Override EST, then touch Accept.

When EST completes all of the tests, analyze the results.

Table 24.

Overall EST Outcomes

Final outcome

PASSED

OVERRIDDEN

FAIL

Meaning

All EST tests passed

ALERT status overridden by user.

One or more critical faults were detected.

The ventilator enters the SVO state and can‐ not be used for normal ventilation until SST passes. Service is required.

Response

EST successfully completed. Select other

Service mode functions or prepare for SST tests prior to returning the ventilator for patient usage.

Repair the ventilator and rerun EST.

Touching Override EST results in the following warning:

Warning: Choose to override the ALERT status and authorize ventilation only when absolutely certain this cannot create a patient hazard or add to risks arising from other hazards.

3.10 Operation Verification

Before ventilating a patient, you must perform SST and alarms tests with passing results . See

Section 3.9.1.2,

SST Test Sequence, page 86 . See

Section 6.5.5, Alarm Testing, page 144 as well.

4 Operation

4.1 Overview

This chapter describes Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator operation and includes sections on:

• Setting up the ventilator

• How to use the ventilator

• How to use the ventilator’s graphical user interface (GUI)

• How to set or change main, alarm, or apnea settings

• How to test alarms

• How to calibrate, enable, or disable the O

sensor

• How to perform inspiratory and expiratory pause maneuvers

• How to use non-invasive ventilation (NIV)

4.2 Ventilator Function

Air and oxygen from wall sources, cylinders, or the optional compressor enter the ventilator and flow through individual oxygen and air flow sensors. The gases are then mixed in the mix module’s accumulator. A pressure-relief valve in the mix module’s accumulator prevents over-pressurization. The mix module also contains an oxygen sensor that monitors the air-oxygen mixture according to the operator-set O

% setting.

After the gas mixes, it flows to the inspiratory pneumatic system, where the breath delivery flow sensor measures the gas flow and controls a PSOL valve for proper breath delivery tidal volumes and pressures. The inspiratory pneumatic system contains a safety valve to avoid over-pressure conditions before flowing through bacteria filters to the patient through the inspiratory limb of the patient circuit. Upon exhalation, gas flows out the patient circuit expiratory limb, through the exhalation bacteria filter, through the exhalation valve, which includes the exhalation flow sensor, and through the exhalation port.

4.3 Ventilator Setup

Warning: To avoid interrupted ventilator operation or possible damage to the ventilator, always use the ventilator on a level surface in its proper orientation.

To set up the ventilator

1. Connect the ventilator to the electrical and gas supplies. See Figure 16, page 58

, Figure 17, page 59

, and

Figure 18, page 60 .

2. Connect the patient circuit to the ventilator. See Figure 25, page 67

and

Figure 26, page 68 to connect the

adult/pediatric or neonatal patient circuits, respectively.

3. Turn the ventilator on using the power switch. See Figure 9, page 41 .

4. Before ventilating a patient, run SST to calculate the compliance and resistance with all items included in the patient circuit. See

Section 3.9.1.2, SST Test Sequence, page 86 .

4.4 User Interface Management

The user interface is structured with a GUI and a status display. The GUI provides access to ventilator controls and patient data. The status display is a small LCD panel that acts as a back up to the GUI in the event of a GUI failure. See

Section 2.11.1.3, Status Display, page 42

for more information about the status display.

The status display is not interactive.

During normal ventilator operation, the following information appears on the status display:

• Current power state (AC or DC)

• Batteries installed / charge status (BDU and compressor, if present)

• Visual indication of audible alarm volume

• Circuit pressure graph displaying P

PEAK

, PEEP, and pressure-related alarm settings

See

Section 2.11.1.3, Status Display, page 42

for information about displayed items during Service mode.

4.4.1 Using the GUI

The GUI is used to interact with the ventilator while it is ventilating a patient or in any of its operating modes.

Caution: Do not lean on the GUI or use it to move the ventilator. Doing so could break the GUI, its locking mechanism, or tip the ventilator over.

The GUI is divided into several areas.

Figure 39.

Areas of the GUI

Prompt area — Located beneath the waveforms. Any prompts or messages related to soft or hard bounds display here. Examples include soft bound and hard bound messages, PAV+™ startup messages, oxygen sensor calibration-in-progress messages, and various other informational messages.

Menu tab — Located on the left side of the GUI screen. Swiping the tab to the right and touching Setup causes the Vent, Apnea, Alarm, and More Settings tabs to appear. Touching those tabs opens screens so that changes to ventilator settings, apnea settings, alarm settings, and more settings can be made.

Waveform area — Located in the center of the GUI screen. Shows various breath waveforms. See

Section 3.8.2.9, Waveforms, page 83

for information on how to configure graphics.

Breath Phase Indicator — During normal ventilation, the GUI displays a breath indicator in the upper left corner that shows the type of breath [Assist (A), Control (C), or Spontaneous (S)] currently being delivered to the patient, and whether it is in the inspiratory or expiratory phase. The breath indicator is updated at the beginning of every inspiration, and persists until the next breath type update. During inspiration, assist (A) and control (C) breath indicators glow green and spontaneous (S) breath indicators glow orange, each appearing in inverse video where the indicator appears black surrounded by the colored glow. See

Figure 39,

page 98

. During the expiratory phase the breath indicators appear as solid colors (green during assist or control breaths and orange during spontaneous breaths).

Vital Patient data banner — Located across the top of the GUI screen. The patient data banner displays monitored patient data and can be configured to show desired patient data. See

Section 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient

Data, page 82 for information on configuring patient data for display.

Alarm banners — Located on the right side of the GUI screen. Indicates to the operator the alarms that are active, and are shown in a color corresponding to priority (high is red and flashing, medium is yellow and flashing, low is yellow and steady).

Constant access icons — Located at the lower right of the GUI screen. This area allows access to home

(house), configure (wrench), logs (clipboard), elevate oxygen percentage (O

), and help (question mark) icon. These icons are always visible regardless of the function selected on the GUI.

Constant access area — Consists of the current settings area and the constant access icons. This area allows access to any of the patient setup variables shown in these areas. Touching an icon causes the particular menu for that variable to appear.

Current settings area — Located at the lower center of the GUI screen. The ventilator’s current active settings display here. Touching any of the current settings buttons causes a dialog to appear, allowing changes using the knob.

10.

Vent setup button — Located at the lower left of the GUI screen.

Touching this button allows access to the ventilator setup screen.

Note: A soft bound is a selected value that exceeds its recommended limit and requires acknowledgment to continue. Hard bounds have minimum and maximum limits beyond which values cannot be selected, however if the desired value is equal to a settings hard bound , then it is allowable.

4.4.2 Adjusting GUI Viewing Properties

4.4.2.1 Screen Opacity

The opacity control enables the operator to adjust the opacity of the displayed information between

50% and 100%. At 50%, the displayed image is semi-transparent, and at 100%, the displayed image is opaque. The opacity value remains as set if power is cycled and if the same patient is ventilated. If a new patient is ventilated, the opacity defaults to 85%. See

Section 3.8.2.10, Opacity, page 85 for instruc‐

tions on adjusting this feature.

4.4.2.2 Pushpin Feature

The pushpin feature prevents a dialog from closing under certain conditions when it is pinned. Like the opacity control, the pushpin appears on the settings screen after a new patient begins ventilation.

Figure 40.

Pushpin Icon - Unpinned State

Figure 41.

Pushpin Icon - Pinned State

To use the pushpin

1. When a dialog is open, for example, if Accept or Accept ALL buttons are available, touch the unpinned pushpin icon to pin the dialog and hold it open.

2. Touch Close to close the dialog.

4.4.2.3 Display Brightness

Display brightness can be controlled manually. This feature is institutionally configurable. See

Section 3.8.2.3,

Screen Brightness and Keyboard Backlight (Light Settings), page 81 . The brightness range is from 1% to 100% with 1%

resolution. The default value is 80%.

To manually adjust display brightness

1. Press the display brightness key.

2. Slide the brightness slider to the right to increase the brightness level or to the left to decrease the brightness level. Alternatively, turn the knob to increase or decrease the brightness level. The control disappears from the screen in approximately 5 seconds.

4.4.2.4 Display Lock

The primary display provides a display lock key to prevent inadvertent changes to settings. When active, the display lock disables the touch screen, knob, and off-screen keys (other than the display lock key) and illuminates an LED on the display bezel. An image of the display lock icon appears transparently over anything displayed on the GUI, should the operator attempt to use the GUI. Any new alarm condition disables the display lock and enables normal use of the GUI.

To lock and unlock the display

1. Press the display lock key on the GUI.

The keyboard LED illuminates and a transparent locked icon appears on the screen, indicating display lock.

2. To unlock the display, press the display lock key again. The display lock LED turns off and an unlocked image briefly appears on the screen.

4.4.3 Using Gestures When Operating the GUI

The GUI incorporates a gesture-based interface where features can be actuated with the fingers using different

motions. Table 25

explains gestures used with the GUI.

Table 25.

Gestures and Their Meanings

Gesture

Swipe

Description

Quickly brush the screen surface with the fingertip.

Used for

Opening or closing dialogs or panels that slide in and out from the screen sides or top, moving waveform data, expanding or collapsing tooltips, scrolling lists, or alarm banners, maximiz‐ ing or minimizing waveforms.

How to use

Swipe toward the center of the screen to open dialogs or panels. Swipe toward the side of the screen (or upward if viewing the additional patient data or large font patient data panels) to close.

To move a paused waveform, swipe in the desired direction.

100

Table 25.

Gestures and Their Meanings (continued)

Gesture

Doubletap

Drag

Touch and hold

Drag and drop

Description

Rapidly touch the screen surface twice with one finger.

Move the fingertip over the screen sur‐ face without losing contact.

Used for

Maximizing or minimizing the viewable area of a dialog, con‐ trol, or waveform, expanding or collapsing tooltips

Changing x- and y- axis scales, moving the waveform cursor, moving scrollbars, scrolling lists.

Scrolling speed varies depend‐ ing upon how far outside the list boundary the finger is posi‐ tioned.

How to use

Swipe upward anywhere on a waveform to maximize it, and swipe downward on the maximized waveform to minimize it.

Swipe a tooltip upward to expand to a long description and downward to collapse to a short description. A downward swipe any‐ where in the patient data area opens the additional patient data panel, and another swipe on the additional patient data tab displays the large font patient data panel.

Double-tapping maximizes the viewable waveform area or shows the long descrip‐ tion of a tooltip. Double-tapping again min‐ imizes the viewable waveform area or shows the short description of a tooltip. If the control is configurable, double tapping produces the configuration pop-up menu.

Touch the axis and drag to the right to increase the waveform x-axis scale, and to the left to decrease. Touch the axis and drag upward to increase the y-axis scale and downward to decrease.

To move the cursor (when the waveform is paused), touch the cursor and drag it right or left. The graph responds similarly. Scroll a list by dragging the scrollbar right or left or up or down. The list scrolls according to the direction of the finger movement. An auto‐ matic scrolling feature starts if the finger is dragged from the inside of a list to outside its boundary. The farther outside the boun‐ dary the finger is dragged, the faster the list scrolls.

N/A Touch an item and hold for at least 0.5

second.

Touch and drag an item to another loca‐ tion and lift finger to drop.

Displaying a tooltip dialog on whatever item is touched. The tooltip appears to glow indicat‐ ing the touch and hold action.

Dragging help icon to describe an onscreen item.

Drag the help icon, located at the lower right of the GUI screen, to the item in ques‐ tion and drop. If a blue glow appears, a tool‐ tip is available and appears with informa‐ tion about that item (for example, a control or symbol).

4.5 Ventilator Operation

Warning: Prior to patient ventilation, select the proper tube type and tube ID.

Caution: To prevent possible damage to electronic circuitry, do not connect the GUI to the BDU while power is applied.

101

Caution: Do not set containers filled with liquids on the ventilator, as spilling may occur.

After turning on the ventilator, it will display a Covidien splash screen, and run power on self test (POST). After the splash screen appears, the ventilator gives a choice to ventilate the same patient or a new patient, or run SST.

Ventilation parameters are entered via the GUI using the following general steps:

1. Touch the setting displayed on the GUI.

2. Turn the knob to the right to increase or to the left to decrease the value.

3. Touch Accept to apply the setting or Accept ALL to apply several settings at once.

Note: Quick Start allows for rapid setup and initiation of mechanical ventilation. Review Quick Start parameters and ensure they are consistent with institutional practice before using this feature.

To use Quick Start

1. Touch New Patient.

2. Touch PBW or Gender/Height.

3. Turn the knob to adjust the patient’s PBW or gender and height (if gender is selected, the height selection becomes available).

4. Touch Quick Start.

5. Connect the circuit wye adapter to the patient’s airway or interface connection. The patient is ventilated with the institutionally configured or factory configured Quick Start defaults according to the PBW or gender/height entered, and circuit type used during SST. There is no prompt to review the settings and the waveforms display appears.

Note: Connecting the circuit wye adapter to the patient’s airway or interface connection prior to making the ventilation settings causes the ventilator to begin ventilation using Safety Pressure Control Ventilation (Safety

PCV) and annunciate a PROCEDURE ERROR alarm. As soon as the ventilator receives confirmation of its settings

(by touching Accept or Accept ALL ), it transitions out of safety PCV, resets the alarm, and delivers the chosen settings. See

Table 51, page 241

for a listing of these settings.

To resume ventilating the same patient

1. Touch Same Patient on the GUI screen. The previous ventilator settings appear for review prior to applying the settings to the patient.

2. If the settings are acceptable, touch START to confirm. To change any settings, touch the setting, turn the knob to increase or decrease the value of the setting, and touch Accept to confirm. To make several settings changes at once, make the desired changes, then touch Accept ALL to confirm. The appearance of the settings changes from white, non-italic font showing the current setting to yellow italics (noting the pending setting). After the settings are accepted, the appearance changes back to white non-italic font.

3. Connect the circuit to the patient’s airway to initiate ventilation.

To ventilate a new patient

1. Touch New Patient on the GUI screen.

102

Figure 42.

New Patient Settings

2. Enter the patient’s PBW or gender and height (if gender is selected, the height selection becomes available).

The ventilator settings screen appears allowing entry of ventilation parameters. See

Figure 42 . If the default

ventilator settings are appropriate for the patient, touch Quick START to confirm the settings. Otherwise, touch a ventilator setting and turn the knob to adjust the parameter. Continue this process for all parameters needing adjustment.

3. Touch START to confirm the changes.

4. Connect the circuit to the patient’s airway to begin ventilation.

4.5.1 Ventilator Settings

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

The following ventilator settings appear at the new patient setup screen:

Predicted Body Weight (PBW) – Adjust the patient’s PBW, or select the patient’s gender and height. See

Section 4.6, Predicted Body Weight (PBW) Calculation, page 110

Ventilation type – Determines the type of ventilation to be delivered [invasive or non-invasive (NIV)]

• Invasive—Conventional ventilation using endotracheal (ET) or tracheostomy (trach) tubes

• Non-invasive (NIV)—Ventilation using non-vented full-face masks, nasal masks, infant nasal prongs, or uncuffed ET tubes. See

Section 4.7, Non-invasive Ventilation (NIV), page 111 .

Mode – Specify the breathing mode (A/C (assist/control), SIMV (synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation), SPONT (spontaneous ventilation), BiLevel or CPAP. CPAP is only available when the circuit type is neonatal and the ventilation type is NIV. See

Table 61, page 249

, Mode setting.

Mandatory type – Select PC (pressure control), VC (volume control), or VC+ (volume control plus).

103

Spontaneous type – If SIMV or BiLevel was selected as the mode, specify PS (pressure support) or TC (tube compensation. If SPONT was selected as the mode, specify PS (pressure support), TC (tube compensation), VS

(volume support) or PAV+™ (proportional assist ventilation).

Note: VS, PAV+™, and TC are only available during Invasive ventilation.

Trigger type – Select pressure- triggering (P-Trig) or flow-triggering ( ⩒ -Trig). Pressure triggering is not available when the ventilation type is NIV. If ventilating a neonatal patient, only flow triggering is available.

Other ways to access the vent setup screen:

• Touch the vent setup button at the bottom left of the GUI display

• Swipe the Menu tab on the left side of the GUI and touch Setup.

Figure 43.

Open Menu Tab

1 Setup button

104

Figure 44.

New Patient setup Screen

To enter settings into the ventilator

1. Select Ventilation Type, Mode, Mandatory Type, Spontaneous Type and Trigger Type by touching the corresponding button.

2. Touch the ventilator setting button needing changes.

3. Adjust the setting value.

4. Continue in this manner until all changes are made, then touch Accept or Accept ALL .

5. Touch START. Ventilation does not begin until the breathing circuit is connected to the patient’s airway. After

ventilation begins, waveforms begin plotting on the displayed waveforms axes. See Section 3.8.2.9,

Waveforms, page 83

for information on setting up the graphics display.

If changes to any settings are required, return to the vent setup screen as described above, or touch a setting icon in the current settings area. See

Figure 39

, item 9.

Note: A yellow triangle icon appears on tabs and buttons displayed on the GUI containing unread or unviewed items. When the item containing the icon is touched, the icon disappears.

Note: To make any settings changes after completing patient setup, touch the Vent tab on the left side of the

Setup dialog and make settings changes as described above. The current setting appears in white font and changes to yellow italics to note the new value is pending. Touch Accept or Accept ALL to confirm a single change or a batch of changes. Once the settings are accepted, their appearance changes to white font.

Note: Selecting Quick Start, Accept , Accept ALL or Start from the setup dialog implements all settings in all four setup tabs (Vent Setup, Apnea, Alarms, and More Settings) and dismisses the setup dialog.

4.5.1.1 Tube Compensation

Tube compensation (TC) is a spontaneous breath type selected during ventilator setup. It allows the ventilator to deliver additional positive pressure to overcome the resistance imposed by the patient’s artificial airway.

See

Section 4.5.1, Ventilator Settings, page 103 for more information on setting up the ventilator. See

Table 61, page 249 for details of specific TC settings.

105

To enable TC

1. Touch the Vent tab on the GUI screen. See

Figure 44, page 105

2. Touch SPONT for the mode selection.

3. Touch TC for spontaneous type.

4. Finish setting up the ventilator as described (see

Section 4.5.1, Ventilator Settings, page 103 for information

on entering ventilator settings).

5. Select the tube type (either endotracheal or tracheostomy) and set the tube ID to correspond to patient settings.

6. After making the changes, touch Accept ALL to apply the new settings, or Cancel to cancel all changes and dismiss the dialog.

4.5.1.2 Adjust Tube Type, Tube ID, and Humidification

Warning: To prevent inappropriate ventilation with TC, select the correct Tube Type (ET or Tracheostomy) and tube inner diameter (ID) for the patient’s ventilatory needs. Inappropriate ventilatory support leading to over-or under-ventilation could result if an ET tube or trach tube setting larger or smaller than the actual value is entered.

To select new settings for the tube

1. Touch the vent setup button on the GUI screen to display the ventilator setup screen.

2. Touch Tube Type or Tube ID for the value to be changed.

3. Turn the knob to change the setting.

4. Make other tube settings, as necessary.

5. Touch Accept ALL to apply the new settings, or Cancel to cancel all changes and dismiss the dialog.

Note: The tube type and tube ID indicators flash if TC is a new selection, indicating the need for entry of the correct tube type and tube ID.

To select new settings for the humidifier

1. From the ventilator setup screen, touch the More Settings tab. A dialog appears containing selections for humidifier type and volume.

Note: A humidification volume button appears below the selection only if Non-heated Expiratory Tube or

Heated Expiratory Tube is selected as the humidifier type.

2. Turn the knob to enter a value equal to the dry volume of the humidifier chamber being used.

3. Touch Accept or Accept ALL to apply the new settings, or Cancel to cancel all changes and dismiss the dialog.

Table 26 lists the allowable ventilator settings according to patient type and ventilation type.

Table 26.

Allowable Ventilator Settings

Patient type

Ventilation type

Mode

Invasive

Adult

NIV

Mandatory type

A/C, SIMV,

SPONT, BiLe‐ vel

A/C, SIMV,

SPONT

PC, VC, VC+ PC, VC

Invasive

A/C, SIMV,

Pediatric

SPONT, BiLevel

PC, VC, VC+

NIV

A/C, SIMV,

SPONT

PC, VC vel

Neonatal

Invasive

A/C, SIMV,

SPONT, BiLe‐

NIV

A/C, SIMV,

SPONT, CPAP

PC, VC, VC+ PC, VC

106

Table 26.

Allowable Ventilator Settings (continued)

Spontaneous type

Trigger type

PS, TC, VS,

PAV+™

(≥25 kg)

⩒ -Trig, P-Trig

⩒ -Trig

PS, TC,

(≥7.0 kg), VS

⩒ -Trig, P-Trig

⩒ -Trig

PS, VS

⩒ -Trig

Note: To use neonatal ventilator settings, the NeoMode 2.0 software option must be installed on the ventilator, or a Puritan Bennett™ 980 Neonatal Ventilator must be in use.

4.5.2 Apnea Settings

After making the necessary changes to the ventilator settings touch the Apnea tab on the left side of the setup dialog. Although changing the apnea settings is not required, confirm the default settings are appropriate for the patient. Apnea ventilation allows pressure control or volume control breath types. Parameters in pressure-controlled apnea breaths include f, P f, V

, ⩒

MAX

, flow pattern, O

%, and T

, T

%, and T

. Volume controlled apnea breath parameters are

Note: If Quick Start is chosen, the Apnea tab on the vent setup screen shows a yellow triangle, indicating the apnea settings have not been reviewed.

Figure 45.

Apnea Setup Screen

To set apnea parameters

1. Select the desired apnea breath type (PC or VC).

2. Enter the desired apnea settings in the same manner as for the ventilator settings.

3. Touch Accept or Accept ALL to confirm apnea settings.

During apnea pressure ventilation, apnea rise time% is fixed at 50%, and the constant parameter during a respiratory rate change is T .

107

4.5.3 Alarm Settings

After accepting the apnea settings, the display returns once more to show the waveforms. Return to the vent setup dialog and touch the Alarms tab on the left side of the GUI screen or touch the alarm icon in the constant

access icons area of the GUI screen. The alarms screen appears with the default alarm settings. See Figure 46, page 108 . Review and adjust the alarm settings appropriately for the patient.

Note: If Quick Start is chosen, the alarms tab on the dialog shows a yellow triangle, indicating the alarm settings have not been reviewed.

Note: The default alarm settings cannot be changed. The clinician can adjust alarm settings by following the procedure below. The alarm settings are retained in memory when the ventilator’s power is cycled and same patient is selected. Otherwise, current settings revert to new patient defaults when a new patient is selected.

Figure 46.

Alarms Settings Screen

To adjust the alarm settings

1. Touch each alarm setting slider of the alarms to change. Alarm settings are available for P

PEAK

, f

TOT

MAND

, V

TE SPONT

, and V

parameters.

, ⩒

E TOT

, V

2. Turn the knob to increase or decrease the value.

3. Continue until all desired alarms are set as necessary.

4. Touch Accept ALL to confirm the alarm settings.

(

Note: There is an additional alarm setting for TC, PAV+™, VS, and VC+ breath types: high inspired tidal volume

⤒ V

). This alarm condition occurs when the inspired tidal volume is larger than the setting value. A ↑ V

alarm will also cause breath delivery to transition to the expiratory phase to avoid delivery of excessive inspiratory volumes.

Warning: Prior to initiating ventilation and whenever ventilator settings are changed, ensure the alarm settings are appropriate for the patient.

Warning: Setting any alarm limits to OFF or extreme high or low values, can cause the associated alarm not to activate during ventilation, which reduces its efficacy for monitoring the patient and alerting the clinician to situations that may require intervention.

108

See

Section 3.8.2.6, Alarm Volume, page 82

to ensure alarm volume is adjusted properly.

Note: Do not block the patient wye while the ventilator is waiting for a patient connection. Otherwise the blockage could imitate a patient connection.

Note: A sample alarm tone sounds for verification at each volume level change. Readjust the alarm volume by moving the alarm volume slider to increase or decrease the alarm volume.

4.5.4 Alarm Screen During Operation

During ventilator operation, the alarm screen appears with indicators to let the operator know the current patient data value for each parameter (item 1), the parameter alarm settings (items 2 and 3), recent range of patient data values for the last 200 breaths (item 4). If an alarm occurs, the slider and corresponding limit button show a color

matching the alarm’s priority. See Figure 47, page 109

Figure 47.

Alarm Screen During Operation

1 Pointers show current value of patient data corresponding to the alarm parameter

2 High alarm setting (in this case ⤒ V

TE SPONT

)

3 Low alarm setting (in this case ⤓ V

TE SPONT

)

4 Range of patient data values for the particular parameter during the last 200 breaths

4.5.5 Making Ventilator Settings Changes

If, during ventilation, settings changes are necessary that don’t involve changes to PBW, mode, breath types, or trigger types, the current settings area located at the lower portion of the GUI screen can be used. See

Figure 39, page 98

for the location of the current settings area.

To change a ventilator setting using the current settings area

1. In the current settings area, touch the parameter whose value needs to be changed. A dialog appears containing buttons for all ventilator settings, with the selected setting highlighted.

2. Touch and turn the knob for any other settings that need to be changed.

3. Touch Accept or Accept ALL .

To change a setting using the vent setup button

1. Touch the vent setup button.

109

2. Change the settings as described previously.

3. Touch Accept or Accept ALL to confirm the changes.

The ventilator settings and the alarm settings chosen remain in memory after the a power cycle, as long as the same patient is chosen when the ventilator is set up again. If a new patient is being ventilated, the ventilator and alarm settings revert to their default values. If all power is lost (both AC and battery), the ventilator and alarm settings in effect prior to the power loss are automatically restored if the power loss duration is 5minutes or less.

If the power loss lasts longer than 5 minutes, ventilation resumes in Safety PCV. Ventilator and alarm settings must be reset for the patient being ventilated. See

Table 51, page 241

for a list of these settings.

To use the Previous Setup button

1. To return to the previous setup, touch the vent setup button then touch Previous Setup on the GUI screen.

The ventilator restores the main control and breath settings previously used, as well as the alarm and apnea settings, and prompts a review by highlighting the previous values in yellow. The ventilator, alarm, and apnea settings tab text is also shown in yellow and the tabs show a yellow triangle, indicating there are previous settings that have not been reviewed.

2. If the settings are acceptable, touch Accept or Accept ALL .

Previous Setup disappears when the previous settings are confirmed and re-appears when ventilating with new settings.

4.5.6 Constant Timing Variable During Respiratory Rate Changes

A breath timing graph appears at the bottom of the setup screen which illustrates the relationship between inspiratory time, expiratory time, I:E ratio, respiratory rate, and the effects on breath timing due to flow pattern, tidal volume, and ⩒

MAX padlock icons are located underneath the breath timing graph allowing the operator to select, from left to right,

, I:E ratio, or T

during mandatory PC, VC, BiLevel, or VC+ breaths. With BiLevel, PC and VC+ breaths, three

as the constant variable during rate changes (or T

, T

ratio, or T

in BiLevel). If the ventilation mode is SPONT, the padlock icons do not appear, and the breath timing graph only displays T inspiration. If the mandatory type is VC, the icons do not appear, but the breath timing graph displays T and T

for a manual

, I:E ratio,

To choose a constant timing variable for rate changes

1. Touch a padlock icon corresponding to the parameter to make constant during rate changes (this changes the padlock’s appearance from unlocked to locked). The “locked” parameter glows in the settings area.

2. Turn the knob to adjust the parameter’s value.

3. Touch Accept .

4.6 Predicted Body Weight (PBW) Calculation

Many default ventilator and alarm settings are based on patient PBW. Either through the entry of height and gender or directly via setting PBW. The PBW range spans at least 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) through at least 155 kg (342 lb) male and 150 kg (331 lb) female. Understanding how the ventilator operates at the very low end of the range of

PBW requires awareness that an entry or prediction for PBW drives the value of a delivered volume, which has a lower limit of 2.0 mL (if using the NeoMode 2.0 option).Data for adult male and female PBW as a function of height are calculated by applying the equations presented on www.ards.net.

Assume the ventilator (via direct height or PBW entry) registered a PBW of 0.3 kg. If a delivered volume of 4 mL/kg

(PBW) was specified, the required volume would equal only 1.2 mL, which is less than the ventilator minimum of

2.0 mL. At a desired 4 mL/kg, the infants’ PBW would need to be at least 0.5 kg or the desired volume must be reset

110

4 to greater than 4 mL/kg (PBW). Once the PBW of the premature infant approaches 1.0 kg (2.2 lb), this restriction disappears.

After entering PBW, review and change all settings as needed.

The correlation function PBW= height was derived from the sources referenced. For subjects whose body weight/height data define the range of PBWs that include the 20- to 23-week gestational-age neonates and the young male and female adolescent adults at the foot of the ARDS tables, their PBW values were taken as the 50th percentile numbers in the Fenton tables and the CDC and NCHS charts and tables, respectively. Note that the

Fenton tables provided the exclusive information for premature and infant data between 20 weeks and 50 weeks

of fetal and gestational growth.

1, 2, 3

Note: Any repeated values noted in the tables are the result of decimal rounding.

4.7 Non-invasive Ventilation (NIV)

Warning: Use only non-vented patient interfaces with NIV. Leaks associated with vented interfaces could result in the ventilator’s inability to compensate for those leaks, even if Leak Sync is employed.

Warning: Full-face masks used for non-invasive ventilation should provide visibility of the patient’s nose and mouth to reduce the risk of emesis aspiration.

Warning: When using NIV, the patient’s exhaled tidal volume (V patient data V

) could differ from the ventilator’s monitored

reading due to leaks around the interface. To avoid this, ensure Leak Sync is enabled.

Non-invasive ventilation (NIV) is used when the clinician determines a mask or other non-invasive patient interface rather than an endotracheal tube would result in the desired patient outcome.

4.7.1 NIV Intended Use

NIV is intended for use by neonatal, pediatric, and adult patients possessing adequate neural-ventilatory coupling and stable, sustainable, respiratory drive.

4.7.2 NIV Breathing Interfaces

The PB980 ventilator can be used with non-vented NIV interfaces that comply with ISO 5356-1:

• Full-face mask: ResMed Mirage™* non-vented full face mask

• Nasal mask: ResMed Ultra Mirage™* non-vented mask

• Infant nasal prongs: Argyle ™* nasal prongs, Hudson RCI™ *infant nasal prongs, Fisher & Paykel™* nasal prongs, medin™* nasal prongs, and RAM cannula.

• Uncuffed neonatal ET tube: Shiley™ uncuffed tracheal tube, Murphy (3.0 mm)

4.7.3 NIV Setup

NIV can be initiated from either the New Patient Setup screen during vent startup or while the patient is being

ventilated invasively. See Table 27

for NIV patient setup information.

1 Fenton TR, BMC Pediatrics 2003, 3:13. www.biomedcentral.com/1471–2431/3/13.

Hamill, PV V. 1977 NCHS growth curves for children birth to 18 years for the United States: National Center for Health Stat

(Vital and Health Statistics: Series 11, Data from the National Health Survey; no. 165) (DHEW publication; (PHS) 78–1650).

1977.

Kuczmarski RJ, Ogden CL, Guo SS, et al. 2000 CDC growth charts for the United States: Methods and development.

National Center for Health Statistics. Vital Health Stat 11(246). 2002.

111

Table 27.

Setting Up a Patient for NIV

To set up a new patient

1. Turn on the ventilator.

2. Select New Patient.

3. Enter patient’s PBW or gender and height.

4. Touch NIV ventilation type.

5. Select mode.

6. Select breath type.

7. Complete ventilator settings, including apnea and alarm settings.

To set up a patient currently being ventilated

1. Touch or swipe the menu tab on the left side of the GUI.

2. Touch Vent Setup.

3. Perform steps 4 through 7 as if setting up the ventilator for a new patient.

4. Review the settings, including apnea and alarm settings, and change if necessary.

To function as intended, D patient.

SENS needs to be set between the LEAK data value displayed while the patient is connected, and the LEAK data value displayed when the interface is open to ambient and not connected to the

To set D

SENS

with NIV interfaces when Leak Sync is enabled

1. After adjusting the patient settings, start ventilation.

2. Ensure that Leak Sync is enabled and set D

SENS

to its highest setting.

3. Select LEAK (L/min) to be displayed in the patient data banner.

4. With the NIV interface connected to the breathing circuit and open to ambient , use the patient data leak value called LEAK to quantify the leak in L/min.

5. Set the D

SENS

(in L/min) below the leak rate (in L/min) to ensure that the disconnect alarm is violated during a disconnect. Note that this will cause a CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm.

6. Connect the patient interface to the patient and ensure that the CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm is resolved.

7. D

SENS

needs to be set higher than the LEAK data value displayed while the patient is connected and lower than the LEAK data value displayed when the interface is open to ambient and not connected to the patient.

8. Periodically assess the leak rate, especially with PEEP changes, and adjust the D is connected to the patient.

SENS

setting as needed to ensure the presence of an alarm during disconnect and the absence of nuisance alarms while the interface

9. Always use alternative methods of monitoring during NIV.

4.7.4 Conversion from Invasive to NIV Ventilation Type

Note: Before switching to non-invasive ventilation from Invasive ventilation when the ETCO

2 ensure the ETCO

option is disabled.

sensor was used,

Warning: For proper ventilation when changing the ventilation type on the same patient, review the automatic settings changes described. Adjust appropriately based on the relevant tables.

Some ventilator settings available during invasive ventilation are not available during NIV. See

Table 28 for

automatic settings changes when changing ventilation type from invasive to NIV.

Table 28.

Invasive to NIV on Same Patient

Current invasive setting

Breath Mode: BiLevel

Breath Mode: SIMV or SPONT

Mandatory Type: VC+

Breath mode: A/C

New NIV setting

High T

I SPONT

( ⤒ T

I SPONT

) limit setting available

Mandatory type:

Neonatal:

PC Adult/Pediatric: VC

112

Table 28.

Invasive to NIV on Same Patient (continued)

Current invasive setting

Spontaneous Type: Any type except PS

Trigger type: Pressure

Alarm settings:

⤓ V

TE SPONT

SENS

⤓ P

PEAK

(if applicable), ⩒

E TOT

, ⤓ V

TE MAND

, INSPIRATION TOO LONG (not user-settable)

New NIV setting

Spontaneous type: PS

Trigger type: Flow

(Flow triggering is the only allowable trigger type dur‐ ing NIV)

Alarm settings: ⤓ P

PEAK

, ⩒

E TOT

, ⤓ V

TE MAND

, ⤓ V

TE SPONT default to NIV new patient values. See

Table 62 . INSPI‐

RATION TOO LONG alarm not available.

SENS

setting defaults to OFF if Leak Sync is disabled.

Note: In any delivered spontaneous breath, either invasive or NIV, if pressure support is set to 0 cmH

2 always a target inspiratory pressure of 1.5 cmH

O applied.

O, there is

When in NIV, the vent setup button’s appearance changes, letting the operator know the ventilation type is NIV.

Figure 48.

Vent Setup Button—“NIV” Indicating NIV Ventilation Type

4.7.5 Conversion from NIV to Invasive Ventilation Type

Table 29 shows automatic settings changes made when changing ventilation type from NIV to invasive.

Table 29.

NIV to Invasive on Same Patient

Current NIV setting

Ventilator settings: ⤒ T

I SPONT

Alarm settings:

⤓ P

PEAK

, ⤓⩒

E TOT

, ⤓ V

TE MAND

, ⤓ V

TE SPONT

SENS

N/A

New invasive setting

Alarm settings: Default to new patient values depend‐ ent upon selected invasive ventilator settings. INSPI‐

RATION TOO LONG alarm becomes available.

SENS

setting defaults to OFF if Leak Sync setting is enabled.

113

4.7.6 High Spontaneous Inspiratory Time Limit Setting

NIV includes a setting in SIMV or SPONT modes for high spontaneous inspiratory time limit ( ⤒ T

I SPONT

). When a patient’s inspiratory time reaches or exceeds the set limit, the ventilator transitions from inspiration to exhalation, and the ⤒ T

I SPONT

symbol appears at the lower left on the GUI screen, indicating the ventilator has truncated inspiration (shown in

Figure 49

). The ⤒ T

I SPONT

setting does not restrict changes to PBW; if the PBW is decreased, ⤒ T

SPONT

may decrease automatically to remain within its allowable limits.

Figure 49.

⤒ T

I SPONT

Indicator

Warning: No audible alarm sounds in conjunction with the visual ⤒ T

I SPONT appear in any alarm log or alarm message.

indicator, nor does the indicator

It is possible the target inspiratory pressure may not be reached if the ⤒ T system leaks are so large as to cause the ventilator to truncate the breath at the maximum allowable ⤒ T setting.

I SPONT

setting is not long enough, or if

I SPONT

Note: To reduce the potential for not reaching the target pressure, minimize the leaks in the system and increase the rise time% or decrease the E

SENS

setting, if appropriate.

4.7.7 NIV Apnea Setup

Set the patient’s apnea parameters as described. See

Section 4.5.2, Apnea Settings, page 107

. NIV does not change the way apnea parameters are set.

4.7.8 NIV Alarm Settings

The system initially sets most alarm settings based on the patient’s PBW. Review all alarm settings, and change as necessary, but startup does not require confirmation of the settings. Alarm settings are made in exactly the same way in NIV as for invasive ventilation.

114

Figure 50.

Default NIV Alarm Settings

Touch the Alarms tab at any time during ventilation to show the current limits and the monitored patient value shown in white on the indicating arrows for each alarm. If an alarm is occurring, the indicator LED color changes

based on alarm priority. See Table 33, page 148 for colors and meanings of alarms and their priorities.

Note: The upper and lower limits of an alarm cannot conflict with each other.

Note: The upper limits for the spontaneous exhaled tidal volume and mandatory exhaled tidal volume alarms are always the same value. Changing the upper limit of one alarm automatically changes the upper limit of the other.

4.8 Manual Inspiration

A manual inspiration is an operator-initiated mandatory (OIM) inspiration. When the operator presses the manual inspiration key while the ventilator is in a mode that includes mandatory breaths (includ‐ ing mixed modes BiLevel and SIMV), the ventilator delivers the manual inspiration using the currently set mandatory breath parameters. A manual inspiration performed while the ventilator is in the SPONT mode uses the currently set apnea breath parameters. A volume-based manual inspiration is com‐ pliance-compensated. Pressing the manual inspiration key while in BiLevel mode will transition from

to T

or T

to T

depending on when in the breath cycle the key was pressed.

4.9 Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers

To access respiratory mechanics maneuvers

1. Touch or swipe the Menu tab on the left side if the GUI.

2. RM in Menu Tab

115

Figure 51.

Touch RM.

3. Respiratory Maneuver Tabs

Figure 52.

Touch the particular tab for the desired maneuver.

4. Follow the prompts on the GUI screen.

5. Accept or reject the maneuver results. If the result is accepted, its value is saved.

4.9.1 Inspiratory Pause Maneuver

An inspiratory pause maneuver closes the inspiration and exhalation valves and extends the inspiratory phase of a single, mandatory breath for the purpose of measuring end inspiratory circuit pressure and plateau pressure

). Then lung static compliance (C

STAT

), and static resistance (R

STAT

) of the respiratory system are calculated.

Pressures on either side of the artificial airway are allowed to equilibrate, which determine the pressure during a

116

4 no-flow state. A request for an inspiratory pause is rejected during apnea ventilation, safety PCV, OSC, BUV, and in

Stand-by state. Inspiratory pause maneuvers are allowed in A/C, SIMV, BiLevel and SPONT modes. If an inspiratory pause maneuver has already occurred during the breath, a second inspiratory pause maneuver is not allowed.

Inspiratory pause maneuvers can be classified as automatic or manual . The automatic inspiratory pause maneuver lasts at least 0.5 second but no longer than 3 seconds. A manual inspiratory pause maneuver starts by pressing and holding the inspiratory pause key. The pause maneuver lasts for the duration of the key-press (up to

7 seconds).

To perform an automatic inspiratory pause maneuver

1. Press and release the inspiratory pause key on the GUI bezel or touch and release Start if performing an

inspiratory pause maneuver from the GUI screen as shown in Figure 52, page 116

. The ventilator performs the inspiratory pause maneuver and displays P

, C

STAT

, and R

STAT

along with the date and time.

2. Touch Accept or Reject to save or dismiss results. If Accept is touched, the results are displayed.

Cancel an automatic inspiratory pause maneuver by touching Cancel on the GUI screen.

To perform a manual inspiratory pause maneuver

1. Press and hold the inspiratory pause key on the GUI bezel or touch and hold Start on the GUI screen if performing an inspiratory pause from the GUI screen as shown above. The ventilator prompts that the maneuver has started, and to release to end the maneuver. The ventilator performs the inspiratory pause maneuver and displays P

, C

STAT

, and R

STAT

along with the date and time.

2. Touch Accept or Reject to save or dismiss results. If Accept is touched, the results are displayed.

Cancel a manual inspiratory pause maneuver by releasing the inspiratory pause key.

4.9.2 Expiratory Pause Maneuver

An expiratory pause maneuver extends the expiratory phase of the current breath for the purpose of measuring end expiratory lung pressure (PEEP

) or total PEEP. It has no effect on the inspiratory phase of a breath, and only one expiratory pause per breath is allowed. For I:E ratio calculation purposes, the expiratory pause maneuver is considered part of the expiratory phase.

During an expiratory pause maneuver, both inspiratory and exhalation valves are closed, allowing the pressures on both sides of the artificial airway to equilibrate. This allows intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

PEEP

) to be calculated. PEEP

equals

minus the set PEEP level. An expiratory pause maneuver can be either automatically or manually administered, and is executed at the next mandatory breath in A/C, SIMV, or BiLevel modes. In SIMV, the breath cycle in which the pause maneuver becomes active (when the next scheduled ventilator-initiated mandatory

(VIM) breath occurs) will be extended by the amount of time the pause is active. For A/C and SIMV, the expiratory pause maneuver is scheduled for the next end-of-exhalation prior to a mandatory breath. In BiLevel the expiratory pause maneuver is scheduled for the next end-of-exhalation prior to a transition from P

L to P

. During the expiratory pause maneuver, PEEP

and PEEP

equilibration time values are displayed and regularly updated because stabilization of one of these values can indicate the pause can be ended. During the expiratory pause maneuver, the apnea interval T

is extended by the amount of time the pause maneuver is active. Expiratory pause maneuver requests are ignored if the ventilator is in apnea ventilation, safety PCV, OSC, BUV, and Stand-By state.

Additionally, SEVERE OCCLUSION alarms are suspended during expiratory pause maneuvers. If flow triggering is active, backup pressure sensitivity (P

SENS

) detects patient breathing effort.

Maximum duration for a manual expiratory pause maneuver is 15 seconds and 3 seconds for an automatic expiratory pause maneuver.

During a manual or automatic expiratory pause maneuver, PEEP

and PEEP

appear on the GUI with the next VIM to allow the clinician to view when these values are stabilized, indicating the maneuver can be ended.

To perform an automatic expiratory pause maneuver

117

1. Press and release the expiratory pause key on the GUI or touch and release Start if performing the expiratory pause maneuver from the GUI screen. The ventilator performs the expiratory pause maneuver and displays a circuit pressure graph, PEEP

, and PEEP

, along with the date and time.

2. Accept or reject the pause maneuver results.

To perform a manual expiratory pause maneuver

1. Press and hold the expiratory pause key on the GUI bezel or touch and hold Start if performing the expiratory pause maneuver from the GUI screen. The ventilator prompts that the maneuver has started, and to release to end the maneuver. The ventilator performs the expiratory pause maneuver and displays a circuit pressure graph, PEEP

, and PEEP

along with the date and time.

2. Accept or reject the pause maneuver results.

Touch Cancel on the GUI screen to cancel the expiratory pause maneuver.

4.9.3 Other Respiratory Maneuvers

To perform other respiratory maneuvers, touch the corresponding tab on the desired maneuver, and follow the prompts on the GUI screen.

4.10 Oxygen Sensor Function

The ventilator’s oxygen sensor monitors O

%. This cell is mounted in the inspiratory module in the BDU and monitors the percentage of oxygen in the mixed gas delivered to the breathing circuit (it may not reflect the actual oxygen concentration in the gas the patient inspires).

See the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for instructions on replacing the O

sensor.

New patient default O

% settings are as follows:

• O

sensor—enabled

• Neonatal—40% O

• Pediatric/adult—100% O

Note: The oxygen sensor has three states: Enabled, Disabled, and Calibrate. The oxygen sensor is enabled at ventilator startup regardless if New Patient or Same Patient setup is selected.

To enable or disable the O

sensor

1. Touch the vent setup button.

2. Touch the More Settings tab. The more settings screen appears.

118

Figure 53.

More Settings Screen with O

Sensor Enabled

3. Touch the button corresponding to the desired O

sensor function (Enabled or Disabled).

4. Touch Accept .

4.10.1 Oxygen Sensor Life

The O

% setting can range from room air (21% O

) up to a maximum of 100% oxygen. The sensor reacts with oxygen to produce a voltage proportional to the partial pressure of the mixed gas. As ambient atmosphere contains approximately 21% oxygen, the sensor constantly reacts with oxygen and always produces a voltage.

The useful life of the cell can also be shortened by exposure to elevated temperatures and pressures. During normal use in the ICU, the oxygen sensor lasts approximately 1 year—the interval for routine preventive maintenance.

Because the oxygen sensor constantly reacts with oxygen, it requires periodic calibration to prevent inaccurate

% alarm annunciation. Once a calibrated oxygen sensor and the ventilator reach a steady-state operating temperature, the monitored O

% will be within three percentage points of the actual value for at least 24 hours.

To ensure the oxygen sensor remains calibrated, recalibrate the oxygen sensor at least once every 24 hours.

Typically, the clinician uses an O

analyzer in conjunction with the information given by the ventilator. If a NO O

SUPPLY alarm occurs, compare the O

analyzer reading with the ventilator’s O

reading for troubleshooting purposes. The ventilator automatically switches to delivering air, only (21% oxygen).

4.10.2 Oxygen Sensor Calibration

The oxygen sensor should be calibrated every 24 hours and before use. The calibration function provides a single-point O

sensor calibration.

To calibrate the O

2 sensor

1. Touch the vent setup button.

2. Touch the More Settings tab.

119

3. Touch Calibrate for the O

sensor. The calibration procedure results in 100% O

being delivered through the breathing circuit for the 2-minute calibration period. See

Figure 53, page 119 .

4.10.3 Oxygen Sensor Calibration Testing

To test the O

sensor calibration

1. Connect the ventilator’s oxygen hose to a known 100% O

2 cylinder).

source (for example, a medical-grade oxygen

2. Calibrate the oxygen sensor as described above.

3. Connect the ventilator oxygen hose to another known 100% O

2 medical-grade oxygen cylinder).

source (for example, a second

4. Set O

% to each of the following values, and allow 1 minute after each for the monitored value to stabilize:

21%, 40%, 90%

5. Watch the GUI screen to ensure the value for O

2 of selecting each setting.

(delivered O

%) is within 3% of each setting within 1 minute

4.11 Ventilator Protection Strategies

The ventilator incorporates a number of strategies to support patient safety. These include power on self test

(POST), SST and a new strategy called Ventilation Assurance , which provides alternate means of ventilation in the case of certain serious faults in the breath delivery system. The descriptions below detail the system response to potential failures.

4.11.1 Power On Self Test (POST)

The first strategy is to detect potential problems before the ventilator is placed on a patient. POST checks the integrity of the ventilator’s electronics and prevents ventilation if a critical fault is found. (See the

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for a complete description of POST). POST may detect major or minor system faults which manifest themselves as device alerts. See

Section 6.5.13, DEVICE ALERT Alarm, page 164 for more information.

4.11.2 Technical Fault

A technical fault occurs if a POST or background test has failed. See

Section 10.17, Power On Self Test (POST), page 244

Based on the test that failed, the ventilator will either ventilate with current settings, ventilate with modified settings, or enter the vent inop state. A technical fault cannot be cleared by pressing the alarm reset key. It can only be cleared by correcting the fault that caused it or if alarm reset criteria have been met.

4.11.3 SST

In addition to characterizing the ventilator breathing circuit, SST performs basic checks on the ventilator’s pneumatic system including the breath delivery PSOL, the flow sensors and the exhalation valve. Faults detected during SST must be corrected before ventilation can be started.

4.11.4 Procedure Error

A procedure error occurs when the ventilator senses a patient connection before ventilator setup is complete. The ventilator provides ventilatory support using default Safety Pressure Controlled Ventilation (Safety PCV) settings.

See

Table 51, page 241 .

120

4.11.5 Ventilation Assurance

During ventilation, the ventilator performs frequent background checks of its breath delivery sub-system (see

Section 10.16, Safety Net, page 240 ). In the event that certain critical components in the pneumatics fail, Ventilation

Assurance provides for continued ventilatory support using one of three backup ventilation (BUV) strategies, bypassing the fault to maintain the highest degree of ventilation that can be safely delivered (see

Section 10.16.4,

Background Diagnostic System, page 242

for a full description of the backup ventilation strategies).

Note: Do not confuse BUV with Safety PCV, which occurs when a patient is connected before ventilator setup is complete, or with apnea ventilation, which occurs in response to patient apnea.

4.11.6 Safety Valve Open (SVO)

In the event of a serious fault occurring that cannot be safely bypassed, the ventilator, as a last resort, reverts to a safe state. In Safe State, the ventilator opens the safety valve and the exhalation valve, allowing the patient to breathe room air (if able to do so), provided the patient circuit is not occluded, and the inspiratory PSOL valve is closed. During SVO, the patient (if connected) can breathe room air through the safety valve after it releases pressure in the patient circuit. The patient exhales through the exhalation valve with minimal resistance and the exhalation valve also acts like a check valve, limiting gas from being drawn in through the exhalation filter or expiratory limb of the circuit. SVO conditions are logged into the event and alarm logs as are the events leading to the SVO condition. If the condition causing SVO clears, the ventilator clears the SVO state. Patient data do not display on the GUI, but graphics are still plotted. During SVO, the ventilator ignores circuit occlusions and disconnects. If the condition causing SVO can only be corrected by servicing the ventilator, the SVO alarm cannot be reset by pressing the alarm reset key.

4.11.7 Ventilator Inoperative (Vent Inop)

Vent Inop occurs when the ventilator detects a catastrophic error and prevents all other safety states from operating. Vent inop limits pressure to the patient as the ventilator enters the SVO state, disables (closes) the gas mixing PSOL valves, and purges the gas mixing system accumulator. The safety valve is opened, a vent inop indicator illuminates, a high priority alarm annunciates from the primary alarm, and the secondary alarm

(continuous tone) is activated. The ventilator can only exit the vent inop state by power cycling and successfully passing EST. The vent inop alarm cannot be reset with the alarm reset key. All detection and annunciation of patient data alarm conditions is suspended.

During a vent inop condition, the inspiratory and expiratory pressure drop measured at the patient wye does not exceed 6.0 cmH

O at 30 L/min.

4.12 Ventilator Shutdown

When the ventilator power switch is turned off, the ventilator executes an orderly shutdown routine, saving patient data before removing power. If the ventilator detects a patient connected when the power switch is turned off, a high priority alarm is annunciated and a banner on the display requires the operator to confirm that a power down was requested. Only after the operator confirms will the ventilator execute the shutdown command.

All logs are retained in the ventilator’s memory upon ventilator shutdown. When the logs reach the maximum

number of entries, the oldest values are overwritten with new values. See Section 8.5, Ventilator Logs, page 189 for

information on ventilator logs.

121

122

5 Product Data Output

5.1 Overview

This chapter describes the features of the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator designed to provide output to the clinician. This includes language, methods of displaying and transferring data, types of displayed data, and types of external device ports. Connectivity to an external patient monitoring system is also included.

5.2 Language

The language used on the ventilator is configured at the factory.

5.3 Data Display

Displayed data are updated in real-time. The practitioner can display up to 60 seconds of waveform data and pause and capture up to two loops using the screen capture function. The operator can pause the displays and when the displays are paused, a cursor appears with the relevant numeric values for the intersecting points of the cursor and waveform or loop. The scalar waveform contains a single value, but loops contain both x- and y-axis data. The operator can move the cursor along the waveform or loop using the knob, and read the corresponding

data. See Section 3.8.2.9, Waveforms, page 83 for details regarding configuring and displaying waveforms.

5.4 Data Transfer

Data from the ventilator can be accessed via USB or RS-232 connectors. The following data are available for downloading via connection to a remote device or flash drive:

• Waveform images (screen capture function)—USB port

• Waveform data—RS-232 port, USB port with USB to serial conversion capability (per Comm port configuration)

• Results from DCI commands—RS-232 port, USB port with USB to serial conversion capability (per Comm port configuration)

5.4.1 GUI Screen Capture

Caution: The USB interface should be used for saving screen captures and interfacing with an external patient monitor. It should not be used to provide power to other types of devices containing a USB interface.

Caution: Only compatible USB devices should be used, otherwise GUI performance may be impacted.

A 128 MB flash drive storage device formatted in the 32-bit file format is required for downloading images from the USB ports. The USB device listed in

Table 42

is the ONLY compatible USB device currently available for use on the PB980. To order a compatible USB device, contact Medtronic Technical Services at 800 255 6774 or a local

Medtronic representative.

To capture GUI screens

1. Navigate to the desired screen from which you wish to capture an image (for example, the waveforms screen). There is no need to pause the waveform before performing the screen capture.

2. Touch the screen capture icon in the constant access icons area of the GUI screen.

If desired, navigate to another screen and repeat steps 1 and 2 for up to 10 images. If another image is captured, increasing the queue to 11 images, the newest image overwrites the oldest image so there are always only 10 images available.

123

Note: If the camera icon appears dim, it means that the screen capture function is currently processing images and is unavailable. When processing is finished, the camera icon is no longer dim and the screen capture function is available.

To transfer the captured images to a USB storage device

1. Swipe the Menu on the left side of the GUI. See

Figure 43, page 104 .

2. Touch Screen Capture. A list of screen captures appears, identified by time and date. A slider also appears if more images than shown are present.

3. Insert a passive USB storage device (flash drive) into one of the USB ports at the rear of the ventilator. The

proper orientation of the USB device is with metal contacts facing the test button. See Figure 56, page 135

If more than one USB storage device is installed in the ventilator, touch the button of the destination USB device where the image will be copied. If an incompatible device is inserted, the port becomes disabled until the device is removed, and removal is confirmed by touching the confirm button. The message shown

in Figure 54 appears.

Figure 54.

Incompatible USB Device Message

Note: Removal of the external USB storage device while screenshot files are being written to it may result in incomplete file transfer and unusable files.

4. In the list of images, touch the image name.

5. Touch Copy. The image is stored on the destination USB storage device.

6. Alternatively, touch Select All, and all images in the list are stored on the USB device and can then be viewed and printed from a personal computer.

Note: The file format of screen captures is PNG.

5.4.2 Communication Setup

To specify the communication configuration for the ventilator

1. Touch the configure icon in the constant access icons area of the GUI.

124

A menu appears with several tabs.

2. Touch the Comm Setup tab. The Comm Setup screen appears allowing three ports to be configured. These ports can be designated as DCI, DCI 2.0, DCI 3.0, Philips, Spacelabs, or Waveforms.

Note: Waveforms can be selected on any port, but only on one port at a time.

Figure 55.

Comm Setup Screen

5.4.3 Comm Port Configuration

Configuring the Comm port allows the ventilator to communicate with devices listed in the Comm Setup screen, or to capture waveform data (in ASCII format) from the ventilator.

To configure Comm ports

1. Touch COM1, COM2, or COM3.

2. Turn the knob indicating the desired device configuration.

3. Select the desired baud rate. If waveforms was selected, the baud rate automatically becomes configured to 38 400.

4. Select 7 or 8 data bits.

5. Select parity of even, odd, or none if data bits =8.

Connect the device to the previously configured port. See

Figure 56, page 135 for a description and the locations

of the Comm ports.

Note: When a USB port is configured as a Comm port, it is necessary to use a USB-to-serial adapter cable. This adapter must be based on the chipset manufactured by Prolific. For further information, contact your Medtronic representative.

Selecting waveforms when configuring a Comm port allows the ventilator to continuously transmit pressure, flow, and sequence numbers in ASCII format from the selected serial port, at a baud rate of 38 400 bits/s, and the operator- selected stop bits, and parity. A sample of pressure and flow readings is taken every 20 ms. This sample of readings is transmitted on the selected serial port at the end of each breath at breath rates of 10/min and higher.

For longer duration breaths, at least the first 8 seconds of the breath is transmitted.

125

The format of the data is as follows:

• The beginning of inspiration is indicated by “BS, S:nnn,<LF>” where ’BS’ identifies the Breath Start, ‘S:nnn’ is a sequence number incremented at every breath, and <LF> is a line feed character.

• The fff, and ppp fields show the breath flow and pressure data.

• The end of exhalation is indicated by: “BE<LF>” where ‘BE’ indicates Breath End, and <LF> is a line feed character.

5.4.4 Serial Commands

The ventilator system offers commands that allow communication to and from the ventilator using a Comm port.

Commands to the ventilator from a remote device include:

• RSET: See Section 5.4.5

• SNDA: See

Section 5.4.6

• SNDF: See

Section 5.4.7

Note: The ventilator responds only if it receives a carriage return <CR> after the command string.

5.4.5 RSET Command

The RSET command clears data from the ventilator receive buffer. The ventilator does not send a response to the host system. Enter the RSET command exactly as shown:

RSET<CR>

5.4.6 SNDA Command

The SNDA command instructs the ventilator to send information on ventilator settings and monitored patient data to the host system. Enter the SNDA command exactly as shown:

SNDA<CR>

When the ventilator receives the command SNDA<CR>, it responds with the code MISCA, followed by ventilator settings and monitored patient data information.

The MISCA response follows this format:

MISCA

706

<STX>

FIELD 5, … FIELD 101,

<ETX>

<CR>

1 Response code to SNDA command

2 Number of bytes between <STX> and <CR>

3 Number of data fields between <STX> and

<ETX>

4 Start of transmission (02 hex)

5 Data field, left-justified and padded with spaces

6 End of transmission (03 hex)

7 Terminating carriage return

Fields not available are marked as “Not used.” Underscores represent one or more spaces that pad each character string.

Table 30 lists MISCA responses to SNDA commands.

Table 30.

MISCA Response

Component

MISCA

706

Description

Response to SNDA command (5 characters)

The number of bytes between <STX> and <CR> (3 characters)

The number of fields between <STX> and <ETX> (2 characters)

126

Field 25

Field 26

Field 27

Field 28-29

Field 30

Field 31-33

Field 34

Field 35

Field 36

Field 37

Field 38

Field 39

Field 40

Field 41

Field 7

Field 8

Field 9

Field 10

Field 11

Field 12

Field 13

Field 14

Field 15

Field 16

Field 17-20

Field 21

Field 22

Field 23

Field 24

Table 30.

MISCA Response (continued)

Component

<STX>

Field 5

Field 6

Field 42

Field 43-44

Field 45

Field 46

Field 47

Field 48

Field 49-50

Start of transmission character (02 hex) tilator (18 characters)

Description

Ventilator time (HH:MM_) (6 characters)

Ventilator ID to allow external hosts to uniquely identify each Puritan Bennett™ 980 Ven‐

Room number (6 characters)

Date (MMM_DD_YYYY_) (12 characters)

Mode (CMV___, SIMV__, CPAP__ or BILEVL) (CMV = A/C) setting (6 characters)

Respiratory rate setting in breaths per minute (6 characters)

Tidal volume setting in liters (6 characters)

Peak flow setting in liters per minute (6 characters)

% setting (6 characters)

Pressure sensitivity setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

PEEP or P

(in BiLevel) setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

Plateau time in seconds (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

Apnea interval in seconds (6 characters)

Apnea tidal volume setting in liters (6 characters)

Apnea respiratory rate setting in breaths per minute (6 characters)

Apnea peak flow setting in liters per minute (6 characters)

Apnea O

% setting (6 characters)

Pressure support setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

Flow pattern setting (SQUARE or RAMP__) (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

Elevate O

state (ON____ or OFF___) (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

Total respiratory rate in breaths per minute (6 characters)

Exhaled tidal volume in liters (6 characters)

Exhaled minute volume in liters (6 characters)

Spontaneous minute volume in liters (6 characters)

Maximum circuit pressure in cmH

O (6 characters)

Mean airway pressure in cmH

O (6 characters)

End inspiratory pressure in cmH

O (6 characters)

Expiratory component of monitored value of I:E ratio, assuming inspiratory component of 1 (6 characters)

High circuit pressure limit in cmH

O (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

Low exhaled tidal volume limit in liters (6 characters)

Low exhaled minute volume limit in liters (6 characters)

High respiratory rate limit in breaths per minute (6 characters)

High circuit pressure alarm status* (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

127

Field 64

Field 65

Field 66

Field 67

Field 68

Field 69

Field 70

Field 71

Field 72-83

Field 84

Field 85

Field 86

Field 87

Field 88

Field 89

Field 90

Field 91

Field 92

Field 93

Field 94

Component

Field 51

Field 52

Field 53

Field 54

Field 55

Field 56

Field 57

Field 58-59

Field 60

Field 61

Field 62

Field 63

Field 95

Field 96

Table 30.

MISCA Response (continued)

Field 97

Field 98

Field 99

Field 100

Field 101

Description

Low exhaled tidal volume (mandatory or spontaneous) alarm status (6 characters)*

Low exhaled minute volume alarm status* (6 characters)

High respiratory rate alarm status* (6 characters)

No O

supply alarm status* (6 characters)

No air supply alarm status* (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

Apnea alarm status* (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

Ventilator time (HH:MM_) (6 characters)

Room number (6 characters)

Date (MMM_DD_YYYY_) (12 characters)

Static compliance (C

STAT

) from inspiratory pause maneuver in mL/cmH

O (6 characters)

Static resistance (R

STAT

) from inspiratory pause maneuver in cmH

O/L/s (6 characters)

Dynamic compliance (C

DYN

) in mL/cmH

O (6 characters)

Dynamic resistance (R

DYN

) in cmH

O/L/s (6 characters)

Negative inspiratory force (NIF) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Vital capacity (VC) in L (6 characters)

Peak spontaneous flow (PSF) in L/min (6 characters)

Ventilator-set base flow in liters per minute (6 characters)

Flow sensitivity setting in L/min (6 characters)

Not used (6 characters)

End inspiratory pressure in cmH

O (6 characters)

Inspiratory pressure or P

setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

Inspiratory time or T

setting in seconds (6 characters)

Apnea interval setting in seconds (6 characters)

Apnea inspiratory pressure setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

Apnea respiratory rate setting in breaths per minute (6 characters)

Apnea inspiratory time setting in seconds (6 characters)

Apnea O

% setting (6 characters)

Apnea high circuit pressure limit in cmH

O (6 characters)

Audio paused state (ON____ or OFF___) (6 characters)

Apnea alarm status* (6 characters)

Severe Occlusion/Disconnect alarm status* (6 characters)

Inspiratory component of I:E ratio or High component of H:L (BiLevel) setting (6 charac‐ ters)

Expiratory component of I:E ratio setting or Low component of H:L (BiLevel) (6 characters)

Inspiratory component of apnea I:E ratio setting (6 characters)

Expiratory component of apnea I:E ratio setting (6 characters)

Constant during rate setting change for pressure control mandatory breaths (I-time or

I/E___ or______) (6 characters) (where ______ represents T

or PCV not active)

Monitored value of I:E ratio (6 characters)

128

Table 30.

MISCA Response (continued)

Component

<ETX>

Description

End of transmission character (03 hex)

<CR> Terminating carriage return

* Possible responses are: NORMAL, ALARM_, or RESET_

5.4.7 SNDF Command

SNDF is a command sent from an external host device to the ventilator system instructing it to transmit all ventilator settings data, monitored patient data, and alarm settings and occurrences. Enter the SNDF command exactly as shown:

SNDF<CR>

When the ventilator receives the command SNDF<CR>, it responds with the code MISCF, followed by ventilator settings, monitored patient data, and alarm information.

The MISCF response follows this format:

MISCF

1225*

169

<STX>

FIELD 5, … FIELD

173,

<ETX>

<CR>

1 Response code to SNDF command

2 Number of bytes between <STX> and

<CR>

3 Number of data fields between <STX> and

<ETX>

4 Start of transmission (02 hex)

5 Data field, left-justified and padded with spaces

6 End of transmission (03 hex)

7 Terminating carriage return

* 1229 if Philips is selected for serial port in communication setup

Table 31 lists MISCF responses to SNDF commands.

Note: Non-applicable fields will either contain zero or be blank.

Note: Ensure your external devices are compatible with the latest DCI software to prevent incompatibilities as data fields may have been modified.

Table 31.

MISCF Response

Component

MISCF

1225*

169

<STX>

Field 5

Response to SNDF command (5 characters)

Number of bytes between <STX> and <CR> (4 characters) *1229 if Phillips is selected for the

Comm port in Communication Setup

Description

Number of fields between <STX> and <ETX> (3 characters)

Start of transmission character (02 hex)

Ventilator time (HH:MM_) (6 characters)

Field 6

Field 7

Field 8

Field 9

Ventilator ID to allow external hosts to uniquely identify each Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series

Ventilator (18 characters)

Date (MMM_DD_YYYY_) (12 characters)

Ventilation Type (NIV______ or INVASIVE_ or HFO

T____) (9 characters)

Mode (A/C___, SIMV__, SPONT_, BILEVL, or CPAP__) (6 characters)

129

Field 36

Field 37

Field 38

Field 39

Field 40

Field 41

Field 42

Field 43

Field 44

Field 45

Field 46

Field 47

Field 48

Field 49

Field 50

Component

Field 10

Field 11

Field 12

Field 13

Field 14

Field 15

Field 16

Field 17

Field 18

Field 19

Field 20

Field 21

Field 22

Field 23

Field 24

Field 25

Field 26

Field 27

Field 28

Field 29

Field 30

Field 31

Field 32

Field 33

Field 34

Field 35

Table 31.

MISCF Response (continued)

Description

Mandatory Type (PC____, VC____, VC+___) (6 characters)

Spontaneous Type (PS____, TC____, VS____, PA____) (6 characters)

Trigger Type setting ( ⩒ -Trig, P-Trig, IE

SYNC

) (6 characters)

Respiratory rate setting in breaths/min (6 characters)

Tidal volume (V

Peak flow ( ⩒

MAX

) setting in L (6 characters)

) setting in L/min (6 characters)

% setting (6 characters)

Pressure sensitivity setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

PEEP/CPAP setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

Plateau setting in seconds (6 characters)

Apnea interval setting in seconds (6 characters)

Apnea tidal volume setting in L (6 characters)

Apnea respiratory rate setting in breaths/min (6 characters)

Apnea peak flow setting in L/min (6 characters)

Apnea O

% setting (6 characters)

PCV apnea inspiratory pressure setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

PCV Apnea Inspiratory Time setting in seconds (6 characters)

Apnea flow pattern setting (SQUARE or RAMP) (6 characters)

Apnea mandatory type setting (PC or VC) (6 characters)

Inspiratory component of Apnea I:E ratio (if apnea mandatory type is PC) (6 characters)

Expiratory component of Apnea I:E ratio (if apnea mandatory type is PC) (6 characters)

Support pressure setting (cmH

O) (6 characters)

Flow pattern setting (SQUARE or RAMP) (6 characters)

Elevate O

state (ON or OFF) (6 characters)

High inspiratory pressure alarm setting ( ⤒ P

PEAK

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Low inspiratory pressure alarm setting ( ⤓ P

PEAK

) in cmH

O or OFF (6 characters)

High exhaled minute volume alarm setting ( ⤒⩒

Low exhaled minute volume alarm setting ( ⤓⩒

E TOT

) in L/min or OFF (6 characters)

E TOT

) in L/min or OFF (6 characters)

High exhaled mandatory tidal volume alarm setting ( ⤒ V

TE MAND

) in mL or OFF (6 characters)

Low exhaled mandatory tidal volume alarm setting ( ⤓ V

TE MAND

) in mL or OFF (6 characters)

High exhaled spontaneous tidal volume alarm setting ( ⤒ V

Low exhaled spontaneous tidal volume alarm setting ( ⤓ V

TE SPONT

) in mL or OFF (6 characters)

TE SPONT

) in mL or OFF (6 characters)

High respiratory rate alarm setting ( ⤒ f

TOT

) in breaths/min or OFF (6 characters)

High inspired tidal volume alarm setting ( ⤒ V

) in mL (6 characters)

Base flow setting in L/min (6 characters)

Flow sensitivity ( ⩒

SENS

) setting in L/min (6 characters)

PCV inspiratory pressure (P

) setting in cmH

O (6 characters)

PCV inspiratory time (T

) setting in seconds (6 characters)

Inspiratory component of I:E ratio setting or High component of H:L ratio setting (6 characters)

Expiratory component of I:E ratio setting or Low component of H:L ratio setting (6 characters)

Constant during rate change setting (I-time, I/E, or E-time) (6 characters)

130

Field 79

Field 80

Field 81

Field 82

Field 83

Field 84

Field 85

Field 86

Field 87

Field 88

Field 89

Field 63

Field 64

Field 65

Field 66

Field 67

Field 68

Field 69

Field 70

Field 71

Field 72

Component

Field 51

Field 52

Field 53

Field 54

Field 55

Field 56

Field 57

Field 58

Field 59

Field 60

Field 61

Field 62

Field 73

Field 74

Field 75

Table 31.

MISCF Response (continued)

Field 76

Field 77

Field 78

Description

Tube ID setting in mm (6 characters)

Tube Type setting (ET or TRACH) (6 characters)

Humidification type setting (Non-heated exp tube, Heated exp tube, or HME) (18 characters)

Humidifier volume setting in L (6 characters)

sensor setting (Enabled or Disabled) (9 characters)

Disconnect sensitivity (D

SENS

) setting in %, L/min or OFF (6 characters)

Rise time% setting (6 characters)

PAV+™ percent support setting (6 characters)

Expiratory sensitivity (E

SENS

) setting in % or L/min for PAV+™ breath type (6 characters)

PBW setting in kg (6 characters)

Target support volume (V

T SUPP

) setting in L (6 characters)

High pressure (P

) setting (in BiLevel) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Low pressure (P

) setting (in BiLevel) in cmH

O (6 characters)

High pressure time (T

) setting (in BiLevel) in seconds (6 characters)

High spontaneous inspiratory time limit setting ( ⤒ T

I SPONT

) in seconds (6 characters)

Circuit type setting (ADULT, PEDIATRIC, or NEONATAL) (9 characters)

Low pressure time (T

) setting (in BiLevel) in seconds (6 characters)

Expiratory time (T

) setting in seconds (6 characters)

Monitored end inspiratory pressure (P

I END

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored respiratory rate (f

TOT

) in breaths/min (6 characters)

Monitored exhaled tidal volume (V

) in L (6 characters)

Monitored patient exhaled minute volume ( ⩒

E TOT

) in L/min (6 characters)

Monitored peak airway pressure (P

PEAK

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored mean airway pressure (P

MEAN

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored expiratory component of monitored value of I:E ratio, assuming inspiratory com‐ ponent of 1 (6 characters)

Monitored I:E ratio (6 characters)

Delivered O

% (6 characters)

Monitored inspired tidal volume (V

) in L # (6 characters)

# V

(L), If Leak Sync ON.

Monitored intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Estimated total resistance (R

TOT

) in cmH

O/L/s (6 characters)

Estimated patient resistance (R

PAV

) in cmH

O/L/s (6 characters)

Estimated patient elastance (E

PAV

) in cmH

O/L (6 characters)

Estimated patient compliance (C

PAV

) in mL/cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored normalized rapid shallow breathing index (f/V

/kg) (6 characters)

Monitored rapid shallow breathing index (f/V

) (6 characters)

Monitored spontaneous percent inspiratory time (T

TOT

) (6 characters)

Monitored Positive end expiratory pressure (PEEP) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored spontaneous inspiratory time (T

I SPONT

) in seconds (6 characters)

Monitored exhaled spontaneous minute volume ( ⩒

TE SPONT

) Min L/min (6 characters)

131

Table 31.

MISCF Response (continued)

Component

Field 90

Field 91

Field 92

Field 93

Field 94

Field 95

Field 96

Field 97

Field 98

Field 99

Field 100

Field 101

Field 102

Field 103

Field 104

Field 105

Field 106

Field 107

Field 108

Field 109

Field 110

Field 111

Field 112

Field 113

Field 114

Field 115

Field 116

Field 117

Field 118

Field 119

Field 120

Field 121

Field 122

Field 123

Field 124

Field 125

Field 126

Field 127

Monitored intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

Monitored total PEEP (PEEP

TOT

Monitored static compliance (C

STAT acters)

Description

) from expiratory pause maneuver in cmH

O (6 characters)

) from expiratory pause maneuver in cmH

O (6 characters)

) from inspiratory pause maneuver in mL/cmH

O (6 char‐

Monitored static resistance (R ters)

STAT

) from inspiratory pause maneuver in cmH

O/L/s (6 charac‐

Monitored plateau pressure (P

) from inspiratory pause maneuver in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored high spontaneous inspiratory time (ALERT_ or blank) (6 characters)

Monitored dynamic compliance (C

DYN

) in mL/cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored dynamic resistance (R

DYN

) in cmH

O/L/s (6 characters)

Monitored peak spontaneous flow (PSF) in L/min (6 characters)

Monitored peak expiratory flow (PEF) in L/min (6 characters)

Monitored end expiratory flow (EEF) in L/min (6 characters)

Proximal Flow Sensor state (ON or OFF) (6 characters)

Monitored negative inspiratory force (NIF) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored P

0.1

pressure change in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored vital capacity (VC) in L (6 characters)

Audio paused (ON or OFF) (6 characters)

Apnea ventilation alarm* (6 characters)

High exhaled minute volume alarm* ( ↑ ⩒

E TOT

) (6 characters)

High exhaled tidal volume alarm* ( ↑ V

) (6 characters)

High O

% alarm* ( ↑ O

%) (6 characters)

High inspiratory pressure alarm* ( ↑ P

PEAK

) (6 characters)

High ventilator pressure alarm* ( ↑ P

VENT

) (6 characters)

High respiratory rate alarm* ( ↑ f

TOT

) (6 characters)

AC power loss alarm* (6 characters)

Inoperative battery alarm* (6 characters)

Low battery alarm* (6 characters)

Inadvertent Power Off alarm* (6 characters)

Low exhaled mandatory tidal volume alarm* ( ↓ V

TE MAND

) (6 characters)

Low exhaled minute volume alarm* ( ↓ ⩒

E TOT

) (6 characters)

Low exhaled spontaneous tidal volume ( ↓ V

TE SPONT

) alarm* (6 characters)

Low O

% alarm* ( ↓ O

%) (6 characters)

Low air supply pressure alarm* (6 characters)

Low O

supply pressure alarm* (6 characters)

Compressor inoperative alarm* (6 characters)

Disconnect alarm* (6 characters)

Severe occlusion alarm* (6 characters)

Inspiration too long alarm* (6 characters)

Procedure error alarm* (6 characters)

132

Field 130

Field 131

Field 137

Field 138

Field 139

Field 140

Field 141

Field 142

Field 143

Field 144

Field 145

Field 146

Field 147

Field 148

Field 149

Field 150

Field 151

Field 152

Field 153

Field 154

Field 155

Field 156

Field 157

Field 158

Field 159

Field 160

Field 161

Field 162

Field 163

Field 164

Table 31.

MISCF Response (continued)

Component

Field 128

Field 129

Field 132

Field 133

Field 134

Field 135

Field 136

Field 165

Field 166

Field 167

e e e

Compliance limited tidal volume (V

High inspired tidal volume* ( ↑ V

Description

) alarm* (6 characters)

) alarm (6 characters)

High inspired tidal volume* ( ↑ V

) alarm (6 characters)

High compensation limit ( ↑ P

COMP

) alarm* (6 characters)

PAV+™ startup too long alarm* (6 characters)

PAV+™ R and C not assessed alarm* (6 characters)

Volume not delivered (VC+) alarm* (6 characters)

Volume not delivered (VS) alarm* (6 characters)

Low inspiratory pressure ( ↓ P

PEAK

) alarm* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A5* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A10* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A15* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A20* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A25* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A30* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A35* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A40* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A45* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A50* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A55* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A60* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A65* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A70* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A75* (6 characters)

Technical malfunction A80* (6 characters)

High ETCO

Alarm* (6 characters)

Spontaneous exhaled tidal volume (V

PAV total work of breathing (WOB

TE SPONT

) in liters (6 characters)

TOT

) in Joules/L (6 characters)

Leak Sync state (ON, or OFF) (6 characters)

%LEAK (6 characters)

LEAK in L/min (6 characters)

LEAK

in mL (6 characters)

Prox Inop alarm* (ALARM or NORMAL)

ETCO

(mmHg) when COM port is set to DCI 2.0 or DCI 3.0 (6 characters). Otherwise blank

Inspiratory Compliance ratio (C20/C) (6 characters)

Three times Inspiratory Time Constant (3Tau

) in seconds (6 characters)

Delivered mL/kg Volume (VTI/PBW) # .

VTL/PBW (mL/kg), If Leak Sync ON. (6 characters)

Monitored Driving Pressure (P

DRIVE

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored Positive End Expiratory Pressure at Patient Interface (PEEP

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

Monitored End Inspiratory Pressure at Patient Interface (P

I END IF

) in cmH

O (6 characters)

133

Table 31.

MISCF Response (continued)

Component

Field 168

Field 169

Field 170

Field 171

Field 172

Field 173

<ETX>

<CR>

Monitored Constant Flow ( ⩒

CONST

IE Sync Trigger Sensitivity (I

SYNC

End of transmission character (03 hex)

Terminating carriage return

) in L/min (6 characters)

) setting (6 characters)

IE Sync Cycle Sensitivity (E

SYNC

) setting (6 characters)

Constant flow ( ⩒

CONST

) setting in L/min (6 characters)

Ventilator State f (6 characters)

Nebulizer State

(6 characters)

Description

* Possible responses are: NORMAL, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH, or RESET.

a Fields 146 to 149 are blank for DCI 3.0

b Nebulizer Inoperative Alarm*, when COM port is set to DCI 3.0

c e

CO2 Monitor Inoperative Alarm* when COM port is set to DCI 3.0

d Low EtCO2 Alarm*, when COM port is set to DCI 3.0

Fields 162 to 173 are configured for DCI 3.0, otherwise Blank.

f Possible Ventilator State responses are: STNDBY (Stand-By Mode), SAFPCV (Safety PCV), BREATH (Normal Breathing Mode),

DISCON (Circuit Disconnect), OCCLUD (Occlusion), SVOPEN (Safety Valve Open), BUV (Backup Ventilation), MIX-BUV (Mixer

Backup Ventilation), HFO2T, APNEA.

g Possible Nebulizer State responses are: ON, OFF, SUSPND (Suspended).

5.5 Communication Ports

Warning: The ventilator does not confirm the receipt of the signal to distributed remote devices, including those with alarms. Therefore, ensure alarm volume is appropriately set to avoid missed alarms.

Warning: To avoid possible injury, only connect devices that comply with IEC 60601-1 standard to any of the ports at the rear of the ventilator, with the exception of passive memory storage devices (“flash drives”) and serial-to-USB adapter cables. If a serial-to-USB adapter cable is used, it must be connected to an IEC 60601-1-compliant device.

134

Figure 56.

Port Locations

1 RS-232 port (COM 1)

2 Ethernet port

3 Nurse call port (remote alarm port)

4 USB port (USB 1) (COM 2)

VEN_11244_D

5 USB port (USB 2) (COM 3)

6 HDMI port

7 Service port

5.5.1 Port Use

See

Section 5.4, Data Transfer, page 123

for data transfer details.

5.5.1.1 RS-232 Port

To use the RS-232 port

1. Obtain a cable with a male DB-9 connector to connect to the RS-232 port on the ventilator.

2. Make the appropriate connection to a monitoring device. A gender changer, null modem cable or socket saver may be required. Consult with the institution’s Information Technology professional as required.

3. Ensure to specify the baud rate, parity, and data bits in the ventilator communication setup to correctly match the parameters of the monitoring device.

4. A monitor designed to use this port is required for obtaining data from the ventilator. Set up the monitoring device to receive ventilator data. These data can include waveform data.

5. Program the remote device to send the appropriate RS-232 commands as described in the next section.

See

Table 30, page 126 and

Table 31, page 129 for MISCA and MISCF responses to SNDA and SNDF commands,

respectively.

135

5.5.1.2 Ethernet Port

The Ethernet port is used by service personnel for accessing various logs and updating ventilator software.

5.5.1.3 Nurse Call Port

A remote alarm or nurse call interface is available on the ventilator system that can be used to remotely annunciate the alarm status of the ventilator. Medium and high priority alarms are remotely annunciated. The nurse call connector is located at the back of the ventilator, as shown. See

Figure 56, page 135 .

See the remote alarm manufacturer’s instructions for use for information regarding proper nurse call connection.

5.5.1.4 USB Ports

The USB ports are used for screen captures, or receiving serial data when a USB port has been configured as a serial port. This is also known as transferring data via a serial-over-USB protocol. See

Section 5.4.2, Communication Setup, page 124

for Comm setup configuration. Screen captures require an external USB memory storage device (“flash drive”) for screen captures. Instructions for using this port for screen captures are given. See

Section 5.4.1, GUI Screen

Capture, page 123 .

5.5.1.5 HDMI Port

An external display can be used via connection with the HDMI port.

To use the HDMI port with an external display

1. Connect one end of an HDMI cable to the HDMI port at the back of the ventilator ( Figure 56, page 135

, item

6).

2. Connect the other end of the cable to the external display. An HDMI to DVI adapter may be used.

3. Turn the device on. The appearance of the GUI now displays on the external display device.

5.5.1.6 Service Port

The Service port is used by service personnel only.

5.6 Retrieving Stored Data

Ventilator data are stored in various logs, accessible using the logs icon. Some logs may be accessed during normal ventilation, and some are only available to Medtronic personnel when the ventilator is in Service mode. See

Section 8.5, Ventilator Logs, page 189 for more information on data stored in

various logs.

5.7 Display Configurability

The operator can configure some ventilator parameters according to personal preference. See Table 16, page 79 for

a table showing which parameters are configurable and by whom.

See

Section 3.8.1, Preparing the Ventilator for Use, page 79

for information on configuring each display item.

5.8 Printing Data or Screen Captures

The ventilator cannot be connected directly to a printer.

Save screen captures to an external storage device, such as a USB flash drive, then print from a PC. See Section 5.4.1,

GUI Screen Capture, page 123

for instructions on using the screen-capture feature.

136

5.9 Connectivity to External Systems

The ventilator is compatible with the Philips Medical IntelliVue MP50 and Spacelabs Ultraview patient monitoring systems.

Note: Not all patient monitors are compatible with the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator.

137

138

6 Performance

6.1 Overview

This chapter contains detailed information about Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator performance including:

• Ventilator settings

• Alarm interpretation and alarm testing

• A detailed description of selected alarms

• Monitored patient data

6.2 System Options

Various software functions and options are available for the ventilator. Details for each of these functions and options are described in the appendices. Information regarding the DC compressor hardware option is included in the Compressor Operator’s Manual Addendum.

6.3 Environmental Considerations

Warning: Use of the ventilator or compressor in altitudes higher or barometric pressures lower than those

specified could compromise ventilator or compressor operation. See Table 60, page 249

for a complete list of environmental specifications.

6.4 Ventilator Settings

Default ventilator settings are based on the circuit type selected during SST. A neonatal, pediatric or adult patient circuit can be used, and all accessories needed to ventilate the patient should be attached when SST is performed.

6.4.1 Ventilation Type

The clinician enters the ventilation type, specifying how the patient will be ventilated; invasively or non-invasively

(NIV). The ventilation type optimizes the alarm limits for NIV patients, and disables some settings for NIV ventilation.

6.4.2 Mode

Available ventilation modes are mandatory (A/C) or spontaneous (SPONT) modes, as well as two “mixed” modes:

SIMV and BiLevel.

A/C (Assist-Control) – A/C mode guarantees delivery of a minimum number of mandatory breaths based on the frequency (f ) set by the clinician. Breaths in A/C can be patient-initiated (PIM) or ventilator-initiated (VIM).

SPONT (Spontaneous) – SPONT mode delivers only spontaneous breaths that are all patient-initiated.

SIMV (Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation) – SIMV is a mixed mode allowing both mandatory and spontaneous breaths. SIMV guarantees at least one mandatory breath per set breath cycle, which is either patient-initiated or ventilator-initiated. The mandatory type of an SIMV breath can be PC, VC, or VC+.

BiLevel – BiLevel is also a mixed mode that overlays the patient’s spontaneous breaths onto the breath structure for PC mandatory breaths. Two levels of pressure, P

and P

are employed. The breath cycle interval for both SIMV and BiLevel modes is 60/f where f is the respiratory rate set by the operator.

CPAP – CPAP is available only when circuit type is neonatal and ventilation type is NIV. CPAP mode allows spontaneous breathing with a desired PEEP level. To limit inadvertent alarms associated with the absence of returned volumes in nasal CPAP breathing, CPAP does not make volume alarm settings available.

139

6.4.3 Breath Type

Mandatory breath types for A/C and SIMV modes include volume controlled (VC), pressure controlled (PC), or volume control plus (VC+) breath types, also called mandatory type.

VC (Volume Control) – The ventilator delivers an operator-set tidal volume.

PC (Pressure Control) – The ventilator delivers an operator-set pressure.

VC+ (Volume Control Plus) – Volume control plus is a mandatory, pressure controlled breath type that does not restrict flow during the inspiratory phase, and automatically adjusts the inspiratory pressure target from breath to

breath to achieve the desired tidal volume despite changing lung conditions. See Section 10.7, Mandatory Breath

Delivery, page 208

for more information on VC+.

Mandatory inspirations are triggered in the following ways:

Pressure Trigger (P-Trig) – Changes in circuit pressure cause the ventilator to deliver a breath. These pressure changes relate to the pressure sensitivity (P

SENS

) set by the operator. If the patient makes an effort to inspire, the airway pressure drops. If the pressure drops by at least the value of P

SENS

, the ventilator delivers a breath.

Flow Trigger ( ⩒ -Trig) – Changes in flow in the circuit cause the ventilator to deliver a breath. The breath delivery and exhalation flow sensors measure gas flow in the ventilator breathing system. As the patient inspires, the delivered flow remains constant and ventilator exhalation flow sensor measures decreased flow. When the difference between the two flow measurements is at least the operator-set value for flow sensitivity ( ⩒

SENS ventilator delivers a breath.

), the

Time Trigger – The ventilator delivers a ventilator-initiated mandatory (VIM) breath after a specific amount of time elapses.

Operator Trigger (OIM) – The operator presses the manual inspiration key. An operator initiated mandatory breath is also called an OIM breath. During an OIM breath, the breath delivered is based on the current settings for a mandatory breath.

Spontaneous breathing modes such as SIMV, BiLevel, and SPONT include the following breath types (called spontaneous types):

PS (Pressure Support) – type.

The ventilator delivers an operator-set positive pressure above PEEP (or above P

BiLevel) during a spontaneous breath. If SIMV is selected as the mode, PS is automatically selected for spontaneous

VS (Volume Support) – The ventilator delivers an operator-set positive pressure above PEEP during a spontaneous breath and automatically adjusts the pressure level from breath to breath to consistently deliver the set tidal volume.

TC (Tube Compensation) – Additional positive pressure delivered to the patient during spontaneous breaths to overcome resistance of the artificial airway.

PAV+™ (Proportional Assist Ventilation) – A software function that allows the ventilator to reduce the work of breathing (WOB) by assisting the patient’s inspiration by an operator-set amount proportional to the breathing effort generated by the patient. See

Chapter 14 for more information on PAV+™.

The inspiratory trigger methods for spontaneous breaths are:

Pressure Trigger (P-Trig) – Same as described for mandatory inspiration triggers.

Flow Trigger ( ⩒ -Trig) – Same as described for mandatory inspiration triggers.

Operator Trigger (OIM) – As the operator can only initiate a mandatory breath by pressing the manual inspiration key, spontaneous mode allows OIMs, but the breath delivered is based on the current apnea breath settings.

See

Section 10.4, Inspiration—Detection and Initiation, page 201

for details on the different trigger methods.

140

6.5 Alarms

This manual uses the following conventions when discussing alarms:

A description or name of an alarm without specifying the alarm setting is denoted with an upward or downward pointing arrow ( ↑ or ↓ ) preceding the specific alarm name. An alarm setting is denoted as an upward or downward pointing arrow with an additional horizontal limit symbol ( ⤒ or ⤓ ) preceding the specific alarm. Some alarm conditions actually limit breath delivery such as ↑ P

PEAK

and ↑ V

by truncating inspiration and transitioning to the expiratory phase. These alarm conditions are denoted as alarm limits

. See Table 32, page 143 .

6.5.1 Alarm Messages

Alarms are visually annunciated using an indicator on the top of the GUI for an operator to view from 360 degrees around the ventilator with a radius of four meters (13.1 feet) centered on the visual alarm indicator. If an alarm occurs, this indicator flashes at a frequency and color matching the alarm priority. The alarms also appear as colored banners on the right side of the GUI screen, which can be viewed by the operator from a distance of four meters and at any point within the base of a cone subtended by an angle of 30° to the axis normal to the center of the plane of the monitoring display or visual indication. If an alarm occurs, this indicator appears in the color matching the alarm priority (yellow for low (!) and medium (!!) priority; red for high (!!!) priority). Specific alarm detail

(shown in the alarm message area) is designed for the operator to read from up to one meter from the screen. For

technical alarm and non-technical alarm details, see the respective tables Table 36, page 150 and

Table 37, page 160 .

An alarm is defined as a primary alarm if it is the initial alarm. A dependent alarm arises as a result of conditions that led to the primary alarm. This is also referred to as an augmentation. An augmentation strategy is built into the ventilator software to handle occurrences where the initial cause of the alarm has the potential to precipitate one or more additional alarms. When an alarm occurs, any subsequent alarm related to the cause of this initial alarm augments the initial alarm instead of appearing on the GUI as a new alarm. The initial alarm’s displayed analysis message is updated with the related alarm’s information, and the Alarm Log Event column shows the initial alarm as Augmented .

A primary alarm consists of a base message , analysis message , and a remedy message . The base message describes the primary alarm. The analysis message describes the likely cause of the alarm and may include alarm augmentations. The remedy message provides information on what to do to correct the alarm condition.

Alarm banners, when dragged leftward from the right side of the GUI, display messages for the indicated active alarms.

Figure 57

shows the alarm message format.

141

Figure 57.

Alarm Message Format

1 Base message

2 Analysis message

3 Remedy message

A latched alarm is one whose visual alarm indicator remains illuminated even if the alarm condition has autoreset.

Latched alarm indicators are located on the sides of the omni-directional LED. A latched alarm can be manually reset by pressing the alarm reset key. If no alarms are active, the highest priority latched alarm appears on the omni-directional LED on the GUI. A lockable alarm is one that does not terminate an active audio paused function (it does not sound an audible alert during an active audio paused function), while a non-lockable alarm cancels the audio paused period and sounds an audible alert. All patient data alarms and the CIRCUIT

DISCONNECT alarm are lockable alarms.

Note: When a new lockable alarm occurs, the alarm will not start to sound audibly if the previous lockable alarm was muted.

The following rules define how alarm messages are displayed:

• Primary alarms precede any dependent alarms.

• The system adds dependent alarms to the analysis messages of each active primary alarm with which they are associated. If a dependent alarm resets, the system removes it from the analysis message of the primary alarm.

• The priority level of a primary alarm is equal to or greater than the priority level of any of its active dependent alarms.

• An alarm cannot be a dependent alarm of any alarm that occurs subsequently.

• If a primary alarm resets, any active dependent alarms become primary unless they are also dependent alarms of another active primary alarm. This is due to different reset criteria for primary and dependent alarms.

• The system applies the new alarm limit to alarm calculations from the moment a change to an alarm limit is accepted.

• The priority level of a dependent alarm is based solely on its detection conditions (not the priority of any associated alarms.

• When an alarm causes the ventilator to enter OSC or safety valve open (SVO), the patient data display

(including waveforms) is blanked. The elapsed time without ventilatory support (that is, since OSC or SVO

142

6 began) appears on the GUI screen. If the alarm causing OSC or SVO is autoreset, the ventilator resets all patient data alarm detection algorithms.

Table 32.

Alarm Descriptions and Symbols

Alarm description

High compensation pressure

High delivered oxygen percentage

High exhaled minute volume

High exhaled minute volume setting

High exhaled tidal volume

High exhaled tidal volume setting

High inspired tidal volume limit

High internal ventilator pressure

High respiratory rate

High respiratory rate setting

High spontaneous inspiratory time

High spontaneous inspiratory time limit

High circuit pressure

High circuit pressure limit

Low circuit pressure

Low circuit pressure setting

Low exhaled mandatory tidal volume

Low exhaled mandatory tidal volume setting

Low exhaled minute volume

Low exhaled minute volume setting

Low exhaled spontaneous tidal volume

Low exhaled spontaneous tidal volume setting

Low delivered oxygen percentage

Symbol

↑ T

SPONT

⤒ T

SPONT

↑ P

PEAK

⤒ P

PEAK

↓ P

PEAK

⤓ P

PEAK

↓ V

TE MAND

⤓ V

TE MAND

↓ ⩒

E TOT

⤓⩒

E TOT

↓ V

TE SPONT

⤓ V

TE SPONT

↓ O

↑ P

COMP

↑ O

↑ ⩒

E TOT

⤒⩒

E TOT

↑ V

⤒ V

↑ P

VENT

↑ f

TOT

⤒ f

TOT

6.5.2 Alarm Reset Key

The alarm reset function can be used for any non-technical alarm

. See Section 6.5.8, Alarm Handling, page 148

for an explanation of technical vs. non-technical alarms . Alarm reset reinitializes the algorithm the ventilator uses to initially detect the alarm except for A/C POWER LOSS, COMPRESSOR

INOPERATIVE, LOW BATTERY, NO AIR SUPPLY, NO O

SUPPLY, PROCEDURE ERROR alarms and active battery alarms. If the cause of the alarm still exists after the alarm reset key is pressed, the alarm becomes active again. The ventilator logs all actuations of the alarm reset key.

6.5.3 Audio Paused Key

Warning: Do not pause, disable, or decrease the volume of the ventilator’s audible alarm if patient safety could be compromised.

The audio paused feature temporarily mutes the audible portion of an alarm for 2 minutes. After the

2-minute period, if the alarm condition still exists, the alarm sounds again. Pressing the audio paused key again restarts the 2-minute interval during which an alarm is muted. An LED within the key illuminates and a count-down timer appears on the GUI next to an audio paused indicator symbol,

143

indicating an active audio paused function. The audio paused feature does not allow the audible alarm to be turned off; the audible portion of the alarm is temporarily muted for 2 minutes. The GUI’s omni-directional LED flashes during an active alarm state and during an audio paused period and its appearance changes with the priority if the alarm escalates. Pressing the alarm reset key cancels an audio paused interval. If the condition that caused the alarm still exists, the alarm activates again.

6.5.4 Alarm Volume Key

An alarm volume key is available for setting the desired alarm volume. The alarm volume is auto‐ matically set to the factory default setting of 10 (maximum) or to the institutional default setting based on circuit type if it has been so configured. When setting the alarm volume, a sample tone is generated, allowing the practitioner to decide the appropriate alarm volume for the surrounding ambient con‐ ditions. If a high priority alarm occurs, the alarm volume increases one increment from its current volume level if it is not acknowledged within 30 seconds. If a high priority alarm is not acknowledged within 60 seconds, the audible alarm volume escalates to its maximum volume.

See

Section 3.8.2.6, Alarm Volume, page 82

for instructions on adjusting the alarm volume.

Warning: The audio alarm volume level is adjustable. The operator should set the volume at a level that allows the operator to distinguish the audio alarm above background noise levels. See

Section 3.8.2.6, Alarm Volume, page 82

6.5.5 Alarm Testing

Testing the alarms requires oxygen and air sources and stable AC power. To verify the alarm system, the operator needs to be standing in front of the ventilator. Test the alarms at least every 12 months, using the procedures described.

Required Equipment

• Test lung (P/N 4-000612-00)

• Adult patient circuit

If the alarm does not annunciate as indicated, verify the ventilator settings and repeat the test. The alarm tests check the operation of the following alarms:

• CIRCUIT DISCONNECT

• LOW EXHALED MANDATORY TIDAL VOLUME ( ↓ V

TE MAND

)

• LOW EXHALED TOTAL MINUTE VOLUME ( ↓ ⩒

E TOT

)

• HIGH CIRCUIT PRESSURE ( ↑ P

PEAK

)

• SEVERE OCCLUSION

• AC POWER LOSS

• APNEA

• LOW EXHALED SPONTANEOUS TIDAL VOLUME ( ↓ V

TE SPONT

)

• NO O

SUPPLY

• LOW DELIVERED O

% ( ↓ O

• HIGH DELIVERED O

% ( ↑ O

Ventilator setup for alarms tests

1. Disconnect the patient circuit from the ventilator and turn the ventilator off for at least 5 minutes.

2. Turn the ventilator on. The ventilator runs POST.

3. On the GUI, select New Patient.

4. Set up new patient using the following settings:

144

PBW : 70 kg

Ventilation type : invasive

Mode : A/C

Mandatory type : VC

Trigger type : ⩒ -Trig

5. Set the following new patient settings: f : 6.0 1/min

: 500 mL

⩒

MAX

: 30 L/min

: 0 s

Flow pattern : square

⩒

SENS

: 3 L/min

%: 21%

PEEP : 5 cmH

6. Set the following apnea settings:

: 10 s f : 6.0 1/min

%: 21%

: 500 mL

7. Set the following alarm settings:

⤒ P

PEAK

: 70 cmH

O f

TOT

: OFF

⤓⩒

⤒⩒

⤓ V

⤒ V

⤓ V

⤒ V

E TOT

: 1 L/min

: 3.5 L/min

TE MAND

: 300 mL

TE MAND

: OFF

TE SPONT

: OFF

8. Set the graphics display to a volume-time plot (for use in the APNEA alarm test).

9. Connect an adult patient circuit to the ventilator and attach a test lung to the patient wye.

Note: To ensure proper test results, do not touch the test lung or patient circuit during the CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm test.

CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm test

1. Allow the ventilator to deliver at least four breaths. During the inspiratory phase of a breath, disconnect the inspiratory filter from the to patient port. The ventilator annunciates a CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm after the inspiratory filter is disconnected.

2. Connect the inspiratory filter to the to patient port to autoreset the alarm.

LOW EXHALED MANDATORY TIDAL VOLUME ( ↓ V

TE MAND

) alarm test

Set V

to 225 mL. The ventilator annunciates a LOW EXHALED MANDATORY TIDAL VOLUME ( ↓ V the third consecutive breath after Accept is touched.

TE MAND

) alarm on

LOW EXHALED TOTAL MINUTE VOLUME ( ↓ ⩒

E TOT

) alarm test

145

Set ⤓⩒

TOT

E TOT

alarm limit to 3.45 L/min. The ventilator annunciates a LOW EXHALED TOTAL MINUTE VOLUME ( ⤓⩒

) alarm on the next breath after Accept is touched.

HIGH CIRCUIT PRESSURE ( ↑ P

PEAK

) alarm test

1. Make the following patient and alarm settings changes:

: 500 mL

⩒

MAX

: 30 L/min

⤒ P

PEAK

: 20 cmH

2. After one breath, the ventilator annunciates a HIGH CIRCUIT PRESSURE ( ↑ P

PEAK sound, check the patient circuit for leaks.

) alarm. If the alarm does not

SEVERE OCCLUSION alarm test

1. Make the following alarm settings changes:

⤒ P

PEAK

: 50 cmH

2. Press the alarm reset key to reset all alarms.

3. Adjust D

SENS

to the ⩒

MAX

setting.

4. Disconnect the ventilator breathing circuit from the from patient port and block the gas flow.

5. While maintaining the occlusion, ensure the safety valve open indicator appears on the status display, the

GUI shows the elapsed time without normal ventilation support, and the test lung inflates and deflates rapidly with small pulses as the ventilator delivers trial pressure-based breaths.

6. Press the alarm reset key to reset all the alarms.

AC POWER LOSS alarm test

1. Allow the ventilator to deliver at least four breaths, then disconnect the power cord from AC facility power.

If any battery is charged, the GUI annunciates an AC POWER LOSS alarm. If less than 10 minutes of battery backup are available, the GUI annunciates a LOW BATTERY alarm. If no battery power is available, the BDU annunciates a LOSS OF POWER alarm.

2. Connect the power cord to AC facility power. The AC POWER LOSS or LOW BATTERY alarm autoresets.

APNEA alarm test

1. Make the following alarm settings changes:

⤒ P

PEAK

: 70 cmH

Mode : SPONT

Spontaneous type : PS

2. The GUI annunciates an APNEA alarm within 10 s after touching Accept .

3. Squeeze the test lung twice to simulate two subsequent patient-initiated breaths. The APNEA alarm autoresets.

4. Let the ventilator return to apnea ventilation.

Note: To avoid triggering a breath during the apnea interval, do not touch the test lung or patient circuit.

Note: For the apnea alarm test, the exhaled tidal volume (V

) displayed in the patient data area must be greater than half the delivered volume shown on the volume-time plot in the graphics display for apnea to autoreset. See

Section 10.12, Apnea Ventilation, page 222

for a technical description of apnea ventilation.

LOW EXHALED SPONTANEOUS TIDAL VOLUME alarm test

1. Make the following patient and alarm settings changes:

Trigger type : P-Trig

SENS

: 4 cmH

146

⤓ V

TE SPONT

: 2500 mL

2. Press the alarm reset key to reset the apnea alarm.

3. Slowly squeeze the test lung to simulate spontaneous breaths. The ventilator annunciates a LOW EXHALED

SPONTANEOUS TIDAL VOLUME ( ↓ V inspiration.

TE SPONT

) alarm at the start of the fourth consecutive spontaneous

4. Make the following patient settings changes:

Mode : A/C

⤓ V

TE SPONT

: OFF

5. Press the alarm reset key to reset the ↓ V

TE SPONT

alarm.

NO O

SUPPLY alarm test

1. Disconnect the oxygen inlet supply. The ventilator annunciates a NO O

SUPPLY alarm within one breath.

2. Connect the oxygen inlet supply. The NO O

2 reconnected.

SUPPLY alarm autoresets within two breaths after oxygen is

LOW DELIVERED O

% and HIGH DELIVERED O

% alarms tests

1. Make the following patient and alarm settings changes:

SENS

: 2 cmH

%: 100%

2. Make the following apnea settings changes:

: 60 s

3. Attach the ventilator’s oxygen gas hose to a known air supply (for example, a medical grade air cylinder) or a wall air outlet.

4. Attach the ventilator’s air gas hose to a known medical oxygen supply.

5. Observe the GUI screen. The delivered O a medium priority ↓ O

% display should decrease, and the ventilator should annunciate

% alarm within 60 seconds and a high priority ↓ O

% alarm within 2 minutes.

6. Set the O

% to 21%.

7. Observe the GUI screen. The delivered O a medium priority ↑ O

% display should increase, and the ventilator should annunciate

% alarm within 60 seconds and a high priority ↑ O

% alarm within 2 minutes.

8. Remove the air gas hose from the oxygen supply and reconnect the hose to a known medical air supply.

9. Remove the oxygen gas hose from the air supply and reconnect the hose to a known oxygen supply.

10. Press the alarm reset key to clear all alarms.

Warning: Before returning the ventilator to service, review all settings and set appropriately for the patient to be ventilated.

6.5.6 Viewing Alarms

When an alarm occurs, the omni-directional LED at the top of the GUI flashes in a color corresponding to the alarm

priority, an audible series of tones sounds, and an alarm banner displays on the GUI. See Figure 39, page 98

. When the alarm banner appears, it displays its base message. Touching the individual alarm causes an expanded explanation to appear, containing analysis and remedy messages, and may contain a link to the alarm log or the alarms settings screen. Touch the link to display requested information. The omni-directional LED remains steadily lit and may appear multicolored, meaning that multiple alarms with varying priority levels have occurred. During an event that causes multiple alarms, the ventilator simultaneously displays the two highest priority active alarms.

147

6.5.7 Alarm Delay

6.5.7.1 Determination of an Alarm Condition

The delay time from the moment the alarm condition first occurs until the alarm is annunciated is imperceptible.

6.5.7.2 Delay to/from a Distributed Alarm System

For alarm conditions relayed via the serial port, the overall delay is dependent upon the polling rate of the external device. The delay from the time the serial port is polled by the external device, until the alarm message leaves the serial port does not exceed 3 seconds. An example of an external device is a patient monitor.

6.5.8 Alarm Handling

Current alarm settings are saved in the ventilator’s non-volatile memory (NVRAM) . If the alarm settings are changed by another clinician, those settings become applicable. For example, there are no operator-selectable default alarm settings.

The ventilator system’s alarm handling strategy is intended to

• Detect and call attention to legitimate causes for caregiver concern as quickly as possible, while minimizing nuisance alarms.

• Identify the potential cause and suggest corrective action for certain types of alarms. However, the clinician must make the final decision regarding any clinical action.

• Make it easy to discern an alarm’s priority level.

• Allow quick and easy alarm setup.

Ventilator alarms are categorized as high priority, medium priority, or low priority, and are classified as technical or non-technical.

The ventilator is equipped with two alarms—the primary alarm and secondary alarm. The primary alarm annunciates high, medium, and low priority alarms when they occur. The secondary alarm (also named immediate priority in

Table 33 ) is a continuous tone alarm and annunciates during vent inop conditions or

complete loss of power. This alarm is powered by a capacitor and lasts for at least 120 seconds.

Table 33

lists alarm priority levels and their visual, audible, and autoreset characteristics. An alarm autoresets when the condition causing the alarm no longer exists.

Table 33.

Alarm Priority

Priority level Visual indicator

Immediate

High: Immediate atten‐ tion required to ensure patient safety.

Specific to alarm condi‐ tion or component failure.

Flashing red omni-direc‐ tional LED located on the top of the GUI, red alarm banner on GUI screen, red bar next to alarm setting icon on Alarms screen.

Audible indicator

Continuous tone alarm sounding for at least 120 s.

High-priority audible alarm (a sequence of five tones that repeats twice, pauses, then repeats again).

Autoreset characteris‐ tics

N/A

Visual alarm does not auto reset. Visual alarm indica‐ tors remain steadily illumi‐ nated following an autor‐ eset. The alarm reset key must be pressed to extin‐ guish visual indicator.

Medium: Prompt atten‐ tion necessary.

Flashing yellow omnidirectional LED located on the top of the GUI, yellow alarm banner on GUI screen, and yellow bar

Medium-priority audible alarm (a repeating sequence of three tones).

LED indicator turns off and autoreset is entered into the alarm log.

148

Table 33.

Alarm Priority (continued)

Priority level Visual indicator next to alarm setting icon on Alarms screen.

Audible indicator Autoreset characteris‐ tics

Low: A change in the patient-ventilator system has occurred.

Steadily illuminated yel‐ low omni-directional LED located on the top of the

GUI, yellow alarm banner on GUI screen, and yellow bar next to alarm setting icon on Alarms screen.

Low-priority audible alarm

(two tones, non-repeat‐ ing).

LED indicator turns off and autoreset is entered into the alarm log.

Normal: Normal ventilator operation

Immediate

Steadily illuminated green omni-directional LED located on the top of the

GUI, no alarm banner, and white values next to alarm setting icon on Alarms screen.

Status display shows the

GUI has failed.

None.

The secondary alarm annunciates a repeating sequence of single tones, as the primary alarm (part of the GUI) has failed.

None

A technical alarm is one that is caused by a violation of any of the ventilator’s self monitoring conditions, such as failure of POST or a fault detected by the ventilator’s background diagnostic system. Technical alarms cannot

be reset by pressing the alarm reset key. (See Section 10.16.4, Background Diagnostic System, page 242 ). Technical

alarms fall into eight categories, shown in Table 34

Table 34.

Technical Alarm Categories

Category

Name

Vent-Inop

Exh BUV

Insp BUV

Mix BUV

SVO

Caution

Warning

Notification

High

Medium

N/A

Priority System Response

Ventilator goes to safe state. See

Sec‐ tion 4.11, Ventilator Protection Strategies, page 120

Backup ventilation

Ventilator goes to safe state. See

Sec‐ tion 4.11, Ventilator Protection Strategies, page 120

Ventilation continues as set

See

Table 35 for a list of ventilator technical alarms, their meaning, and what to do if they occur.

149

See

Table 62 for the settings, ranges, and resolutions of all of the ventilator alarms.

Table 35.

Technical Alarms

Alarm message

SENSOR

DEVICE ALERT

Meaning

sensor is out of calibration or has failed.

Various. Technical alarm category is described. See

Table 34, page 149

More information for the particular technical alarm can be found in the

System diagnostic log, a link to which is provided on the expanded alarm banner.

What to do

Re-calibrate or replace O

sensor.

Follow remedy message displayed on GUI.

A non-technical alarm is an alarm caused due to a fault in the patient-ventilator interaction or a fault in the electrical or gas supplies that the practitioner may be able to alleviate.

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary

Base message

AC POWER LOSS

Priority

Low

AC POWER LOSS

APNEA (patient data alarm)

Low

Medium

High

Analysis message

Operating on vent main battery.

Operating on vent main and compres‐ sor battery.

Apnea ventilation.

Breath interval > apnea interval.

Extended apnea duration or multiple apnea events.

Remedy message

N/A

Check patient & set‐ tings.

Comments

Ventilator’s power switch is on. Ventila‐ tor automatically switches to battery power. AC power not available. Battery operating indicator on status display turns on. Resets when

AC power is restored.

The set apnea interval has elapsed without the ventilator, patient, or operator triggering a breath. Resets after patient initiates a third consecutive breath. Possible dependent alarm:

↓ ⩒

E TOT

150

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

CIRCUIT DISCON‐

NECT

COMPLIANCE LIMI‐

TED V

(alarm is not adjustable) (patient data alarm)

COMPRESSOR INOP‐

ERATIVE

↑ P

Base message

PEAK alarm)

(patient data

Priority

High

Low

Medium

High

Analysis message

No ventilation

Compliance com‐ pensation limit reached

Remedy message

Check patient

Reconnect circuit.

Check patient.

Reconnect circuit.

Check patient and circuit type. Inspired volume may be < set.

Comments

Ventilator has recov‐ ered from uninten‐ ded power loss last‐ ing more than 5 minutes, detects cir‐ cuit disconnect. The

GUI screen displays elapsed time without ventilator support.

Resets when patient is reconnected.

Ventilator detects cir‐ cuit disconnect and switches to Stand-By state; the GUI screen displays elapsed time without ventilator support. Resets when patient is reconnec‐ ted.

Compliance volume required to compen‐ sate delivery of a VC,

VC+ or VS breath exceeds the maxi‐ mum allowed for three consecutive breaths.

No compressor air.

Replace compressor. No compressor ready indicator on status display.

Last breath ≥ set limit.

Last 3 breaths ≥ set limit.

Last 4 or more breaths ≥ set limit.

Check patient, cir‐ cuit & ET tube.

Measured airway pressure ≥ set limit.

Ventilator truncates current breath unless already in exhalation.

Possible dependent alarms: ↓ V

TE MAND

↓ ⩒

E TOT

, ↑ f

TOT

Corrective action:

Check patient. Check tube type/ID setting.

Consider reducing%

Supp setting or increasing ⤒ P

PEAK

151

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

Base message

↑ P

COMP alarm)

↓ P

PEAK alarm)

(patient data

Priority

Low

Medium

High

Low

Medium

High

Analysis message

Last spont breath≥ set P limit–5 cmH

Last 2 breaths, pres‐ sure ≤ set limit.

Last 4 breaths, pres‐ sure ≤ set limit

≤ set limit

PEAK

Last 3 spont breaths

≥ set P

PEAK limit–5 cmH

Last 4 or more spont breaths ≥ set P limit–5 cmH

PEAK

Last 10 or more breaths, pressure

Remedy message

In TC or PAV+™:

Check for leaks, tube type/ID setting.

Check for leaks.

Comments

Pressure of spontane‐ ous breaths ≥ set limit. Possible dependent alarms:

↓ V

TE SPONT

, ↓ ⩒

E TOT

↑ f

TOT

Corrective action:

Check for leaks. Check for the correct tube type. Check that the tube inside diameter corresponds to the patient PBW. Check the ⤒ P

PEAK

setting.

Peak inspiratory pres‐ sure ≤ alarm setting.

(Available only when mandatory type is

VC+* or when venti‐ lation type is NIV.

Target pressure = the low limit:

PEEP+3 cmH

O. Ven‐ tilator cannot deliver target volume. Possi‐ ble dependent alarms: ↑ f

TOT

Corrective action:

Check patient and settings; check for leaks.

* Because the VC+ pressure control algorithm does not allow the target inspiratory pressure to fall below

PEEP+3 cmH

O, attempting to set the ⤓ P

PEAK

alarm limit at or below this level will turn the alarm off.

↑ O

% (patient data alarm)

↓ O

% (patient data alarm)

Medium

High

Measured O

% > set for ≥30 s but <2 min

Measured O for ≥2 min.

Measured O

% > set

% < set

Check patient, gas sources, O

& ventilator.

analyzer

Check patient, gas sources, O

& ventilator.

analyzer

The O

% measured during any phase of a breath cycle is 7%

(12% during the first hour of operation) or more above the O

% setting for at least 30 seconds. (These per‐ centages increase by

5% for 4 minutes fol‐ lowing a decrease in the O

% setting).

The O

% measured during any phase of a breath cycle is 7%

152

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

↑ V

Base message

(patient data alarm)

↑ ⩒

E TOT alarm)

↑ f

TOT

(patient data alarm)

(patient data

Priority

Low

Medium

High

Low

Medium

High

Low

Medium

High f f f

Analysis message

Last 2 breaths ≥ set limit.

Last 4 breaths ≥ set limit.

Last 10 or more breaths ≥ set limit.

⩒

≤30 s

⩒

>30 s

⩒

E TOT

>120 s

TOT

≥ set limit for

≤30 s.

≥ set limit for

>30 s.

≥ set limit for

>120 s.

Remedy message

Check settings, changes in patient’s

R & C.

Check patient & set‐ tings.

Comments

(12% during the first hour of operation) or more below the O

% setting for at least 30 seconds, or below

18%. (These percen‐ tages increase by 5% for 4 minutes follow‐ ing an increase in the

% setting).

Exhaled tidal volume

≥ set limit. Alarm updated whenever exhaled tidal volume is recalculated. Possi‐ ble dependent alarm:

↑ ⩒

E TOT

Expiratory minute volume ≥ set limit.

Alarm updated whenever an exhaled minute volume is recalculated. Possible dependent alarm:

↑ V

Total respiratory rate≥ set limit. Alarm upda‐ ted at the beginning of each inspiration.

Reset when meas‐ ured respiratory rate falls below the alarm limit. Possible dependent alarms:

↓ V

↓ ⩒

TE MAND

E TOT

, ↓ V

TE SPONT

153

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

Base message

↑ P

VENT alarm)

(patient data

INOPERATIVE BAT‐

TERY

INOPERATIVE BAT‐

TERY

INOPERATIVE BAT‐

TERY

Priority

Low

Medium

High

Low

Analysis message

1 breath ≥ limit.

2 breaths ≥ limit.

3 or more breaths

≥ limit.

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional ventilator battery system.

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional compressor battery system.

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional ventilator battery system.

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional compressor battery system.

Remedy message

Check patient, cir‐ cuit & ET tube.

Service/replace ven‐ tilator battery.

Service/replace compressor battery.

Service/replace ven‐ tilator battery. Serv‐ ice/replace com‐ pressor battery.

Comments

Inspiratory pressure

>110 cmH

O and mandatory type is VC or spontaneous type is TC or PAV+™. Venti‐ lator truncates cur‐ rent breath unless already in exhalation.

Possible dependent alarms:

↓ V

TE MAND

TOT

, ↑ f

TOT

, ↓ ⩒

Corrective action:

• Check for agita‐ tion. Agitated breathing, com‐ bined with high

% Supp setting in

PAV+™ can cause over assistance.

Consider reduc‐ ing% Supp set‐ ting.

• Provide alternate ventilation.

Remove ventila‐ tor from use and contact Service.

Battery installed but not functioning or charging for ≥ 6 hours. Resets when battery is functional.

154

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

Base message

INOPERATIVE BAT‐

TERY

INOPERATIVE BAT‐

TERY

INOPERATIVE BAT‐

TERY

INSPIRATION TOO

LONG (patient data alarm)

Priority

Medium

Low

Medium

High

Analysis message

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional ventilator battery system.

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional compressor battery system.

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional ventilator battery system.

Inadequate charge or nonfunctional compressor battery system.

Last 2 spont breaths

= PBW based T

limit.

Last 4 spont breaths

= PBW based T

limit.

Last 10 or more spont breaths = PBW based T

limit.

Remedy message

Service/replace ven‐ tilator battery.

Service/replace compressor battery.

Service/replace ven‐ tilator battery. Serv‐ ice/replace com‐ pressor battery.

Check patient.

Check for leaks.

PAV STARTUP TOO

LONG (patient data alarm) (occurs only if

PAV+™ is in use)

Low

Medium

High

Defective battery detected. Corrective action- Replace bat‐ tery as soon as possi‐ ble.

Comments

PAV startup not complete for ≥45 s.

PAV startup not complete for ≥90 s.

PAV startup not complete for ≥120 s.

Check for leaks, shal‐ low breathing, & set‐ tings for ↑ V

↑ P

PEAK

and

Inspiratory time for spontaneous breath

≥ PBW-based limit.

Ventilator transitions to exhalation. Resets when T

falls below

PBW-based limit.

Active only when ventilation type is invasive.

Unable to assess patient’s resistance and compliance dur‐ ing PAV startup. Possi‐ ble dependent alarms

↓ V

TE SPONT

, ↓ ⩒

TOT

, ↑ f

TOT

. Corrective action: Check patient.

(Patient’s inspiratory times may be too short to evaluate resistance and com‐ pliance). Check that selected humidifica‐ tion type and empty humidifier volume are correct.

155

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

Base message

PAV R & C NOT

ASSESSED (patient data alarm) (occurs only if PAV+™ is in use)

Priority

Low

Medium

Analysis message

R and/or C over 15 minutes old.

R and/or C over 30 minutes old.

Remedy message

Check for leaks, shal‐ low breathing, & set‐ tings for tube ID, ↑ V

TI and ↑ P

PEAK

LOSS OF POWER

LOW BATTERY

Immediate

Medium

N/A

Vent main battery operational time

<10 minutes.

Compressor battery operational time

<10 minutes.

Vent main battery operational time

<10 minutes and compressor battery operational time

<10 minutes.

N/A

Replace or allow recharge vent main battery.

Replace or allow recharge compres‐ sor battery.

Replace or allow recharge vent main battery and com‐ pressor battery.

Comments

Unable to assess resistance or compli‐ ance during PAV+™ steady-state. Startup was successful, but later assessments were unsuccessful.

Corrective action:

Check patient.

(Patient’s inspiratory times may be too short to evaluate resistance and com‐ pliance). Check that selected humidifica‐ tion type and empty humidifier volume are correct.

The ventilator power switch is on and there is insufficient power from AC and the bat‐ tery. There may not be a visual indicator for this alarm, but an independent audio alarm sounds for at least 120 seconds.

Alarm annunciation can be reset by turn‐ ing power switch to off position.

Resets when battery has ≥10 minutes of operational time remaining or when

AC power is restored.

Resets when com‐ pressor battery has

≥ 10 minutes of operational time remaining or when

AC power is restored

Resets when main battery or compres‐ sor battery has ≥10 minutes of opera‐ tional time remaining

156

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

LOW BATTERY

↓ data alarm)

↓

Base message

TE MAND

TE SPONT

(patient

(patient data alarm)

Priority

High

Low

Medium

High

Low

Medium

High

Analysis message

Vent main battery operational time <5 minutes.

Compressor battery operational time <5 minutes.

Vent main battery operational time <5 minutes and com‐ pressor battery operational time < 5 minutes.

Last 2 mand breaths

≤ set limit.

Last 4 mand breaths

≤ set limit.

Last 10 or more mand breaths ≤ set limit.

Remedy message

Replace or allow recharge vent main battery.

Replace or allow recharge compres‐ sor battery.

Replace or allow recharge vent main battery and com‐ pressor battery.

Check for leaks, changes in patient’s

R & C.

Last 4 spont breaths

≤ set limit

Last 7 spont breaths

≤ set limit

Last 10 or more spont breaths ≤ set limit

Check patient & set‐ tings.

Comments or when AC power is restored.

Resets when battery has ≥5 minutes of operational time remaining or when

AC power is restored.

Resets when com‐ pressor battery has

≥ 5 minutes of opera‐ tional time remaining or when AC power is restored

Resets when main battery or compres‐ sor battery has ≥5 minutes of opera‐ tional time remaining or when AC power is restored

Exhaled mandatory tidal volume≤ set limit. Alarm updated whenever exhaled mandatory tidal vol‐ ume is recalculated.

Possible dependent alarms: ↓ ⩒

E TOT

, ↑ f

TOT

Exhaled spontaneous tidal volume ≤ set limit. Alarm updated whenever exhaled spontaneous tidal volume is recalcula‐ ted. Possible depend‐ ent alarms: ↓ ⩒

↑ f

TOT

E TOT

157

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

↑ alarm)

↓

⩒

Base message

(patient data

E TOT alarm) alarm)

(patient data

VOLUME NOT DELIV‐

ERED (not adjusta‐ ble) (patient data

Priority

Low

Medium

High

Low

Medium

High

Low

Medium

⩒

>30 s.

⩒

Analysis message

Last spont breath

≥ set limit.

Last 3 spont breaths

≥ set limit.

Last 4 or more spont breaths ≥ set limit.

⩒

E TOT

≤30 s.

E TOT

≤ set limit for

>120 s.

Last 2 spont (or mand) breaths pres‐ sure > max allowa‐ ble level.

Last 10 or more spont (or mand) breaths, pressure > max allowable level.

Remedy message

In TC, VS, or PAV+™:

Check patient and settings.

Check patient & set‐ tings.

Check patient & set‐ ting for ↑ P

PEAK

Comments

Delivered inspiratory volume ≥ inspiratory limit. Ventilator transi‐ tions to exhalation.

Possible dependent alarms: ↓ V

TE SPONT

↓ ⩒

E TOT

, ↑ f

TOT

Corrective action:

Check for leaks. Check for the correct tube type. Check the V

SUPP

or % Supp set‐ ting. In PAV+™, check for patient agitation, which can cause mis‐ calculation of R and C

PAV

. Consider reducing % Supp set‐ ting. Check ⤒ V

Total minute volume

≤ set limit. Alarm updated whenever exhaled minute vol‐ ume is recalculated.

Possible dependent alarms: ↓ V

TE MAND

↓ V

TE SPONT

, ↑ f

TOT

Insp target pressure >

PEAK

–

PEEP–3 cmH

O), when spontaneous type is VS or manda‐ tory type is VC+. Ven‐ tilator cannot deliver target volume. Possi‐ ble dependent alarms: For VC+ breaths: ↓ V

TE MAND

. For VS ↓ ⩒

E TOT

, ↑ f

TOT breaths:

↓ ⩒

E TOT

↓

, ↑ f

TE SPONT

TOT

Corrective action:

Check patient and settings.

158

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

Base message

NO AIR SUPPLY

NO O

SUPPLY

PROCEDURE ERROR

SEVERE OCCLUSION

PROX INOPERATIVE

(if Proximal Flow

Sensor is in use)

INADVERTENT

POWER OFF

High

Priority

Low

High

Low

High

Low

Analysis message

Compressor inoper‐ ative. Ventilation continues as set.

Only O

Compressor inoper‐ ative. Ventilation continues as set, except O2% =100.

Ventilation contin‐ ues as set except O

=100%.

Ventilation contin‐ ues as set. Only air available.

Ventilation contin‐ ues as set, except

available.

% =21.

Patient connected before setup complete.

Data from Proximal

Flow Sensor are not being used.

Ventilator switched

OFF with patient

Remedy message

Check air source.

Check patient & air source.

Check O

source.

Check patient & O

2 source.

Provide alternate ventilation.

Complete setup pro‐ cess.

Little/no ventilation. Check patient. Pro‐ vide alternate venti‐ lation. Clear occlu‐ sions; drain circuit.

Check proximal flow sensor connections and tubes for occlu‐ sions or leaks.

Return power switch to on position and disconnect patient

Comments

Ventilator delivers

100% O

. Air supply pressure ≤17 psig.

Resets if air supply pressure ≥35 psig is connected.

Operator-set O

% equals 21%. Resets if

supply connected.

Ventilator delivers

21% O

instead of set

%. Resets if oxygen supply connected.

Ventilator begins safety ventilation.

Resets when ventila‐ tor startup procedure is complete.

Ventilator enters occlusion status cycling (OSC). Patient data displays are blanked and GUI screen displays elapsed time without ventilator support.

Data obtained from the proximal flow sensor are invalid, non-existent, or unreasonable based on current ventilator settings or purge lines are occluded. Alarm resets when condi‐ tion is corrected. Data for real time wave‐ forms and monitored volumes are obtained from internal sensors.

User must acknowl‐ edge turning the power OFF by touch‐

159

Table 36.

Non-technical Alarm Summary (continued)

Base message Priority Analysis message connected to breathing circuit.

Remedy message before turning power off.

Comments ing Power Off on the

GUI.

Table 37.

Non-Technical Alarms and Suggested Responses

Alarm message

AC POWER LOSS

Meaning

The ventilator or compressor is run‐ ning on battery power.

Response

Monitor the battery charge level to ensure there is enough power remaining to operate the ventilator or compressor.

Check patient and settings.

APNEA (patient data alarm)

CIRCUIT DISCONNECT

Compliance limited V alarm)

(patient data

COMPRESSOR INOPERATIVE

↑ P

PEAK

(patient data alarm)

The time between patient breaths exceeds the set apnea interval.

The patient circuit has become dis‐ connected or there is a large leak in the patient circuit.

Compliance volume required to compensate delivery of a VC, VC+, or VS breath exceeds the maximum allowed for three consecutive breaths.

Air pressure not detected in the compressor’s accumulator. Status display indicates the compressor is inoperative.

The measured airway pressure is

≥ set limit. Reduced tidal volume likely.

Re-connect the patient circuit, or eliminate the leak.

Check patient and circuit type.

Inspired volume may be less than set.

Service or replace compressor.

• Check the patient.

• Check the patient circuit.

• Check the endotracheal tube.

↓ P

PEAK

(patient data alarm) The peak inspiratory pressure in the patient circuit ≤ alarm setting. This alarm is only available when NIV is the selected ventilation type or when VC+ is the selected manda‐ tory type during invasive ventila‐ tion.*

Check for leaks in the patient circuit and VBS.

* Because the VC+ pressure control algorithm does not allow the target inspiratory pressure to fall below

PEEP+3 cmH

O, attempting to set the ⤓ P

PEAK

alarm setting at or below this level will turn the alarm off.

↑ O

% (patient data alarm) The O

% measured during any phase of a breath cycle is 7% (12% during the first hour of operation) or more above the O

% parameter for at least 30 seconds. The percentage window increases by 5% for 4 minutes after increasing the set

% value.

Check the patient, the air and oxy‐ gen supplies, the oxygen analyzer, and the ventilator.

160

Table 37.

Non-Technical Alarms and Suggested Responses (continued)

Alarm message

↓ O

% (patient data alarm)

Meaning

The O

% measured during any phase of a breath cycle is 7% (12% during the first hour of operation) or more below the O

% parameter for at least 30 seconds. The percentage window increases by 5% for 4 minutes after increasing the set

% value.

↑

↑ f

↑

⩒

(patient data alarm)

E TOT

TOT

(patient data alarm)

VENT

(patient data alarm)

INOPERATIVE BATTERY

INSPIRATION TOO LONG (patient data alarm)

LOSS OF POWER

Exhaled tidal volume ≥ alarm set‐ ting for the last two breaths.

Minute volume ≥ alarm setting.

The breath rate from all breaths is ≥ alarm setting.

The inspiratory pressure transducer has measured a pressure

>110 cmH

O in VC, TC, or PAV+™.

The ventilator transitions to exhala‐ tion. A reduced tidal volume is likely.

Alarm indicates unable to charge battery or the battery system is non‐ functional.

The PBW-based inspiratory time for the last two spontaneous breaths exceeds the ventilator-set limit.

Active only when ventilation type is invasive.

The ventilator power switch is on, but there is insufficient power from the mains AC and the battery. There may not be a visual indicator for this alarm, but an independent audio alarm (immediate priority) sounds for at least 120 seconds.

Response

• Check the patient, the air and oxygen supplies, the oxygen analyzer and the ventilator.

• Calibrate the oxygen sensor.

See

Section 4.10.2, Oxygen Sen‐ sor Calibration, page 119

for details regarding calibrating the oxygen sensor.

• Use an external O

2 disable the O

monitor and

sensor.

• Check patient settings.

• Check for changes in patient’s resistance and compliance.

Check patient settings.

Check the patient and the ventilator settings.

• Check the patient, the patient circuit (including filters), and the endotracheal tub. Ensure that the ET tube ID is the correct size.

• Check the ventilator flow and volume settings.

• Rerun SST.

• Obtain and alternate ventila‐ tion source.

• Remove the ventilator from clinical use and obtain service.

Replace inoperative battery.

• Check the patient.

• Check the patient circuit for leaks.

• Check rise time% and E

SENS tings.

set‐

• Check the integrity of the AC power and battery connec‐ tions.

• Obtain alternate ventilation, if necessary.

• Use an extended battery. If the loss if power event has been resolved, turn the power switch

161

Table 37.

Non-Technical Alarms and Suggested Responses (continued)

Alarm message

LOW BATTERY

↓

TE MAND

TE SPONT

(patient data alarm)

Meaning

Medium priority alarm indicating

<10 minutes of battery power remaining to operate the ventilator or compressor.

High priority alarm indicating <5 minutes of battery power remain to operate the ventilator or compres‐ sor.

The patient’s exhaled mandatory tidal volume is ≤ alarm setting for the last two mandatory breaths.

Response off and back on again to reset the alarm.

Recharge the battery, by plugging the ventilator into AC power or replace the battery, or install an extended battery.

• Check the patient.

• Check for leaks in the patient circuit.

• Check for changes in the patient’s resistance and com‐ pliance.

• Check the patient.

• Check the ventilator settings.

↓

↑

⩒

E TOT

(patient data alarm)

NO AIR SUPPLY

NO O

SUPPLY

COMP

The patient’s exhaled spontaneous tidal volume is ≤ alarm setting for the last two spontaneous breaths.

The minute volume for all breaths is

≤ alarm setting.

The air supply pressure is less than the minimum pressure required for correct ventilator operation. The ventilator delivers 100% O

if avail‐ able. If an oxygen supply is not avail‐ able, the safety valve opens. The ventilator displays the elapsed time without ventilator support. This alarm cannot be set or disabled.

The oxygen supply pressure is less than the minimum pressure required for correct ventilator oper‐ ation. The ventilator delivers 100% air if available. If an air supply is not available, the safety valve opens.

The ventilator displays the elapsed time without ventilatory support.

This alarm cannot be set or disabled.

Target pressure ≥

( ⤒ P

PEAK

–5 cmH

• Check the patient.

• Check the ventilator settings.

• Check the patient.

• Check the air and oxygen sour‐ ces.

• Obtain alternate ventilation, if necessary.

• Check the patient.

• Check the air and oxygen sour‐ ces.

• Obtain alternate ventilation, if necessary.

In TC:

Check for leaks and tube type/ID setting.

In PAV+™:

Limit target pressure to

⤒ P

PEAK

–5 cmH

162

Table 37.

Non-Technical Alarms and Suggested Responses (continued)

Alarm message

PROCEDURE ERROR

SEVERE OCCLUSION

↑ V

(patient data alarm)

VOLUME NOT DELIVERED (patient data alarm

PAV STARTUP TOO LONG (occurs only if PAV+™ is in use)

PAV R & C NOT ASSESSED (occurs only if PAV+™ is in use)

PROX INOPERATIVE

Meaning

The patient is attached before ven‐ tilator startup is complete. Safety ventilation is active.

The patient circuit is severely occlu‐ ded. The ventilator enters occlusion status cycling. The elapsed time without ventilatory support appears.

Delivered inspiratory volume ≥ high inspiratory volume limit

Response

• Provide alternate ventilation, if necessary.

• Complete ventilator startup procedure.

• Check the patient.

• Obtain alternate ventilation, if necessary.

• Check patient circuit for bulk liquid, crimps, blocked filter.

• If problem persists, remove ventilator from use and obtain service.

• Check patient and ventilator settings.

• Check for leaks, tube type/ID, and % Supp settings, and patient agitation.

• Ventilator transitions to exhala‐ tion.

Check patient and ⤒ P

PEAK

setting Insp target pressure>

PEAK

–PEEP–3 cmH

O), when spontaneous type is VS or when mandatory type is VC+.

Unable to assess resistance or com‐ pliance during PAV+™ startup.

Unable to assess resistance or com‐ pliance during PAV+™ steady-state.

A malfunction occurred with the proximal flow sensor or the pneu‐ matic lines are occluded.

Check for leaks, shallow breathing, and settings for ⤒ V

and ⤒ P

PEAK

Check for leaks, shallow breathing, and settings for tube ID, ⤒ V

and

⤒ P

PEAK

Replace the proximal flow sensor or purge its pneumatic lines. Does not affect data from the ventilator’s delivery or exhalation flow sensors.

The next sections provide detailed descriptions of selected alarms.

6.5.9 AC POWER LOSS Alarm

The AC POWER LOSS alarm indicates the ventilator power switch is on and the ventilator is being powered by the battery and an alternate power source may soon be required to sustain normal ventilator operation. The ventilator annunciates a medium-priority LOW BATTERY alarm when the ventilator has less than 10 minutes of battery power remaining. The ventilator annunciates a high-priority LOW BATTERY alarm when less than 5 minutes of battery power are estimated available.

The compressor is a DC device, in which AC power is converted to DC power, and it has its own primary and extended batteries (if the extended battery was purchased). If AC power is lost, there is no conversion to DC power for the compressor as in normal operation, but the compressor supplies air, providing the charge level of its batteries is sufficient.

163

6.5.10 APNEA Alarm

The APNEA alarm indicates neither the ventilator nor the patient has triggered a breath for the operator-selected apnea interval (T

). T

is measured from the start of an inspiration to the start of the next inspiration and is based on the ventilator’s inspiratory detection criteria. T

can only be set via the apnea ventilation settings.

The APNEA alarm autoresets after the patient initiates two successive breaths, and is intended to establish the patient’s inspiratory drive is reliable enough to resume normal ventilation. To ensure the breaths are patient-initiated (and not due to autotriggering), exhaled volumes must be at least half the inspired V

T avoids returning to normal ventilation if there is a disconnect.)

. (This

6.5.11 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT Alarm

The CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm indicates the patient circuit is disconnected at the ventilator or the patient side of the patient wye, or a large leak is present. The methods by which circuit disconnects are detected vary depending on breath type. Time, pressure, flow, delivered volume, exhaled volume, and the D discussion of the CIRCUIT DISCONNECT detection methods.

SENS

setting may be

used in the circuit disconnect detection algorithms. See Section 10.13.2, Disconnect, page 226 for a complete

The CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm sensitivity is adjusted via the D

SENS

setting. During a CIRCUIT DISCONNECT condition, the ventilator enters an idle state and delivers a base flow of oxygen to detect a reconnection.

When the ventilator determines the patient circuit is reconnected, the CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm autoresets and normal ventilation resumes without having to manually reset the alarm (for example, following suctioning).

A disconnected patient circuit interrupts gas delivery and patient monitoring. Notification of a patient circuit disconnect is crucial, particularly when the patient cannot breathe spontaneously. The ventilator does not enter apnea ventilation when a disconnect is detected to avoid changing modes during a routine suctioning procedure.

Note: When utilizing a closed-suction catheter system, the suctioning procedure can be executed using existing mode, breath type and settings. To reduce potential for hypoxemia during the procedure, elevate the oxygen concentration using the Elevate O

control. See Section 3.8.2.5, Elevate O

, page 81

6.5.12 LOSS OF POWER Alarm

This alarm alerts the operator that there is insufficient battery power and no AC power to support ventilator or compressor operation. The alarm annunciates as long as the ventilator’s power switch is in the on position, and lasts for at least 120 seconds.

6.5.13 DEVICE ALERT Alarm

A DEVICE ALERT alarm indicates a background test or power on self test (POST) has failed. Depending on which test failed, the ventilator either continues to ventilate according to current settings, or ventilates with modified settings, or enters the ventilator inoperative state. The DEVICE ALERT alarm relies on the ventilator’s self-testing

and notifies the clinician of an abnormal condition requiring service. See Section 10.16.4, Background Diagnostic

System, page 242 .

6.5.14 HIGH CIRCUIT PRESSURE ( ↑ P

PEAK

) Alarm

The ↑ P

⤒ P

PEAK

alarm indicates the currently measured airway pressure is equal to or greater than the set limit. The

limit is active during all breath types and phases to provide redundant patient protection (for example, to detect air flow restrictions downstream of the pressure-sensing device). The ⤒ P

PEAK ventilation modes. The ↑ P

PEAK and adult patients. The ⤒ P

PEAK

limit is active in all normal

alarm new patient default values are separately configurable for neonatal, pediatric,

limit is not active during a SEVERE OCCLUSION alarm.

The ↑ P

PEAK

alarm truncates inspiration and transitions the ventilator into the expiratory phase. The limit cannot be set less than:

164

• PEEP+7 cmH

• PEEP+ P

+2 cmH

• PEEP+P

SUPP

• ⤓ P

PEAK

+2 cmH

The ⤒ P

PEAK

limit cannot be disabled. The ventilator phases in changes to the ⤒ P

PEAK

limit immediately to allow prompt notification of a high circuit pressure condition.

The minimum ⤒ P

PEAK

limit (7 cmH

O) corresponds to the lowest peak pressures not due to autotriggering anticipated during a mandatory breath. The maximum ⤒ P

PEAK

limit (100 cmH maximum pressure required to inflate very low-compliance lungs.

O) was selected because it is the

The ventilator allows circuit pressure to rise according to a computed triggering profile for the initial phase of PC and PS breaths without activating the ↑ P

PEAK

alarm. This triggering profile helps avoid nuisance alarms due to possible transient pressure overshoot in the airway when aggressive values of rise time% are selected. A brief pressure overshoot measured in the patient circuit is unlikely to be present at the carina.

6.5.15 HIGH DELIVERED O

% ( ↑ O

%) Alarm

The ↑ O

% alarm indicates the measured O

30 seconds to eliminate transient O

% is at or above the error percentage above the O

% delivery variation nuisance alarms. The ↑ O

2 in ventilator gas delivery or oxygen monitor. The ventilator declares a ventilator automatically sets the ↑ O

↑ O

% setting for at least

% alarm detects malfunctions

% alarm after 30 seconds. Although the

% alarm limits, the oxygen sensor can be disabled. (The error percentage is

12% above setting for the first hour of ventilator operation, 7% above the setting after the first hour of operation, and an additional 5% above the setting for the first 4 minutes following a decrease in the setting).

The ventilator automatically adjusts the ↑ O

% alarm limit when O occlusion, circuit disconnect, or a NO AIR SUPPLY or NO O

% changes due to 100% O limit against the measured oxygen percentage at 1-second intervals.

, apnea ventilation,

SUPPLY alarm. The ventilator checks the ↑ O

% alarm

6.5.16 HIGH EXHALED MINUTE VOLUME ( ↑ ⩒

E TOT

) Alarm

The ↑ ⩒

E TOT

alarm indicates the measured exhaled total minute volume for spontaneous and mandatory breaths is equal to or greater than the alarm setting. The ↑ ⩒

E TOT

alarm is effective immediately upon changing the setting, to ensure prompt notification of prolonged high tidal volumes.

The ↑ ⩒

E TOT resistance. The ↑ ⩒ hypocarbia.

alarm can be used to detect a change in a patient’s breathing pattern, or a change in compliance or

E TOT

alarm can also detect too-large tidal volumes, which could lead to hyperventilation and

6.5.17 HIGH EXHALED TIDAL VOLUME ( ↑ V

) Alarm

The ↑ V

alarm indicates the measured exhaled tidal volume for spontaneous and mandatory breaths is equal to or greater than the set ⤒ V

alarm. The ↑ V

alarm is updated whenever a new measured value is available.

The ↑ V

alarm can detect increased exhaled tidal volume (due to greater compliance and lower resistance) and prevent hyperventilation during pressure control ventilation or pressure support. Turn the ↑ V nuisance alarms. (Hyperventilation due to increased compliance is not a concern during volume-based ventilation, because the tidal volume is fixed by the clinician’s choice and the ventilator’s compliance-compensation algorithm.)

alarm OFF to avoid

6.5.18 HIGH INSPIRED TIDAL VOLUME ( ↑ V

) Alarm

The ↑ V

alarm indicates the patient’s inspired volume exceeds the set limit. When this condition occurs, the breath terminates and the alarm sounds. The ventilator displays monitored inspired tidal volume values in the patient

165

data area on the GUI screen. When ventilation type is NIV, there is no high inspired tidal volume alarm or setting available, but the monitored inspired tidal volume (V

) may appear in the patient data area on the GUI screen.

6.5.19 HIGH RESPIRATORY RATE ( ↑ f

TOT

) Alarm

The ↑ f

TOT

alarm indicates the measured breath rate is greater than or equal to the ⤒ f

TOT

alarm setting. The ↑ f

TOT alarm is updated whenever a new total measured respiratory rate is available.

The ↑ f

TOT

alarm can detect tachypnea, which could indicate the tidal volume is too low or the patient’s work of breathing has increased. The ventilator phases in changes to the ⤒ f notification of a high respiratory rate condition.

TOT

limit immediately to ensure prompt

6.5.20 INSPIRATION TOO LONG Alarm

The INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm, active only when ventilation type is invasive, indicates the inspiratory time of a spontaneous breath exceeds the following time limit:

• (1.99 + 0.02×PBW) seconds (adult and pediatric circuits)

• (1.00+0.10×PBW) seconds (neonatal circuits) where PBW is the current setting for predicted body weight in kg.

When the ventilator declares an INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm, the ventilator terminates inspiration and transitions to exhalation. The INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm applies only to spontaneous breaths and cannot be set or disabled.

Because leaks (in the patient circuit, around the endotracheal tube cuff, or through chest tubes) and patient-ventilator mismatch can affect accurate exhalation detection, the INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm can act as a backup method of safely terminating inspiration. If the INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm occurs frequently, check for leaks and ensure E

SENS

and rise time% are properly set.

6.5.21 LOW CIRCUIT PRESSURE ( ↓ P

PEAK

) Alarm

Warning: Because the VC+ pressure control algorithm does not allow the target inspiratory pressure to fall below

PEEP+3 cmH

O, attempting to set the ⤓ P

PEAK

alarm limit at or below this level will turn the alarm off.

The ↓ P

PEAK

alarm indicates the measured maximum airway pressure during the current breath is less than or equal to the set alarm level during a non-invasive inspiration or during a VC+ inspiration.

The ↓ P

PEAK

alarm is active for mandatory and spontaneous breaths, and is present only when ventilation type is

NIV or mandatory type is VC+. During VC+, the ↓ P turned off during NIV. The ⤓ P

PEAK

alarm can be turned off. The ↓ P

PEAK

alarm can always be

alarm limit cannot be set to a value greater than or equal to the ⤒ P

PEAK

alarm limit.

In VC+, whenever PEEP is changed, ↓ P

≥16 cmH

O, or PEEP+3.5 cmH

PEAK

is set automatically to its new patient value, PEEP+4 cmH

O when PEEP<16 cmH

O when PEEP

There are no alarms dependent upon ↓ P

PEAK

and the ↓ P

PEAK

alarm does not depend on other alarms.

6.5.22 LOW DELIVERED O

% ( ↓ O

%) Alarm

The ↓ O

% alarm indicates the measured O below the O

% during any phase of a breath is at or below the error percentage

% setting, or less than or equal to 18%, for at least 30 seconds. Although the ventilator automatically sets the ↓ O

% alarm, replace (if necessary) or disable the oxygen sensor to avoid nuisance alarms. (The error percentage is 12% below setting for the first hour of ventilator operation following a reset, 7% below setting after the first hour of operation, and an additional 5% below setting for the first 4 minutes following an increase in the setting.)

The ventilator automatically adjusts the ↓ O disconnect, or a NO O

% alarm limit when O

SUPPLY or NO AIR SUPPLY alarm. The ↓ O

% changes due to apnea ventilation, circuit

% alarm is disabled during a safety valve open

166

(SVO) condition. The ventilator checks the ↓ O

2 intervals.

% alarm against the measured oxygen percentage at 1-second

The ↓ O

% alarm can detect malfunctions in ventilator gas delivery or the oxygen monitor, and can ensure the patient is adequately oxygenated. The ventilator declares a alarms from transient O

% delivery variations. The O

↓ O

% alarm after 30 seconds to eliminate nuisance

% measured by the oxygen sensor is shown in the patient data area. See

Section 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient Data, page 82

to include O

% if it is not displayed.

6.5.23 LOW EXHALED MANDATORY TIDAL VOLUME ( ↓ V

TE MAND

) Alarm

The alarm indicates the measured exhaled mandatory tidal volume is less than or equal to the ⤓ V setting. The ↓ V

TE MAND

alarm

TE MAND

alarm updates when a new measured value of exhaled mandatory tidal volume is available.

The ↓ V

TE MAND

alarm can detect an obstruction, a leak during volume ventilation, or a change in compliance or resistance during pressure-based ventilation (that is, when the same pressure is achieved but tidal volume decreases). There are separate alarms for mandatory and spontaneous exhaled tidal volumes for use during SIMV,

SPONT, and BiLevel. The ventilator phases in a change to the ↓ V notification of a low exhaled tidal volume condition.

TE MAND

alarm immediately to ensure prompt

6.5.24 LOW EXHALED SPONTANEOUS TIDAL VOLUME ( ↓ V

TE SPONT

) Alarm

The ↓

SPONT

TE SPONT available.

alarm indicates the measured exhaled spontaneous tidal volume is less than or equal to the ⤓ V

alarm setting. The alarm updates when a new measured value of exhaled spontaneous tidal volume is

The ↓ V

TE SPONT

alarm can detect a leak in the patient circuit or a change in the patient’s respiratory drive during a single breath. The ↓ V

TE SPONT

alarm is based on the current breath rather than on an average to detect changes as quickly as possible. There are separate alarms for mandatory and spontaneous exhaled tidal volumes for use during SIMV and BiLevel. The ventilator phases in a change to the ⤓ V prompt notification of a low exhaled tidal volume condition.

TE SPONT

alarm limit immediately to ensure

6.5.25 LOW EXHALED TOTAL MINUTE VOLUME ( ↓ ⩒

E TOT

) Alarm

The ↓ ⩒ or equal to the ⤓⩒ volume.

E TOT

alarm indicates the measured minute volume (for mandatory and spontaneous breaths) is less than

E TOT

alarm setting. The ↓ ⩒

E TOT

alarm updates with each new calculation for exhaled minute

The ↓ ⩒

E TOT

alarm can detect a leak or obstruction in the patient circuit, a change in compliance or resistance, or a change in the patient’s breathing pattern. The ↓ ⩒

E TOT

alarm can also detect too-small tidal volumes, which could lead to hypoventilation and hypoxia (oxygen desaturation).

The ventilator phases in changes to the ⤓⩒

E TOT prolonged low tidal volumes.

alarm limit immediately to ensure prompt notification of

6.5.26 PROCEDURE ERROR Alarm

The ventilator declares a PROCEDURE ERROR alarm if it is powered up (either by turning on the power switch or if power is regained following a power loss of at least 5 minutes) and the ventilator detects a patient attached before Ventilator Startup is complete. Until confirmation of the ventilator settings, the ventilator annunciates a

high-priority alarm and enters Safety PCV. See Table 51, page 241

The PROCEDURE ERROR alarm requires confirmation of ventilator settings after restoration of ventilator power, in case a new patient is attached to the ventilator. Safety PCV is an emergency mode of ventilation providing ventilation according to displayed settings until settings confirmation, and is not intended for long-term patient ventilation.

167

6.5.27 SEVERE OCCLUSION Alarm

A severe occlusion alarm occurs when gas flow in the ventilator breathing system is severely restricted. The ventilator enters Occlusion Status Cycling (OSC) where the ventilator periodically attempts to deliver a pressure-based breath while monitoring inspiratory and expiratory breath phases for a severe occlusion. If an occlusion is not detected, the ventilator considers the occlusion condition reset, clears the occlusion alarm, and continues ventilation with the settings in use before the occlusion occurred. The ventilator indicates an occlusion was detected.

6.6 Monitored Patient Data

Monitored patient data appear in the Patient Data Banner at the top of the GUI screen above the waveforms

display. See Figure 39, page 98

See

Section 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient Data, page 82

to change the displayed patient data parameters or the order in which they are displayed.

If any patient data values are displayed continuously blinking, it means their values are shown clipped to what has been defined as their absolute limits. If the values are displayed in parentheses “( )”, it means they are clipped to their variable limits. Variable limits are calculated values derived from the set PBW and ventilator settings.

Displayed patient data values that have been clipped should be viewed as suspect.

Dashes (--) are displayed if the patient data value is not applicable based on mode or breath type combinations.

Note: If no value is displayed, then the ventilator is in a state where the value cannot be measured.

Note: All displayed patient volume data represent lung volumes expressed under BTPS conditions.

The following sections contain descriptions of all patient data parameters shown in the patient data displays.

6.6.1 Total Exhaled Minute Volume ( ⩒

E TOT

)

The BTPS and compliance compensated sum of exhaled gas volumes from both mandatory and spontaneous breaths for the previous 1-minute interval.

6.6.2 Exhaled Spontaneous Minute Volume ( ⩒

E SPONT

)

The BTPS- and compliance-compensated sum of exhaled spontaneous volumes for the previous minute.

6.6.3 Exhaled Tidal Volume (V

)

The volume of the patient’s exhaled gas for the previous mandatory or spontaneous breath. Displayed V

TE compliance-and BTPS compensated, and updates at the next inspiration.

is both

6.6.4 Proximal Exhaled Minute Volume ( ⩒

E TOTY

)

The BTPS- and compliance-compensated sum of exhaled spontaneous volumes for the previous minute, measured by the proximal flow sensor (for neonatal patients, only).

6.6.5 Proximal Exhaled Tidal Volume (V

TEY

)

The exhaled tidal volume for the previous breath measured by the proximal flow sensor (for neonatal patients, only). V

TEY

is updated at the beginning of the next inspiration.

6.6.6 Exhaled Spontaneous Tidal Volume (V

TE SPONT

)

The exhaled volume of the last spontaneous breath, updated at the beginning of the next inspiration following a spontaneous breath.

168

6.6.7 Exhaled Mandatory Tidal Volume (V

TE MAND

)

The exhaled volume of the last mandatory breath, updated at the beginning of the next inspiration following a mandatory breath. If the mode is SPONT and the ventilator has not delivered mandatory breaths in a time period of greater than 2 minutes (for example via a manual inspiration), the V

TE MAND hidden. The indicator reappears when the value updates.

patient data indicator becomes

6.6.8 Exhaled mL/kg Volume

The patient’s exhaled volume displayed in mL/kg PBW.

6.6.9 Inspired Tidal Volume (V

)

Inspired tidal volume (V pressure-based or NIV breaths, updated at the beginning of the following expiratory phase. V data are available.

) is the BTPS- and compliance-compensated volume of inspired gas for all

is displayed when

6.6.10 Proximal Inspired Tidal Volume (V

TIY

)

Proximal inspired tidal volume (V

TIY

) is the inspired tidal volume for a mandatory or spontaneous breath measured by the proximal flow sensor (for neonatal patients, only). V expiratory phase and is displayed when data are available.

TIY

is updated at the beginning of the following

6.6.11 Delivered mL/kg Volume

The delivered gas volume in mL/kg PBW.

6.6.12 I:E Ratio

I:E ratio is the ratio of inspiratory time to expiratory time for the previous breath, regardless of breath type, updated at the beginning of the next inspiration. When I:E ratio is ≥1:1, it is displayed as XX:1. Otherwise it is displayed as

1:XX.

Note: Due to limitations in setting the I:E ratio in PC ventilation, the monitored data display may not exactly match the I:E ratio setting.

6.6.13 Mean Circuit Pressure (P

MEAN

)

Mean circuit pressure (P or negative.

MEAN

) is the average circuit pressure for a complete breath period, including both inspiratory and expiratory phases whether mandatory or spontaneous. The displayed value can be either positive

6.6.14 Peak Circuit Pressure (P

PEAK

)

Peak circuit pressure (P

PEAK

) is the maximum circuit pressure at the patient wye during the previous breath, including both inspiratory and expiratory phases.

6.6.15 End Inspiratory Pressure (P

I END

)

End inspiratory pressure (P

I END

) is the pressure at the end of the inspiratory phase of the current breath.

6.6.16 End Expiratory Pressure (PEEP)

End expiratory pressure (PEEP) is the pressure at the end of the expiratory phase of the previous breath, updated at the beginning of the next inspiration. During an expiratory pause maneuver, the displayed value includes any active lung PEEP.

169

6.6.17 Intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

)

Intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

) is an estimate of the pressure above the PEEP level at the end of an exhalation. PEEP

is determined during an expiratory pause maneuver.

6.6.18 PAV-based Intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

I PAV

)

PAV-based intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

I PAV breath.

) is an estimate of intrinsic PEEP, updated at the end of a spontaneous PAV+™

6.6.19 Total PEEP (PEEP

)

Total PEEP (PEEP

) is the estimated pressure at the circuit wye during the expiratory pause maneuver.

6.6.20 Plateau Pressure (P

)

Plateau pressure (P

) is the pressure measured and displayed during an inspiratory pause maneuver.

6.6.21 Driving Pressure (P

DRIVE

)

While ventilating with PAV+, driving pressure (P

PEEP

TOT be calculated by dividing V

by C

PAV

DRIVE

and represents the amount of pressure required to overcome the elastic recoil of the lungs. P

PAV

) is the difference between plateau pressure and estimated

DRIVE

can also

PAV+™ software automatically performs a 300 ms end-inspiratory hold in a random pattern every four to ten

PAV+™ breaths. Each time the end-inspiratory hold is conducted this pressure change is measured from the end expiratory lung pressure at the beginning of the breath to the pressure at the end of the plateau maneuver.

6.6.22 Total Respiratory Rate (f

TOT

)

Total respiratory rate (f

TOT patient.

) is the total number of mandatory and spontaneous breaths per minute delivered to the

6.6.23 PAV-based Lung Compliance (C

PAV

)

For a PAV+™ breath, C

PAV

is the change in pulmonary volume for an applied change in patient airway pressure, measured under zero-flow conditions and updated upon successful completion of each calculation. C displayed on the waveform screen.

PAV

6.6.24 PAV-based Patient Resistance (R

PAV

)

For a PAV+™ breath, R

PAV

is the change in pulmonary pressure for an applied change in patient lung flow and updated upon successful completion of each calculation. R

PAV

is displayed on the waveform screen.

6.6.25 PAV-based Lung Elastance (E

PAV

)

For a PAV+™ breath, E

PAV

is the inverse of C

PAV

and is updated upon successful completion of each calculation.

6.6.26 Spontaneous Rapid Shallow Breathing Index (f/V

)

Spontaneous rapid shallow breathing index (f/V indicate the inverse.

) is an indication of the patient’s ability to breathe spontaneously.

High values generally mean the patient is breathing rapidly, but with low tidal volumes. Low values generally

6.6.27 Spontaneous Inspiratory Time Ratio (T

TOT

)

In SPONT mode, spontaneous inspiratory time ratio (T

TOT

) is the percentage of a spontaneous breath consumed by the inspiratory phase. Updated at the successful completion of a spontaneous breath.

170

6.6.28 Spontaneous Inspiratory Time (T

I SPONT

)

Spontaneous inspiratory time (T

I SPONT

) is the duration of the inspiratory phase of a spontaneous breath and updated at the end of each spontaneous breath. T

I SPONT

is only calculated when the breathing mode allows spontaneous breaths and the breaths are patient-initiated.

6.6.29 PAV-based Total Airway Resistance (R

TOT

)

For a PAV+™ breath, R

TOT

is the change in pulmonary pressure for an applied change in total airway flow and updated upon the successful completion of each calculation. If the R at the beginning of this section, the R

TOT

PAV

value appears in parentheses as described

value also appears in parentheses.

6.6.30 Static Compliance (C

STAT

) and Static Resistance (R

STAT

)

STAT

is an estimate of the elasticity of the patient’s lungs, expressed in mL/cmH

O. It is computed during a mandatory breath.

STAT

is the total inspiratory resistance across the artificial airway and respiratory system, displayed at the start of the next inspiration after the inspiratory pause maneuver. It is an estimate of how restrictive the patient’s airway is, based on the pressure drop at a given flow, expressed in cmH breath with a square flow waveform.

O/L/s. R

STAT

is computed during a VC mandatory

STAT

is calculated using this equation:

STAT pt ckt

Static compliance P ckt

Total expiratory volume (patient and breathing circuit)

Compliance of the breathing circuit during the pause maneuver (derived from SST)

PEEP

The pressure in the patient circuit measured at the end of the 100 ms interval defining the pause-mechanics plateau

The pressure in the patient circuit measured at the end of expiration

STAT

is calculated using this equation after C

STAT

is computed and assuming a VC breath type with a square waveform:

STAT ckt

Static resistance

Compliance of the breathing circuit during the pause maneuver (derived from SST)

STAT

Static compliance

Mean pressure in the patient circuit over the

100 ms interval defining the pausemechanics plateau

Peak circuit pressure ⩒ pt

Flow into the patient during the last 100 ms of the waveform

PEAK

During the pause, the most recently selected graphics are displayed and frozen, to determine when inspiratory pressure stabilizes. C and take this format:

STAT

and R

STAT

are displayed at the start of the next inspiration following the inspiratory pause

STAT

xxx or

171

STAT

yyy

Special formatting is applied if the software determines variables in the equations or the resulting C

STAT values are out of bounds:

or R

STAT

• Parentheses ( ) signify questionable C

STAT

or R

STAT

values, derived from questionable variables.

• Flashing C

STAT

or R

STAT

values are out of bounds.

• R

STAT

------ means resistance could not be computed, because the breath was not of a mandatory, VC type with square flow waveform.

6.6.31 Dynamic Compliance (C

DYN

)

DYN

is a dynamic estimate of static compliance for each mandatory breath delivered.

6.6.32 Dynamic Resistance (R

DYN

)

DYN

is a dynamic estimate of static resistance for each mandatory breath delivered.

6.6.33 C

/C is the ratio of compliance of the last 20% of inspiration to the compliance of the entire inspiration.

6.6.34 End Expiratory Flow (EEF)

End expiratory flow (EEF) is a measurement of the end expiratory flow for an applicable breath.

6.6.35 Peak Spontaneous Flow (PSF)

Peak spontaneous flow is a measurement of the maximum inspiratory spontaneous flow for an applicable spontaneous breath

6.6.36 Displayed O

Displayed O

% is the percentage of oxygen in the gas delivered to the patient, measured at the ventilator’s outlet, upstream of the inspiratory filter. It is intended to provide a check against the set O not as a measurement of oxygen delivered to the patient. O

% for alarm determination, and

% data can be displayed as long as the O

2 is enabled. If the monitor is disabled, dashes (--) are displayed. If a device alert occurs related to the O

2 a blinking 0 is displayed.

monitor

monitor,

6.6.37 Inspiratory Time Constant (3Tau

)

The 3Tau

parameter is three times the product of the patient’s resistance and compliance, and is used to determine the adequacy of the set inspiratory time (pressure ventilation), or the inspiratory time determined by the flow pattern, tidal volume, (V

), peak flow ( ⩒

MAX

), and plateau time (T

) settings (volume ventilation).

172

7 Preventive Maintenance

7.1 Overview

This chapter contains information on maintenance of the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator. It includes:

• How to perform routine preventive maintenance procedures, including frequency

• How to clean, disinfect, or sterilize the ventilator and its main components

• How to store the ventilator for extended periods

• How to dispose of used parts

7.2 Ventilator Operational Time

The ventilator contains an hour meter that records the number of operational hours since the ventilator was manufactured. An additional timer tracks the number of hours since the last preventive maintenance activity was performed. Both the GUI and the status display show the number of hours before the next preventive maintenance is due.

7.3 Preventive Maintenance Intervals

Warning:

To ensure proper ventilator operation, perform Preventive Maintenance intervals as specified in Table 38

and Table 41

Table 38.

Operator Preventive Maintenance Frequency

Part

Patient circuit: inspiratory and expir‐ atory limbs

Frequency

Several times a day or as required by the institution’s policy.

Maintenance

• Check both limbs for water accumulation.

• Empty and clean.

Check and empty as needed.

Condensate vial (disposable), water trap

Oxygen sensor calibration

Several times a day or as required by the institution’s policy.

Daily or as necessary

• After 15 days of continuous use

From the ventilator setup screen, touch the More Settings tab. To cal‐ ibrate the oxygen sensor, touch Cal‐ ibrate in the oxygen sensor area of the screen. See

Section 4.10.3, Oxy‐ gen Sensor Calibration Testing, page 120

for information on testing the oxygen sensor calibration.

Inlet air filter bowl

Disposable drain bag and tubing

(single unit)

• Replace bowl if it is cracked.

• If any sign of moisture is visible, remove ventilator from use and con‐ tact service personnel.

Discard when filled to capacity or when changing the patient circuit.

Disposable patient circuit tubing Discard.

N/A

Discard per the institution’s proto‐ col.

Disposable exhalation filter • After each patient use Replace with a new filter. Discard used filter according to the institu‐ tion’s protocol.

173

Table 38.

Operator Preventive Maintenance Frequency (continued)

Part

Drain bag clamp

Drain bag tubing

Neonatal door/adapter

Battery

Exhalation flow sensor assembly

(EVQ)

Compressor inlet air filter

Frequency

After each patient use

Maintenance

Wipe clean with a cloth dampened with one of the cleaning agents lis‐

ted in Table 39

Replace if the clamp is damaged.

When the drain bag is filled to capacity or when changing the patient circuit

When gas pathway surfaces are visi‐ bly soiled or per institutional guide‐ lines.

When exterior surfaces of door are soiled.

When transferring battery to or from another ventilator

Every 3 years or as prompted

Per institutional guidelines, or if SST flow sensor cross check fails. DO

NOT STERILIZE the exhalation flow sensor assembly.

Every 100 disinfection cycles. A dis‐ infection cycle is defined as one dis‐

infection event as described in tion 7.5.1, Exhalation Flow Sensor

Assembly (EVQ) Disinfection, page 177

Every 250 hours

Sec‐

Discard.

Disinfect per

Table 40

Surface clean per

Section 7.4

Wash in mild soapy water and rinse thoroughly. Let air dry.

Disinfect by wiping with a damp cloth using one of the solutions lis‐ ted. See

Table 39, page 175

for approved cleaning agents.

Replace.

Disinfect. See

Section 7.5, Compo‐ nent Cleaning and Disinfection, page 175

and

Section 7.5.1, Exhala‐ tion Flow Sensor Assembly (EVQ) Dis‐ infection, page 177 . Run flow sensor

calibration and SST.

Replace. Discard used flow sensor according to the institution’s proto‐ col. Run flow sensor calibration and

SST.

Note: If problems occur after exhalation flow sensor replacement, reseat or readjust the flow sensor, and check the patient circuit integrity. If the problem persists, replace the flow sensor.

Caution: Use specified cleaning and disinfecting agents and procedures for the appropriate part as instructed.

Follow cleaning procedures outlined in

Section 7.4

through

Section 7.5.1

7.4 Surface Cleaning of Exterior Surfaces

External surfaces of the GUI, BDU, and standard or compressor base may become soiled and should be cleaned periodically.

To clean the GUI, BDU, and base surfaces

1. Moisten a soft cloth with one of the surface cleaning agents listed or use Sani-Cloths (PDI, Inc.). See Table 39, page 175 .

2. Wipe the GUI, BDU, and base, removing any dirt or foreign substances.

3. Dry all components thoroughly.

174

4. If necessary, vacuum any cooling vents on the GUI and BDU with an electrostatic discharge (ESD)-safe vacuum to remove any dust.

Table 39.

Surface Cleaning Agents

Part

Ventilator exterior (including touch screen and flex arm)

Procedure

Wipe clean with a cloth dampened with one of the cleaning agents lis‐ ted below or equivalent. Use a damp cloth and water to rinse off chemical residue as necessary.

• Mild dish washing detergent solution

• Isopropyl alcohol (70% solu‐ tion)

• Bleach (10% solution)

• Window cleaning solution (iso‐ propyl alcohol and ammonia)

• Ammonia (15% solution)

• Hydrogen peroxide (3% solu‐ tion)

• Formula 409

Company)

TM* cleaner (Clorox

• CaviCide ™* surface disinfectant

(Metrex Research Corporation)

• Control III ™* germicide (Maril

Products, Inc.)

Comments/cautions

• Do not allow liquid or sprays to penetrate the ventilator open‐ ings or cable connections.

• Do not attempt to sterilize the ventilator by exposure to ethyl‐ ene oxide (ETO) gas.

• Do not use pressurized air to clean or dry the ventilator, including the GUI cooling vents.

• Do not submerge the ventilator or pour cleaning solutions over or into the ventilator.

Ventilator cooling vents

• Mr. Muscle Window & Glass (SC

Johnson)

• Sani Cloths (PDI, Inc.)

• [Propan-2-ol, Isopropanol, Iso‐ propyl Alcohol]

Vacuum the vents at the back of the

GUI and BDU to remove dust.

N/A a Chemicals stated are the generic equivalents of Mr. Muscle Window & Glass

7.5 Component Cleaning and Disinfection

Warning: To avoid microbial contamination and potential performance problems, do not clean, disinfect, or reuse single-use or disposable components. Discard per local or institutional regulations.

Risks associated with reuse of single-patient use items include but are not limited to microbial cross-contamination, leaks, loss of part integrity, and increased pressure drop. When cleaning reusable components, do not use hard brushes or implements that could damage surfaces.

Table 40.

Component Cleaning Agents and Disinfection Procedures

EVQ

Part Cleaning agent/procedure

Before disinfection, presoak in

EMpower™* Dual Enzymatic Solu‐ tion (Metrex Inc.).

Comments/cautions

Do not drop the EVQ or handle roughly during disinfection or storage.

175

Table 40.

Component Cleaning Agents and Disinfection Procedures (continued)

Part

Neonatal door/adapter

Reusable patient circuit tubing

Cleaning agent/procedure

Perform high level disinfection using liquid chemical disinfectant with any of the following agents:

• Cidex™* (2.5%) (ASP

a )

• Cidex™* OPA (0.55%) ASP

• Sporox™* II (Sultan)

See

Section 7.5.1, Exhalation Flow

Sensor Assembly (EVQ) Disinfection, page 177 for specific instructions.

Before disinfection, presoak in

EMpower ™* Dual Enzymatic Solu‐ tion (Metrex Inc.).

Perform high-level disinfection using liquid chemical disinfectant with any of the following agents:

• Cidex™* (2.5%) (ASP

a )

• Cidex™* OPA (0.55%) ASP

Follow the manufacturer’s instruc‐ tions.

Disinfect per manufacturer’s instructions for use.

N/A

Comments/cautions

Breathing circuit in-line water traps Disinfect per manufacturer’s

Breathing circuit components

Inlet air filter bowl

Battery instructions for use.

Disinfect per manufacturer’s instructions for use.

Wash the bowl with mild soap sol‐ ution, if needed.

Wipe with a damp cloth using one of the cleaning agents listed. See

Table 39, page 175

• Inspect for nicks and cuts and replace if damaged.

• Run SST to check for leaks when reinstalling the circuit or when installing a new circuit.

• Inspect water traps for cracks and replace if damaged.

• Run SST to check for leaks when reinstalling the circuit or when installing a new circuit.

• Inspect components for nicks and cuts and replace if dam‐ aged.

• Run SST to check for leaks when reinstalling the circuit or when installing a new circuit.

• Avoid exposing the inlet air fil‐ ter bowl to aromatic solvents, especially ketones.

• Replace if cracks or crazing are visible.

Do not immerse the battery or get the contacts wet.

176

Table 40.

Component Cleaning Agents and Disinfection Procedures (continued)

Part

Cooling fan filter

Other accessories

Cleaning agent/procedure

Clean every 250 hours or as neces‐ sary.

Follow manufacturer’s instructions for use.

Comments/cautions

Wash in mild soap solution, rinse, and air dry.

N/A a Op Advanced Sterilization Products.

To clean and disinfect parts

1. Wash parts in warm water using a mild soap solution.

2. Thoroughly rinse parts in clean, warm water (tap water is acceptable) and wipe dry.

3. Clean or disinfect ventilator surfaces and component parts per the procedures listed for each component.

See

Table 39, page 175 and Table 40, page 175 for lists of acceptable cleaning and disinfecting agents.

4. Visually inspect the components for cracks or other damage prior to use.

5. Dispose of damaged parts according to the institution’s policy.

Note:

Steps 1 through 3 above do not apply to the EVQ. See Section 7.5.1, Exhalation Flow Sensor Assembly (EVQ)

Disinfection, page 177 for disinfection instructions.

Whenever replacing or reinstalling a component, run SST before ventilating a patient.

7.5.1 Exhalation Flow Sensor Assembly (EVQ) Disinfection

Note: Follow the institution’s infection control protocol for handling, storage, and disposal of potentially bio-contaminated waste.

Caution: To avoid damaging the hot film wire, do not insert fingers or objects into the center port when disinfecting the EVQ.

The EVQ contains the exhalation flow sensor electronics, exhalation valve diaphragm, exhalation filter seal, and pressure sensor filter. The exhalation flow sensor electronics consist of the hot film wire and the thermistor.

Caution: To avoid damage to the exhalation flow sensor element:

• Do not touch the hot film wire or thermistor in the center port.

• Do not vigorously agitate fluid through the center port while immersed.

• Do not forcefully blow compressed air or any fluid into the center cavity.

• Do not drop or handle roughly during disinfection, replacement, or storage.

Warning: Damaging the flow sensor’s hot film wire or thermistor in the center port can cause the ventilator’s spirometry system to malfunction.

177

Figure 58.

EVQ

1 Top View

2 Bottom View

Figure 59.

EVQ Components

1 Hot film wire and thermistor

2 Diaphragm sealing surface

3 Electrical contacts

4 Filter grommet

7.5.1.1 Removal

To remove the EVQ

1. Lift up on the exhalation filter latch and open the exhalation filter door.

2. With thumb inserted into the plastic exhalation port and four fingers under the EVQ, pull it down until it snaps out. To avoid damaging the flow sensor element, do not insert fingers into the center port.

178

Figure 60.

EVQ Removal

Warning: Prior to cleaning and disinfection, remove and dispose of the disposable components of the exhalation flow sensor assembly. See

Section 7.5.2, EVQ Reassembly, page 182

for re-assembly instructions.

To remove disposable components of the EVQ

1. Remove and discard the exhalation valve diaphragm, the exhalation filter seal, and the pressure sensor filter.

Lift the exhalation filter seal out of the exhalation flow sensor to remove it.

Figure 61.

Exhalation Valve Diaphragm Removal

179

Figure 62.

Exhalation Filter Seal Removal

Figure 63.

Pressure Sensor Filter Removal

2. Dispose of removed items according to the institution’s protocol. Follow local governing ordinances regarding disposal of potentially biocontaminated waste.

7.5.1.2 Disinfection

Warning: Do not steam autoclave the EVQ or sterilize with ethylene oxide gas. Either process could cause the ventilator’s spirometry system to malfunction when reinstalled in the ventilator.

Warning:

Use only the disinfectants described. See Table 40, page 175 . Using disinfectants not recommended by

Covidien may damage the plastic enclosure or electronic sensor components, resulting in malfunction of the ventilator’s spirometry system.

Warning: Follow disinfectant manufacturer’s recommendations for personal protection (such as gloves, fume hood, etc.) to avoid potential injury.

180

1. Presoak the EVQ in the enzymatic solution. See

Table 38 . The purpose for this presoak is to break down any

biofilm that may be present. Follow manufacturer’s instructions regarding duration of soak process.

Caution: Do not use any type of brush to scrub the EVQ, as damage to the flow sensing element could occur.

2. Rinse in clean, deionized water.

3. Prepare the chemical disinfectant according to the manufacturer’s instructions or as noted in the institution’s protocol. See

Table 40, page 175

for the proper disinfecting agents.

4. Immerse the exhalation flow sensor in the disinfectant solution, oriented as shown in

Figure 64

, and rotate to remove trapped air bubbles in the its cavities. Keep immersed for the minimum time period by the manufacturer or as noted in the institution’s protocol.

Figure 64.

Immersion Method

5. At the end of the disinfecting immersion period, remove and drain all disinfectant. Ensure all cavities are completely drained.

7.5.1.3 Rinsing

1. Rinse the EVQ using clean, deionized water in the same manner used for the disinfection step.

2. Drain and repeat rinsing three times with clean, deionized water.

Warning: Rinse according to manufacturer’s instructions. Avoid skin contact with disinfecting agents to prevent possible injury.

3. After rinsing in deionized water, immerse in a clean isopropyl alcohol bath for approximately 15 seconds.

Slowly agitate and rotate to empty air pockets.

7.5.1.4 Drying

• Dry in a low temperature warm air cabinet designed for this purpose. Covidien recommends a convective drying oven for this process, with temperature not exceeding 60°C (140°F).

181

Caution: Exercise care in placement and handling in a dryer to prevent damage to the assembly’s flow sensor element.

7.5.1.5 Inspection

See

Figure 59, page 178 while inspecting the EVQ.

1. Inspect the plastic body, diaphragm sealing surface, filter grommet and the seal groove on the bottom side for any visible damage, degradation, or contamination.

2. Inspect electrical contacts for contaminating film or material. Wipe clean with a soft cloth if necessary.

3. Inspect the hot film wire and thermistor in the center port for damage and for contamination.

DO NOT

ATTEMPT TO CLEAN EITHER OF THESE . If contamination exists, rinse again with deionized water. If rinsing is unsuccessful or hot film wire or thermistor is damaged, replace the EVQ.

7.5.2 EVQ Reassembly

Figure 65 shows the reprocessing kit:

Figure 65.

EVQ Reprocessing Kit

1 Diaphragm

2 Pressure sensor filter

3 Exhalation filter seal

To reassemble the EVQ components

1. After drying the EVQ, remove the pressure sensor filter from the reprocessing kit and install its large diameter into the filter grommet with a twisting motion until flush with the plastic valve body, as shown. The narrow end faces out.

182

Figure 66.

Installing the Pressure Sensor Filter

Figure 67.

Installing the Pressure Sensor Filter

2. Remove the exhalation filter seal from the kit and turn the assembly so its bottom is facing up.

3. Install the seal into the exhalation flow sensor as shown in Figure 68

. Ensure that the seal fits completely within the recess and sits flat.

183

Figure 68.

Installing the Exhalation Filter Seal

1 Exhalation filter seal

4. Remove the diaphragm from the kit and install it. See Figure 69 and

Figure 70

Figure 69.

Installing the Diaphragm

184

Figure 70.

Installing the Diaphragm

1 Diaphragm bead located in the EVQ’s groove.

5. Carefully inspect component placement and the complete assembly.

7.5.3 EVQ Replacement

1. Replace the EVQ any time if cracked or damaged in use. If a malfunction occurs during SST or EST, first readjust or reseat the exhalation flow sensor. If SST or EST errors still occur, replace the exhalation flow sensor.

2. Replace the assembly if damage to the hot film wire or thermistor in the center port is noted.

3. Perform required calibrations. See

Table 38 .

To install the EVQ into the ventilator

1. With the exhalation filter door open, insert the assembly directly under the exhalation valve and push

straight up until it snaps into place. See Figure 71

. To avoid damaging the hot film wire, do not insert fingers into any opening.

2. Install the exhalation filter by sliding it onto the tracks in the door, and orienting the filter’s from patient port through the hole in the door.

3. Close the exhalation filter door and lower the exhalation filter latch.

185

Figure 71.

Installing the EVQ

4. Run flow sensor calibration and SST after EVQ reinstallation.

7.5.4 Storage

1. Pretest the EVQ before storage by installing it into the ventilator and running SST to test the integrity of the

breathing system. See Section 3.9.1.2, SST Test Sequence, page 86

2. After performing SST, remove the assembly and place it into a protective bag or similar covered container.

7.6 Service Personnel Preventive Maintenance

Covidien recommends only qualified service personnel perform preventive maintenance activities. Complete details are described in the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual .

At ventilator startup, and in Service mode, the GUI and status display indicate when there are 500 hours or less before preventive maintenance is due.

Table 41.

Service Preventive Maintenance Frequency

Frequency

Every 12 months

When ventilator location changes by 1000 feet of altitude

Entire ventilator

Part Maintenance

• Run extended self test (EST)

• Test alarm system. See

Sec‐ tion 6.5.5, Alarm Testing, page 144 .

• Perform electrical safety test and inspect ventilator for mechanical damage and for label illegibility.

Primary and extended batteries Perform battery test (as a part of EST in Service mode).

Atmospheric pressure transducer Perform atmospheric pressure transducer calibration.

186

Table 41.

Service Preventive Maintenance Frequency (continued)

Frequency

Every 10 000 operational hours

Part

Internal inspiratory filter

BDU 10K PM kit, p/n 10097275

Every year from date of installation, or sooner as needed.

Oxygen sensor

Maintenance

Replace. Do not attempt to auto‐ clave or reuse.

Replace the components included in the 10K PM kit. Fill out the PM label and attach to the device. See the

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ven‐ tilator Service Manual , Table 7-1 for information on tests required after installation of the BDU 10K PM

Kit.

• Replace the oxygen sensor as needed.

• Calibrate after replacement.

• Actual sensor life depends on operating environment. Oper‐ ation at higher temperature or

% levels will result in shorter sensor life.

Replace.

Every 7 years or sooner as needed Coin cell batteries on GUI and BD

CPU PCBAs

7.7 Safety Checks

Qualified service personnel should perform extended self test (EST) on the ventilator after servicing it at the intervals specified in

Table 41 . See the

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for details on performing EST.

7.8 Inspection and Calibration

Ventilator inspection and calibration should be performed by qualified service personnel at the intervals specified

in Table 41

7.9 Documentation

Qualified service personnel should manually enter the service date, time, and nature of repair/preventive maintenance performed into the log using a keyboard on the GUI.

To manually document a service or preventive maintenance activity

1. Enter Service Mode.

2. Touch the Logs tab.

3. Touch the Service Log tab.

4. Touch Add Entry, and using the buttons to the right of each line, complete the entry.

5. Touch Accept when complete.

7.10 Storage for Extended Periods

To store the ventilator

1. Clean the unit thoroughly.

2. Remove any batteries and accessories.

187

To return the ventilator to service

1. Replace batteries.

2. Recharge batteries prior to patient ventilation. If batteries are older than 3 years, use new batteries.

3. Perform EST and SST prior to patient ventilation.

188

8 Troubleshooting

8.1 Overview

This chapter contains information regarding ventilator logs on the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator.

Warning: To avoid a potential electrical shock, do not attempt to correct any electrical problem with the ventilator while it is connected to AC power.

8.2 Problem Categories

For the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Operator’s Manual, troubleshooting is limited to responding to ventilator alarms and reviewing various ventilator logs. For detailed alarm information, including how to

respond to alarms, see Chapter 6 to address individual alarms that may occur during ventilator use. Qualified

service personnel who have attended the Medtronic training class for Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilators should consult the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for detailed repair information and an interpretation of ventilator diagnostic codes.

8.3 How to Obtain Ventilator Service

To obtain service for the ventilator, call Medtronic Customer Service at 1 800 635 5267 and follow the prompts.

8.4 Used Part Disposal

Follow local governing ordinances and recycling plans regarding disposal or recycling of device components.

Discard all damaged parts removed from the ventilator during the maintenance procedures according to your institution’s protocol. Sterilize contaminated parts before nondestructive disposal.

8.5 Ventilator Logs

The ventilator uses various logs to store event information for later retrieval when managing a patient’s treatment. Some of the logs are accessible during ventilation and some logs are only available to

Medtronic personnel when the ventilator is in Service mode. The Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series

Ventilator Service Manual gives more details regarding logs available to qualified service personnel.

When New Patient is selected during ventilator setup, patient data, ventilator settings, and alarm logs are cleared, but this information is available for service personnel review following New Patient selection when the ventilator is set up.

• Alarms Log — The alarm log records up to 1000 alarms that have occurred, whether they have been reset or autoreset, the priority level, and their analysis messages.

The alarm log is accessible during normal ventilation and in Service mode. A date- and time-stamped entry is made in the log whenever an alarm is detected, escalated, reset or auto-reset. An entry is also made when an audio paused interval begins, ends, or is canceled. If one or more alarms have occurred since the last time the alarm log was viewed, a triangular icon appears on the GUI indicating there are unread items. The alarm log is stored in non-volatile memory (NVRAM) and may be re-displayed after the ventilator’s power is cycled.

If the ventilator enters backup ventilation (BUV) for any reason, this is also entered into the alarm log. The alarm log is cleared by setting the ventilator up for a new patient.

• Settings Log — The settings log records changes to ventilator settings for retrospective analysis of ventilator-patient management. The time and date, old and new settings. and alarm resets are recorded. A maximum of 500 settings changes can be stored in the log. The settings log is cleared when the ventilator is set up for a new patient. The settings log is accessible in normal ventilation mode and Service mode.

189

• Patient Data Log — This log records every minute (up to 4320 patient data entries) consisting of date and time of the entry, patient data name, and the patient data value during ventilator operation. It is cleared when the ventilator is set up for a new patient. Three tabs are contained in the patient data log:

– Vital Patient data — The log contains the same information that the clinician has configured in the patient data banner at the top of the GUI. If the patient data parameters in the banner are changed, these changes are reflected the next time the patient data log is viewed.

– Additional Patient Data – 1 — This log corresponds to the patient data parameters set on page one of the additional patient data banner. A total of 15 parameters are stored here, consisting of date and time of the entry (recorded every minute), patient data name, and the patient data value during ventilator operation.

– Additional Patient Data – 2 — This log corresponds to the patient data parameters set on page two of the additional patient data banner. A total of 10 parameters are stored here, consisting of date and time of the entry (recorded every minute), patient data name, and the patient data value during ventilator operation.

• Diagnostic Log — The Diagnostic Log is accessible during normal ventilation and Service modes and contains tabs for the System Diagnostic Log (default), the System Communication Log, and the EST/SST

Diagnostic Log. The diagnostic log contains tabs for the following:

– System Diagnostic Log — The System Diagnostic Log contains the date and time when an event occurred, the type of event, the diagnostic codes associated with each fault or error that occurred, the type of error that occurred, and any notes. The diagnostic log is not cleared when the ventilator is set up for a new patient.

– System Communication Log — This log contains information generated by the ventilator’s communication software. See the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual, 10128204, for a description of information contained in the System Communication Log.

– EST/SST Diagnostic Log — The EST/SST diagnostic log displays the time, date, test/event, system code, type, and notes.

• EST/SST Status Log — The EST and SST status log displays the time, date, test, test status (passed or failed).

• General Event Log — The general event log contains ventilator-related information not found in any other logs. It includes date and time of compressor on and off, changes in alarm volume, when the ventilator entered and exited Stand-By, GUI key presses, respiratory mechanics maneuvers, O

2 connection, elevate O

2 is not cleared upon new patient setup.

calibration, patient

, and warning notifications. The General event log can display up to 256 entries and

• Service Log — The service log is accessible during normal ventilation and Service modes and contains the nature and type of the service, reference numbers specific to the service event (for example, sensor and actuator ID numbers), manual and automatic serial number input, and the time and date when the service event occurred. It is not cleared upon new patient setup.

To view ventilator logs

1. Touch the clipboard icon in the constant access icon area of the GUI.

The log screen appears with tabs for the various logs.

2. Touch the tab of the log desired.

3. View the information for each parameter desired.

190

Figure 72.

Log Screen

1 Individual logs tabs

2 Pages contained in the log being viewed

Ventilator logs can be saved by entering Service mode, and downloading them via the Ethernet port. See the

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for instructions on downloading ventilator logs.

8.6 Diagnostic Codes

Refer to the diagnostic log for the codes generated during patient ventilation. For more information on the diagnostic codes, contact Medtronic Technical Support.

191

192

9 Accessories

9.1 Overview

This chapter includes accessories that can be used with the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator. See

Table 42

for part numbers of any items available through Covidien.

The following commonly available accessories from the listed manufacturers can be used with the ventilator system:

• Filters —DAR/Covidien, Puritan Bennett

• Heated Humidification Systems —Hudson RCI TM* /Teleflex, Fisher & Paykel TM*

• Patient Circuits —commonly available breathing circuits with standard ISO 15 mm/22 mm connection for neonatal, pediatric, and adult patients. Manufacturers include Fisher & Paykel

RCI TM* /Teleflex.

TM* , DAR, and Hudson

• Masks —ResMed TM* , Respironics TM* , Fisher & Paykel TM*

• Patient Monitoring Systems

—See Section 5.9, Connectivity to External Systems, page 137

for information on systems that can be used with the ventilator

• Nasal Interfaces —Hudson RCI TM* /Teleflex TM* , Fisher & Paykel TM* , Argyle TM*

• Compressed air filter and water trap —Covidien

Warning: The Puritan Bennett™ Series Ventilator contains phthalates. When used as indicated, very limited exposure to trace amounts of phthalates may occur. There is no clear clinical evidence that this degree of exposure increases clinical risk. However, to minimize risk of phthalate exposure in children and nursing or pregnant women, this product should only be used as directed.

9.2 General Accessory Information

The patient circuit support arm (flex arm) can be fastened to the ventilator handle on either the right or left side.

Flex arms used on the Puritan Bennett™ 840 Ventilator System can also be used on the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series

Ventilator System.

193

Figure 73.

Ventilator with Accessories

Figure 74.

Additional Accessories

See

Figure 73, page 194 and Figure 74

for the parts listed in the following table:

Note: Occasionally, part numbers change. If in doubt about a part number, contact your local Covidien representative.

Note: The ventilator is designed with a semi-automated short self test (SST) procedure that, in addition to other tests, measures compliance, resistance, and leak for the ventilator breathing circuit assembly (inspiratory filter, breathing circuit, humidifier chamber ([as applicable}, exhalation filter, and exhalation flow sensor). Reference

Section 3.9.1, SST (Short Self Test), page 86 .

194

When SST is performed according to the instructions provided in

Section 3.9.1

, a ventilator breathing circuit assembly that passes SST for a particular patient type (adult, pediatric, or neonatal) will allow the ventilator to operate within specification for that same patient type. Refer to

Table 56

for acceptable compliance and resistance ranges.

Table 42.

Accessories and Options

Item number

Accessory or option description

Test lung

Drain bag tubing (package of 10)

Part number

10005490

Drain bag (package of 25)

Drain bag tubing clamp, reusable (package of 5)

4-048493-00

4-048491-00

4-048492-00

Pediatric-adult exhalation filtration system (carton of 12), disposable 10043551

980 FRU, exhalation flow sensor

Wall air water trap

Power cord, 10A, RA, USA

Air hose assembly; United States

Oxygen hose assembly; United States

Cylinder mount for compressed air and O

gas

Flex arm assembly

FRU, caster base assembly

Rechargeable lithium-ion battery

Humidifier bracket

Drain bag clip

Inspiratory bacteria filter, disposable, (carton of 50) (DAR)

Condensate vial, permanently attached to disposable exhalation filter

Condensate vial drain cap

10097468

10086051

10081056

4-006541-00

4-001474-00

10086050

10005187

980CASBAS

10086042

10086049

10087137

351U5856

4-074613-00

195

Table 42.

Accessories and Options (continued)

Item number

Not shown

Accessory or option description

Assy, patient circuit, adult dual heated wire, disposable, for F&P

MR850 (Medtronic/DAR)

Adapter cable: 111/1149

Assy, patient circuit, single heated wire, adult, disposable, for F&P

MR850 (Medtronic/DAR)

Adapter cable: 111/1146

Ventilator breathing circuit, adult, dual heated system, disposable

(Fisher & Paykel) a

Ventilator breathing circuit, adult, dual heated, no water traps, dis‐

posable (Hudson RCITM*/Teleflex) a

Assy, patient circuit, with single water trap, heated insp. limb,pedia‐ tric, disposable, F&P MR850 (Medtronic/DAR)

Adapter cable: 111/1146

Assy, patient circuit, dual heated wire, pediatric, disposable, F&P

MR850 (Intersurgical)

Ventilator breathing circuit, pediatric, dual heated, disposable (Hud‐ son RCI™*/ Teleflex)

Assy, patient circuit, neonatal, single heated wire, disposable, incu‐ bator use, for F&P MR850 (Medtronic/DAR)

Adapter cable: 111/1146

Assy, patient circuit, neonatal, single heated wire, disposable, not for incubator use, for F&P MR850 (Medtronic/DAR)

Adapter cable: 111/1146

Ventilator breathing circuit, neonatal, heated insp tube, disposable

(Hudson RCI™*/Teleflex) a

Ventilator breathing circuit, neonatal, dual heated system, dual water traps, disposable (Hudson RCI™*/Teleflex)

Ventilator breathing circuit, neonatal, dual heated system, disposa‐ ble, (Fisher & Paykel)

Neonatal exhalation filtration system, disposable, with condensate vial

Proximal Flow monitoring sensor (disposable, 10/box)

Exhalation valve module reprocessing kit (6/carton)

Gold standard test circuit, 21 inch (for performing EST)

End tidal CO

monitoring option

Integrated Nebulizer Upgrade Option

PB980 Exhaust Port Adapter

Hardware options

Proximal Flow monitoring option

980, USB flash drive

Software options

NeoMode 2.0 Software Upgrade US

High Flow O

Therapy Upgrade Option US

Part number

304S14300

304S14402Z

RT280

870-35 KIT

306S8987

5505850

780-24

307S9910

307/8682

780-06

780-15

RT265

4-076900-00

10047078

10086048

4-018506-00

10084332

980NEB

980EVQADAPT-30

10084331

PT00011076

10096526-US

980HFO2T-US

196

Table 42.

Accessories and Options (continued)

Item number

Not shown

Accessory or option description

IE Sync Trigger Upgrade Option US

NIV plus Software Upgrade Option US

Part number

980IESYNC-US

980NIVPLUS-US a The part numbers listed reflect the breathing circuit manufacturer part numbers and are subject to change. Refer to the breathing circuit manufacturer for exact circuit details regarding ordering information.

197

198

10 Theory of Operations

10.1 Overview

This chapter provides specific details on breath delivery functions of the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator.

The chapter is organized as shown below.

Section number

10.1

10.2

10.3

10.4

10.5

10.6

10.7

10.8

10.9

10.10

10.11

10.12

10.13

10.14

10.15

10.16

10.17

10.18

10.19

Title and Page

Section 10.1, Overview, page 199

Section 10.2, Intended Use, page 200

Section 10.3, Applicable Technology, page 200

Section 10.4, Inspiration—Detection and Initiation, page 201

Section 10.5, Exhalation—Detection and Initiation, page 204

Section 10.6, Compliance and BTPS Compensation, page 205

Section 10.7, Mandatory Breath Delivery, page 208

Section 10.8, Spontaneous Breath Delivery, page 211

Section 10.9, A/C Mode, page 217

Section 10.10, SIMV Mode, page 218

Section 10.11, Spontaneous (SPONT) Mode, page 222

Section 10.12, Apnea Ventilation, page 222

Section 10.13, Detecting Occlusion and Disconnect, page 225

Section 10.14, Respiratory Mechanics, page 227

Section 6.4, Ventilator Settings, page 139

Section 10.16, Safety Net, page 240

Section 10.17, Power On Self Test (POST), page 244

Section 10.18, Short Self Test (SST), page 244

Section 10.19, Extended Self Test (EST), page 244

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

The gas supplies to which the ventilator are connected must be capable of delivering 200 L/min flow with the supply pressure between 241.8 kPa to 599.8 kPa (35 psig and 87 psig). These supplies may be compressed air from an external source (wall or bottled) air or oxygen. (An optional compressor is available to be used as an external air source.)

Air and oxygen hoses connect directly to fittings at the rear of the breath delivery unit (BDU). The flow of each gas is metered by a proportional solenoid (PSOL) valve to achieve the desired mix in the mix module. The flow through each PSOL is monitored by separate flow sensors to ensure the accuracy of the mix. The mixed gases then flow to the inspiratory module.

The blended gas in the inspiratory module is metered by the breath delivery PSOL and monitored by the breath delivery flow sensor to ensure that the gas is delivered to the patient according to the settings specified by the operator. Delivered tidal volumes are corrected to standard respiratory conditions (BTPS) to ensure consistent interpretation by the clinician. The inspiratory module also incorporates the safety valve, which opens to vent excess pressure and allows the patient to breathe room air (if able to do so) in the event of a serous malfunction.

199

An optional compressor, capable of delivering flows of 140 L/min (BTPS) and minute volumes of up to 40 L/min

(BTPS), can be connected to the ventilator. Gas mixing occurs in the accumulator, protected by a relief valve. A one-way valve allows a maximum reverse flow into the gas supply system up to 100 mL/min under normal conditions.

Air and O

gases travel through PSOLs, flow sensors, and one-way valves, and are mixed in the mix module

(according to the operator-set O

concentration), which also has a pressure-relief valve. From here, the gas flows through another PSOL, to the inspiratory pneumatic system, where it passes by a safety valve, then through a one-way valve, an internal bacteria filter, an external bacteria filter, through the humidifier, if used, and then to the patient via the connected breathing circuit.

During exhalation, the gas flows through the expiratory limb of the breathing circuit, through a condensate vial, a bacteria filter, through the exhalation flow sensor, through the exhalation valve, and out the exhaust port. The exhalation valve actively controls PEEP while minimizing pressure overshoots and relieving excess pressures.

Pressure transducers in the inspiratory pneumatic system (PI) and exhalation compartment (PE) monitor pressures for accurately controlling breath delivery.

10.2 Intended Use

This theory of operations is described mainly from a clinical standpoint, discussing how the ventilator responds to various patient inputs, but also including a general description of the ventilator’s components and how they work together to manage breath delivery.

10.3 Applicable Technology

The ventilator’s control is provided by breath delivery (BD) and graphical user interface (GUI) central processing units (CPUs). The BD CPU manages all breath delivery functions and provides background checks on the subsystems required for breath delivery. The GUI CPU controls the primary display, operator input devices, and the alarm system. The status display, a small, non-interactive LCD display located on the breath delivery unit (BDU) is controlled by its own processor. See

Section 2.11.1.3, Status Display, page 42

for more information.

USB, Ethernet, and HDMI interfaces are provided on the ventilator. The USB interface supports items such as transferring data to an external monitor via a serial -over-USB protocol and saving screen captures to a memory

storage device or flash drive. See Section 5.4.3, Comm Port Configuration, page 125 for information on

serial-over-USB data transfer. The Ethernet interface is used by qualified service personnel for accessing ventilator logs and performing software options installation, and the HDMI interface provides the ability to display the GUI screen on an external video display device.

Pressure and flow sensors in the inspiratory and expiratory modules to manage breath delivery processes. Sensor signals are used as feedback to the breath delivery PSOL and exhalation valve controllers. Additional flow and pressure sensors are used in the mix module to control the breathing gas composition. In addition, gas temperature is measured for temperature compensation of flow readings. Atmospheric pressure is measured in the inspiratory module and used for BTPS compensation. The sensor signals are filtered using anti-aliasing filters and sampled with A/D converters. Additional low-pass filters precondition the signals, the signals are then used for controls and display purposes.

Closed-loop control is used to maintain consistent pressure and flow waveforms in the face of changing patient/system conditions. This is accomplished by using the output as a feedback signal that is compared to the operator-set input. The difference between the two is used to drive the system toward the desired output. For example, pressure-control modes use airway pressure as the feedback signal to control gas flow from the ventilator. See the figure below. This diagram shows a schematic drawing of a general feedback control system.

The input is a reference value (e.g., operator preset inspiratory pressure) that is compared to the actual output value (e.g., instantaneous value of airway pressure). The difference between those two values is the error signal.

The error signal is passed to the controller (e.g., the software control algorithm). The controller converts the error

200

signal into a signal that can drive the actuator (e.g., the hardware drivers and valves) to cause a change in the manipulated variable (e.g., inspiratory flow).

Figure 75.

General Feedback Control System

Note: In the diagram above, the “plant” is the patient and the connected breathing circuit.

10.4 Inspiration—Detection and Initiation

When ventilator inspiration occurs, it is called triggering. Breaths are delivered to the patient based on ventilator settings the practitioner has entered and are determined by pressure, flow, or time measurements, or operator action. The ventilator uses the following methods to trigger an inspiration:

• Pressure triggering (P-Trig)

• Flow triggering ( ⩒ -Trig)

• Time-triggering

• Operator-initiated

If the ventilator detects a drop in pressure at the circuit wye or when there is a decrease in base flow measured at the exhalation valve, the patient is said to trigger the breath. Mandatory breaths triggered by the patient are referred to as PIM or patient-initiated mandatory breaths.

All spontaneous breaths are patient-initiated, and are also triggered by a decrease in circuit pressure or measured base flow indicating the patient is initiating an inspiration.

Another term, autotriggering , is used to describe a condition where the ventilator triggers a breath in the absence of the patient’s breathing effort. Autotriggering can be caused by inappropriate ventilator sensitivity settings, water in the patient circuit, or gas leaks in the patient circuit.

10.4.1 Pressure Triggering

If pressure triggering (P-Trig) is selected, the ventilator transitions into inspiration when the pressure at the patient circuit wye drops below positive end expiratory pressure (PEEP) minus the operator-set sensitivity level (P

SENS

). See

Figure 76

. As the patient begins the inspiratory effort and breathes gas from the circuit (event 5, the A-B interval), pressure decreases below PEEP. When the pressure drops below PEEP minus P

SENS

(event 6), the ventilator delivers a PIM breath. The pressure-decline time interval between events A and B determines how aggressive the patient’s inspiratory effort is. A short time interval signifies an aggressive breathing effort. The A-B interval is also affected by P

SENS

. A smaller P

SENS

setting means a shorter A-B time interval. (The minimum P

SENS

setting is limited by autotriggering, and the triggering criteria include filtering algorithms that minimize the probability of autotriggering.)

201

Figure 76.

Inspiration Using Pressure Sensitivity

1 Exhalation

2 Inspiration

3 Event A: (patient inspires)

4 Event B: Patient-triggered inspiration begins

5 A-B interval

6 Operator-set pressure sensitivity

10.4.2 Flow Triggering

If flow triggering ( ⩒ -Trig) is selected the BDU provides a constant gas flow through the ventilator breathing circuit

(called base flow) during exhalation. The base flow is 1.5 L/min greater than the value selected for flow sensitivity

( ⩒

SENS

). See

Figure 77, page 203

represents inspiratory flow.]

where the top graphic represents expiratory flow and the bottom graphic

The ventilator’s breath delivery flow sensor measures the base flow delivered to the circuit and the exhalation flow sensor measures the flow entering the exhalation valve. The ventilator monitors patient flow by measuring the difference between the inspiratory and exhaled flow measurements. If the patient is not inspiring, any difference in measured flows is due to leaks in the breathing system or flow sensor inaccuracy. The clinician can compensate for leaks in the breathing system by increasing ⩒

SENS

to a value equal to desired ⩒

SENS

+ leak flow.

As the patient begins the inspiratory effort and inspires from the base flow, less exhaled flow is measured, while the delivered flow remains constant. See

Figure 77 (event A). As the patient continues to inspire, the difference

between the delivery and exhalation flow sensor measurements increases. The ventilator initiates an inspiration when the difference between the two flow measurements is greater than or equal to the operator-set flow

sensitivity value. See Figure 77

, (event B).

As with pressure triggering, the time delay between onset of the patient’s effort and actual gas delivery depends on:

• How quickly the exhaled flow declines (that is, the aggressiveness of the inspiratory effort). The more aggressive the inspiratory effort, the shorter the interval.

• The flow sensitivity value. The smaller the value, the shorter the delay.

During flow triggering, a backup pressure sensitivity of 2 cmH

2 that the flow trigger fails.

O is present to detect a breath trigger in the event

202

Figure 77.

Inspiration Using Flow Sensitivity

1 Software-set base flow (L/min)

2 Start of patient effort

3 Event A: flow is decreasing

4 Event B: Gas delivery begins

5 Operator-set flow sensitivity

6 1.5 L/min

7 Flow delivered to patient

10.4.3 Time Triggers

The ventilator measures the time interval for each breath and breath phase. If the ventilator is in Assist/Control

(A/C) mode (where the ventilator delivers breaths based on the breath rate setting), a VIM or ventilator initiated mandatory breath is delivered after the appropriate time interval. The duration of the breath in seconds (T b

) is 60/f.

Figure 78.

Breath Activity During Time-triggered Inspiration

1 Breath activity (VIM)

2 Breath activity (PIM)

3 Time period (T b

) =60/f

10.4.4 Operator-initiated Triggers

If the operator presses the manual inspiration key, an OIM (operator-initiated mandatory) breath is delivered. The ventilator will not deliver an OIM under the following conditions:

• During an active inspiration, whether mandatory or spontaneous

• During the restricted phase of exhalation

• During circuit disconnect and occlusion status cycling (OSC) conditions

See

Section 10.7.5

later in this chapter for information on the restricted phase of exhalation.

203

10.5 Exhalation—Detection and Initiation

When exhalation occurs, it is called cycling. Mandatory breaths can be volume-cycled or time-cycled by the ventilator or pressure cycled by the patient. Spontaneous breaths can be flow-cycled or pressure-cycled by the patient or time-cycled by the ventilator. A patient-cycled exhalation relies on measurements such as inspiratory flow rate or airway pressure. The ventilator uses the three methods described below to detect exhalation:

• Airway pressure method (spontaneous breaths)

• Percent peak flow method (spontaneous breaths)

• Time-cycling method (mandatory breaths)

10.5.1 Airway Pressure Method

If expiratory sensitivity (E

SENS

) is set to a value too low for the patient-ventilator combination, a forceful expiratory effort could cause circuit pressure (P

PEAK

) to rise to its limit. The ventilator monitors circuit pressure throughout the inspiratory phase, and initiates an exhalation when the pressure equals the inspiratory pressure (P

I volume support (VS).

) target value + an incremental value. This transition to exhalation occurs during spontaneous pressure-based ventilation and in

Note: The allowable incremental value above the target pressure is 1.5 cmH

O once a portion of inspiration time

(Tn) has elapsed. Before Tn, the incremental value is higher to allow for transient pressure overshoots. For the first

200 of inspiration, the incremental pressure is 10% of the target pressure, up or 8 cmH

O, whichever is greater.

From 200 to Tn, the incremental pressure decreases in a linear fashion from the initial value to 1.5 cmH

Figure 79.

Exhalation via the Airway Pressure Method

1 Pressure target

2 Pressure target +incremental value (n)

3 Start breath

4 200 ms

5 Tn

10.5.2 Percent Peak Flow Method

For spontaneous breath types including PS (pressure supported), TC (tube compensated), and VS (volume supported), the ventilator captures the value of the delivered peak inspiratory flow, then monitors the inspiratory flow decline until the value of current flow to peak flow (expressed as a percentage) is less than or equal to the set

SENS

value. The ventilator then cycles from inspiration into exhalation.

See

Figure 80

for an example of exhalation using this method.

204

Figure 80.

Typical Flow-cycled breath

1 Flow (y-axis)

2 Peak flow

3 E

SENS

= a % of peak flow

SENS

4 Inspiration

5 Exhalation

6 Time (x-axis)

Note: PAV+™ uses a flow-based cycling method, also called E

⩒

MAX

SENS

, but it is expressed in L/min rather than in % of

10.5.3 Time-cycling Method

In pressure ventilation, the set inspiratory time (T ventilation, T

depends on the tidal volume (V

) defines the duration of the inspiratory phase. In volume

) setting, peak flow ( ⩒

MAX

), flow pattern, and plateau time (T

). The ventilator cycles into exhalation when the set T

(pressure ventilation) or computed T

(volume ventilation) lapses.

10.5.4 Backup Methods

There are four backup methods for preventing excessive duration or pressure during inspiration:

Time limit – For adult and pediatric patients, the time limit method ends inspiration and begins exhalation when the duration of a spontaneous inspiration is greater than or equal to [1.99 s +0.02× PBW (kg)] s.

High circuit pressure limit – During any type of inspiration, inspiration ends and exhalation begins when the monitored airway pressure (PCIRC) is greater than or equal to the set high circuit pressure limit.

High ventilator pressure limit – The ventilator transitions from inspiration to exhalation if the high ventilator pressure ( ⤒ P

VENT

) limit of 110 cmH

O is reached.

High inspired tidal volume limit – The high inspired tidal volume limit terminates inspiration and commences exhalation during VC+, VS, tube compensated (TC), or proportionally assisted (PAV+™) breaths if the delivered volume is greater than or equal to ⤒ V

10.6 Compliance and BTPS Compensation

10.6.1 Compliance Compensation in Volume-based Breaths

Compliance compensation accounts for the gas volume not actually delivered to the patient during inspiration.

This gas is known as the compliance volume, VC. VC is the gas lost to pressurizing the breathing circuit and includes the volumes of the patient circuit, any accessories such as a humidifier and water traps, and internal ventilator gas passages.

205

Figure 81.

Square Flow Pattern

1 Flow (y-axis)

2 Actual ⩒

MAX

3 Set ⩒

MAX

Figure 82.

Descending Ramp Flow Pattern

4 Compliance volume (VC)

5 Set V

6 T

VEN_10247_A

1 Flow (y-axis)

2 Actual ⩒

MAX

3 Set ⩒

MAX

4 Compliance volume (VC)

5 Set V

6 T

7 Minimum ⩒

MAX

VEN_10248_A t

206

In the ventilator, an iterative algorithm automatically computes the compliance volume. There is a maximum tubing to- patient compliance ratio to reduce the potential for over-inflation due to an erroneous patient compliance estimation. The maximum ratio is determined by the selected patient circuit type and predicted body weight (PBW):

Factor Compliance volume factor

C pt ckt

Compliance of the patient circuit

The compliance volume is calculated as

C pt

Compliance of the patient

C pt ckt

Compliance volume

Compliance of the patient circuit

P wye

Pressure at the patient wye at the end of the current inspiration

Pressure at the end of the current exhalation

Without automated compliance compensation, practitioners would have to compute VC to estimate the loss of volume in the patient circuit, then increase the V

setting by that amount. Increasing the tidal volume by a single increment to compensate for compliance volume provides only partial compensation, and requires extra effort and understanding by the practitioner. Additionally, P wye

and P can change with time.

An iterative algorithm in the ventilator automatically computes the compliance volume and compensates for it.

Compliance compensation does not change inspiratory time (T amplitude of the selected flow pattern). Keeping T

). It is achieved by increasing flow (increasing the

constant maintains the original I:E ratio.

There is a maximum compliance volume to reduce the potential for overinflation due to an erroneous compliance volume calculation. The maximum compliance volume is determined by the selected patient circuit type and predicted body weight (PBW), and is summarized by this equation:

V comp,max

= Factor x Tidal volume where:

T b

= breath period (seconds) f = set respiratory rate (breaths per minute) where:

V comp,max

= maximum compliance volume

Factor = linear interpolation of the values in Table 43

for adult, pediatric, and neonatal circuit types. Factor is calculated as:

MIN (10, MAX (2.5, 1.0+(2.0/0.3× kg PBW)))

207

Table 43.

Compliance Volume Factors

Adult patient circuit type

PBW (kg) Factor

≤10 5

4.6

3.4

≥150

2.75

2.5

Pediatric patient circuit type

PBW (kg) Factor

≤10 5

12.5

3.5

2.9

2.7

2.5

Neonatal patient circuit type

PBW (kg) Factor

≤0.7

7.67

4.33

≥4.5

3.22

2.5

Note: Compliance compensation calculations are also in effect during exhalation to ensure spirometry accuracy.

If the patient’s compliance decreases beyond the limits of compliance compensation, the ventilator relies on the

⤒ P

PEAK

alarm setting to truncate the breath and switch to exhalation.

10.6.2 BTPS Compensation in Volume-based Breaths

Volumes and flows are BTPS-compensated, that is, they are reported by the ventilator at existing barometric pressure, 37°C (98.6°F), and fully saturated with water vapor.

10.7 Mandatory Breath Delivery

Three mandatory breath types are offered in the ventilator—volume control (VC) which bases breath delivery on the delivered inspiratory tidal volume, pressure control (PC), which bases breath delivery on achieving and sustaining a pressure target for a set period of time, and volume control plus (VC+) which is a pressure-controlled breath based on a target tidal volume. VC+ can be used in situations where a patient’s lungs become more compliant due to treatment as it reduces the target pressure (lessening the forces on the alveoli) to achieve the target tidal volume.

Mandatory breaths are delivered by the ventilator, are either assisted (if patient initiated or PIM), or controlled (if ventilator-initiated or VIM), or initiated by the operator (OIM). In A/C mode, the breath period (T using the breath rate (f ) according to the equation b

) is calculated

If, during T b

, patient effort is detected, a PIM breath is initiated and a new breath period starts. If no patient effort is detected before T b

lapses, the next breath delivered is a VIM, and a new breath period starts.

See

Table 61, page 249 for details on the following VC+ settings:

• Expiratory time (T

)

• I:E ratio

• Inspiratory time (T

)

• Rise time%

• Target or tidal volume (V

)

VC and PC breath types require no initialization. A VC breath is based on meeting a delivered volume target and a PC breath is based on meeting a specific pressure target. VC+ breaths, however, go through a startup routine.

10.7.1 Volume Control (VC)

Volume Control is the control scheme that controls the flow with for the purpose of supplying a predetermined volume (set by the practitioner) to the patient. There are two basic flow wave forms to administer this volume: the square waveform that guarantees a constant flow during the inspiration time, or the descending ramp

waveform whose slope and initial value are determined to provide the required volume target. See Figure 83

and

Figure 84 . The inspiration time is determined indirectly by the characteristics of the selected flow wave.

208

Figure 83.

Ideal Waveform Using Square Flow Pattern

1 Pressure (cmH

2 Flow (L/min)

3 Volume (mL)

4 Inspiratory phase

5 Expiratory phase

6 Constant flow

Figure 84.

Ideal Waveform Using Descending Ramp Flow Pattern

1 Pressure (cmH

2 Flow (L/min)

3 Volume (mL)

4 Inspiratory phase

5 Expiratory phase

6 Descending ramp

10.7.2 Pressure Control (PC)

Pressure Control is the control scheme by which the pressure is controlled at the circuit wye to reach a constant

level (set by the practitioner) during inspiration, and a PEEP level during exhalation. See Figure 85, page 210 . This

level is maintained for a time given by the set inspiration time, following followed by an exhalation regulated by the exhalation valve until the PEEP level is reached. As flow is not predetermined, the supplied volume varies depending on the patient’s pulmonary response.

209

Figure 85.

Ideal Waveform Using Pressure Control Ventilation

1 Pressure (cmH

2 Flow (L/min)

3 Volume (mL)

4 Target pressure

5 PEEP

6 Inspiratory phase

7 Expiratory phase

10.7.3 VC+

VC+ breaths require initialization and must go through a startup routine.

10.7.3.1 VC+ Startup

Up to three test breaths are delivered prior to ventilating the patient with VC+ breaths. The delivered VC+ test breaths are volume control (VC) breaths (if Leak Sync is disabled) using the VC+ settings for V

and inspiratory time and a ramp flow pattern. Delivered peak flows are calculated based on SST tubing compliance, assuming an end-inspiratory pressure of 15 cmH

O above PEEP for adult and pediatric patient types, and 10 cmH for neonatal patient type. After each test breath, the measured delivered volume and the end-inspiratory pressure and end-expiratory pressure are used to estimate the patient’s lung compliance to determine the VC+ pressure target to achieve the set V

O above PEEP

In VC+, if pressure and volume measurements from the test breaths are not valid, then a PC breath is delivered with

of 15 cmH

O for pediatric and adult patients or 10 cmH settings in VC+.

O for neonatal patients using the T

and rise time%

Note: To allow for optimal function of startup and operation of VC+ in the ventilator it is important not to block the tubing while the patient is undergoing suctioning or other treatment that requires disconnection from the ventilator. The ventilator has a disconnect detection algorithm that suspends ventilation while the patient is disconnected.

After VC+ startup, the ventilator will make adjustments to the target pressure to deliver the set volume (V summarized in

Table 44 .

). To reach the desired volume promptly, the maximum allowed pressure adjustments for all patient circuit types are

210

Table 44.

Pressure Adjustment Limits According to Patient Body Weight (PBW)

Condition

Maximum pressure adjustment (up), cmH

Minimum pressure adjust‐ ment (down), cmH

-6

+4.5

-6

7 ≤ PBW <

15 kg

-6

15 ≤ PBW <

20 kg

-8

20 ≤ PBW kg

+10

-10

See

Table 36, page 150 for details on the following VC+ alarms:

• VOLUME NOT DELIVERED

• HIGH INSPIRED TIDAL VOLUME ( ↑ V

)

• LOW CIRCUIT PRESSURE ( ↓ P

PEAK

)

• COMPLIANCE LIMITED V

During VC+, inspiratory target pressure cannot be lower than PEEP+3 cmH

−3 cmH

O and cannot exceed ⤒ P

PEAK

10.7.4 Rise time%

If PC or VC+ is selected as the mandatory type, adjust rise time% for optimum flow delivery into the lungs. Patients with high impedance (low compliance, high resistance) may benefit from a lower rise time% whereas patients with low impedance may better tolerate a more aggressive rise time setting. The rise time% setting specifies the speed at which the inspiratory pressure reaches 95% of the target pressure. The rise time setting applies to PS

(including a setting of 0 cmH

O), PC, VC+, or BiLevel breaths.

To match the flow demand of an actively breathing patient, observe simultaneous pressure-time and flow-time curves, and adjust the rise time% to maintain a smooth rise of pressure to the target value. A rise time% setting reaching the target value well before the end of inspiration can cause the ventilator to supply excess flow to the patient. Whether this oversupply is clinically beneficial must be evaluated for each patient. Generally, the optimum rise time% for gently breathing patients is less than or equal to the default (50%), while optimum rise time% for more aggressively breathing patients can be 50% or higher.

Warning: Under certain clinical circumstances (such as stiff lungs, or a small patient with a weak inspiratory drive), a rise time% setting above 50% could cause a transient pressure overshoot and premature transition to exhalation, or pressure oscillations during inspiration. Carefully evaluate the patient’s condition before setting the rise time

% above the default setting of 50%.

10.7.5 Manual Inspiration

When pressed, the manual inspiration key delivers one OIM breath to the patient, using set breath delivery parameters. The ventilator will not allow a manual inspiration during the restricted phase of exhalation or when the ventilator is in the process of delivering a breath (whether mandatory or spontaneous). All manual inspiration attempts are logged in the General Event log.

The restricted phase of exhalation is the time period during the expiratory phase where an inspiration trigger is not allowed. The restricted phase of exhalation is defined as the first 200 ms of exhalation or the time it takes for expiratory flow to drop to ≤50% of the peak expiratory flow, or the time it takes for the expiratory flow to drop to

≤0.5 L/min (whichever is longest). The restricted phase of exhalation will end after 5 seconds of exhalation have elapsed regardless of the measured expiratory flow rate.

10.8 Spontaneous Breath Delivery

The modes allowing spontaneous breaths are SIMV, SPONT, and BiLevel.

211

The spontaneous breath type setting determines the type of pressure-assist that will be applied to the patient’s spontaneous breaths (PS, TC, VS, or PAV+™).

After selecting the spontaneous breath type, choose the level of pressure support (P

T SUPP

) for VS or percent support for TC and PAV+™ and specify the rise time% and E

SENS

) for PS, Support volume

, where available. Changes to the spontaneous breath type setting phase in at the start of the next inspiration.

SUPP

Note: In any delivered spontaneous breath, either invasive or NIV, there is always a target inspiratory pressure of at least 1.5 cmH

O applied.

During spontaneous breathing, the patient’s respiratory control center rhythmically activates the inspiratory muscles. The support type setting allows selection of pressure-assist to supplement the patient’s pressure-generating capability.

Table 45.

Spontaneous Breath Delivery Characteristics

Characteristic

Inspiratory detection

Pressure or flow during inspiration

Spontaneous type =PS and

SUPP

<5 cmH

Implementation

SENS

or ⩒

SENS

depending on the trigger type selected.

Pressure rises according to the selected rise time% and PBW setting, with target pressure equal to the effective pressure +PEEP:

SUPP

Effective pressure (cmH

0 1.5

2.2

2.9

3.6

4.3

Pressure rises according to the selected rise time% and PBW setting, and target pressure equals P

SUPP

+PEEP.

Pressure or flow during inspiration

Spontaneous type =PS and

SUPP

≥5 cmH

Pressure or flow during inspiration

Spontaneous type =VS

Tube compensation (TC)

Pressure rises according to the selected rise time% and PBW setting, and target pressure equals the pressure determined during the test breath or pressure target determined from assessment of delivered volume from

the previous breath. For more information on VS, see Section 10.8.2, Volume

Support (VS), page 213

Tube compensation provides programmable, inspiratory pressure assis‐ tance during otherwise unsupported spontaneous breaths. This assists the patient in overcoming the flow resistance of the artificial airway. Pres‐ sure is programmed to help the patient overcome part or all of the resist‐ ance of the artificial airway. The ventilator continuously calculates the pressure differential based on tube type and tube ID and adjusts the compensation pressure accordingly. For more information regarding TC,

see Section 4.5.1.1, Tube Compensation, page 105

Inspiratory flow profile The inspiratory flow profile is determined by patient demand and the rise time% setting. As the rise time% setting is increased from minimum to maximum, the time to achieve the pressure target decreases. The maxi‐ mum available flow is up to 30 L/min for neonatal circuit types, 80 L/min for pediatric circuit types, and up to 200 L/min for adult circuit types with‐ out Leak Sync.

Exhalation valve during inspiration Adjusts to minimize pressure overshoot and maintain the target pressure.

Inspiratory valve during inspiration Adjust to maintain target pressure. Because the exhalation valve acts as a relief valve venting any excess flow, inspiratory flow can be delivered aggressively and allows reduced work of breathing.

212

Table 45.

Spontaneous Breath Delivery Characteristics (continued)

Characteristic

Expiratory detection

Implementation

The end-inspiratory flow or airway pressure method, whichever detects exhalation first. Time backup and the ↑ P backup strategies.

PEAK

alarm are also available as

Pressure or flow during exhalation Pressure is controlled to PEEP. For pressure triggering: set to deliver a bias flow of 1 L/min. For flow triggering: set to deliver base flow.

Inspiratory valves during exhalation For pressure triggering: set to deliver a bias flow of 1 L/min. For flow trig‐ gering: set to deliver base flow near the end of expiratory flow.

Exhalation valve during exhalation Adjusts to maintain the operator-selected value for PEEP.

10.8.1 Pressure Support (PS)

Pressure Support is a type of spontaneous breath, similar to PC, by which the pressure is controlled to reach a constant value, preset by the practitioner, once an inspiratory effort is detected. This target value is held until the detection of end of inspiration. Subsequently, the exhalation valve control initiates the exhalation, driving the pressure to the PEEP level.

10.8.2 Volume Support (VS)

Volume support is a pressure-supported spontaneous breath type available when SPONT is selected as the mode.

The target support volume (V

T SUPP

) is the target volume for pressure supported breaths.

See

Table 61, page 249 for details regarding the following VS settings:

• Expiratory sensitivity (E

SENS

)

• Rise time%

• Target support volume (V

T SUPP

)

10.8.2.1 Technical Description

Volume Support (VS) breaths are patient-triggered, pressure-supported spontaneous breaths. The VS algorithm varies the inspiratory pressure of each breath to deliver the operator-set target tidal volume (V

T SUPP

). If the delivered volume for a breath is above or below the set target volume, VS adjusts the target pressure for the next breath up or down, as necessary, to deliver more or less volume. As the patient’s condition improves allowing more patient control over spontaneous ventilation, the VS algorithm decreases the amount of inspiratory pressure necessary to deliver the target volume. Conversely, VS increases inspiratory pressure if the patient’s respiratory drive becomes compromised.

In the absence of leaks or changes in patient resistance or compliance, Volume Support achieves and maintains a steady, breath-to-breath tidal volume within five breaths of VS initiation or startup.

During VS, the inspiratory pressure target cannot be lower than PEEP+1.5 cmH

−3 cmH

O, and cannot exceed ⤒ P

PEAK

10.8.2.2 VS Startup

Test breaths are delivered prior to ventilating the patient with VS breaths. The delivered VS test breaths are pressure support breaths using a P

SUPP

value of 15 cmH

O for pediatric and adult patients or 10 cmH

O for neonatal patients. The test breaths use the E

SENS

and rise time% settings in VS. After each test breath, the measured delivered volume and the end-inspiratory pressure and end-expiratory pressure are used to estimate the patient’s lung compliance to determine the VS pressure target to achieve the set V

In VS, if pressure and volume measurements from test breaths are not valid, VS startup continues delivering test breaths until the pressure and volume measurements are valid.

213

Note: To allow for optimal function of startup and operation of VS in the ventilator it is important not to block the tubing while the patient is undergoing suctioning or other treatment that requires disconnection from the ventilator. The ventilator has a disconnect detection algorithm that suspends ventilation while the patient is disconnected.

After VS startup, the ventilator makes adjustments to the target pressure in order to deliver the set volume (V

SUPP

). To reach the desired volume promptly, the maximum allowed pressure adjustments for all patient circuit types are summarized in

Table 46 .

Table 46.

Pressure Adjustment Limits According to Patient Body Weight (PBW)

Condition

Maximum pressure adjustment (up), cmH

Minimum pressure adjust‐ ment (down), cmH

-6

+4.5

-6

7 ≤ PBW <

15 kg

-6

15 ≤ PBW <

20 kg

-8

20 ≤ PBW kg

+10

-10

See

Table 36, page 150 for details on the following VS alarms:

• VOLUME NOT DELIVERED

• COMPLIANCE LIMITED V

• HIGH INSPIRED TIDAL VOLUME ( ↑ V

)

10.8.2.3 Monitored Patient Data

For details on the spontaneous inspired tidal volume patient data parameter available during VS breaths, see

Table 61, page 249

10.8.3 Tube Compensation

Tube compensation (TC) is a pressure-supported spontaneous breath type available in SIMV, SPONT and BiLevel modes. When TC is enabled, the patient’s respiratory muscles are not required to work as hard to draw gases into the lungs as they would in the absence of the pressure assistance provided by the TC feature. This is particularly important for patients whose respiratory systems are already functioning poorly, and would have to exert even greater muscular effort to overcome the increased resistance to flow through the artificial airway.

TC provides programmable, inspiratory pressure assistance during otherwise unsupported spontaneous breaths.

This assists the patient in overcoming the flow resistance of the artificial airway. Pressure is programmed to vary in accordance with the resistance to flow of the artificial airway. The ventilator continuously calculates the pressure differential and adjusts the compensation pressure accordingly.

TC also includes safety protection, safety checks, and logic checks that prevent the operator from entering certain incompatible settings, such as a large airway size paired with a small predicted body weight.

If the type of humidifier has been changed after running SST with TC, the volume can be adjusted at the same time to avoid a reduction in compensation compliance accuracy.

10.8.3.1 Technical Description

TC is a spontaneous mode enhancement that assists patients’ spontaneous breaths not already supported by specific pressure-based breath types (such as PS, VS, and PAV+™) by delivering positive pressure proportional to the flow-based, resistive pressure developed across the artificial airway. TC causes the sensation of breathing through an artificial airway to diminish because the TC algorithm instructs the ventilator to develop just the correct amount of forward pressure to offset (cancel) the back pressure developed across the artificial airway during the inspiratory phase. The degree of cancellation can be set by the clinician and is adjustable between 10% an 100% in increments of 5%.

214

TC can support all unsupported spontaneous breaths for patients with predicted body weights ≥7.0 kg (15.4 lb), and for endotracheal/tracheostomy tubes with an inside diameter (ID) of ≥4.5 mm. TC can be used within SPONT,

BiLevel or SIMV, all of which permit unsupported spontaneous breaths. With BiLevel selected, TC supports spontaneous breaths at both pressure levels.

TC checks the flow rate every 5, using an internal lookup table that contains the flow-to-pressure relationship of the selected artificial airway, and is used to calculate the amount of pressure needed to overcome all or part of the resistance of the artificial airway. Based on the TC setting and the instantaneous flow measurement, the ventilator’s PSOL valves are continually adjusted, adjusting the circuit pressure to match the changing tube-pressure compensation requirements.

10.8.3.2 Tube Compensation Alarms

For details of the ↑ P

COMP

, ↑ P

VENT

, and ↑ V

alarms associated with TC, see

Table 36, page 150

10.8.3.3 Monitored Patient Data

For details of the inspired tidal volume (V

page 249 .

) monitored patient data parameter a associated with TC, see

Table 61,

10.8.3.4 Tube Inside Diameter (ID)

The ventilator uses soft bound and hard bound values for estimated tube inside diameter (ID) based on PBW. Soft bounds are ventilator settings that have reached their recommended high or low limits. When adjusting the tube size, if the inside diameter does not align with a valid predicted body weight, a Continue button appears. Setting the ventilator beyond these soft bounds requires the operator to acknowledge the prompt by touching the

Continue button before continuing to adjust the tube size. The limit beyond which the tube ID cannot be adjusted is called a hard bound, and the ventilator emits an invalid entry tone when a hard bound is reached.

Warning: Greater than expected ventilatory support, leading to unknown harm, can result if the specified tube type or tube ID is smaller than the actual tube type or tube ID.

10.8.3.5 Ventilator Settings/Guidelines

The estimation of settings to use with TC is aided by an understanding of: the ventilator settings, the data used for determination of the compensation values, and the specified performance or accuracy of the TC function.

The setting for ⤒ P

PEAK

must take the estimated tube compensation into consideration. The target pressure

(compensation) at the patient wye is derived from the knowledge of the approximate airway resistance of the ET or tracheostomy tube being used. The compensation pressure in cmH

O for available tube sizes and gas flows is shown. See

Figure 86, page 216 and Figure 87, page 216

. The estimated compensation must be added to the value of PEEP for calculation and setting of ⤒ P

PEAK

10.8.3.6 Specified Performance

Performance using TC is specified to be ±(0.5+10% of actual) joules/liter (residual work during inspiration at the

100% support (% Supp) level). Work is computed over the entire inspiratory interval. In terms of ventilation, resistive work is given by the following equation:

E END

Work [J/L]

End expiratory pressure

P k

Tracheal pressure

Conversion constant (0.098) [J/cmH

O × L]

Figure 86 and Figure 87

indicate pressures at steady-state flows for ET tubes and tracheostomy tubes, respectively, at 100% support at the wye for sizes between 4.5 mm and 10 mm.

215

Figure 86.

ET Tube Target Pressure vs. Flow

1 Pressure (cmH

2 Flow (L/min)

Figure 87.

Tracheostomy Tube Target Pressure vs. Flow

1 Pressure (cmH

2 Flow (L/min)

216

10.8.4 Proportional Assist Ventilation (PAV+™)

PAV+™ is another available type of spontaneous breath. For detailed description of the operating theory, see

Chapter 14 .

10.9 A/C Mode

When the ventilator is in assist-control (A/C) mode, only mandatory breaths are delivered. These mandatory breaths can be PC, VC, or VC+ breaths. See

Section 10.7, Mandatory Breath Delivery, page 208 for a more detailed

explanation of VC+ breaths. As for any mandatory breath, the triggering methods can be P-Trig, ⩒ -Trig, time-triggered, or operator initiated. If the ventilator senses the patient initiating the breath, a PIM or assist breath is delivered. Otherwise, VIM breaths ( control breaths ) are delivered based on the set respiratory rate. The length of the breath period is defined as: where:

T b

= breath period (seconds) f = set respiratory rate (breaths per minute)

The inspiratory phase length is determined by the current breath delivery settings. At the end of the inspiratory phase, the ventilator enters the expiratory phase as determined by the following equation: where:

= length of the expiratory phase (seconds)

= length of inspiratory phase including plateau time, T

(seconds)

Figure 88 illustrates A/C breath delivery when there is no patient inspiratory effort detected (all inspirations are

VIMs).

Figure 88.

No Patient Inspiratory Effort Detected 10

1 VIM

2 Tb

Figure 89 shows A/C breath delivery when patient inspiratory effort is detected. The ventilator allows PIM breaths

to be delivered at a rate greater than or equal to the set respiratory rate.

217

Figure 89.

Patient Inspiratory Effort Detected

1 PIM

2 Tb set

Figure 90 illustrates A/C breath delivery when there are both PIM and VIM breaths. delivered.

Figure 90.

Combined VIM and PIM Breaths

1 VIM

2 PIM

3 Tb set

If changes to the respiratory rate are made, they are phased in during exhalation only. The new breath period depends on the new respiratory rate, is based on the start of the current breath, and follows these rules:

• The current breath’s inspiratory time is not changed.

• A new inspiration is not delivered until at least 200 ms of exhalation have elapsed.

• The maximum time t until the first VIM for the new respiratory rate is delivered is 3.5 times the current inspiratory time or the length of the new breath period (whichever is longer), but t is no longer than the old breath period.

• If the patient generates a PIM after the ventilator recognizes the rate change and before time t, the new rate begins with the PIM.

10.9.1 Changing to A/C Mode

Switching to A/C mode from any other mode causes the ventilator to phase in a VIM and set the start time for the beginning of the next A/C breath period. Following this VIM, and before the next A/C period begins, the ventilator responds to the patient’s inspiratory efforts by delivering mandatory breaths.

The first A/C breath (VIM breath) is phased in while following these rules:

• The breath is not delivered during an inspiration.

• The breath is not delivered during the restricted phase of exhalation.

• The ventilator ensures the apnea interval elapses at least 5 seconds after the beginning of exhalation.

• Any other specially scheduled event (for example, a respiratory mechanics maneuver or any pause maneuver) is canceled and rescheduled at the next interval.

When the first VIM of the new A/C mode is delivered depends on the mode and breath type active when the mode change is requested.

10.10 SIMV Mode

Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation (SIMV) mode is a mixed ventilation mode allowing both mandatory and spontaneous breaths using pressure- or flow-triggering. The mandatory breaths can be PC, VC,

218

or VC+, and the spontaneous breaths are pressure-assisted with either PS or TC. SIMV guarantees one mandatory breath per SIMV breath period, which is either a PIM or VIM. OIM breaths are allowed in SIMV and are delivered at

the setting selected for mandatory type. Figure 91

shows the two parts of the SIMV breath period.

Figure 91.

Mandatory and Spontaneous Intervals

1 Tb= SIMV breath period (includes Tm and Ts)

2 Tm= Mandatory interval (reserved for a PIM breath)

3 Ts= Spontaneous interval (VIM delivered if no PIM delivered during Tm)

The first part of the period is the mandatory interval (Tm) which is reserved for a PIM. If a PIM is delivered, the Tm interval ends and the ventilator switches to the second part of the period, the spontaneous interval (Ts), which is reserved for spontaneous breathing for the remainder of the breath period. At the end of an SIMV breath period, the cycle repeats. If a PIM is not delivered during the mandatory interval, the ventilator delivers a VIM at the end

of the mandatory interval, then switches to the spontaneous interval. Figure 92 shows an SIMV breath period

where a PIM is delivered within the mandatory interval. Any subsequent trigger efforts during Ts yield spontaneous breaths. As shown, Tm transitions to Ts when a PIM is delivered.

Figure 92.

PIM Delivered Within Mandatory Interval

1 PIM

2 Tm (Tm transitions to Ts when a PIM is delivered)

3 Ts (subsequent trigger efforts during Ts yield spontaneous breaths)

4 Tb

Figure 93 shows an SIMV breath period where a PIM is not delivered within the mandatory interval.

Figure 93.

PIM Not Delivered Within Mandatory Interval

1 VIM

2 Tm (VIM delivered at end of Tm if no PIM delivered during Tm)

3 Ts

4 Tb

In SIMV, mandatory breaths are identical to those in A/C mode if the ventilator’s respiratory rate setting is greater than the patient’s natural respiratory rate. Spontaneous breaths are identical to those in SPONT mode if the ventilator setting for respiratory rate is significantly below the patient’s natural respiratory rate. Patient triggering must meet the requirements for pressure and flow sensitivity.

219

The procedure for setting the respiratory rate in SIMV is the same as in A/C mode. Once the respiratory rate (f ) is set, the SIMV interval period Tb in seconds is:

T b

= 60/f

During the mandatory interval, if the patient triggers a breath according to the current setting for pressure or flow sensitivity, the ventilator delivers a PIM. Once a mandatory breath is triggered, Tm ends, Ts begins, and any further trigger efforts yield spontaneous breaths. During the spontaneous interval, the patient can take as many spontaneous breaths as allowed. If no PIM or OIM is delivered by the end of the mandatory interval, the ventilator delivers a VIM and transitions to the spontaneous interval at the beginning of the VIM.

The SIMV breathing algorithm delivers one mandatory breath each period interval, regardless of the patient’s ability to breathe spontaneously. Once a PIM or VIM is delivered, all successful patient efforts yield spontaneous breaths until the cycle interval ends. The ventilator delivers one mandatory breath during the mandatory interval, regardless of the number of successful patient efforts detected during the spontaneous interval. (An OIM delivered during the mandatory interval satisfies the mandatory breath requirement, and causes Tm to transition to Ts.)

The maximum mandatory interval for any valid respiratory rate setting in SIMV is defined as the lesser of:

• 0.6× the SIMV interval period (Tb)

• 10 s

There is no minimum value for Tm.

In SIMV, the interval from mandatory breath to mandatory breath can be as long as 1.6 times the SIMV period interval (but no longer than the period interval +10 s. At high respiratory rates and too-large tidal volumes, breath stacking (the delivery of a second inspiration before the first exhalation is complete) is likely. In volume ventilation, breath stacking during inspiration and early exhalation leads to hyperinflation and increased airway and lung pressures, which can be detected by a high pressure limit alarm. In pressure control ventilation (with inspiratory pressure remaining constant), breath stacking leads to reduced tidal volumes, which can be detected by the low tidal volume and minute ventilation alarms.

In SIMV mode it is possible for the respiratory rate to drop temporarily below the f setting (unlike A/C mode, in which f

TOT

is always greater than or equal to the f setting). If the patient triggers a breath at the beginning of a breath period, then does not trigger another breath until the maximum mandatory interval for the following breath has elapsed, a monitored respiratory rate less than the respiratory rate setting can result.

If a spontaneous breath occurs toward the end of the spontaneous interval, inspiration or exhalation can still be in progress when the SIMV interval ends. No VIM, PIM, or OIM is allowed during the restricted phase of exhalation.

In the extreme, one or more expected mandatory breaths could be omitted. When the expiratory phase of the spontaneous breath ends, the ventilator reverts to its normal criteria for delivering mandatory breaths.

If an OIM is detected during the mandatory interval, the ventilator delivers the currently specified mandatory breath then closes Tm and transitions to Ts. If an OIM is detected during the spontaneous interval, the ventilator delivers the currently specified mandatory breath, but the SIMV cycle timing does not restart if OIM breaths are delivered during Ts.

10.10.1 Changing to SIMV Mode

Switching the ventilator to SIMV from any other mode, causes the ventilator to phase in a VIM and set the start time for the next SIMV period. Following this VIM, but before the next SIMV period begins, the ventilator responds to successful patient inspiratory efforts by delivering spontaneous breaths. The first SIMV VIM breath is phased in according to the following rules:

• The VIM breath is not delivered during an inspiration or during the restricted phase of exhalation.

• If the current mode is A/C, the first SIMV VIM is delivered after the restricted phase of exhalation plus the shortest of the following intervals, referenced to the beginning of the last or current inspiration: 3.5×T

, or the length of the current breath period.

, current

220

• If the current mode is SPONT, and the current or last breath type was spontaneous or OIM, the first SIMV VIM is delivered after the restricted phase of exhalation plus the shortest of the following intervals, referenced to the beginning of the last or current inspiration: 3.5×T

, or current T

• If the current mode is BiLevel in the PH state and the current breath is mandatory, the PEEP level will be reduced to P

once the expiratory phase is detected.

• The time t until the first VIM of the new A/C mode is the lesser of:

– PEEP transition time +2.5 × duration of the active gas delivery phase

– the length of the apnea interval (T

)

– the length of the current breath cycle

• If the current mode is BiLevel in the P

state and the current breath is spontaneous, the PEEP level will be reduced once the expiratory phase is detected.

• The time t until the first VIM of the new A/C mode is the lesser of:

– PEEP transition time +2.5× duration of the spontaneous inspiration

– the start time of the spontaneous breath + the length of the apnea interval (T

• If the current mode is BiLevel in the P

L of the new A/C mode is the lesser of:

state and the current breath is mandatory, the time t until the first VIM

– PEEP transition time +2.5 × duration of the active gas delivery phase

– the length of the apnea interval (T

)

– the length of the current breath cycle

• If the current mode is BiLevel in the P

L time has occurred during P

state and the current breath is spontaneous and the spontaneous start

, the time t until the first VIM of the new A/C mode is the lesser of:

– 3.5 × duration of the spontaneous inspiration

– the length of the apnea interval (T

)

– the length of the current breath cycle

• If the current mode is BiLevel in the P

L time has occurred during P

state and the current breath is spontaneous and the spontaneous start

, the time t until the first VIM of the new A/C mode is the lesser of:

– PEEP transition time +2.5 × duration of the spontaneous inspiration

– the start time of the spontaneous breath + the length of the apnea interval (T

)

If the command to change to SIMV occurs after the restricted phase of exhalation has ended, and before a next breath or the apnea interval has elapsed, the ventilator delivers the first SIMV VIM at the moment the command is recognized.

The point at which the new rate is phased in depends on the current phase of the SIMV interval and when the rate change command is accepted. If the rate change occurs during the mandatory interval, the maximum mandatory interval is that for the new or old rate, whichever is less. If the patient generates a successful inspiratory effort during the spontaneous interval, the ventilator responds by delivering a spontaneous breath.

Respiratory rate changes are phased in during exhalation only. The new SIMV interval is determined by the new respiratory rate and is referenced to the start of the current SIMV period interval, following these rules:

• Inspiratory time (T

) of current breath is neither truncated nor extended.

• The new inspiration is not delivered until 200 ms of exhalation have elapsed.

The time until the new SIMV interval begins is:

• Whichever is greater: the new SIMV period interval or 3.5× the last or current T

• Not greater than the current SIMV period interval.

221

10.11 Spontaneous (SPONT) Mode

In SPONT mode, the patient initiates inspiration according to the trigger type in effect, but OIM breaths are allowed and are delivered with the currently specified mandatory breath parameters. The following spontaneous breath types are available in SPONT mode:

• PS

• VS

• TC

• PAV+™

The inspiratory phase begins when the ventilator detects patient effort during the ventilator’s expiratory phase.

Breath delivery during the inspiratory phase is determined by the settings for pressure support, PEEP, rise time%, and expiratory sensitivity, unless the breath is an OIM breath.

If TC or PAV+™ is selected as the spontaneous type, breath delivery during the inspiratory phase is determined by the settings for% support (% Supp), expiratory sensitivity, tube ID, and tube type.

Note: Given the current ventilator settings, if PAV+™ would be an allowable spontaneous type (except that tube

ID <6 mm) then PAV+™ becomes selectable. If selected, tube ID is set to its New Patient default value based on the

PBW entered. An attention icon for tube ID appears.

If volume support (VS) is selected as the spontaneous type, breath delivery during the inspiratory phase is determined by rise time%, volume support level (V

T SUPP

), expiratory sensitivity, and PEEP.

Inspiratory pause maneuvers are only possible during OIM breaths, and expiratory pause maneuvers are not allowed during SPONT.

Expiratory trigger methods include:

• E

SENS

(% flow deceleration from peak inspiratory flow)

• PBW based time limit (T

too long)

• ↑ P

PEAK

• Inspiratory tidal volume limit (for VS only)

• Airway pressure cycling method

10.11.1 Changing to SPONT Mode

If the operator changes to SPONT mode during an A/C or SIMV inspiration (mandatory or spontaneous), the inspiration is completed, unaffected by the mode change. Because SPONT mode has no special breath timing requirements, the ventilator then enters the expiratory phase and waits for the detection of patient inspiratory effort, a manual inspiration, or apnea detection.

10.12 Apnea Ventilation

When a patient stops breathing or is no longer being ventilated, it is called apnea. When apnea is detected by the ventilator, the ventilator alarms and delivers apnea ventilation according to the current apnea ventilation settings.

10.12.1 Apnea Detection

The ventilator declares apnea when no breath has been delivered by the time the operator-selected apnea interval elapses, plus a small increment of time (350). This increment allows time for a patient who has begun to initiate a breath to trigger inspiration and prevent the ventilator from declaring apnea when the apnea interval is equal to the breath period.

The apnea timer resets whenever an inspiration begins, regardless of whether the inspiration is patient-triggered, ventilator-triggered, or operator-initiated. The ventilator then sets a new apnea interval beginning from the start of the current inspiration. To hold off apnea ventilation, another inspiration must be delivered before (the current

222

apnea interval +350) elapses. Apnea detection is suspended during a disconnect, occlusion, or safety valve open

(SVO) state.

Apnea is not declared when the apnea interval setting equals or exceeds the breath period. For example, if the respiratory rate setting is 4/min, an apnea interval of 15 seconds or more means apnea cannot be detected. The ventilator bases apnea detection on inspiratory (not expiratory) flow, and allows detection of a disconnect or occlusion during apnea ventilation. Apnea detection is designed to accommodate interruptions to the typical breathing pattern due to other ventilator features that temporarily extend the inspiratory or expiratory intervals

(rate changes, for example) but still detect a true apnea event.

Figure 94 shows an apnea breath where T

equals the breath period.

Figure 94.

Apnea Interval Equals Breath Period

1 Tb0

2 Tb1

3 PIM

4 T

(apnea interval)

Figure 95 shows an apnea breath with T

greater than the breath period.

Figure 95.

Apnea Interval Greater Than Breath Period

1 Tb0

2 Tb1

3 PIM

4 VIM

5 T

(apnea interval)

Figure 96 shows an apnea breath with T

less than the breath period.

Figure 96.

Apnea Interval Less Than Breath Period

223

1 Tb0

2 Tb1

3 PIM

4 Dashed line indicates a PIM to avoid apnea

5 Apnea VIM

6 Apnea interval

7 Apnea Tb0

8 Apnea ventilation

9 Tb (T

<Tb)

10.12.2 Transition to Apnea Ventilation

When apnea is declared, the ventilator delivers apnea ventilation according to the current apnea ventilation settings and displays the apnea settings on the graphical user interface (GUI). Regardless of the apnea interval setting, apnea ventilation cannot begin until inspiration of the current breath is complete and the restricted phase of exhalation has elapsed.

10.12.3 Settings Changes During Apnea Ventilation

All apnea and non-apnea settings remain active on the GUI during apnea ventilation. Both non-apnea and apnea settings changes are phased in according to the applicable rules. If apnea ventilation is active, new settings are accepted but not implemented until non-apnea ventilation begins. Allowing key entries after apnea detection allows adjustment of the apnea interval at setup, regardless of whether apnea has been detected. During apnea ventilation, the manual inspiration key is active, but expiratory pause and inspiratory pause keys are not active. The increase O

control is active during apnea ventilation, because apnea detection is likely during suctioning.

The apnea respiratory rate must be ≥60/T

. Additionally, apnea settings cannot result in an I:E ratio >1.00:1.

10.12.4 Resetting Apnea Ventilation

Apnea ventilation is intended as an auxiliary mode of ventilation when there is insufficient breath delivery to the patient over a specified period of time. Apnea ventilation can be reset to normal ventilation by the operator (by pressing the alarm reset key) or the patient (autoreset). It is also reset when a rate change is made that renders apnea ventilation inapplicable.

If the patient regains inspiratory control, the ventilator returns to the operator-selected mode of non-apnea ventilation. The ventilator determines whether the patient has regained respiratory control by monitoring triggered inspirations and exhaled volume. With exception of PAV+ and TC breath types, if the patient triggers two consecutive inspirations, and the exhaled volume is equal to or greater than 50% of the delivered volume

(including any compliance volume), the ventilator resets to non-apnea ventilation. Exhaled volume is monitored to avoid resetting due to autotriggering caused by large leaks in the patient circuit. During PAV+ and TC, on the first patient triggered breath, the ventilator returns to PAV+ or TC. PAV+ reenters its Startup phase to estimate the patient’s respiratory mechanics values. TC begins immediately at the set percent support.

10.12.5 Apnea Ventilation in SIMV

The following strategy is designed to allow SIMV to avoid triggering apnea ventilation if a VIM breath can be delivered instead:

• If the apnea interval (T

) elapses at any time during the mandatory interval, the ventilator delivers a VIM rather than beginning apnea ventilation.

• If T

elapses during the spontaneous interval, apnea ventilation begins.

Figure 97

shows an illustration of how SIMV is designed to deliver a VIM rather than trigger apnea ventilation, when possible.

224

Figure 97.

Apnea Ventilation in SIMV

1 Tb

2 Last breath (PIM)

3 VIM

4 Tm max

5 T

6 Tm (If T

elapses during Tm, the ventilator delivers a VIM rather than beginning apnea ventilation

7 Ts

10.12.6 Phasing in New Apnea Intervals

How a new apnea interval is phased in depends on whether or not apnea ventilation is active. If apnea ventilation is active, the ventilator accepts and implements the new setting immediately. During normal ventilation (that is, apnea ventilation is not active), these rules apply

• If the new apnea interval setting is shorter than the current (or temporarily extended) apnea interval, the new value is implemented at the next inspiration.

• If the new apnea interval setting is longer than the current (or temporarily extended) apnea interval, the old interval is extended to match the new interval immediately.

10.13 Detecting Occlusion and Disconnect

10.13.1 Occlusion

The ventilator detects severe patient circuit occlusions to protect the patient from excessive airway pressures, or from receiving little or no gas. Occlusions require immediate attention to remedy.

The ventilator detects a severe occlusion if:

• The inspiratory or expiratory limb of the breathing circuit is partially or completely occluded (condensate or secretions collected in a gravity-dependent loop, kinked or crimped tubing, etc.).

• The ventilator exhaust port is blocked or resistance through the port is too high.

The ventilator checks the patient circuit for occlusions during all modes of breathing (except Stand-By state and safety valve open) at delivery of every breath. Once the circuit check begins, the ventilator detects a severe occlusion of the patient circuit within 200 ms. The ventilator checks the exhaust port for occlusions during the expiratory phase of every breath (except during disconnect and safety valve open). Once the exhaust port check begins, the ventilator detects a severe occlusion within 100 ms following the first 200 ms of exhalation. All occlusion checking is disabled during pressure sensor autozeroing.

When an occlusion is detected, an alarm sounds, the ventilator enters the OSC (occlusion status cycling) state and displays a message indicating the length of time the patient has gone without ventilation (how long the ventilator has been in OSC). This alarm has the capability to autoreset, as occlusions such as those due to patient activity (for example, crimped or kinked tubing) can correct themselves.

Once a severe occlusion is detected, the ventilator acts to minimize airway pressure. Because any severe occlusion places the patient at risk, the ventilator minimizes the risk while displaying the length of time the patient has been without ventilatory support. Severe occlusion is detected regardless of what mode or triggering strategy is in effect. When a severe occlusion is detected, the ventilator terminates normal ventilation, terminates any active

225

audio paused interval, annunciates an occlusion alarm, and enters the safe state (exhalation and inspiratory valve deenergized and safety valve open) for 15 seconds or until inspiratory pressure drops to 5 cmH whichever comes first.

O or less,

During a severe occlusion, the ventilator enters OSC, in which it periodically attempts to deliver a pressure-based breath while monitoring the inspiratory and expiratory phases for the existence of a severe occlusion. If the severe occlusion is corrected, the ventilator detects the corrected condition after two complete OSC breath periods during which no occlusion is detected. When the ventilator delivers an OSC breath, it closes the safety valve and waits 500 ms for the safety valve to close completely, delivers a breath with a target pressure of 15 cmH

O for

2000 ms, then cycles to exhalation. This breath is followed by a mandatory breath according to the current settings, but with PEEP =0 and O

% equal to 100% for adult/pediatric circuit types or 40% for neonatal circuits.

During OSC (and only during OSC), the ⤒ P interfere with the ability of the ventilator to detect a corrected occlusion. When the ventilator does not detect a severe occlusion, it resets the occlusion alarm, rreestablishes PEEP, and reinstates breath delivery according to current settings.

PEAK

(high circuit pressure) alarm limit is disabled to ensure it does not

Inspiratory and expiratory pause maneuvers, and manual inspirations are suspended during a severe occlusion.

Pause maneuvers are canceled by a severe occlusion. During a severe occlusion, ventilator settings changes are possible. Severe occlusions are not detected when the ventilator is in the safety valve open (SVO) state.

A corrected occlusion is detected within 15 seconds.

10.13.2 Disconnect

A circuit disconnect condition is detected when the ventilator cannot ensure that a patient is receiving sufficient tidal volume (due to a large leak or disconnected patient circuit). This discussion applies when Leak Sync is disabled.

When a disconnect is detected, an alarm sounds, the ventilator indicates that a disconnect has been detected, and displays a message indicating the length of time the patient has gone without ventilation.

Patient data are not displayed during a circuit disconnect condition.

The ventilator monitors the expiratory pressure and flow, delivered volume, and exhaled volume to declare a disconnect using any of these methods

• The ventilator detects a disconnect when the expiratory pressure transducer measures no circuit pressure and no exhaled flow during the first 200 ms of exhalation. The ventilator postpones declaring a disconnect for another 100 ms to allow an occlusion (if detected) to be declared first, because it is possible for an occlusion to match the disconnect detection criteria.

• Despite many possible variations of circuit disconnections or large leaks, it is possible for a patient to generate some exhaled flow and pressure. The ventilator then uses the disconnect sensitivity (D

SENS

, the percentage of delivered volume lost during the expiratory phase of the same breath to declare a disconnect) setting to detect a disconnect.

• If the disconnect occurs during a spontaneous breath, a disconnect is declared when the inspiration is terminated by maximum inspiratory time (or the ⤒ T

I SPONT

limit setting when ventilation type is non-invasive

[NIV]) and the ventilator detects inspiratory flow rising to the maximum allowable.

• If the disconnect occurs at the endotracheal tube, the exhaled volume will be much less than the delivered volume for the previous inspiration. The ventilator declares a disconnect if the exhaled volume is lower than the D

SENS

setting for three consecutive breaths. The D

SENS

setting helps avoid false detections due to leaks in the circuit or the patient’s lungs, and the three-consecutive-breaths requirement helps avoid false detections due to a patient out-drawing the ventilator during volume control (VC) breaths.

• Flow less than a value determined using the D

SENS consecutive seconds during exhalation.

setting and pressure less than 0.5 cmH

O detected for 10

226

Warning: When ventilation type is NIV, and D

SENS leaks and some disconnect conditions.

setting is turned OFF, the system may not sound an alarm for

Once the ventilator detects a patient circuit disconnect, the ventilator declares a high-priority alarm and discontinues breath delivery, regardless of what mode (including apnea) was active when the disconnect was detected. If there is an active audio paused interval when the disconnect occurs, the audio paused interval is not canceled. The ventilator displays the length of time the patient has been without ventilatory support. During the disconnect, the exhalation valve closes, idle flow (10 L/min flow with Leak Sync disabled and 20 L/min with Leak

Sync enabled) begins, and breath triggering is disabled. A message appears identifying how long the patient has gone without ventilatory support.

The ventilator monitors both expiratory flow and circuit pressures to detect reconnection. The ventilator declares a reconnect if any of the following criteria are met for the applicable time interval:

• Exhaled idle flow within the reconnect threshold is detected.

• Inspiratory and expiratory pressures are both above or both below reconnect threshold levels or,

• Inspiratory pressure rises to a reconnect level.

If the disconnect condition is corrected, the ventilator detects the corrected condition within 1 second.

Ventilator triggering, apnea detection, expiratory and inspiratory pause maneuvers, manual inspirations, and programmed maneuvers or one-time events are suspended during a patient circuit disconnect condition.

Spirometry is not monitored during a disconnect, and all alarms based on spirometry values are disabled. During a disconnect condition, ventilator settings changes are possible.

If the disconnect alarm is autoreset or manually reset, the ventilator reestablishes PEEP. Once PEEP is reestablished, the ventilator reinstates breath delivery according to settings in effect before the disconnect was detected.

Circuit disconnect detection is not active during OSC, SVO, or prior to patient connection.

10.13.3 Annunciating Occlusion and Disconnect Alarms

Occlusion and disconnection cannot be declared at the same time. Therefore, the ventilator annunciates only the first event to be declared.

10.14 Respiratory Mechanics

See Section 4.9, Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers, page 115

for instructions on how to perform these maneuvers.

In addition to inspiratory pause and expiratory pause maneuvers, the ventilator can provide other respiratory maneuvers, including negative inspiratory force (NIF), occlusion pressure (P

0.1

) and vital capacity (VC), as well as automatic calculations of lung function and performance, such as dynamic compliance (C

DYN resistance (R

DYN

), peak expiratory flow (PEF), end expiratory flow (EEF), C

) and dynamic

/C, and peak spontaneous flow (PSF).

Respiratory maneuvers can be performed in all breathing modes (except as noted below) but are not available during the following conditions:

• Apnea ventilation

• Safety PCV

• Occlusion status cycling (OSC)

• Non-invasive ventilation (NIV)

• When the circuit type is neonatal

• SVO

• Ventilator is in Stand-By state

• When any other respiratory maneuver has already taken place during the same breath

The GUI also displays any maneuver request, distinguishing between requests that are accepted or rejected, and any maneuver that has begun, ended, or has been canceled.

227

When a maneuver is selected, a GUI information panel is opened, displaying the maneuver name, user prompts and controls, and recent calculated results.

Any maneuver is canceled automatically upon declaration of any of the following alarms:

• ↑ P

PEAK

alarm

• ↑ P

VENT

alarm

• ↑ V

The following respiratory mechanics maneuvers are not available in BiLevel ventilation:

• P

0.1

—Occlusion pressure

• NIF —Negative inspiratory force

• VC—Vital capacity

10.14.1 Inspiratory Pause

Note: Inspiratory pause and expiratory pause maneuvers can be performed directly by pressing the respective keys on the GUI or by swiping the Menu tab on the left side of the GUI. For more information on how to perform

respiratory mechanics maneuvers from the Menu tab, see Section 4.9, Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers, page 115

An inspiratory pause maneuver extends the inspiratory phase of a single mandatory breath for the purpose of measuring end inspiratory circuit pressure which is used to calculate static compliance of the patient’s lungs and thorax (C

STAT

), static resistance of the respiratory system (R

STAT

), and inspiratory plateau pressure (P

). To calculate these pressures, the inspiratory and exhalation valves are closed, allowing pressures on both sides of the artificial airway to equalize, revealing the actual lung inflation pressure during a no-flow condition. An inspiratory pause maneuver can be either automatically or manually administered, and is only available during the next mandatory breath in A/C, SIMV, BiLevel or SPONT modes. In BiLevel, an inspiratory pause maneuver is scheduled for the next inspiration prior to a transition from P

to P

. Only one inspiratory pause maneuver is allowed per breath. An inspiratory pause maneuver cannot occur during apnea ventilation, safety PCV, stand-by state, occlusion, and SVO.

An automatic inspiratory pause maneuver begins when the inspiratory pause key is pressed momentarily or the

maneuver is started from the GUI screen. See Section 4.9, Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers, page 115

for more information on performing respiratory mechanics maneuvers from the Menu tab on the GUI rather than using the keys on the GUI. The pause lasts at least 0.5 second but no longer than 3 seconds. A manual inspiratory pause maneuver starts by pressing and holding the inspiratory pause key. The pause lasts for the duration of the key press

(up to 7 seconds).

An active manual inspiratory pause maneuver is considered complete if any of the following occur:

• The inspiratory pause key is released and at least 2 seconds of the inspiratory pause maneuver have elapsed or pressure stability conditions have been detected for not less than 0.5 second.

• Pause duration reaches 7 seconds.

A manual inspiratory pause maneuver request (if the maneuver is not yet active) will be canceled if any of events

1 through 10 in Table 47

occur.

Table 47.

Inspiratory and Expiratory Pause Events

Event identifier

Occlusion is detected

Apnea is detected

Event

There is a loss of communications with the GUI

High Ventilator pressure limit ( ⤒ P

VENT

) is reached

High circuit pressure limit ( ⤒ P

PEAK

) is reached

A disconnect is detected

228

Table 47.

Inspiratory and Expiratory Pause Events (continued)

Event identifier

Event

72 seconds have elapsed without an inspiratory pause after one has been requested

INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm is detected

High inspired tidal volume ( ↑ V

) alarm is detected

High compensation pressure ( ↑ P

COMP

) alarm is detected

Cancel is touched if maneuver is initiated from the GUI screen.

Safety valve open (SVO) is detected

Patient trigger effort causes circuit pressure to go below sensitivity. The sensitivity level is the setting value for pressure trigger or the backup pressure value for flow trigger

BUV is entered

Expiratory pause key is pressed (inspiratory pause key if maneuver is an expiratory pause)

During a manual inspiratory pause maneuver, the maneuver is terminated if any of events 1, 3, 5, 6, 12, or 13 occur.

An inspiratory pause maneuver is ignored if the ventilator is in apnea ventilation, safety PCV, OSC, SVO, BUV, or

Stand-By state.

An active automatic inspiratory pause maneuver is terminated and exhalation begun if any of events1 through12, or 14 occur.

The active automatic inspiratory pause maneuver is considered complete if the pause duration reaches 3 seconds or pressure stability conditions have been detected for not less than 0.5 second.

An automatic inspiratory pause maneuver request (if the maneuver is not yet active) will be canceled if any of events1 through 9, 11, 12, 14, or 15 occur.

Other characteristics of inspiratory pause maneuvers include:

• During an inspiratory pause maneuver, the apnea interval (T

A pause maneuver.

) is extended by the duration of the inspiratory

• If the ventilator is in SIMV, the breath period during which the next scheduled VIM occurs will also be extended by the amount of time the inspiratory pause maneuver is active.

• All activations of the inspiratory pause control are logged in the Patient Data log.

• Severe occlusion detection is suspended.

• When calculating I:E ratio, the inspiratory pause maneuver is considered part of the inspiratory phase.

• The expiratory time remains unchanged, and will result in a change in the I:E ratio for the breath that includes the inspiratory phase.

Once the inspiratory pause maneuver is completed the operator can review the quality of the maneuver waveform and accept or reject the maneuver data.

10.14.2 Expiratory Pause

An expiratory pause maneuver extends the expiratory phase of a single breath to measure end expiratory lung pressure (PEEP

) and allows intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

) to be calculated as PEEP

minus set PEEP. The pressures on either side of the artificial airway are allowed to equalize by closing the inspiratory and exhalation valves. Expiratory pause maneuvers are available in A/C, SIMV, and BiLevel modes. For A/C and SIMV, the expiratory pause maneuver is scheduled for the next end-of-exhalation prior to a mandatory breath. In BiLevel, the expiratory pause maneuver occurs at the next end-of-exhalation prior to a transition from P

to P

. Only one expiratory pause maneuver per

229

breath is allowed, and the expiratory pause maneuver request is rejected if an inspiratory pause maneuver has already taken place during the same breath.

A request for an expiratory pause maneuver is ignored in apnea ventilation, safety PCV, SPONT, OSC, BUV, and

Stand-By. See Section 4.9, Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers, page 115

for more information on performing these maneuvers from the GUI screen rather than using the keys on the GUI.

Either manual or automatic expiratory pause maneuvers can occur. A momentary press of the expiratory pause key begins an automatic expiratory pause maneuver, which lasts at least 0.5 second, but no longer than 3.0

seconds. A manual expiratory pause maneuver starts by pressing and holding the expiratory pause key and lasts for the duration of the key-press (up to 15 seconds).

An active manual expiratory pause maneuver is terminated if any of events1 through 12 occur (see

Table 47, page 228 ).

An active manual expiratory pause maneuver is complete if the expiratory pause key is released and at least 3 seconds of the expiratory pause maneuver have elapsed, pressure stability conditions have been detected for

≥0.5 second, or pause duration lasts 15 seconds.

An active automatic

expiratory pause maneuver is terminated if any of events1, 3, or 11 through13 in Table 47

occur.

An active automatic expiratory pause maneuver is complete if pause duration reaches 3 seconds or pressure stability conditions have been detected for ≥0.5 second, or pause duration lasts 15 seconds.

The automatic expiratory pause maneuver request (the maneuver is not yet active) is canceled if events 1 through

9, 11, 12, or 15 in

Table 47 occur.

The automatic expiratory pause maneuver is terminated and inspiration begun if any of events 1, 3, or 11 through13 in

Table 47

occur.

Other characteristics of expiratory pause maneuvers include:

• During an active manual expiratory pause maneuver, severe occlusion detection is suspended.

• When calculating I:E ratio, the expiratory pause maneuver is considered part of the expiratory phase.

• During the expiratory pause maneuver, the inspiratory time remains unchanged, so the I:E ratio is changed for the breath that includes the expiratory pause maneuver.

• All activations of the expiratory pause control are logged in the Patient Data log.

Once the expiratory pause maneuver is completed the operator can review the quality of the maneuver waveform and accept or reject the maneuver data.

10.14.3 Negative Inspiratory Force (NIF) Maneuver

The negative inspiratory force (NIF) maneuver is a coached maneuver where the patient is prompted to draw a maximum inspiration against an occluded airway (the inspiratory and exhalation valves are fully closed).

A NIF maneuver is canceled if:

• Disconnect is detected.

• Occlusion is detected.

• SVO is detected.

• ↑ P

PEAK

alarm is declared.

• ↑ P

VENT

alarm is declared.

• ↑ V

alarm is declared.

• Communications with the GUI is lost.

• The maneuver has been active for 30 seconds and an inspiration is not detected.

230

• INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm is declared.

• A manual inspiration is requested.

When a NIF maneuver is activated, a single pressure-time waveform grid is automatically displayed. During a NIF maneuver, the circuit pressure displays on the waveforms screen and is regularly updated, producing a real-time display.

When an active NIF maneuver ends successfully, the calculated NIF result appears on the waveforms screen and on the maneuver panel. The NIF value displayed represents the maximum negative pressure from PEEP.

When a NIF maneuver ends, a PEEP restoration breath is delivered to the patient, then normal breath delivery resumes.

10.14.4 P0.1 Maneuver (Occlusion Pressure)

0.1

is the negative airway pressure (delta pressure change) generated during the first 100 ms of an occluded inspiration. It is an estimate of the neuromuscular drive to breathe.

When a P

0.1

maneuver ends successfully, the calculated airway pressure displays on the waveforms screen and on the maneuver panel. A P activate the maneuver.

0.1

maneuver is terminated if 7 seconds elapse and a trigger has not been detected to

A P

0.1

maneuver is canceled if:

• Disconnect is detected.

• Occlusion is detected.

• SVO is detected.

• ↑ P

PEAK

alarm is declared.

• ↑ P

VENT

alarm is declared.

• ↑ V

alarm is declared.

• INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm is declared.

• Communications with the GUI is lost.

• A manual inspiration is requested.

10.14.5 Vital Capacity (VC) Maneuver

The vital capacity (VC) maneuver is a coached maneuver where the patient is prompted to draw a maximum inspiration (regardless of the current settings) and then to slowly and fully exhale.

When the vital capacity maneuver becomes active, the ventilator delivers a spontaneous inspiration in response to patient effort (with P

SUPP

=0, Rise time% =50, and E

SENS

=0), and then allows for a full exhalation effort.

When a vital capacity maneuver is requested, a single volume-time waveform grid is automatically displayed. A vital capacity maneuver is canceled if:

• Disconnect is detected.

• Occlusion is detected.

• SVO is detected.

• ↑ P

PEAK

alarm is declared.

• ↑ P

PEAK

alarm is declared.

• ↑ V

alarm is declared.

• INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm is declared.

• Communications with the GUI is lost.

• A manual inspiration is requested.

231

• The maneuver as been active for 15 seconds and inspiration is not detected.

• Cancel is touched.

When an active VC maneuver ends successfully, the calculated expiratory volume displays on the waveforms screen and on the maneuver panel and a PEEP restoration breath is delivered.

10.15 Ventilator Settings

10.15.1 Apnea Ventilation

Apnea ventilation is a backup mode and starts if the patient fails to breathe within the apnea interval (T the operator. T

) set by

defines the maximum allowable length of time between the start of inspiration and the start of the next inspiration. Available settings include mandatory type (PC or VC). For PC breaths the allowable settings are:

• Apnea interval (T

)

• Inspiratory pressure (P

)

• Inspiratory time T

)

• Respiratory rate (f )

For VC breaths, the allowable settings are:

• Apnea interval (T

)

• Flow pattern

• O

• Peak inspiratory flow ( ⩒

MAX

)

• Respiratory rate (f )

• Tidal volume (V

)

During apnea ventilation with PC selected as the mandatory type, rise time% is fixed at 50%, and the constant parameter during a rate change is inspiratory time (T

If apnea is possible (that is, if (60/f )>T ventilation O

) increasing the non-apnea O

% setting automatically changes apnea

% if it is not already set higher than the new non-apnea O

%. Apnea ventilation O

% does not automatically change by decreasing the non-apnea O

%. Whenever there is an automatic change to an apnea setting, a message appears on the GUI, and the apnea settings screen appears.

During apnea ventilation, changes to all non-apnea ventilation settings are allowed, but the new settings do not take effect until the ventilator resumes normal ventilation. Being able to change T

during apnea ventilation can avoid immediately re-entering apnea ventilation once normal ventilation resumes.

Because the minimum value for T

is 3 seconds, apnea ventilation cannot take place when non-apnea f is greater than or equal to 18/min. The ventilator does not enter apnea ventilation if T

Set T

is equal to the breath period interval.

to a value less than the expected or current breath period interval as a way of allowing the patient to initiate breaths while protecting the patient from the consequences of apnea.

10.15.2 Circuit Type and Predicted Body Weight (PBW)

Together, circuit type and PBW (displayed in lb or kg) provide the basis for new patient values and absolute limits on various ventilator settings such as tidal volume V

) and Peak flow ( ⩒

MAX

). Run SST to change the circuit type.

Table 48 gives the minimum, maximum, and new patient default values for V

based on circuit type.

232

Table 48.

Values for V

Based on Circuit Type

Circuit type

Neonatal

New patient default

When mandatory type is

VC+, MAX {2 mL, (mL/kg

Ratio ×PBW)} mL;

When mandatory type is

VC, MAX {3 mL, (mL/kg

Ratio ×PBW)} mL

Pediatric mL/kg ratio ×PBW mL

Adult mL/kg ratio ×PBW mL

25 mL

Minimum V

2 mL if NeoMode 2.0 soft‐ ware option is installed

Maximum V

315 mL

1590 mL

2500 mL

For more information on V

calculations based on PBW and circuit type, see Table 61

, V

setting.

Table 49.

Peak Flow and Circuit Type (Leak Sync Disabled)

Circuit type

Neonatal

Pediatric

Adult

30 L/min

60 L/min

150 L/min

Maximum peak flow ( ⩒

MAX

) setting

PBW determines constants for breath delivery algorithms, some user-settable alarms, the high spontaneous inspiratory time limit setting ( ⤒ T

I SPONT

) in NIV, and the non-settable INSPIRATION TOO LONG alarm.

10.15.3 Ventilation Type

There are two ventilation type choices—invasive and NIV (non-invasive). Invasive ventilation is conventional ventilation used with endotracheal or tracheostomy tubes. All installed software options, breathing modes, breath types, and trigger types are available during invasive ventilation.

NIV interfaces include non-vented full-faced or nasal masks or nasal prongs. See Section 4.7.2, NIV Breathing

Interfaces, page 111

for a list of interfaces that have been successfully tested with NIV).

NIV enables the ventilator to handle large system leaks associated with these interfaces by providing pressure-based disconnect alarms, minimizing false disconnect alarms, and replacing the INSPIRATION TOO

LONG alarm with a high spontaneous inspiratory time limit ( ⤒ T

I SPONT

) setting and visual indicator.

The following list shows the subset of invasive settings active during NIV:

• Mode — A/C, SIMV, SPONT. (BiLevel is not available during NIV.)

• Mandatory Type — PC or VC. (VC+ is not available during NIV.)

• Spontaneous Type — PS (TC and VS are not available during NIV.)

During NIV alarm setup, the clinician may set alarms to OFF and must determine if doing so is appropriate for the patient’s condition.

10.15.4 Mode and Breath Type

Specifying the mode defines the types and sequences of breaths allowed for both invasive and NIV ventilation types.

Table 50.

Modes and Breath Types

Mode Mandatory breath type

A/C Invasive: VC,VC+, or

Spontaneous breath type

Not allowed All mandatory (patient-, ventilator-, or oper‐ ator-initiated)

Sequence

233

Table 50.

Modes and Breath Types (continued)

Mode

SIMV Invasive: PC, VC, or

VC+

NIV: VC or PC

SPONT Not allowed (PC or

BiLevel

(invasive ventila‐ tion type only)

Mandatory breath

NIV: VC or PC

VC allowed only for manual inspira‐ tions).

PC type

CPAP VC or PC (allowed only for OIM breaths)

Spontaneous breath type

Pressure supported (PS) or TC.

Invasive: Pressure supported

(PS), Tube compensated (TC),

Volume supported (VS), Propor‐ tionally assisted (PAV+™)

NIV: PS

PS, TC

N/A

Sequence

Each new breath begins with a mandatory interval, during which a patient effort yields a synchronized mandatory breath. If no patient effort is detected during the man‐ datory interval, the ventilator delivers a mandatory breath. Subsequent patient efforts before the end of the breath yield spontaneous breaths.

All spontaneous (except for manual inspi‐ rations).

Combines mandatory and spontaneous

breathing modes. See Chapter 12

for more information on BiLevel ventilation.

All spontaneous (except for manual inspi‐

rations). See

tion on CPAP.

Chapter 15

for more informa‐

Breath types must be defined before settings can be specified. There are only two categories of breath type: mandatory and spontaneous. Mandatory breaths are volume controlled (VC) or pressure controlled (PC or VC+).

The ventilator currently offers spontaneous breaths that are pressure supported (PS) volume supported (VS), tube compensated (TC), or proportionally assisted (PAV+™).

Figure 98

shows the modes and breath types available on the ventilator.

Figure 98.

Illustrated Modes and Breath Types

The mode setting defines the interaction between the ventilator and the patient.

• Assist/control (A/C) mode allows the ventilator to control ventilation within boundaries specified by the practitioner. All breaths are mandatory, and can be PC, VC, or VC+

• Spontaneous (SPONT) mode allows the patient to control ventilation. The patient must be able to breathe independently, and exert the effort to trigger ventilator support.

• Synchronized Intermittent Mandatory Ventilation (SIMV) is a mixed mode that allows a combination of mandatory and spontaneous interactions. In SIMV, the breaths can be spontaneous or mandatory, mandatory breaths are synchronized with the patient’s inspiratory efforts, and breath delivery is determined by the f setting.

234

• BiLevel is a mixed mode that combines both mandatory and spontaneous breath types. Breaths are delivered in a manner similar to SIMV mode with PC selected, but providing two levels of pressure. The patient is free to initiate spontaneous breaths at either pressure level during BiLevel.

Changes to the mode are phased in at the start of inspiration. Mandatory and spontaneous breaths can be flow or pressure triggered.

The ventilator automatically links the mandatory type setting to the mode setting. During A/C or SIMV modes, once the operator has specified volume or pressure, the ventilator displays the appropriate breath parameters.

Changes in the mandatory type are phased in at the start of inspiration.

10.15.5 Respiratory Rate (f)

The f setting determines the minimum number of mandatory breaths per minute for ventilator-initiated mandatory breaths in A/C, SIMV, and BiLevel modes. If the mode is A/C or SIMV and VC is the breath type, specifying

⩒

MAX of f, T

and flow pattern determines T

, T

, and I:E. In PC breaths, specifying T

I timing variables. See

Section 10.15.13, Inspiratory Time (T

automatically determines the other

), page 237

for an explanation of the interdependencies

, and I:E. Changes to the f setting are phased in at the start of inspiration.

The ventilator does not accept a proposed f setting if it would cause the new T

or T

to be ≤0.2 second, the T

to be

≥8 seconds, or I:E ratio ≥4.00:1. The ventilator also applies these restrictions to a proposed change to the apnea respiratory rate, except that apnea I:E cannot exceed 1.00:1. An exception to this rule occurs in BiLevel ventilation where the proposed f setting will allow the I:E ratio to be ≥4.00:1 only until the minimum T

is reached.

10.15.6 Tidal Volume (V

)

The V

setting determines the volume of gas delivered to the patient during a VC mandatory breath. The delivered

is compensated for BTPS and patient circuit compliance. Changes to the V inspiration. The V

setting only affects the delivery of mandatory breaths.

setting are phased in at the start of

When proposing a change to the V

T flow pattern, and T

≤0.2 second, or a T

setting, the ventilator compares the new value with the settings for f,

. If the proposed setting would result in an I:E ratio that exceeds 4.00:1 or a T

≤0.2 second, the ventilator disallows the change.

⩒

MAX

≥8 seconds or

10.15.7 Peak Inspiratory Flow ( ⩒

MAX

)

The ⩒

MAX

setting determines the maximum rate of delivery of tidal volume to the patient during mandatory VC breaths, only. Changes to ⩒

MAX

are phased in at the start of inspiration. Mandatory breaths are compliance compensated, even at the maximum ⩒

MAX

setting. Circuit compliance compensation does not cause the ventilator to exceed the ventilator’s maximum flow capability.

When proposing a change to the ⩒ flow pattern, and T

MAX

≥8.0 seconds or ≤0.2 second, or a T

setting, the ventilator compares the new value with the settings for V

. It is impossible to set a new ⩒

≤0.2 second.

MAX

, f,

that would result in an I:E ratio that exceeds 4.00:1, or a

10.15.8 Plateau Time (T

)

The T

setting determines the amount of time inspiration is held in the patient’s airway after inspiratory flow has ceased. T

is available only during VC mandatory breaths (for A/C and SIMV mode, and operator-initiated mandatory breaths). T start of inspiration.

is not available for PC mandatory breaths. Changes to the T

setting are phased in at the

When proposing a change to the T

setting, the ventilator computes the new I:E ratio and T

I settings for V

, f, ⩒

MAX

4.00:1, or a T

≥8 seconds or ≤0.2 second, or a T

E the inspiratory phase.

, and flow pattern. It is impossible to set a new T

that would result in an I:E ratio that exceeds

≤0.2 second. For the I:E ratio calculation, T

, given the current

is considered part of

235

10.15.9 Flow Pattern

The flow pattern setting defines the gas flow pattern of volume-controlled (VC) mandatory breaths only. The selected values for V are held constant, T

and ⩒

MAX

apply to both the square or descending ramp flow patterns. If V

and ⩒

MAX

and

approximately halves when the flow pattern changes from descending ramp to square (and approximately doubles when flow pattern changes from square to descending ramp), and corresponding changes to the I:E ratio also occur. Changes in flow pattern are phased in at the start of inspiration.

The settings for flow pattern, V

, f, T

, and ⩒

MAX

are interrelated. If any setting change would cause any of the following, the ventilator does not allow that change

• I:E ratio >4:1

• T

>8.0 s or T

<0.2 s

• T

<0.2 s

10.15.10 Flow Sensitivity ( ⩒

SENS

)

The ⩒

SENS

setting defines the rate of flow inspired by a patient that triggers the ventilator to deliver a mandatory or spontaneous breath. When ⩒ -Trig is selected, a base flow of gas (1.5 L/min) travels through the patient circuit during the ventilator’s expiratory phase. Once a value for flow sensitivity is selected, the ventilator delivers a base flow equal to ⩒

SENS flow exceeds the ⩒

+1.5 L/min (base flow is not user- selectable). When the patient inhales and their inspiratory

SENS

setting, a trigger occurs and the ventilator delivers a breath. Reductions to in immediately, while increases are phased in at the start of exhalation.

⩒

SENS

are phased

When ⩒

SENS

is active, it replaces pressure sensitivity (P

SENS

⩒

SENS controlled, and apnea ventilation). When ⩒

SENS

). The ⩒

SENS

is active, a backup P

setting has no effect on the P

SENS

setting of 2 cmH the patient’s inspiratory effort, even if the flow sensors do not detect flow.

SENS

can be active in any ventilation mode (including pressure supported, volume controlled, pressure

setting.

O is in effect to detect

Although the minimum ⩒

SENS

setting of 0.2 L/min (adult/pediatric circuit types) or 0.1 L/min (neonatal circuit type) can result in autotriggering, it can be appropriate for very weak patients. The maximum setting of 20 L/min

(adult/pediatric circuit types) or 10 L/min (neonatal circuit type) is intended to avoid autotriggering when there are significant leaks in the patient circuit.

10.15.11 Pressure Sensitivity (P

SENS

)

The P

SENS

(either mandatory or spontaneous). Changes to P on the ⩒

setting selects the pressure drop below baseline (PEEP) required to begin a patient-initiated breath

SENS

are phased in immediately. The P

setting and is active only if the trigger type is P-Trig.

SENS

setting has no effect

Lower P

SENS

settings provide greater patient comfort and require less patient effort to initiate a breath. However, fluctuations in system pressure can cause autotriggering at very low settings. The maximum P autotriggering under worst-case conditions if patient circuit leakage is within specified limits.

SENS

setting avoids

10.15.12 Inspiratory Pressure (P

)

The P

setting determines the pressure at which the ventilator delivers gas to the patient during a PC mandatory breath. The P

setting only affects the delivery of PC mandatory breaths. The selected P

(For example, if PEEP is set to 5 cmH

Changes to the P

O, and P

is 20 cmH

is the pressure above PEEP.

O, the ventilator delivers gas to the patient at 25 cmH

setting are phased in at the start of inspiration.

O.)

The sum of PEEP+P

+2 cmH

O cannot exceed the high circuit pressure ( ⤒ P

PEAK pressures, first raise the ⤒ P

PEAK

limit before increasing the settings for PEEP or P

5 cmH

O and the maximum value is 90 cmH

) limit. To increase this sum of

. The minimum value for P

236

10.15.13 Inspiratory Time (T

)

The T

setting determines the time during which an inspiration is delivered to the patient for PC mandatory breaths. The ventilator accepts a setting as long as the resulting I:E ratio and T phase in at the start of inspiration. Directly setting T

settings are valid. Changes to T

in VC mandatory breaths is not allowed.

The ventilator rejects settings that result in an I:E ratio ≥4.00:1, a T

I to ensure the patient has adequate time for exhalation.

≥8 seconds or ≤0.2 second, or a T

≤0.2 second

Setting f and T

automatically determines the value for I:E and T

This equation summarizes the relationship between T

, I:E, T

, and breath period time

If the f setting remains constant, any one of the three variables (T

, I:E, or T

) can define the inspiratory and expiratory intervals. If the f setting is low (and additional spontaneous patient efforts are expected), T

can be a more useful variable to set than I:E. As thef setting increases (and the fewer patient-triggered breaths are expected), the I:E setting becomes more relevant. Regardless of which variable is chosen, a breath timing bar always shows the interrelationship between T

, I:E, T

, and f.

10.15.14 Expiratory Time (T

)

The T

setting defines the duration of exhalation for PC and VC+ mandatory breaths, only. Changes to the T

E setting are phased in at the start of exhalation. Setting f and T

. See

Section 10.15.13, Inspiratory Time (T

), page 237

automatically determines the value for I:E ratio and

for an explanation of the interdependencies of f, T

, T

, and I:E.

10.15.15 I:E Ratio

The I:E ratio setting is available when I:E is selected as the constant during rate change. The I:E setting determines the ratio of inspiratory time to expiratory time for mandatory PC breaths. The ventilator accepts the specified range of direct I:E ratio settings as long as the resulting T mandatory breaths. Changes to the I:E ratio phase in at the start of inspiration. Directly setting the I:E ratio in VC

mandatory breaths is not allowed. See

interdependencies of f, T

, T

, and I:E.

and T

settings are within the ranges established for

Section 10.15.13, Inspiratory Time (T

), page 237

for an explanation of the

Setting f and I:E automatically determine the values for T

and T

. The maximum I:E ratio setting of 4.00:1 is the maximum that allows adequate time for exhalation and is intended for inverse ratio pressure control ventilation.

10.15.16 High Pressure (P

) in BiLevel

The pressure level entered by the operator for the inspiratory phase of the mandatory breath in BiLevel ventilation.

10.15.17 Low Pressure (P

) in BiLevel

The pressure level entered by the operator for the expiratory phase of the mandatory breath in BiLevel ventilation.

10.15.18 High Time (T

) in BiLevel

The duration of time (in seconds) the ventilator maintains the set high pressure level in BiLevel ventilation.

10.15.19 Low Time (T

) in BiLevel

The duration of time (in seconds) the ventilator maintains the set low pressure level in BiLevel ventilation.

237

10.15.20 T

Ratio in BiLevel

The ratio of T

to T

in BiLevel ventilation, similar to I:E ratio when ventilating a patient without BiLevel.

10.15.21 PEEP

This setting defines the positive end-expiratory pressure (PEEP), also called baseline airway pressure. PEEP is the positive pressure maintained in the patient circuit during exhalation. Changes to the PEEP setting are phased in at the start of exhalation.

The sum of

• PEEP+7 cmH

• PEEP+ P

+2 cmH

O (if PC is active)

• PEEP+ P

SUPP

+2 cmH

O (if PS is in use) cannot exceed the ⤒ P

PEAK

limit. To increase the sum of pressures, first raise the ⤒ P

PEAK settings for PEEP, P

, or P

SUPP

limit before increasing the

If there is a loss of PEEP from occlusion, disconnect, safety valve open, or loss of power conditions, PEEP is reestablished (when the condition is corrected) by the ventilator delivering a PEEP restoration breath. The PEEP restoration breath is a 1.5 cmH

O pressure-supported breath with exhalation sensitivity of 25%, and rise time% of

50%. A PEEP restoration breath is also delivered at the conclusion of vent startup. After PEEP is restored, the ventilator resumes breath delivery at the current settings.

Note: PEEP restoration breath parameters are not user adjustable.

10.15.22 Pressure Support (P

SUPP

)

The P

SUPP

The P

SUPP

setting determines the level of positive pressure above PEEP applied to the patient’s airway during a spontaneous breath. P

setting is maintained as long as the patient inspires, and patient demand determines the flow rate.

Changes to the P

SUPP spontaneous breaths.

SUPP

is only available in SIMV, SPONT, and BiLevel, in which spontaneous breaths are allowed.

setting are phased in at the start of inspiration. The pressure support setting affects only

The sum of PEEP+P

⤒ P

PEAK

SUPP safe for the patient, a P pressure.

+2 cmH

SUPP

O cannot exceed the ⤒ P

PEAK

limit before increasing the settings for PEEP or P

SUPP

setting that would cause a ↑ P

PEAK

limit. To increase the sum of pressures, first raise the

. As the ⤒ P

PEAK

limit is the highest pressure considered

alarm requires reevaluating the maximum safe circuit

10.15.23 Volume Support (V

T SUPP

)

Volume support (V

T SUPP

Changes to the to the V

) is defined as the volume of gas delivered to the patient during spontaneous VS breaths.

T SUPP

setting are phased in at the start of inspiration.

10.15.24 % Supp in TC

In TC, the % Supp setting represents the amount of the imposed resistance of the artificial airway the TC breath type will eliminate by applying added pressure at the patient circuit wye. For example, if the % Supp setting is

100%, TC eliminates 100% of the extra work imposed the by the airway. At 50%, TC eliminates 50% of the added work from the airway. TC is also used with BiLevel, and is available during both P

and P

phases.

10.15.25 % Supp in PAV+™

In PAV+™, the % Supp setting represents the percentage of the total work of breathing (WOB) provided by the ventilator. Higher inspiratory demand yields greater support from the ventilator. The patient performs the remaining work. If the total WOB changes (resulting from a change to resistance or compliance) the percent support remains constant.

238

10.15.26 Rise Time%

The rise time% setting allows adjustment of the speed at which the inspiratory pressure reaches 95% of the target pressure. Rise time settings apply to PS (including a setting of 0 cmH

O), VS, PC, VC+, or BiLevel breaths. The higher the value of rise time%, the more aggressive (and hence, the more rapid) the rise of inspiratory pressure to the target (which equals PEEP+P

(or P

SUPP

)). The rise time% setting only appears when pressure-based breaths are available. The range of rise time% is 1% to 100%. A setting of 50% takes approximately half the time to reach 95% of the target pressure as a setting of 1.

• For mandatory PC, VC+, or BiLevel breaths, a rise time setting of 1 produces a pressure trajectory reaching 95% of the inspiratory target pressure (PEEP + P

) in 2 seconds or 2/3 of the T

, whichever is shortest.

• For spontaneous breaths (VS, or PS), a rise time setting of 1 produces a pressure trajectory reaching 95% of the inspiratory target (PEEP+P

SUPP

) in (0.4×PBW-based T

TOO LONG ×2/3) seconds.

• When both PC and PS breaths are active, the slopes and thus the pressure trajectories can appear to be different. Changes to T

and P

cause PC pressure trajectories to change. Changes in rise time% are phased in at the start of inspiration.

• When P

SUPP

=0, the rise time% setting determines how quickly the ventilator drives circuit pressure to

PEEP+1.5 cmH

10.15.27 Expiratory Sensitivity (E

SENS

)

The E

SENS

setting defines the percentage of the measured peak inspiratory flow at which the ventilator cycles from inspiration to exhalation in all spontaneous breath types. When inspiratory flow falls to the level defined by E exhalation begins. E

SENS

is a primary setting and is accessible from the GUI screen. Changes to E in at the next patient-initiated spontaneous inspiration.

SENS

are phased

SENS

complements rise time%. Rise time% should be adjusted first to match the patient’s inspiratory drive, and then the E

SENS

setting should cause ventilator exhalation to occur at a point most appropriate for the patient. The higher the E

SENS

setting, the shorter the inspiratory time. Generally, the most appropriate E

SENS

is compatible with the patient’s condition, neither extending nor shortening the patient’s intrinsic inspiratory phase.

SENS

in a PAV+™ breath is expressed in L/min instead of percent.

10.15.28 Disconnect Sensitivity (D

SENS

)

Leak Sync disabled: Disconnect sensitivity (D

SENS

) is defined as the percentage of returned volume lost due to declaring a leak, above which the ventilator declares a CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm. When D of the returned volume must be lost before the alarm annunciates. During NIV, the D

SENS

is set to its lowest value (20%) it has the highest sensitivity for detecting a leak or disconnect. Conversely, when D

SENS

value is automatically set to OFF, which means that returned volume loss is not considered and the alarm will not sound.

is set to its highest value (95%), the ventilator is least sensitive to declaring a leak or disconnect, because greater than 95%

Leak Sync enabled: Disconnect sensitivity (D a disconnect and vice versa.

SENS

) is defined as the leak at PEEP value in L/min above which the ventilator declares a CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm. The lowest setting is most sensitive to detecting and declaring

To function as intended, D patient.

SENS

needs to be set between the LEAK data value displayed while the patient is connected, and the LEAK data value displayed when the interface is open to ambient and not connected to the

To set D

SENS

with NIV interfaces when Leak Sync is enabled

1. After adjusting the patient settings, start ventilation.

2. Ensure that Leak Sync is enabled and set D

SENS

to the highest setting.

3. Select LEAK (L/min) to be displayed in the patient data banner.

4. With the NIV interface connected to the breathing circuit and open to ambient use the patient data leak value called LEAK to quantify the leak in L/min.

239

5. Set the D

SENS

(in L/min) below the leak rate (in L/min) to ensure that the disconnect alarm is violated during a disconnect. Note that this will cause a CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm.

6. Connect the patient interface to the patient and ensure that the CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm is resolved.

7. D

SENS

8. Periodically assess the leak rate, especially with PEEP changes, and adjust the D is connected to the patient.

SENS

setting as needed to ensure the presence of an alarm during disconnect and the absence of nuisance alarms while the interface

9. Always use alternative methods of monitoring during NIV.

Note: If D

SENS

is set to OFF during NIV, the ventilator is still capable of declaring a CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm.

Note: D

SENS

cannot be turned OFF if Leak Sync is enabled.

Changes to D

SENS

are phased in at the start of inspiration.

10.15.29 High Spontaneous Inspiratory Time Limit ( ⤒ T

I SPONT

)

The high spontaneous inspiratory time limit setting ( ⤒ T

I SPONT

) is available only in SIMV or SPONT modes during

NIV, and provides a means for setting a maximum inspiratory time after which the ventilator automatically transitions to exhalation. The default ⤒ T

I SPONT

setting is based upon circuit type and PBW.

For pediatric/adult circuit types, the new patient default value is (1.99+(0.02×PBW)) s.

For neonatal circuit types, the new patient default value is ((1.00+(0.10×PBW) s.

The ⤒ T

I SPONT

indicator appears on the primary display at the beginning of a ventilator-initiated exhalation and remains visible for as long as the ventilator truncates breaths in response to the ⤒ T indicator disappears when the patient’s inspiratory time returns to less than the phased in at the start of inspiration.

⤒ T

I SPONT

setting. The ⤒ T

I SPONT

setting, or after 15 seconds has elapsed after the beginning of exhalation of the last truncated breath. Changes to ⤒ T

I SPONT

are

10.15.30 Humidification Type

The humidification type setting sets the type of humidification system (heated expiratory tube, non-heated expiratory tube, or heat-moisture exchanger (HME) used on the ventilator and can be changed during normal ventilation or short self test (SST). Changes in humidification type phase in at the start of inspiration.

SST calibrates spirometry partly based on the humidification type. Changing the humidification type without rerunning SST can affect the accuracy of spirometry and delivery.

The accuracy of the exhalation flow sensor varies depending on the water vapor content of the expiratory gas, which depends on the type of humidification system in use. Because the temperature and humidity of gas entering the exhalation filter differ based on the humidification type being used, spirometry calculations also differ according to humidification type. For optimum accuracy, rerun SST to change the humidification type.

10.15.31 Humidifier Volume

The dry, compressible volume in mL of the humidification chamber for the humidification type entered during

SST. Humidifier volume is only entered if a humidifier is used.

10.16 Safety Net

While the ventilator is designed to be as safe and as reliable as possible, Covidien recognizes the potential for problems to arise during mechanical ventilation, either due to user error, patient-ventilator interactions, or because of problems with the ventilator itself. Safety net is a broad term that includes strategies for handling problems that arise in the patient-ventilator system (patient problems) as well as strategies to minimize the impact

240

10 of system faults on patient safety. In these scenarios, the ventilator is designed to alarm and to provide the highest level of ventilation support possible in case of ventilator malfunction. If the ventilator is not capable of ventilatory support, it opens the patient circuit and allows the patient to breathe from room air if able to do so (this emergency state is called Safety Valve Open(SVO) . Safety mechanisms are designed to be verified periodically or to have redundancy. The ventilator is designed to ensure that a single-point failure does not cause a safety hazard or affect its ability to annunciate a high-priority audible alarm.

10.16.1 User Error

The ventilator is designed to prevent the operator from implementing settings that are clearly inappropriate for the patient’s predicted body weight (PBW). Each setting has either soft bounds (can be overridden) or hard bounds (no override allowed) that alert the operator to the fact that the settings may be inappropriate for the patient. In the event that the patient is connected without any parameters being specified, the ventilator enters

Safety PCV, a safe mode of ventilation regardless of the circuit type in use (neonatal, pediatric, or adult) or patient’s

PBW. Safety PCV is entered after POST, if a patient connection is made prior to settings confirmation. Safety PCV uses new patient default settings with exceptions shown in

Table 51 .

Table 51.

Safety PCV Settings

Parameter

PBW f

TOT

Mode

Mandatory type

(total respiratory rate)

PEEP

Trigger type

↓ ⩒

⩒

↑ P

↑ V

SENS

PEAK

↑ ⩒

E TOT

alarm

↓ V

TE MAND

↓ V

TE SPONT

alarm

Circuit type

Safety PCV value

Neonatal: 3 kg

Pediatric:15 kg

Adult: 50 kg

A/C

Neonatal: 25 1/min

Pediatric: 16 1/min

Adult: 16 1/min

Neonatal: 0.3 s

Pediatric: 0.7 s

Adult: 1 s

15 cmH

Neonatal: 40%

Pediatric: 100%

Adult: 100%

3 cmH

Neonatal: ⩒

TRIG

Pediatric: P-Trig

Adult: P-Trig

2 cmH

1.0 L/min

20 cmH

OFF

0.05 L/min

OFF

Last set value, or adult if none available

241

Table 51.

Safety PCV Settings (continued)

Parameter

Humidification type

Humidifier volume

Safety PCV value

Set value, or non-heated exp tube if none available

Last set value

Note: In Safety PCV, expiratory pause maneuvers are not allowed.

10.16.2 Patient Related Problems

In case of patient problems, the ventilator remains fully operative and annunciates the appropriate alarm. The detection, response, and priority of each patient-related alarm is determined by the actual patient problem. See

Section 6.5, Alarms, page 141

for a comprehensive description of the patient alarm system.

10.16.3 System Related Problems

The ventilator is designed to prevent system faults. Its modular design allows the breath delivery unit (BDU) to operate independently of the graphical user interface (GUI) and several modules of the breath delivery sub-system have redundancy that, if certain faults occur, provides for ventilatory support using settings that do not depend on the suspect hardware. System faults include the following:

• Hardware faults (those that originate inside the ventilator and affect its performance)

• Soft faults (faults momentarily introduced into the ventilator that interfere with normal operation

• Inadequate supply (AC power or external gas pressure)

• Patient circuit integrity (occluded or disconnected circuit)

10.16.4 Background Diagnostic System

The ventilator has an extensive system of continuous testing processes. If an error is detected in the background diagnostic system, the ventilator notifies the operator by posting an entry in the diagnostic log. If the ventilator experiences an anomaly that causes an unintended reset, the ventilator will recover from that reset and deliver a breath within 3 seconds without any operator intervention. After recovering from a reset, the ventilator uses the same settings that were in effect before the reset occurred.

The background test process compares monitored values of ventilator functions with expected values of ventilator sensors under normal conditions regardless of whether the ventilator is in Stand-By or is ventilating a patient. The ventilator will continue to ventilate the patient with the highest level of support possible, and may revert to one of the states described. See

Section 4.11, Ventilator Protection Strategies, page 120 .

Background tests include

• Periodically initiated tests performed at intervals of a specific number of machine cycles. These tests check hardware components directly affecting breath delivery, safety mechanisms, and the GUI, and detect and correct corruption of control variable data.

• Boundary checks performed at every analog measurement. These checks verify measurement circuitry, including sensors.

Ventilation Assurance is a safety net feature invoked if the background diagnostics detect a problem with certain components in either the gas mix subsystem, the inspiratory subsystem, or the expiratory subsystem. Each subsystem has a backup ventilation strategy that allows ventilation to continue by bypassing the suspect components giving the operator time to replace the ventilator.Mix backup ventilation (BUV) is invoked if the measured gas mix is significantly different from the set mix, if the accumulator pressure is out of range or if a fault is indicated in the mix PSOLs or flow sensors. During Mix BUV, the normal mix controller is bypassed and ventilation continues as set, except that the gas mix reverts to 100% oxygen or air, depending on where the fault indication was detected. Backup circuits then control the pressure in the accumulator to keep it in the proper range for the

Inspiratory Module.

242

Inspiratory BUV is invoked if background diagnostics detect a problem in the inspiratory module (PSOL or flow

sensor signal out of range). In Inspiratory BUV, ventilation continues with the settings listed in Table 52

Table 52.

Inspiratory Backup Ventilation Settings

Backup ventilation parameter

PBW

Mode f

Mandatory type

PEEP

Trigger type

Gas flow

Setting

Previously used setting during Vent Startup

A/C

Neonatal: 25 1/min

Pediatric: 16 1/min

Adult: 16 1/min

Neonatal: 0.3 s

Pediatric: 0.7 s

Adult: 1 s

15 cmH

O above PEEP

100% (21% if O

not available)

3 cmH

0 s

⩒ -Trig; 2 L/min (adult/pediatric), 1.5 L/min (neonatal) ⩒

Controlled by pressure in the mix accumulator

During Inspiratory BUV, the delivery PSOL is disabled, but gas delivery is achieved via an inspiratory BUV solenoid valve, the gas flow being created by pressure in the mix accumulator.

Exhalation BUV is invoked if problems with the exhalation valve driver are detected. A backup analog circuit is enabled to control the exhalation valve though the more advanced control features (active exhalation valve control) are not functional.

Note: During Mix and Inspiratory BUV, gas supply to installed options is disabled.

Entry into BUV is logged in the alarm log and system diagnostic log, and the status display provides an indicator that the ventilator is in BUV and which subsystem is affected.

When in BUV, a high priority alarm is annunciated, and the GUI displays an alarm banner indicating BUV, displays blank fields for patient data, and displays a pressure waveform.

If the ventilator cannot provide any degree of reliable ventilatory support and fault monitoring, then the ventilator sounds an alarm and enters the safety valve open (SVO) emergency state. During SVO, the ventilator deenergizes the safety valve, exhalation, and inspiratory valves, annunciates a high-priority alarm, and turns on the SVO indicator. During SVO, a patient can spontaneously inspire room air (if able to do so) and exhale. Check valves on the inspiratory and expiratory sides minimize rebreathing of exhaled gas during SVO. During SVO the ventilator:

• Displays the elapsed time without ventilatory support

• Does not display patient data (including waveforms)

• Does not detect patient circuit occlusion or disconnect conditions

Visible indicators on the ventilator’s GUI and status display illuminate when the ventilator is in the SVO state. Other safeguards built into the ventilator include a one-way valve (check valve) in the inspiratory pneumatic circuit allowing the patient to inhale through the safety valve with limited resistance. This check valve also limits exhaled flow from entering the inspiratory limb to reduce the possibility of rebreathing exhaled CO

gas.

243

10.17 Power On Self Test (POST)

Every time the ventilator is powered on or resets and at the beginning of short self test (SST) and extended self test (EST) it performs power on self test (POST). POST checks the integrity of the GUI and breath delivery subsystems and communication channels without operator intervention and takes approximately 15 seconds to complete.

If POST detects a major fault, qualified service personnel must correct the problem and successfully pass EST. See the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Service Manual for more details on POST.

10.18 Short Self Test (SST)

SST is a short (about 6 minutes) and simple sequence of tests that verifies proper operation of breath delivery hardware (including pressure and flow sensors), checks the patient circuit (including tubing, humidification device, and filters) for leaks, and measures the circuit compliance and resistance. SST also checks the resistance of the exhalation filter. SST, in normal mode, can only be performed at start up, prior to initiation of ventilation.

Covidien recommends running SST every 15 days, between patients, and when changing the patient circuit or its configuration (including changing circuit type, adding or removing in-line water traps, or using a different type

or style of patient circuit). See Section 3.9.1.2, SST Test Sequence, page 86

. The ventilator does not allow access to SST if it senses a patient is connected.

10.19 Extended Self Test (EST)

EST verifies the integrity of the ventilator’s subsystems using operator participation. EST requires a “gold standard” test circuit and a stopper to block the patient wye. All test resources, including the software code to run EST, exist in the ventilator. EST testing, excluding tests of optional equipment (such as the compressor and extended battery) takes about 10 minutes. If the compressor is used as the air source for EST and optional equipment is tested, then EST takes approximately 15 minutes. See

Section 3.9.3, Extended Self Test (EST), page 93

Warning: Do not enter Service mode with a patient attached to the ventilator. Serious injury could result.

244

11 Specifications

11.1 Overview

This chapter contains the following specifications for the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator:

• Physical

• Electrical

• Interface

• Environmental

• Performance (ranges, resolution, and accuracies for ventilator settings, alarm settings, and patient data)

• EMC compliance information

11.2 Measurement Uncertainty

Measurement uncertainties and the manner in which they are applied are listed in

Table 53 .

Table 53.

Performance Verification Equipment Uncertainty

Flow

Measured parameter

Pressure

Oxygen concentration

Temperature

Atmospheric Pressure

Offset

0.1001 SLPM

0.121594 cmH

0.0168% O

0.886041°C

1.76 cmH

Gain

2.7642% reading

0.195756% reading

0.0973% reading

0.128726% reading

During breath delivery performance verification for flow and pressure based measurements, the equipment inaccuracy is subtracted from the acceptance specification as follows:

• Net acceptance gain = requirement specification gain – measurement uncertainty gain

• Net acceptance offset = requirement specification offset – measurement uncertainty offset

• Acceptance limit = ±[(net acceptance offset) + (net acceptance gain) × (setting)]

• (setting– acceptance limit)≤ measurement ≤(setting + acceptance limit)

For derived parameters, such as volume, compliance, etc., the individual sensor uncertainties are combined and applied as applicable to determine the acceptance limits.

11.3 Physical Characteristics

Table 54.

Physical Characteristics

Weight Ventilator: 51.26 kg (113 lb) including BDU, GUI, standard base, and primary battery

BDU only: 31.3 kg (69 lb)

Ventilator and compressor: 71.2 kg (157 lb) including BDU, GUI, ventilator and compressor primary batteries, base assembly, and compressor Compressor:

40.4 kg (89 lb) including base assembly

BDU only: 31.3 kg (69 lb)

Pendant configuration: 34.5 kg (76 lb) including BDU, GUI, primary battery

Pendant configuration, BDU only: 27.2 kg (60 lb)

245

Table 54.

Physical Characteristics (continued)

Dimensions

Pendant configuration, GUI only: 5.7 kg (12.6 lb)

Ventilator: 32 cm by 30 cm by 111 cm

(12.5 in. width by 11.5 in. depth by 43.5 in. height) (not including GUI screen)

Ventilator: 32 cm by 30 cm by 148 cm) (including GUI screen) (12.5 in. width by

11.5 in. depth by 58 in. height

Standard base: 58 cm by 66 cm (22.5 in. width by 26 in. depth)

At a distance of 1 meter, does not exceed 48 dBA at 5 L/min A-weighted sound pressure level, ventilator

A-weighted sound pressure level, ventilator and compressor

A-weighted sound power level, ventilator

A-weighted sound power level, ventilator and compressor

Connectors

At a distance of 1 meter does not exceed 54 dBA at 5 L/min

Does not exceed 61 dBA at 5 L/min

Does not exceed 63 dBA at 5 L/min

Inspiratory and expiratory limb connectors are 22 mm OD conical fittings compliant with ISO 5356-1

Inspiratory/ exhalation filters See filter instructions for use for complete specifications

Pressure units (chosen by oper‐ ator)

Hectopascal (hPa) centimeters of water (cmH

Displayed weight units

Displayed length units

Kilograms (kg) or Pounds (lb) (user selectable)

Centimeters (cm) or Inches (in) (user selectable)

Table 55.

Pneumatic Specifications

Oxygen and air inlet supplies Pressure: 241 kPa to 600 kPa (35 psi to 87 psi)

Flow: Maximum of 200 L/min

Oxygen sensor life Up to 1 year. Operating life varies depending on oxygen usage and ambient temperature.

Gas mixing system Range of flow from the mixing system:

Up to 150 L/min for adult patients. Additional flow is available (peak flow to

200 L/min) for compliance compensation

Up to 80 L/min for pediatric circuit type

Up to 30 L/min for neonatal circuit type

Leakage from one gas system to another: Meets IEC 80601-2-12 standard

Operating pressure range: 241 kPa to 600 kPa (35 psi to 87 psi)

Table 56.

Technical Specifications

Maximum limited pressure (P

LIM max

Maximum working pressure (P

W max

)

Response time to change in FiO

90% O

setting from 21% to

(measured at the patient wye)

Measuring devices

A fixed pressure limit to the safety valve limits circuit pressure to <125 cmH

O (123 hPa) at the patient wye.

Wmax

is ensured by the high pressure limit ( ⤒ P

PEAK when P

is <100 cmH

O (98.07 hPa).

)

<18 s for volumes >150 mL

<19 s for volumes ≥30 mL but ≤150 mL

<50 s for volumes ≥2 mL but <30 mL

Pressure measurements:

Type: Solid stated differential pressure transducer Sens‐ ing position: Inspiratory module; expiratory module

Volume measurements:

246

Table 56.

Technical Specifications (continued)

Type: Hot film anemometer Sensing position: Inspira‐ tory module; expiratory module

Oxygen measurement:

Type: Galvanic cell

Sensing position: Inspiratory module

Up to 75 L/min Minute volume ( ⩒

E TOT

) capability, ventilator

Minute volume ( ⩒

E TOT

) capability, compressor Up to 40 L/min BTPS, including compliance compen‐ sation

Internal inspiratory filter bacterial/viral filtration effi‐ ciency

Results of ventilator testing using circuits identified for use with the ventilator system

>99.999%

Internal inspiratory filter particle filtration efficiency >99.97% retention of particles 0.3 µm nominal at

100 L/min flow

Internal inspiratory filter resistance 0.2 cmH

O < resistance <2.2 cmH

0.2 cmH

O < resistance <1.7 cmH

O at 30 L/min flow

O at 15 L/min flow

Combined inspiratory limb resistance 0.2 cmH

O < resistance <5.5 cmH

0.2 cmH

O < resistance <1.7 cmH

O at 30 L/min flow

O at 15 L/min flow

Exhalation filter resistance (pediatric/adult, disposable) < 2.0 cmH

O at 30 L/min when new < 1.7 cmH

O at

15 L/min when new

Exhalation filter particle filtration efficiency, pedia‐ tric/adult, disposable

Exhalation filter bacterial/viral filtration efficiency neo‐ natal, disposable)

Exhalation filter particle filtration efficiency (neonatal, disposable)

Exhalation filter resistance (neonatal, disposable)

Circuit compliance (acceptable ranges of VBS compli‐ ance for each patient type)

Inspiratory limb circuit resistance (acceptable ranges of

VBS inspiratory limb resistance for each patient type)

Expiratory limb circuit resistance (acceptable ranges of

VBS expiratory limb resistance for each patient type)

Alarm volume (primary)

Measurement uncertainty: ±3 dBA

Maximum of 0.03% penetration of particles 0.3 µm nominal at 30 L/min flow

>99.999% bacterial filtration efficiency/99.99% viral fil‐ tration efficiency

> 99.70% retention of particles 0.3 µm nominal at

30 L/min flow

< 0.58 cmH

O at 2.5 L/min when new

ADULT: 1.3 mL/cmH

O to 4.2 mL/cmH

PEDIATRIC: 0.9 mL/cmH

O to 3.0 mL/cmH

NEONATAL: 0.4 mL/cmH

O to 1.5 mL/cmH

ADULT (at 60 L/min): 1.15 cmH

O to 11.0 cmH

PEDIATRIC (at 30 L/min): 0.46 cmH

NEONATAL (at 10 L/min): 0.37 cmH

(6.0 cmH

O for Prox)

O to 4.5 cmH

ADULT (at 60 L/min): 1.15 cmH

O to 11.0 cmH

PEDIATRIC (at 30 L/min): 0.46 cmH

NEONATAL (at 10 L/min): 0.37 cmH

4.5 cmH

O(6.0 cmH

O for Prox)

O to 4.5 cmH

O to

Range: High priority alarm volume range (dBA): 58 (vol‐ ume setting 1) to 86 (volume setting 10) Medium pri‐ ority alarm volume range (dBA): 52 (volume setting 1) to 78 (volume setting 10) Low priority alarm volume range (dBA): 50 (volume setting 1) to 76 (volume set‐ ting 10)

Measured 1 m from front, rear, and sides of ventilator

See

Section 6.5.4, Alarm Volume Key, page 144

for alarm volume behavior during an alarm condition.

247

Table 56.

Technical Specifications (continued)

Alarm volume (secondary)

Measurement uncertainty: ±3 dBA

11.4 Electrical Specifications

Table 57.

Electrical Specifications

Electrical ratings, ventilator

Resolution: 1

Minimum 64 dBA measured 1 m from front, rear, and sides of ventilator.

Electrical ratings, ventilator and compressor

Mains overcurrent release

Earth leakage current

Touch current

Patient leakage current

11.5 Interface Requirements

The pinout for the RS-232 interface is as follows:

Table 58.

RS-232 Pinout

Pin

The pinout for the nurse call interface is as follows:

Table 59.

Nurse Call Pinout

Pin

Signal

N/C

RxD

TxD

N/C

GND

N/C

RTS

CTS

N/C

100 V ~, 50–60 Hz, 2.25 A

120 V ~, 50–60 Hz 1.5 A

220–240 V ~, 50–60 Hz, 0.75 A

100 V~, 50–60 Hz, 8.25 A

120 V~, 50–60 Hz, 6.0 A

220–240 V~, 50–60 Hz, 3.0 A

CB1: 4 A

CB2: 6 A

Meets requirements of IEC 60601-1, type BF applied part

Not connected

Name

Receive data

Transmit data

Not connected

Ground

Not connected

Request to send

Clear to send

Mot connected

Configuration

Normally closed (NC)

Relay common

Normally open (NO)

Not connected

248

11.6 Environmental Specifications

Table 60.

Environmental Specifications

Specification

Temperature

Atmospheric Pressure

Altitude

Relative Humidity

Operation

10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F) Ventila‐ tor

10°C to 35°C (50°F to 95°F) Internal

Battery Charger

70 kPa to 106 kPa (10.15 psi) to

(15.37 psi)

–411.5 m to 3048 m (–1350 ft to 10

000 ft)

10% to 95% non-condensing

Storage

–20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 158°F)

50 kPa to 106 kPa (7.25 psi to

15.37 psi)

6096 m max (20 000 ft max)

10% to 95% non-condensing

Note: When using the compressor, reduced dryer performance may be expected if relative humidity exceeds 50% when temperature is 40°C.

When using the compressor, reduced dryer performance may be expected if temperature exceeds 32.8°C when relative humidity is 95%.

Note: The limits marked on the device label represent out-of-box storage conditions as follows:

• Temperature: 10°C to 40°C (50°F to 104°F)

• Pressure: 70 kPa to 106 kPa (10.15 psi to 15.37 psi)

• Relative humidity: 10% to 95% non-condensing

11.7 Performance Specifications

11.7.1 Ranges and Resolutions

See Table 61

for ranges and resolutions for ventilator settings. See Table 62, page 255

for alarm settings, and Table 63, page 257 for displayed patient data parameters.

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution

Setting

Apnea ventilation

Apnea expiratory time (T

Apnea I:E ratio

)

Description

A safety mode of ventilation that starts if the patient does not receive a breath for an elapsed time exceeding the apnea inter‐ val.

For mandatory PC apnea breaths, the time interval between the end of inspiration and the beginning of the next inspiration.

In PC breath types, specifies the ratio of apnea inspiratory time to apenea expiratory time.

Apnea flow pattern The flow shape of the delivered mandatory volume-based (VC) apnea breath.

Apnea inspiratory pressure (P

) The pressure above PEEP at which gas is delivered to the

Range and resolution

See individual apnea settings.

Range: 0.20 s to 59.8 s

Resolution: 0.01 s

Range: I:E ≤1.00:1

Resolution: 0.01 for values >1:10.0; 0.1 for values ≤1:10 and >1:100; 1 for values ≤1:100

Range: square, descending ramp

Range: 5 cmH

Resolution:

O to 90–PEEP cmH

1 cmH

249

(

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

Apnea O

Apnea peak inspiratory flow

⩒

MAX

)

Setting

Apnea inspiratory time (T

Apnea interval (T

)

Description patient during mandatory PC apnea breaths.

Same as inspiratory time for non-apnea ventilation

The time after which the venti‐ lator transitions to apnea venti‐ lation T

≥ 60/f

Determines the oxygen con‐ centration in a standard mixture of air and oxygen

The maximum rate of tidal vol‐ ume delivery during mandatory volume-based apnea breaths.

Range:

Range and resolution

0.20 s to 8 s

Resolution: 0.01 s in PC or VC+, 0.02 s in VC

3 s to 60 s or OFF in CPAP

Resolution: 1 s

Range: 21% O

Resolution:

to 100% O

Apnea respiratory rate (f

Apnea tidal volume (V

)

) Sets the number of volume- or pressure-based breaths per minute for ventilator initiated mandatory (VIM) apnea breaths

Sets the volume of gas delivered to the patient’s lungs during a mandatory, volume-controlled apnea breath. Apnea tidal vol‐ ume is compensated for body temperature and pressure, satu‐ rated (BTPS) and the compli‐ ance of the patient circuit.

Apnea constant during rate change

Apnea mandatory type

Circuit type

Specifies which of the three operator-adjustable breath tim‐ ing variables remains constant when respiratory rate is changed during apnea ventila‐ tion.

The type of mandatory breath delivered during apnea ventila‐ tion

Specifies the circuit for which compliance and resistance val‐ ues during SST have been cal‐ culated

Constant during rate change Specifies which of the three operator-adjustable breath tim‐ ing variables remains constant when respiratory rate is changed.

Range: When mandatory type is VC:

NEONATAL: 1 L/min to 30 L/min

PEDIATRIC: 3.0 L/min to 60 L/min

ADULT: 3.0 L/min to 150 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min for flows <20 L/min

(BTPS); 1 L/min for flows ≥20 L/min (BTPS)

Range: 2.0 1/min to 40 1/min

Resolution: 0.1 1/min for 2.0 1/min to 9.9

1/min; 1 1/min for 10 1/min to 40 1/min

Range:

NEONATAL: 3 mL to 315 mL

PEDIATRIC/ADULT: ≥25 mL to 2500 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for values <20 mL;

0.5 mL for values ≥20 mL and <25 mL; 1 mL for values ≥25 mL and <100 mL; 5 mL for values ≥100 mL and <400 mL; 10 mL for values ≥400 mL

Range: T

Range: PC, VC

Range: NEONATAL, PEDIATRIC, ADULT

Range: I:E ratio, T

ratio, T

, T

for PC or VC+ breaths;

in BiLevel

250

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

Gender

Height

Setting

Expiratory sensitivity (E

Expiratory time (T

Flow pattern

Flow sensitivity ( ⩒

)

SENS

)

SENS

)

Description

Disconnect sensitivity (D

SENS

) Leak Sync disabled: The per‐ centage of returned volume lost, above which the ventilator declares a CIRCUIT DISCON‐

NECT alarm. Leak Sync enabled:

The leak at PEEP value in L/min above which the ventilator declares a CIRCUIT DISCON‐

NECT alarm.

The percentage of ⩒

MAX

that, when reached, causes the ven‐ tilator to cycle from inspiration to exhalation during spontane‐ ous, pressure-based breaths.

For PC or VC+ breaths, the time interval between the end of inspiration and the beginning of the next inspiration. The end of the expiratory phase is consid‐ ered to be when the flow rate at the patient wye remains less than 0.5 L/min above the base flow.

The flow shape of the delivered mandatory or VC breath

For flow triggered breaths, determines the volume of flow

(below the base flow) required to begin a mandatory or spon‐ taneous patient initiated breath.

The patient’s gender

The patient’s height

Range and resolution

Range: (Leak Sync disabled): 20% to 95% or

OFF

Range: (Leak Sync enabled):

NEONATAL: Invasive: 1 L/min to 15 L/min

NIV: 1 L/min to 30 L/min

PEDIATRIC: 1 L/min to 40 L/min

ADULT: 1 L/min to 65 L/min

Resolution: (Leak Sync disabled):1%

Resolution: (Leak Sync enabled) 0.5 L/min for values<10 L/min; 1 L/min for values

≥10 L/min

Range: 1% to 80% when spontaneous type is PS or VS

1 L/min to 10 L/min when spontaneous type is PAV+™

Resolution: 1% when spontaneous type is

PS, TC, or VS; 1 L/min when spontaneous type is PAV+™.

NOTE: Default value is not expected to need adjustment. Only adjust after becom‐ ing experienced with PAV+™ and only if it is suspected that the ventilator is not cycling at the patient’s end-of-inspiration.

Range: ≥0.20 s

Resolution: 0.01 s

Range: square, descending ramp

Range:

NEONATAL: 0.1 L/min to 10 L/min

PEDIATRIC/ADULT: 0.2 L/min to

20.0 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min

Range: Male or Female

Range: 19.5 cm to 280 cm; 7.5 in. to 110 in.

Resolution: 0.5 cm for heights <35 cm;

1 cm for heights <254 cm; 2 cm for heights

≥254 cm; 0.25 in. for heights <14 in.; 0.5 in.

for heights <100 in.; 1 in. for heights ≥100 in.

See

Section 4.6

251

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

I:E ratio

Setting

High spontaneous inspiratory time limit ( ⤒ T

I SPONT

)

Humidification type

Humidifier volume

Elevate O

Description

Active in NIV only, allows the operator to select the maximum spontaneous inspiratory time.

The type of humidification sys‐ tem used on the ventilator

The empty fluid volume of the currently installed humidifier.

The percentage of O added to the current air/O ture for 2 minutes

to be

mix‐

In PC and VC+ breath types, specifies the ratio of inspiratory time to expiratory time.

Inspiratory pressure (P

Inspiratory time (T

)

Leak Sync (leak compensation) Compensates for leaks during invasive or non-invasive (NIV) ventilation.

Mandatory type The type of mandatory breath delivered in A/C, SPONT or SIMV modes. SPONT mode allows mandatory type selection for operator initiated mandatory

(OIM) breaths.

mL/kg ratio

The pressure above PEEP at which gas is delivered to the patient during mandatory PC breaths.

The time during which an inspi‐ ration is delivered to the patient during mandatory PC or VC+ breaths.

Mode

The default tidal volume/PBW ratio (only adjustable in Service

Mode)

The ventilation mode. The mode determines the allowable breath types:

A/C—assist/control—a manda‐ tory mode allowing volume controlled (VC), pressure con‐ trolled (PC), or VC+ breath types.

SPONT—allows the patient to initiate the breath. Applicable

SPONT breath types are pres‐

Range and resolution

Range:

NEONATAL: 0.2 s to 1.7 s

PEDIATRIC/ADULT: 0.4 s to 5 s

Range: HME, non-heated expiratory tube, heated expiratory tube.

Range: 100 mL to 1000 mL

Resolution: 10 mL

Range: 1% to 100%

Resolution: 1% between 1% and 10%; 5% between 5% and 75%; jumps to 100% when increased above 75%

Range: 1:299 to 149:1

Resolution: 0.01 for values >1:10; 0.1 for values ≤1:10.0 and >1:100.0; 1 for values

≤1:100

Displayed as XX:1 when I:E ≥1; displayed as

1:XX when I:E <1

Range: 5 cmH

Resolution:

O to 90 cmH

1 cmH

Range: 0.2 s to 8 s for mandatory PC, and

VC+ breaths, (T

+0.2 s to 8 s in VC)

Resolution: 0.01 s for PC or VC+ breaths;

0.02 s for VC breaths

Range: Enabled or Disabled

Range: PC, VC, VC+

Range: 4.0 mL/kg to 10 mL/kg

Resolution: 0.5 mL/kg

Range: A/C, SPONT, SIMV, BiLevel but not available when ventilation type is NIV; CPAP

(only available when circuit type is NEONA‐

TAL and ventilation type is NIV))

252

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

Setting

% (delivered)

Peak inspiratory flow ( ⩒

MAX

)

Description sure support (PS), volume sup‐ port (VS), tube compensated

(TC) or PAV+™.

SIMV—Synchronized Intermit‐ tent Mandatory Ventilation—a mixed ventilatory mode provid‐ ing mandatory breaths and allowing a patient spontaneous breaths during the breath cycle.

BiLevel—a mixed ventilatory mode combining the attributes of both mandatory and sponta‐ neous breaths incorporating two pressure levels, P

and P

Percentage of delivered oxygen in the gas mixture

The maximum rate of tidal vol‐ ume delivery during mandatory volume-based breaths.

Range and resolution

PEEP

Sets the positive end-expiratory pressure, defined as the pres‐ sure targeted in the patient cir‐ cuit during exhalation.

The positive pressure during the insufflation phase in BiLevel ventilation.

The positive pressure in the patient circuit during the expir‐ atory phase of BiLevel ventila‐ tion.

Plateau time (T

) The amount of time inspiration is held in the patient’s lungs after inspiratory flow ceases for man‐ datory volume-based breaths.

Considered part of the inspira‐ tory phase for I:E ratio calcula‐ tions.

Predicted Body Weight (PBW) Indicates an approximation of the patient’s body weight based upon their gender and height

(or length for neonatal patients).

PBW determines default limits and limits for breath delivery parameters.

Range: 21% to 100%

Resolution: 1%

Range: When mandatory type is VC:

NEONATAL: 1 L/min to 30 L/min

PEDIATRIC: 3.0 L/min to 60 L/min

ADULT: 3.0 L/min to 150 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min for values <20 L/min

(BTPS); 1 L/min for values ≥20 L/min (BTPS)

Range: 0 cmH

O to 45 cmH

Resolution: 0.5 cmH

O from 0.0 cmH

19.5 cmH

45 cmH

O; 1 cmH

O from 20 cmH

O to

Range: 5 cmH

Resolution:

O to 90 cmH

1 cmH

Range: 0 cmH

O to 45 cmH

Resolution: 0.5 cmH

O from 0.0 cmH

19.5 cmH

45 cmH

O; 1 cmH

O from 20 cmH

Range: 0 s to 2 s

Resolution: 0.1 s

O to

Range:

NEONATAL: 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) to 7.0 kg (15 lb) when NeoMode 2.0 option is installed;

PEDIATRIC: 3.5 kg (7.7 lb) to 35 kg (77 lb)

ADULT: ≥25 kg (55.12 lb)

Resolution: 0.01 kg for weights <1 kg,

0.1 kg for weights ≥1 kg and <10 kg, 1 kg for weights ≥10 kg

253

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

Setting

Pressure sensitivity (P

SENS

)

Description

For pressure triggered breaths, determines the amount of pres‐ sure below PEEP required to begin a mandatory or sponta‐ neous patient initiated breath.

Pressure support (P

SUPP

) or PS The positive pressure above

PEEP (or P in BiLevel) during a spontaneous breath.

Respiratory rate (f )

Rise time%

Spontaneous type

% Supp

(time high)

(time low)

ratio

Tidal volume (V

)

Sets the number of volume- or pressure-based breaths per minute for ventilator initiated mandatory (VIM) breaths in A/C,

SIMV, and BiLevel modes

Range and resolution

Range: 0.1 cmH

Resolution:

Range: 0 cmH

Resolution:

O to 20.0 cmH

0.1 cmH

1 cmH

O to 70 cmH

Range:

NEONATAL: 1.0 1/min to 150 1/min

PEDIATRIC/ADULT: 1.0 1/min to 100

1/min

Resolution: 0.1 1/min from 1.0 1/min to 9.9

1/min; 1 1/min from 10 1/min to 150 1/min

Range: 1% to 100%

Resolution: 1%

Sets the speed at which inspira‐ tory gas delivered to the patient reaches the pressure target in

BiLevel, PC, VC+, VS, or PS.

Higher percentages of rise time produce inspiratory pressure trajectories with shorter time to the target value.

The breath type for patient ini‐ tiated spontaneous breaths in

SIMV, SPONT, and BiLevel modes.

In tube compensation, specifies the additional positive pressure desired to overcome resistance of the artificial airway.

In PAV+™, specifies the percent‐ age of total inspiratory work of breathing (WOB) performed by the ventilator.

The duration of the insufflation phase during BiLevel ventila‐ tion.

The duration of the expiratory phase during BiLevel ventila‐ tion.

In BiLevel, specifies the ratio of insufflation time to expiratory time

The volume of gas delivered to the patient during a mandatory volume-based breath. V

com‐

Range:

Resolution:

Range: 5% to 95%

Resolution:

Range:

Resolution:

Range:

PS, TC, PAV+™, or VS

10% to 100%

0.2 s to 30 s

0.01 s

≥0.20 s

Resolution: 0.01 s

Range: 1:299 to 4:1; in BiLevel

T:T

Resolution: 0.01 for <10.00:1 and >1:10.00;

0.1 for [<100.0:1 and ≥10.0:1] or [≤1:10.0 and

>1:100.0]; 1 for <1:100.0 or ≥100:1

Range:

NEONATAL: 2 mL to 315 mL in VC+

NEONATAL: 3 mL to 315 mL in VC

254

Table 61.

Ventilator Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

Setting

Volume support (V

T SUPP

Trigger type

Tube ID

Tube type

Ventilation type

Description pensates for body temperature and pressure, saturated (BTPS) and circuit compliance. Applica‐ ble for volume-based breaths.

) or VS The volume of gas delivered to the patient during spontane‐ ous, volume supported breaths

Determines whether flow changes ( ⩒ -Trig), or pressure changes (P-Trig) trigger patient breaths

The internal diameter of the arti‐ ficial airway used to ventilate the patient.

The type of artificial airway used to ventilate the patient.

Invasive or non-invasive (NIV) ventilation type based upon the type of breathing interface used. Invasive: ET or Trach tubes

NIV: masks, infant nasal prongs, or uncuffed ET tubes

Range and resolution

PEDIATRIC: 25 mL to 1590 mL

ADULT: 25 mL to 2500 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for values <20 mL;

0.5 mL for values ≥20 mL and <25 mL; 1 mL for values ≥25 mL and <100 mL; 5 mL for values ≥100 mL and <400 mL; 10 mL for values ≥400 mL

Range:

NEONATAL: 2 mL to 310 mL

PEDIATRIC: 25 mL to 1590 mL

ADULT: 25 mL to 2500 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for values <20 mL;

0.5 mL for values ≥20 mL and <25 mL; 1 mL for values ≥25 mL and <100 mL; 5 mL for values ≥100 mL and <400 mL; 10 mL for values ≥400 mL

Range:

NEONATAL: ⩒ -Trig

PEDIATRIC/ADULT: ⩒ -Trig or P-Trig

Range: 4.5 mm to 10 mm when spontane‐ ous type is TC

Range: 6 mm to 10 mm when spontaneous type is PAV+™

Resolution: 0.5 mm

Range: Endotracheal (ET), tracheal (Trach)

Range: Invasive, NIV

Table 62.

Alarm Settings Range and Resolution

Alarm volume

Setting

Apnea interval (T

)

Description

Controls the volume of alarm annunciations

The apnea alarm condition indi‐ cates that neither the ventilator nor the patient has triggered a breath for the operator-selected apnea interval (T

When the apnea alarm condition is true, the ventilator invokes manda‐ tory ventilation as specified by the operator.

Range and resolution

Range: 1 (minimum) to 10 (maxi‐ mum)

Resolution: 1

Range: 3 s to 60 s or OFF in CPAP

Resolution: 1 s

255

(

Table 62.

Alarm Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

Setting

High circuit pressure setting

⤒ P

PEAK

)

Low circuit pressure setting( ⤓ P

PEAK

High exhaled minute volume alarm setting (

High exhaled tidal volume alarm setting ( ⤒ V

)

High inspired tidal volume alarm limit (

High respiratory rate alarm setting

⤒ f

TOT

High spontaneous inspiratory time limit (

)

⤒

⤒⩒

)

E TOT

I SPONT

)

Description

The ⤒ P

PEAK alarm level

alarm indicates the patient’s airway pressure ≥ the set

) The

The ↑ ⩒

E TOT

alarm indicates the measured total minute volume

≥ the set alarm limit.

The

↓

↑

PEAK

alarm indicates the measured airway pressure ≤ the set alarm limit during an NIV or VC+ inspiration.

alarm indicates that the measured exhaled tidal vol‐ ume≥ the set alarm limit for spon‐ taneous and mandatory breaths.

The ↑ V

alarm indicates the deliv‐ ered volume of any breath ≥ the set alarm limit.

The limit.

↑ f

TOT

alarm indicates the meas‐ ured breath rate ≥ the set alarm

The ⤒ T

I SPONT

indicator allows the operator to select the maximum spontaneous inspiratory time of an

NIV breath. No alarm is annunciated; only the symbol ⤒ T

I SPONT

appears on the screen near the NIV indicator when inspiration time exceeds the setting. If ⤒ T

I SPONT

is exceeded, the ventilator transitions from inspira‐ tion to exhalation.

Range and resolution

Range: 7 cmH

O to 100 cmH

Resolution: 1 cmH

Range:

NIV: OFF or ≥0.5 cmH

O to

100 cmH

VC+:

≥PEEP +3.5 cmH

≤16 cmH

PEEP >16 cmH

O (with PEEP

O) ≥PEEP +4 cmH

O (with

O to 100 cmH

Resolution: 0.5 cmH

<20.0 cmH

O; 1 cmH

O for values

≥20 cmH

Range: OFF and

NEONATAL: 0.1 L/min to 10 L/min

PEDIATRIC: 0.1 L/min to 30 L/min

ADULT: 0.1 L/min to 100 L/min

Resolution: 0.005 L/min for values

<0.50 L/min; 0.05 L/min for values

≥0.5 L/min to <5.0 L/min; 0.5 L/min for values ≥5.0 L/min

Range: OFF and

NEONATAL: 5 mL to 500 mL

PEDIATRIC: 25 mL to 1500 mL

ADULT: 25 mL to 3000 mL

Resolution: 1 mL for values

<100 mL; 5 mL for values ≥100 mL and <400 mL; 10 mL for values

≥400 mL

Range: 6 mL to 6000 mL

Resolution: 1 mL for values

<100 mL; 5 mL for values ≥100 mL to

<400 mL; 10 mL for values ≥400 mL

Range: OFF or

NEONATAL: 10 1/min to 170 1/min

PEDIATRIC/ADULT: 1/min 10

1/min to 110 1/min

Resolution: 1 1/min

Range:

NEONATAL: 0.2 s to ≤ the value of the NIV inspiratory time limit trigger for the patient’s PBW and circuit type (in seconds)

PEDIATRIC/ADULT: 0.4 s to ≤ the value of the NIV inspiratory time limit trigger (in seconds) for the patient’s PBW and circuit type Res‐ olution: 0.1 s

256

Table 62.

Alarm Settings Range and Resolution (continued)

Setting

Low exhaled mandatory tidal vol‐ ume alarm setting ( ⤓ V

TE MAND

)

Low exhaled minute volume alarm setting ( ⤓⩒

E TOT

)

The ↓ ⩒

E TOT

alarm indicates the measured exhaled minute volume

≤ the set alarm limit for mandatory and spontaneous breaths.

Low exhaled spontaneous tidal vol‐ ume alarm setting ( ⤓ V

TE SPONT

)

The measured mandatory tidal volume

≤ the set alarm limit.

The

↓

Description

TE MAND

TE SPONT

alarm indicates the

alarm indicates the measured spontaneous tidal vol‐ ume ≤ the set alarm limit.

Range and resolution

Range: OFF and

NEONATAL: 1 mL to 300 mL

PEDIATRIC: 1 mL to 1000 mL

ADULT: 1 mL to 2500 mL

Resolution: 1.0 mL for values

<100 mL; 5 mL for values ≥100 mL and <400 mL; 10 mL for values

≥400 mL

Range: OFF when ventilation type

= NIV and

NEONATAL: 0.01 L/min to 10 L/min

PEDIATRIC: 0.05 L/min to 30 L/min

ADULT: 0.05 L/min to 60 L/min

Resolution: 0.005 L/min for values

<0.50 L/min; 0.05 L/min for values

≥0.50 L/min and < 5.0 L/min;

0.5 L/min for values >5.0 L/min

Range: OFF and

NEONATAL: 1 mL to 300 mL

PEDIATRIC: 1 mL to 1000 mL

ADULT: 1 to 2500 mL

Resolution: 1 mL for values

<100 mL; 5 mL for values 100 mL to

<400 mL; 10 mL for values ≥400 mL

Table 63.

Patient Data Range and Resolution

Data value

Breath phase

Inspired tidal volume (V

Leak Sync

) during

Description

The breath phase indicator displays the breath delivery phase (inspira‐ tory or expiratory) currently being delivered to the patient.

The volume inspired for each breath when Leak Sync is enabled.

Inspired tidal volume (V

Driving Pressure (P

DRIVE

)

Dynamic compliance (C

)

DYN

)

Range and resolution

Range: Control (C), Assist (A), Spon‐ taneous (S)

The volume inspired for a pressurebased breath

During PAV+ TM P

DRIVE

Plateau Pressure and the estimated

PEEP

TOT

is computed as the pressure difference between

The result of dividing the delivered tidal volume by the peak airway pressure.

Range: 0 mL to 6000 mL Resolu‐ tion: 0.1 mL for values <10 mL; 1 mL for values 10 mL to 6000 mL

Range: 0 mL to 6000 mL

Resolution: 0.01 mL for 0 mL to

9.9 mL, 1 mL for values 10 mL to

6000 mL

Range: 0 cmH

O to 90 cmH

Resolution: 0.1 cmH

O for 0 cmH to 9.9 cmH

10 cmH

O; 1.0 cmH

O to 90 cmH

O for values

Range: 0 mL/cmH

O to 200 mL/cmH

Resolution: 0.1 mL/cmH ues <10 mL/cmH

2 for values ≥10 mL/cmH

O for val‐

O; 1 mL/cmH

257

Table 63.

Patient Data Range and Resolution (continued)

Data value

Dynamic resistance (R

DYN

End expiratory flow (EEF)

)

End expiratory pressure (PEEP)

End inspiratory pressure (P

I END

)

Description

The change in pressure per unit change in flow.

The rate of expiratory flow occur‐ ring at the end of exhalation.

The pressure at the end of the expir‐ atory phase of the previous breath

(also applies in BiLevel).

The pressure at the end of the inspiratory phase of the current breath (also applies in BiLevel).

Range and resolution

Range: cmH

0.1 cmH

0.0 cmH

O/L/s to 100

O/L/s Resolution:

<10 cmH

O/L/ for values

O/L/s; 1 cmH values ≥10 cmH

O/L/s

O/ L/s for

Range: 0 L/min to 150 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min for values

<20 L/min; 1 L/min for values

≥ 20 L/min

Range: −20.0 cmH

Resolution:

−10.0 cmH

1 cmH

≥10 cmH

O to 130 cmH

0.1 cmH

O between

O and +10.0 cmH

O for values ≤–10 cmH

O and

Range:

Resolution:

−20.0 cmH

1 cmH

−20.0 cmH

130 cmH

O to 130 cmH

0.1 cmH

O for

O to 9.9 cmH

O for values 10 cmH

O to

Range: 0 mL to 6000 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for 0 mL to

9.9 mL; 1 mL for 10 mL to 6000 mL

Exhaled mandatory tidal volume

TE MAND

)

The exhaled volume of the last mandatory breath. When the mode is SPONT, and no mandatory breaths have occurred for a time period ≥2 minutes, the V

TE MAND indicator is hidden. Mandatory breaths can occur during SPONT mode via manual inspiration.

Exhaled minute volume ( ⩒

E TOT

) A calculated sum of the volumes exhaled by the patient for manda‐ tory and spontaneous breaths for the previous one-minute interval

(also applies in BiLevel).

Exhaled spontaneous minute vol‐ ume ( ⩒

E SPONT

)

The sum of exhaled spontaneous volumes per minute (also applies in

BiLevel)

Exhaled spontaneous tidal volume

TE SPONT

Leak Sync exhaled tidal volume

)

Exhaled tidal volume (V

)

Range: 0.00 L/min to 99.9 L/min

Resolution: 0.01 L/min for

0.00 L/min to 9.99 L/min; 0.1 L/min for 10.0 L/min to 99.9 L/min

The exhaled volume of the last spontaneous breath.

The volume exhaled by the patient for the previous mandatory or spontaneous breath (also applies in

BiLevel.

The volume exhaled by the patient for the previous mandatory or spontaneous breath during Leak

Sync (also applies in BiLevel).

Range: 0 L/min to 99.9 L/min

Resolution: 0.01 L/min for

0.00 L/min to 9.99 L/min; 0.1 L/min for 10.0 L/min to 99.9 L/min

Range: 0 mL to 6000 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for 0 mL to

9.9 mL; 1 mL for 10 mL to 6000 mL

Range: 0 mL to 6000 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for 0 mL to

9.9 mL; 1 mL for 10 mL to 6000 mL

Range: 0 mL to 6000 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for 0 mL to

9.9 mL; 1 mL for 10 mL to 6000 mL

258

Table 63.

Patient Data Range and Resolution (continued)

I:E ratio

Data value

Inspiratory compliance (C

Intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

)

/C)

Description

The ratio of the inspiratory time to expiratory time for the previous breath.

The ratio of compliance of the last

20% of inspiration to the compli‐ ance of the entire inspiration

A calculated estimate of the pres‐ sure above PEEP at the end of exha‐ lation.

Range and resolution

Range: 1:599 to 149:1

Resolution: 0.1 for 9.9:1 to 1:9.9; 1 for

149:1 to 10:1 and 1:10 to 1:599

Range: 0 to 1.00

Resolution: 0.01

Mean circuit pressure (P

MEAN

)

Negative inspiratory force (NIF)

% (monitored)

0.1

The calculated average circuit pres‐ sure for an entire breath cycle including both inspiratory and expiratory phases (whether the breath is mandatory or spontane‐ ous).

The negative pressure generated during a maximally forced inspira‐ tory effort against an obstruction to flow.

The monitored percentage of oxy‐ gen in the gas delivered to the patient, measured at the ventilator outlet upstream of the inspiratory filter.

The inspiratory depression of air‐ way pressure after 100 ms of occlu‐ sion. P

0.1

is an indicator of respira‐ tory drive.

PAV based intrinsic PEEP (PEEP

I PAV

) The estimated intrinsic PEEP during a PAV+™ breath. Intrinsic PEEP is an estimate of the pressure above

PEEP at the end of every pause exhalation.

PAV-based lung compliance (C

PAV

) a

The calculated change in pulmo‐ nary volume for an applied change in patient airway pressure when measured under conditions of zero flow during a PAV+™ plateau maneuver. When PAV+™ is selected, the ventilator displays the current filtered value for patient compli‐ ance, and updates the display at the successful completion of each esti‐ mation. C

PAV

can be displayed in the

vital patient data banner. See Sec‐

Range: −20.0 cmH

O to +130 cmH

Resolution:

−9.9 cmH

1 cmH

≥10 cmH

0.1 cmH

O between

O and +9.9 cmH

O for values ≤–10 cmH

O and

Range: −20.0 cmH

Resolution:

−20.0 cmH

1 cmH

O to 100 cmH

0.1 cmH

O to 9.9 cmH

O for 10 cmH

100 cmH

O for

O to

Range: ≤0 cmH

O to ≥–50 cmH

Resolution:

≤–10 cmH

>–10 cmH

1 cmH

O for values

O; 0.1 cmH

O for values

Range: 0% to 103%

Resolution: 1%

Range: ≥–20 cmH

−10 cmH

≥–10 cmH

Resolution: 1 cmH

O to 0 cmH

O for values <

O; 0.1 cmH

O for values

Range: 0 cmH

O to 130 cmH

Resolution: 0.1 cmH

O for values

<10 cmH

≥10 cmH

O; 1 cmH

O for values

Range: 2.5 mL/cmH

O to 200 mL/cmH

Resolution: 0.1 mL/cmH ues <10 mL/cmH

2 values ≥10 mL/cmH

O for val‐

O; 1 cmH

O for

259

Table 63.

Patient Data Range and Resolution (continued)

PAV-based total airway resistance

TOT

) a

PAV-based work of breathing

(WOB

TOT

)

Data value

PAV-based lung elastance (E

PAV

PAV-based patient resistance (R

Peak expiratory flow (PEF)

)

PAV

)

Description

tion 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient Data, page 82

For a PAV+™ breath, E ted as the inverse of C above). E

PAV

is calcula‐

(see

can be displayed in the

vital patient data banner. See Sec‐ tion 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient Data, page 82

The difference between estimated total resistance R

TOT

and the simul‐ taneously estimated resistance of the artificial airway. When PAV+™ is selected, the ventilator displays the current filtered value for patient resistance, and updates the display at the successful completion of each estimation. R

PAV

can be dis‐ played in the vital patient data ban‐

ner. See Section 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient

Data, page 82

cmH

Range and resolution

Range: 5.0 cmH

O/L to 400 cmH

O/L

Resolution: 0.1 cmH

<10 cmH

O/L

O/L; 1 cmH

O/L for values

O/L ≥10

Range: 0.0 cmH

O/L/s to 60 cmH

O/L/s

Resolution: 0.1 cmH ues <10 cmH

2 for values ≥ 10 cmH

O/L/s for val‐

O/L/s; 1 cmH

O/L/s

O/ L/s

TOT

is an estimated value captured just past peak expiratory flow and is equal to the pressure loss across the patient airway plus respiratory sys‐ tem (patient airway + ET tube + expiratory limb of the VBS)/ expira‐ tory flow. This pressure loss is divi‐ ded by the expiratory flow estima‐ ted at the same moment, yielding the estimate for R

TOT

.The complete operation is orchestrated and monitored by a software algorithm.

When PAV+™ is selected, the venti‐ lator displays the current filtered value for total resistance, and updates the display at the success‐ ful completion of each calculation.

TOT can be displayed in the vital patient data banner. See

Sec‐ tion 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient Data, page 82

Range: 1.0 cmH

O/L/s to 80 cmH

O/L/s

Resolution: 0.1 cmH ues <10 cmH

2 for values ≥10 cmH

O/L/s for val‐

O/L/s; 1 cmH

O/L/s

O/ L/s

The estimated effort needed for patient inspiration including both patient and ventilator.

Range: 1.0 J/L to10.0 J/L

Resolution: 0.1 J/L

The maximum speed of exhalation.

Range: 0 L/min to 150 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min for PEF

<20 L/min; 1 L/min for PEF ≥20 L/min

260

Table 63.

Patient Data Range and Resolution (continued)

TEY

) ume ( ⩒

Data value

Peak circuit pressure (P

PEAK

)

Peak spontaneous flow (PSF)

Plateau pressure (P

E TOTY

)

Proximal exhaled tidal volume

Proximal exhaled total minute vol‐

Description

The maximum pressure during the previous breath, relative to the patient wye, including inspiratory and expiratory phases.

The maximum flow rate sampled during a spontaneous inspiration.

The pressure measured during an inspiratory pause maneuver.

For neonatal patients, the exhaled volume of the previous breath measured by the proximal flow sen‐ sor) (if installed).

For neonatal patients, the exhaled minute volume measured by the proximal flow sensor) (if installed).

Range and resolution

Range: −20.0 cmH

O to 130 cmH

Resolution: 0.1 cmH

O for values

−20.0 cmH

1 cmH

130 cmH

O to 9.9 cmH

O for values 10 cmH

O to

Range: 0 L/min to 200 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min for values

<20 L/min; 1 L/min for values

≥ 20 L/min

Range: −20.0 cmH

O to 130 cmH

Resolution: 0.1 cmH

O for values

−20.0 cmH

1 cmH

O to 9.9 cmH

O for values ≥10 cmH

Range: 0 mL to 500 mL

Resolution: 0.1 mL for values 0 mL to 9.9 mL; 1 mL for values 10 mL to

500 mL

Range: 0.00 L/min to 99.9 L/min

Resolution: 0.01 L/min for

0.00 L/min to 9.99 L/min; 0.1 L/min for 10.0 L/min to 99.9 L/min

Range: 0 mL to 500 mL

Resolution: 1 mL

Proximal inspired tidal volume (V

TIY

) For neonatal patients, the inspired volume of the previous breath measured by the proximal flow sen‐ sor) (if installed).

Spontaneous inspiratory time (T

SPONT

)

Spontaneous inspiratory time ratio

TOT

)

Spontaneous rapid shallow breath‐ ing index (f/V

)

The duration of the inspiratory phase of a spontaneous breath.

The fraction of the total spontane‐ ous breath time used by inspiration.

Static compliance (C

STAT

)

A calculated value using exhaled spontaneous tidal volume. High values indicate the patient is breathing rapidly, but with little vol‐ ume/breath. Low values indicate the inverse scenario.

An estimate of the patient’s lungthorax static compliance or elastic‐ ity.

Static resistance (R

STAT

)

Range:

0 s to 10 s

Resolution: 0.01 s

0 to 1

Resolution: 0.01

0.1 1/min-L to 600 1/min-L

Resolution: 0.1 1/min-L for values

<10 1/min-L; 1 1/min-L; for values

≥10 1/min-L

An estimate of the restrictiveness of the patient’s lungs and the artificial airway.

Range: 0 mL/cmH

O to 500 mL/ cmH

Resolution: 0.1 mL/cmH

O for val‐

O; 1 mL/cmH

O ues <10 mL/cmH for values ≥10 mL/cmH

Range: 0 cmH

O/L/s to 500 cmH

O/L/s

Resolution: 0.1 cmH ues <10 cmH

2 for values ≥10 cmH

O/L/s for val‐

O/L/s, 1 cmH

O/L/s

O/ L/s

261

Table 63.

Patient Data Range and Resolution (continued)

LEAK

%LEAK

LEAK

Data value

Total PEEP (PEEP

)

Total respiratory rate (f

Vital capacity (VC)

TOT

)

The estimated pressure at the cir‐ cuit wye during an expiratory pause maneuver.

Description

The number of mandatory or spon‐ taneous breaths/min delivered to the patient.

The maximum amount of air that can be exhaled after a maximum inhalation.

Inspiratory leak volume, the total volume delivered during inspira‐ tion to compensate for the leak.

Percent leak, the percentage of total delivered volume during inspi‐ ration attributed to the leak calcu‐ lated as (leak volume during inspi‐ ration / total delivered inspiratory volume)×100.

Exhalation leak. The leak rate at

PEEP during exhalation.

Exhalation Leak at PEEP during Leak

Sync, measured by the proximal flow sensor.

Range and resolution

Range: –20.0 cmH

O to +130 cmH

Resolution: 0.1 cmH

<10 cmH

≤–10 cmH

O; 1 cmH

O for values

O and ≥10 cmH

Range: 1 1/min to 200 1/min

Resolution: 0.1 1/min for values <10

1/min; 1 1/min for 10 1/min to 200

1/min

Range:

Resolution:

<10 mL; 1 mL for values ≥10 mL

Range:

0 mL to 6000 mL

Resolution:

0.1 mL for values

0 mL to 9000 mL

Resolution: 1 mL

0% to 100%

0 L/min to 200 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min

0 L/min to 50 L/min

Resolution: 0.1 L/min a If the estimated value of C

PAV

, E

PAV

, R

PAV

, or R

TOT

violates expected (PBW-based) limits, parentheses around the value indicate the value is questionable. If the estimated value exceeds its absolute limit, the limit value flashes in parentheses.

Table 64.

Delivery Accuracy

Parameter

Inspiratory pressure (P

)

End expiratory pressure (PEEP)

Pressure support (P

SUPP

)

Tidal volume (V)

Accuracy

±(3.0+2.5% of setting) cmH

±(2.0+4% of setting) cmH

±(3.0+2.5% of setting) cmH

For adult and pediatric circuit type settings:

For T<600ms:

±(10+10% of setting ×600 ms/T

ms)

For T

≥600ms:

±(10+10% of setting) mL.

For neonatal circuit type settings:

For setting of 2 mL VC+ only):

±(1+10% of setting) mL.

For setting of 3 mL to 4 mL:

±(2+10% of setting) mL (delivered volume shall be ≥1 mL.

Range

5 cmH

O to 90 cmH

0 cmH

O to 45 cmH

0 cmH

O to 70 cmH

For adult and pediatric circuit type settings: 25 mL to 2500 mL For neo‐ natal circuit type settings: 2 mL to

310 mL

262

Table 64.

Delivery Accuracy (continued)

Parameter

% (delivered)

Accuracy

For setting of 5 mL to 20 mL:

±(3+15% of setting).

For setting of ≥20 mL:

±(4+10% of setting) mL.

±3%

±(2.0+4% of setting) cmH

Range

21% to 100%

5 cmH

O to 90 cmH

0 cmH

O to 45 cmH

Table 65.

Monitoring (Patient Data) Accuracy

Parameter

Peak circuit pressure (P

PEAK

)

Mean circuit pressure (P

MEAN

)

End expiratory pressure (PEEP)

End inspiratory pressure (P

I END

)

Inspired tidal volume (V

)

Exhaled tidal volume (V

Inspired tidal volume during Leak

Sync (V

)

Accuracy

±(2+4% of reading) cmH

±(4 mL+15% of actual) mL

±(4 mL+10% of actual) mL

For adult and pediatric circuit type settings:

For T≤600ms:

±(10+20% ×600 ms/T

ms of read‐ ing) mL.

For T

>600 ms:

±(10+20% of reading) mL.

For neonatal circuit type setting:

±(10+20% of reading) mL.

For readings <100 mL, the accuracy shall apply when the percentage of inspiratory leak volume is <80%.

Exhaled tidal volume (V

Leak Sync

) during For adult and pediatric circuit type settings:

For T

≤600ms:

±(10+20% ×600 ms/T

ms of read‐ ing) mL.

For T

>600 ms:

±(10+20% of reading) mL.

For neonatal circuit type setting:

±(10+20% of reading) mL.

For readings <100 mL, the accuracy shall apply when the percentage of inspiratory leak volume is <80%.

Proximal exhaled tidal volume (V

TEY

) ±(1+10% of reading) mL

Proximal inspired tidal volume (V

TIY

) ±(1+10% of reading) mL

% (monitored) ±3%

Respiratory rate (f

TOT

) ±0.8 1/min

Range

5 cmH

O to 90 cmH

3 cmH

O to 70 cmH

0 cmH

O to 45 cmH

5 cmH

O to 90 cmH

2 mL to 2500 mL

For adult and pediatric circuit type settings:

25 mL to 2500 mL

For neonatal circuit type settings:

2 mL to 310 mL

For adult and pediatric circuit type settings:

25 mL to 2500 mL

For neonatal circuit type settings:

2 mL to 310 mL

15% to 100%

1 1/min to 150 1/min

263

Table 66.

Computed Value Accuracy

Parameter Accuracy

PAV-based lung compliance (C

PAV

) ±(1+20% of measured value)

mL/cmH

PAV-based total airway resistance

TOT

)

PAV-based work of breathing

(WOB

TOT

)

±(3+20% of measured value)

cmH

75%

O/L/s

±(0.5+10% of measured work) J/L with a percent support setting of

10 mL/cmH

5.0 cmH

0.7 J/L to 4 J/L

Range

O to 100 mL/cmH

O/L/s to 50 cmH

O/L/s

Warning: The ventilator accuracies listed in this chapter are applicable under the operating conditions identified.

See

Table 60, page 249

Operation outside specified ranges cannot guarantee the accuracies listed in the tables above, and may supply incorrect information.

11.8 Manufacturer’s Declaration

The following tables contain the manufacturer’s declarations for the ventilator system electromagnetic emissions, electromagnetic immunity, separation distances between ventilator and portable and mobile RF communications equipment and a list of compliant cables.

Warning: Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect the performance of the ventilator system. Install and use this device according to the information contained in this manual.

Warning: The ventilator system should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment, except as may be specified elsewhere in this manual. If adjacent or stacked used is necessary, the ventilator system should be observed to verify normal operation in the configurations in which it will be used.

Warning: Portable RF communications equipment (including peripherals such as antenna cables and external antennas should be used no closer than 30 cm (12 in) to any part of the ventilator, including cables specified by the manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the performance of this equipment could result.

Caution: This equipment is not intended for use in residential environments and may not provide adequate protection to radio communication services in such environments.

Note: The emissions characteristics of this equipment make it suitable for use in industrial areas and hospitals

(CISPR 11 class A). If it is used in a residential environment (for which CISPR 11 class B is normally required) this equipment might not offer adequate protection to radio-frequency communication services. The user might need to take mitigation measures, such as relocating or re-orienting the equipment.

264

Table 67.

Electromagnetic Emissions

The ventilator is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the operator of the ventilator should assure that it is used in such an environment.

Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment— guidance

Radiated RF emissions

CISPR 11

Group 1

Class A

The ventilator uses RF energy only for its internal functions. The venti‐ lator is intended to be used only in hospitals and not be connected to the public mains network.

Conducted emissions

CISPR 11

The ventilator is intended to be used only in hospitals and not be connected to the public mains net‐ work.

Harmonic emissions

IEC 61000-3-2

Voltage fluctuations/flicker

IEC 61000-3-3

Class A

Complies

The ventilator is intended to be used only in hospitals and not be connected to the public mains net‐ work.

Table 68.

Electromagnetic Immunity

The ventilator is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the operator of the ventilator should assure that it is used in such an environment.

EMC test Test standard Test levels Remarks Electromagnetic environment— guidance

ESD

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-2

±2,4,68 kV contact discharge

±2,4,8,15 kV air dis‐ charge

N/A

Floors should be wood, concrete, or ceramic tile. If floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least

30%.

Radiated immunity

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 61000-4-3

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-3

10 V/m

3 V/m

Modulation: 80%

AM, 2 Hz

Modulation: 80%

AM, 1 kHz

N/A

265

Table 68.

Electromagnetic Immunity (continued)

The ventilator is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the operator of the ventilator should assure that it is used in such an environment.

EMC test Test standard Test levels Remarks Electromagnetic environment— guidance

EFT/burst

Surge

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 61000-4-4

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014IEC

61000-4-4

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-5

±1 kV (I/O)

±2 kV (AC Mains)

±05 kV,1 kV line to line

±05 kV,1 kV &2 kV line to earth

5 kHz pulse repeti‐ tion rate

100 kHz pulse repe‐ tition rate

N/A

Mains power quality should be that of a typical hospital envi‐ ronment.

Conducted immun‐ ity

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 61000-4-6

3 V

RMS

10 V

RMS

in the follow‐ ing frequency

ranges (ISM Bands a

);

• 6.765–6.795 MH z

• 13.553–13.567

MHz

• 26.957–27.283

MHz

• 40.66 –

40.70 MHz

3 V

RMS

6 V

RMS

in the follow‐ ing frequency

ranges (ISM Bands a

);

Modulation: 80%

AM, 2 Hz

Portable and mobile

RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the ven‐ tilator system, including cables, than the separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the fre‐ quency of the trans‐ mitter. See

Table 71

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-6

• 6.765–6.795 MH z

• 13.553–13.567

MHz

Modulation: 80%

AM, 1 kHz

• 26.957 –27.283

MHz

• 40.66 –

40.70 MHz

Magnetic immunity

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-8

30 A/m N/A

Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical hospital envi‐ ronment.

NOTE: U

is the AC mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

266

Table 68.

Electromagnetic Immunity (continued)

The ventilator is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the operator of the ventilator should assure that it is used in such an environment.

EMC test Test standard Test levels Remarks Electromagnetic environment— guidance

• 95% minimum voltage reduc‐ tion for 0.5 peri‐ ods (10)

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 61000-4-11

• 60% minimum voltage reduc‐ tion for 5 peri‐ ods (100)

Voltage dips

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-11

• 30% minimum voltage reduc‐ tion for 25 peri‐ ods (500)

• U

=0%, 0.5

cycle (0, 45, 90,

135, 180, 225,

270, and 350°)

• U

=0%; 1 cycle

=70%; 25/30 cycles (@0°)

N/A

Mains power should be that of a typical hospital environ‐ ment. If the operator of the ventilator requires continuous operation during power mains inter‐ ruptions, it is recom‐ mended that the ventilator be pow‐ ered from an unin‐ terruptible power supply or a battery.

Interrupts

Proximity field from

RF wireless commu‐ nication equipment

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 3.0:2007

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-11

IEC 60601-1-2, Edi‐ tion 4.0:2014

IEC 61000-4-3

• U

See

=0%;

250/300 cycles

Table 69

Modulation: See

Table 69 .

N/A

RFID immunity

AIM Standard

7351731 Rev. 2.00

2017

IEC 61000-4-3

See AIM Standard

Test Levels ( Table 70

See section 7 in AIM

Standard 7351731 for more details on execution of the dif‐ ferent RFID specifi‐ cations.

N/A

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.

NOTE 2 these guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

a The ISM (industrial, scientific and medical) bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz are 6.765 to 6,795 MHz; 13.553 MHz to

13.567 MHz; 26.957 MHz; and 40.66 MHz to 40.70 MHz. The compliance levels in the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80 MHz to 2.5 GHz are intended to decrease the likelihood mobile/portable communications equipment could cause interference if it is inadvertently brought into patient areas. For this reason, an additional factor of 10/3 is used in calculating the separation distance for transmitters in these frequency ranges.

267

Table 69.

Immunity to Proximity Fields RF Wireless Communications Equipment

Test fre‐ quency

(MHz)

Band (MHz) Service Modulation Maximum power (W)

Distance (m) Immunity test level

(V/m)

385

450

380–390

430–470

TETRA 400

• GMRS

460

• FRS 460

Pulse modula‐ tion

18 Hz

FM ±5 kHz deviation

1 kHz sine

1,8

0,3

710

745

780

810

870

704–787

LTE Band 13,

Pulse modula‐ tion217 Hz

Pulse modula‐ tion 18 Hz

0,2 0,3 9

930

1720

1845

1970

2450

800–960

1700–1990

2400–2570

• GSM

800/900

• TETRA

800

• iDEN 820

• CDMA

850

• LTE Band

• GSM

1800

• CDMA

1900

• GSM

1900

• GSM

1900

DECT

• LTE Band

1, 3, 4, 25

• UMTS

• Bluetoot h ™*

• WLAN,

802.11

b/g/n

• RFID

2450

• LTE Band

Pulse modula‐ tion 217 Hz

0,3

5240

5500

5785

5100–5800

WLAN

802.11a/n

Pulse modula‐ tion 217 Hz

0,2 0,3 9

268

Table 70.

AIM Standard Test Levels

RFID specification

ISO 14223

ISO/IEC 14443-3 (Type A)

ISO/IEC 14443-4 (Type B)

ISO/IEC 15693 (ISO 18000-3 Mode 1)

ISO 18999-3 Mode 3

ISO/IEC 18000-7

ISO/IEC 18000-63 Type C

ISO/IEC 18000-4 Mode 1

Frequency

134.2 kHz

13.56 MHz

433 MHz

860–960 MHz

2.45 GHz

Test level (RMS)

65 A/m

7.5 A/m

5 A/m

12 A/m

3 V/m

54 V/m

Table 71.

Recommended Separation Distances for RF

The ventilator is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances are controlled. The customer or the operator of the ventilator can help prevent electromagnetic inter‐ ference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equip‐ ment (transmitters) and the ventilator as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.

Rated maximum output power of transmitter (W)

150 kHz to 80 MHz outside of ISM bands

150 kHz to 80 MHz inside of ISM bands

80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz

0.01

0.1

100

0.117

0.37

1.17

3.7

11.7

0.12

0.38

1.2

3.8

0.12

0.38

1.2

3.8

0.23

0.73

2.3

7.3

For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d

in meters (m) a

can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer. These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.

NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.

NOTE 2

Field strengths from fixed transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site survey the compliance level in each frequency range the following symbol:

, should be less than

. Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with

11 a The compliance levels in the ISM frequency bands between 150 kHz and 80 MHz and in the frequency range 80 MHz to

2.5 GHz are intended to decrease the likelihood mobile/portable communications equipment could cause interference if it is inadvertently brought into patient areas. For this reason, an additional factor of 10/3 is used in calculating the separation distance for transmitters in these frequency ranges.

b Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the 980 Series Ventilator is used exceeds the applicable

269

RF compliance level above, the 980 Series Ventilator should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the ventilator.

c Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 10 V/m.

Warning: The use of accessories and cables other than those specified with the exception of parts sold by

Covidien as replacements for internal components, may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the ventilator system.

Table 72.

Recommended Cables

Part Number and Description

10081056, Power cord, 10A, RA, USA 3 m (10 ft)

Cable length

11.9 Safety Tests

All safety tests should be performed by qualified service personnel at the interval specified. See

Table 41 .

11.10 Essential Performance Requirements

Per ISO/EN 80601-2-12: 2011, Medical electrical equipment Part 2-12: Particular requirements for basic safety and essential performance of critical care ventilators, the ventilator’s essential performance requirements are given in

Table 61 ,

Table 62 , and

Table 63

. Alarms, including oxygen level alarms and gas failure alarms, are identified in

Chapter 6 . AC and battery backup power information is given in

Chapter 3

, and gas failure cross flow information

is given in Chapter 3 .

If essential performance is lost or degraded due to exposure of electromagnetic disturbance levels higher than

those described in Table 68

, the following may occur:

• Component failures

• Changes in programmable parameters or settings

• Reset to default settings

• Changes to operating mode

• Initiation of an unintended operation

• Error in delivered volume of individual breaths greater than 35%

• Error in delivered minute volume greater than 25%

• False positive alarm condition

• Failure to Alarm

270

12 Appendix BiLevel 2.0

12.1 Overview

This appendix describes the operation of the BiLevel 2.0 ventilation mode on the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series

Ventilator.

BiLevel is a mixed mode of ventilation that combines attributes of mandatory and spontaneous breathing, with the breath timing settings determining which breath type is favored. In BiLevel Mode, mandatory breaths are always pressure-controlled, and spontaneous breaths can be pressure-supported (PS) or tube compensated (TC).

Figure 99.

Spontaneous Breathing at P

1 P

CIRC

(cmH

2 T

3 T

4 P

5 P

6 Spontaneous breaths

BiLevel resembles SIMV mode, except that BiLevel establishes two levels of positive airway pressure. Cycling between the two levels can be triggered by BiLevel timing settings or by patient effort.

Figure 100.

BiLevel Mode

1 Pressure (y-axis)

2 P

3 P

4 Spontaneous breath

5 Synchronized transitions

6 Pressure support

7 Time-based transitions. NOTE: The Pressure support level is always referenced to P

The two pressure levels are called low pressure (P

) and high pressure (P

BiLevel monitors mandatory and spontaneous tidal volumes separately.

). At either pressure level, patients can breathe spontaneously, and spontaneous breaths can be assisted with tube compensation or pressure support.

Inspiratory time and expiratory time in BiLevel become time high (T

H inspiratory and expiratory times, P

is maintained during T

and P

) and time low (T

), respectively. During these

is maintained during T

271

12.2 Intended Use

BiLevel is intended for adult, pediatric, and neonatal patients.

12.3 Safety Reminder

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

12.4 Setting Up BiLevel

BiLevel is a ventilatory mode (along with A/C, SIMV, and SPONT).

To set up BiLevel

1. At the ventilator setup screen, enter PBW or gender and height.

2. Touch BiLevel. After selecting BiLevel mode, the ventilator uses the PC mandatory breath type, which cannot be changed.

3. Choose the spontaneous type (PS or TC).

4. Choose trigger type (P-Trig or ⩒ -Trig).

5. Select desired ventilator settings. The default settings for BiLevel mode appear. To change a setting, touch its button and turn the knob to set its value. P

must always be at least 5 cmH

O greater than P

6. Set T

, T

or the ratio of T

to T

. To select settings that would result in a T

ratio greater than 1:1 or 4:1, you must touch Continue to confirm after reaching the 1:1 and 4:1 limits.

Figure 101.

BiLevel Setup Screen

7. Touch Start.

8. Set apnea and alarm settings by touching their respective tabs at the side of the ventilator settings screen and changing settings appropriately.

272

Note: The rise time% setting determines the rise time to reach target pressure for transitions from P

L spontaneous breaths, even when pressure support (P spontaneous breaths.

SUPP

)=0. Expiratory sensitivity (E

SENS

to P

) applies to all

and for

12.5 Using Pressure Support with BiLevel

Spontaneous breaths in BiLevel mode can be assisted with pressure support according to these rules (see

Figure 102, page 273

• Pressure support (P

SUPP to P

) can be used to assist spontaneous breaths at P

. Target pressure =P

SUPP

and P

. P

SUPP

is always set relative

• Spontaneous patient efforts at P

are not pressure supported unless P

SUPP

>(P

−P

). All spontaneous breaths

(whether or not they are pressure supported) are assisted by a pressure of 1.5 cmH

• If P

SUPP

is greater than P

H all spontaneous breaths at P

+1.5 cmH

O, all spontaneous breaths at P

are assisted by P

SUPP

−(P

−P

are assisted by the P

SUPP

setting, and

• All spontaneous breaths not supported by PS or TC (for example, a classic CPAP breath) are assisted with an inspiratory pressure of 1.5 cmH

For example, if P

=5 cmH

O, P

=15 cmH

O, and P

SUPP

=20 cmH

• All spontaneous breaths at P

25 cmH

O, and

are assisted by 20 cmH

O of pressure support (P

SUPP

) for a total pressure of

• All spontaneous breaths in P

H total pressure of 25 cmH

are assisted by 10 cmH

O of pressure support (P

SUPP

−(P

− P

)) for the same

Figure 102.

BiLevel with Pressure Support

1 Pressure (y-axis)

2 P

Pressure support =10 cmH

3 P

Pressure support =20 cmH

4 P

5 P

During spontaneous breaths, the pressure target is calculated with respect to P

12.6 Manual Inspirations in BiLevel Mode

Pressing the manual inspiration key during BiLevel mode causes the ventilator to:

• Cycle to P

, if the current pressure level is P

• Cycle to P

, if the current pressure level is P

To avoid breath stacking, the ventilator does not cycle from one pressure level to another during the earliest stage of exhalation.

273

12.7 Respiratory Mechanics Maneuvers in BiLevel

In BiLevel, respiratory mechanics maneuvers are limited to inspiratory pause and expiratory pause maneuvers.

12.8 Specifications

See

Table 61, page 249 for the following specifications:

• Low pressure (P

)

• High pressure (P

)

• Low time (T

)

• High time (T

)

• T

ratio

• Respiratory rate (f )

• Rise time%

12.9 Technical Description

BiLevel is a mode of ventilation that alternately cycles between two operator-set pressure levels, P

and P

H pressure durations are defined by operator-set timing variables T

L levels, P

and P

, are analogous to breath phase transitions in PC.

and T

. The

. Transitions between the two pressure

At the extreme ranges of T

and T

, BiLevel can resemble the single breath type mode A/C - PC, or the more complex breath type mode, an “inverted-like” IMV. If T

and T example T

>1:2 or 1:3), then BiLevel assumes a breathing pattern similar to, if not qualitatively identical to A/C -

PC. However, as T

begins to shorten with the T pattern patented by John Downs

and defined as APRV.

assume normal values with respect to PBW (for

ratio extending beyond 4:1, the breathing pattern assumes a distinctly different shape. In the extreme, the exaggerated time at P

and abrupt release to P

would match the

In between the A/C - PC-like pattern and the APRV-like pattern, there would be patterns with moderately long T

H and T

intervals, allowing the patient sufficient time to breathe spontaneously at both P

and P

L and spontaneous breath types. In this sense, BiLevel and SIMV are classified as mixed modes.

. In these types of breathing patterns, (but less so with APRV) BiLevel, like SIMV, can be thought of as providing both mandatory

Direct access to any of the three breath timing parameters in BiLevel is accomplished by touching the padlock icon associated with the T

period, T

period or the T

ratio displayed on the breath timing bar in the setup screen.

While in BiLevel mode, spontaneously triggered breaths at either pressure level can be augmented with higher inspiratory pressures using pressure support (PS) or tube compensation (TC) breath types.

12.9.1 Synchrony in BiLevel

Just as BiLevel attempts to synchronize spontaneous breath delivery with the patient’s inspiratory and expiratory efforts, it also attempts to synchronize the transitions between pressure levels with the patient’s breathing efforts.

This allows T

H the T

to be extended to prevent transitions to P

during the patient’s spontaneous inspiration. Likewise,

interval may be extended to prevent a transition to P

during the patient’s spontaneous exhalation.

The trigger sensitivity setting (P

down to P

and T pattern.

SENS

or ⩒

SENS

) is used to synchronize the transition from P

is synchronized with the patient’s spontaneous expiratory effort. The BiLevel algorithm will vary the

intervals as necessary to synchronize the transitions between P

and P

to P

. The transition from

to match the patient’s breathing

The actual durations of T

and T

vary according to whether or not the patient makes any spontaneous inspiratory efforts during those periods.

4 Downs, JB, Stock MC. Airway pressure release ventilation: A new concept in ventilatory support. Crit Care Med

1987;15:459–461

274

To manage synchrony with the patient’s breathing pattern, the BiLevel algorithm partitions the T

into spontaneous and synchronous intervals as shown in Figure 103 .

and T

periods

Figure 103.

Spontaneous and Synchronous Intervals

1 Pressure (y-axis)

2 T

3 P

4 P

5 T

6 Synchronous interval

7 Spontaneous interval

By partitioning T

and T

into spontaneous and synchronous phases, BiLevel responds to patient efforts (or lack of them) in a predictable pattern:

• During the spontaneous interval of each pressure level, successful inspiratory efforts cause the ventilator to deliver spontaneous breaths.

• During T

L synchronous intervals, successful inspiratory efforts cause the ventilator to cycle from P

L there is no spontaneous (patient) effort, this transition takes place at the end of the T

period.

to P

. If

• During T

H synchronous intervals, successful expiratory efforts cause the ventilator to cycle from P

to P

. If there is no spontaneous exhalation, the transition to the P

level takes place at the end of the T

period.

12.9.2 Patient Monitoring in BiLevel

If the patient breathes spontaneously at either pressure level, BiLevel monitors and displays the total respiratory rate, including mandatory and spontaneous breaths. BiLevel also displays the exhaled tidal volume and total exhaled minute volume for both mandatory and spontaneous breaths.

12.9.3 APRV Strategy in BiLevel

Lengthening the T

period and shortening the T breath volume, results in an inverse T

period to only allow incomplete exhalation of the mandatory ratio. In this breath timing configuration with T

4:1, BiLevel becomes A irway P ressure R elease V entilation (APRV).

ratios of greater than

APRV is characterized by longer T

periods, short T

periods (usually less than 1 second), and inverse T

ratios.

Because at these breath timing settings, all of the patient-triggered spontaneous breaths occur during the T

“releases”, which are controlled by the f setting.

H period, APRV resembles CPAP ventilation with occasional, short periods of incomplete exhalation referred to as

275

Figure 104.

APRV With Spontaneous Breathing at P

1 P

CIRC

(cmH

2 Lengthened inspiratory time (T

)

3 Shortened release time (T

)

In APRV, the P

level is set to optimize pulmonary compliance for spontaneous breathing while maintaining an elevated mean airway pressure to promote oxygenation, the P

level is set, along with the T

, to control the expiratory release volume of mandatory breaths to help manage CO controls the number of releases per minute which are used to help manage the patient’s CO also impacts the mean airway pressure.

and alveolar ventilation, and the f setting

levels. The f setting

In APRV the operator can configure the BiLevel settings to allow direct control of T f setting will not inadvertently lengthen the T

L volume. With the T

period locked, changes in set f will change the T

H while maintaining the set T

period.

to assure that changes in the

period resulting in destabilization of end-expiratory alveolar

period to accommodate the new f setting

12.9.4 Technical Structure of BiLevel

In BiLevel, the ventilator establishes two levels of baseline pressure. One level is essentially the same as the standard PEEP level set for all common modes of ventilation. The second pressure level is the level established at

. Both pressure levels permit CPAP, TC and PS breaths. The breath timing settings determine whether the patient can initiate any of these breath types.

12.10 Mode Changes

Changing to BiLevel mode from other modes follows the general guidelines for mode changes:

• The change is made as soon as possible without compromising inspiration or exhalation.

• Breaths are not stacked during inspiration.

276

13 Appendix Leak Sync

13.1 Overview

This appendix describes the operation of the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Leak Sync function. Leak Sync enables the ventilator to compensate for leaks in the breathing circuit while accurately detecting the patient’s effort to trigger and cycle a breath. Because Leak Sync allows the ventilator to differentiate between flow due to leaks and flow due to patient respiratory effort, it provides dynamic compensation and enhances patient-ventilator synchrony. See

Chapter 4

for general parameter and operational information.

13.2 Intended Use

Leak Sync is designed to compensate for leaks in the breathing circuit during non-invasive or invasive ventilation.

Leak Sync accurately quantifies instantaneous leak rates, therefore detecting patient respiratory phase transitions correctly and may affect work of breathing. Leak Sync is intended for neonatal, pediatric, and adult patients.

13.3 Safety Reminder

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

13.4 Leak Sync

Breathing circuit leaks can cause the ventilator to erroneously detect patient inspiratory efforts (called autotriggering) or delay exhalation in pressure support. Patient interfaces such as masks are particularly prone to significant leaks. Inaccurately declaring inspiration or exhalation can result in patient-ventilator dysynchrony and increased work of breathing.

Changing inspiratory or expiratory sensitivity settings can temporarily correct the problem, but requires continued frequent clinical intervention to ensure that sensitivity is adjusted appropriately as conditions change

(for example, if the patient moves or the circuit leak changes).

Leak Sync adds flow to the breathing circuit to compensate for leaks. The maximum Leak Sync flow applies to the maximum base flow compensation during exhalation. During pressure-based inspirations, the total delivered flow (leak flow plus inspiratory flow) is limited by the maximum total flow.

Table 73

shows the maximum leak rates at set PEEP pressure that Leak Sync will compensate based on patient type.

Table 73.

Maximum Leak Compensation Flow Based on Patient Type

Patient type

Neonatal

Pediatric

Adult

Maximum leak compensation flow at PEEP

Invasive: 15 L/min

NIV: 30 L/min (25 L/min if compres‐ sor is the air source)

40 L/min (25 L/min if compressor is the air source)

65 L/min (25 L/min if compressor is the air source)

Maximum total flow

50 L/min

120 L/min

200 L/min

Warning: With significant leaks, pressure targets may not be reached due to flow limitations.

277

13.5 Setting Up Leak Sync

For more information on setting up the ventilator, see Chapter 4 .

To enable Leak Sync

1. At the ventilator setup screen, touch the More Settings tab.

2. Touch Enabled in the Leak Sync area.

3. Touch Accept ALL to enable Leak Sync.

Figure 105.

Enabling Leak Sync

Note: The default value for Leak Sync is Disabled when the circuit type is pediatric or adult and the ventilation type is invasive. Otherwise the default value for Leak Sync is Enabled.

Note: Leak Sync is not allowed for tube compensated (TC) and Proportional Assist Ventilation (PAV+™) breath types.

13.6 When Leak Sync is Enabled

See

Figure 106, page 279

for an example showing the GUI screen when Leak Sync is enabled.

• The vent setup button on the GUI screen indicates Leak Sync is active.

• D

SENS

is displayed in units of L/min, rather than %.

• If the ventilator detects a leak during a respiratory mechanics maneuver, the message Leak Detected is displayed.

• A new leak or change in leak rate is typically quantified and compensated within three breaths. Monitored patient data stabilizes within a few breaths.

• Select inspiratory and expiratory sensitivity settings as usual. If the ventilator auto-triggers, try increasing flow sensitivity ( ⩒

SENS

Note: The absence of the Leak Detected message does not mean there is no leak.

278

Note: Leak Sync is automatically enabled when ventilating a new patient and the circuit type is neonatal, regardless of the ventilation type. If Leak Sync is disabled, it remains disabled when switching between invasive and NIV ventilation types.

Figure 106.

GUI Screen when Leak Sync is Enabled

1 LS appears on vent setup button notifying the operator that Leak Sync is enabled

13.6.1 Adjusting Disconnect Sensitivity (D

SENS

)

When Leak Sync is enabled, the CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm becomes active based on the D

SENS is the maximum allowable leak rate at set PEEP.

setting, which

When Leak Sync is disabled, D

SENS

is automatically set to 75%.

Warning: When Ventilation Type = NIV and Leak Sync is disabled, D

SENS

is automatically set to OFF.

See

Table 74 for a summary of D

SENS maximum Leak Sync flow.

settings when Leak Sync is enabled. Note that it is possible to set D

SENS

below

Table 74.

SENS

Settings

Breathing circuit type

Neonatal

Pediatric

Adult

SENS

setting

Range: Invasive: 1 L/min to 15 L/min

NIV: 1 L/min to 30 L/min

Default: 2 L/min (Invasive Ventila‐ tion) 5 L/min (NIV)

Range: 1 L/min to 40 L/min

Default: 20 L/min

Range: 1 L/min to 65 L/min

Default: 40 L/min

Maximum total flow

50 L/min

120 L/min

200 L/min

Warning: Setting D

SENS

higher than necessary may prevent timely detection of inadvertent extubation.

279

13.6.2 Monitored Patient Data

When Leak Sync is enabled, three additional parameters are displayed on the More Patient Data screen and updated for each breath. Display the More Patient Data screen by swiping the tab on the patient data banner.

These leak parameters may also be configured on the patient data banner and the large font patient data panel.

Figure 107.

Leak Sync Monitored Patient Data

1 Leak Sync parameters

See

Table 63, page 257 for information regarding the following monitored patient data parameters:

• V

LEAK

• % LEAK

• LEAK

Displayed values for exhaled tidal volume (V

) and inspired tidal volume (V the estimated inspired or exhaled lung volume. The accuracies for V

) are leak-compensated, and indicate

and V

also change when Leak Sync is enabled (see

Section 13.7

for more information). Graphic displays of flow during Leak Sync indicate estimated lung flows.

13.7 Technical Discussion

Managing breathing circuit leaks is important to ensure appropriate breath triggering and cycling, ventilation adequacy, and valid patient data. Detecting and monitoring leaks can improve treatment, reduce patient work of breathing, and provide more accurate information for clinical assessments.

Leak Sync recognizes that changing pressures lead to varying deflection of interface materials and leak sizes. The

Leak Sync leak model includes a rigid leak orifice whose size remains constant under changing pressures, combined with an elastic leak source whose size varies as a function of applied pressure. This algorithm provides a more accurate estimate of instantaneous leak to improve patient-ventilator synchrony under varying airway pressures.

280

Leak Sync allows the ventilator to determine the leak level and allows the operator to set the flow trigger and peak flow sensitivities to a selected threshold. The base flow during exhalation is set to:

• Flow triggering: 1.5 L/min + estimated leak flow at PEEP+ flow sensitivity

• Pressure triggering: 1.0 L/min + estimated leak flow at PEEP

13.7.1 Inspired Tidal Volume (V

) Accuracy During Leak Sync

For V

parameter accuracy, see Table 65, page 263 .

For readings <100 mL, accuracy ranges apply when the percentage of inspiratory leak volume is <80%, where the percentage of leak volume is:

(Leak volume during inspiration / total delivered inspiratory volume)×100

Note: Inspired tidal volume is labeled as V

when Leak Sync is enabled, and as V

when Leak Sync is disabled.

13.7.2 Exhaled Tidal Volume (V

) Accuracy During Leak Sync

For accuracy when Leak Sync is enabled, see Table 65, page 263

, V

parameter.

In Table 65

, T

= time to exhale 90% of volume actually exhaled by the patient.

For readings <100 mL, accuracy ranges apply when the percentage of inspiratory leak volume is <80%, where the percentage of leak volume is:

(Leak volume during inspiration/total delivered inspiratory volume) ×100

13.7.3 %LEAK Calculation

For %LEAK parameter specifications, see Table 63, page 257 .

13.7.4 CIRCUIT DISCONNECT Alarm During Leak Sync

The CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm is activated if the overall leak volume during the whole breath exceeds the maximum leak volume derived from the D if the end-inspiratory pressure falls below (set PEEP+1 cmH this alarm message:

SENS

setting. During VC, the CIRCUIT DISCONNECT alarm is also activated

O) for three consecutive breaths. The screen shows

281

Figure 108.

Circuit Disconnect During VC

If the compressor is in use and the D

SENS

setting >25 L/min, a D

SENS of 25 L/min is used to determine that the circuit is disconnected. If LEAK >25 L/min, the alarm banner shows the following message:

Check patient. Reconnect circuit. Leak may exceed maximum compensation value for compressor.

Normal operation resumes if the ventilator detects a patient connection.

282

14 Appendix PAV™+

14.1 Overview

This appendix describes the operation of PAV+™ software for the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator.

Proportional Assist Ventilation (PAV+™) is designed to improve the work of breathing of a spontaneously breathing patient by reducing the patient’s increased work of breathing when pulmonary mechanics are compromised.

The PAV+™ breath type differs from the pressure support (PS) breath type in the following way:

PAV+™ acts as an inspiratory amplifier; the degree of amplification is set by the% Support setting (% Supp). PAV+™ software continuously monitors the patient’s instantaneous inspiratory flow and instantaneous lung volume, which are indicators of the patient’s inspiratory effort. These signals, together with ongoing estimates of the patient’s resistance and compliance, allow the software to instantaneously compute the necessary pressure at the patient wye to assist the patient’s inspiratory muscles to the degree selected by the % Supp setting. Higher inspiratory demand yields greater support from the ventilator.

PAV+™ software reduces the risk of inadvertent entry of incompatible settings, such as small predicted body weight (PBW) paired with a large airway.

14.2 Intended Use

PAV+ TM is intended for use in spontaneously breathing adult patients whose ventilator predicted body weight

(PBW) setting is at least 25.0 kg (55 lb). Patients must be intubated with either endotracheal (ET) or tracheostomy

(Trach) tubes of internal diameter (ID) 6.0 mm to 10.0 mm. Patients must have satisfactory neural-ventilatory coupling, and stable, sustainable inspiratory drive.

14.3 Safety Information

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

Warning: PAV+™ is not an available breath type in non-invasive ventilation (NIV). Do not use non-invasive patient interfaces such as masks, nasal prongs, uncuffed ET tubes, etc. as leaks associated with these interfaces may result in over-assist and patient discomfort.

Warning: Breathing circuit and artificial airway must be free from leaks. Leaks may result in ventilator over-assist and patient discomfort.

Warning: Ensure high and low tidal volume alarm thresholds are set appropriately because an overestimation of lung compliance could result in an under-support condition resulting in the delivery of smaller than optimal tidal volumes.

14.4 PAV+™

Warning: Ensure that there are no significant leaks in the breathing circuit or around the artificial airway cuff.

Significant leaks can affect the performance of PAV+™ and the accuracy of resistance (R) and elastance (E) estimates.

Warning: Do not use silicone breathing circuits with PAV+™: the elastic behavior of a silicone circuit at the beginning of exhalation can cause pressure-flow oscillations that result in underestimates of patient resistance.

The act of inspiration requires the patient’s inspiratory muscles to develop a pressure gradient between the mouth and the alveoli sufficient to draw in breathing gas and inflate the lungs. Some of this pressure gradient is dissipated

283

as gas travels through the artificial airway and the patient’s conducting airways, and some of the pressure gradient is dissipated in the inflation of the lungs and thorax. Each element of pressure dissipation is characterized by a measurable property: the resistance of the artificial and patient airways, and the compliance (or elastance) of the lung and thorax.

PAV+™ software uses specific information, including resistance of the artificial airway, resistance of the patient’s airways, lung-thorax compliance, instantaneous inspiratory flow and lung volume, and the % Supp setting to compute the instantaneous pressure to be applied at the patient connection port (patient wye). PAV+™ software randomly estimates patient resistance and compliance approximately every four to 10 breaths. Every 5, the software estimates lung flow, based on an estimate of flow at the patient wye, and lung volume, based on the integral of the value of estimated lung flow.

PAV+™ begins to assist an inspiration when flow (generated by the patient’s inspiratory muscles) appears at the patient wye. If the patient ceases inspiration, the assist also ceases. Once inspiratory flow begins, PAV+™ software monitors instantaneous flow and volume every 5 and applies the pressure calculated to overcome a proportion

(determined by the % Supp setting) of the pressure losses dissipated across the resistances of the artificial and patient airways and lung/thorax compliance.

Because the PAV+™ algorithm does not know the patient’s mechanics when the PAV+™ breath type is selected, the software performs a startup routine to obtain initial data. At startup, PAV+™ software delivers four consecutive

PAV+™ breaths, each of which includes an end-inspiratory pause maneuver that yields estimates of the patient’s resistance and compliance. The first breath, however, is delivered using the predicted resistance for the artificial airway and conservative estimates for patient resistance and compliance, based on the patient’s PBW.

Each of the next three PAV+™ breaths averages stepwise decreased physiologic values with the estimated resistance and compliance values from the previous breath, weighting earlier estimates less with each successive breath, and yielding more reliable estimates for resistance and compliance. The fifth PAV+™ breath (the first non-startup breath) is delivered using the final estimates with the clinician-set % Supp setting. Once startup is complete, the PAV+™ software randomly applies a maneuver breath every four to 10 breaths after the last maneuver breath to re-estimate patient resistance and compliance. New values are always averaged with former values.

PAV+™ graphically displays estimates of patient lung pressure (intrinsic PEEP), patient compliance, patient resistance, total resistance, total work of inspiration, patient work of inspiration, inspiratory elastic work (an indicator of lung-thorax work), and inspiratory resistive work.

The % Supp setting ranges from a minimum of 5% (the ventilator performs 5% of the work of inspiration and the patient performs 95%) to a maximum of 95% (the ventilator performs 95% of the work and the patient performs

5%), adjustable in 5% increments.

PAV+™ also includes alarm limits, safety checks, and logic checks that reject non-physiologic values for patient resistance and compliance as well as inappropriate data.

14.4.1 Setting Up PAV+™

To set up PAV+™

1. At the ventilator setup screen, enter the patient’s gender and height or the patient’s PBW.

2. Touch invasive ventilation type.

3. Touch SPONT mode.

4. Touch PAV+™ to select Spontaneous type.

5. Touch the desired trigger type (

P-Trig

or ⩒ -Trig).

6. Select tube type

284

7. Select the tube ID. Initially, a default value is shown based on the PBW entered at ventilator startup. If this

ID is not correct for the airway in use, turn the knob to adjust the ID setting.

8. Ventilator Setup Screen Continue setting up the ventilator as described in

Chapter 4

Note: If the operator selects an internal diameter that does not correspond to allowable values, touch Continue to override the tube ID setting. If attempts are made to choose a tube ID less than 6.0 mm or greater than 10 mm, a hard bound limit is reached, as PAV+™ is not intended for use with tubes smaller than 6.0 mm or larger than

10.0 mm. When touching Dismiss, the setting remains at the last tube ID selected. Touch Accept or Accept ALL to accept changes, or touch Cancel to cancel changes.

Note: If Leak Sync is currently enabled, it becomes disabled when PAV+™ is selected.

Note: When the ventilator is used on the same patient previously ventilated using PAV+™, the GUI displays an attention icon and the tube type and tube ID previously used, as a reminder to the clinician to review those settings during ventilator setup.

14.4.2 PBW and Tube ID

The ventilator uses soft bound and hard bound values for estimated tube inside diameters based upon PBW. Soft bounds are ventilator settings that have reached their recommended high or low limits. When adjusting the tube size, if the inside diameter does not align with a valid predicted body weight, a Continue button appears. Setting the ventilator beyond these soft bounds requires the operator to acknowledge the prompt by touching Continue before continuing to adjust the tube size. The limit beyond which the tube ID cannot be adjusted is called a hard bound, and the ventilator emits an invalid entry tone when a hard bound is reached.

Warning: Ensure that the correct artificial airway ID size is entered. Because PAV+™ amplifies flow, entering a smaller-than-actual airway ID causes the flow-based pressure assistance to over-support the patient and could lead to transient over-assist at high values of % Supp. Conversely, entering a larger-than-actual ID results in under-support. PAV+™ software monitors the settings for the PBW and artificial airway. If the PBW and tube ID settings do not correspond to allowable values, confirm or correct the settings. Confirming or correcting the actual ID size minimizes the likelihood that PAV+™ will over-support or under-support.

To apply new settings for the artificial airway follow these steps

1. Touch the vent setup button at the lower left of the GUI screen.

285

2. Touch Tube Type and turn the knob to select Trach or ET to set the tube type.

3. Touch Tube ID and turn the knob to set the tube ID.

4. Touch Accept or Accept ALL to apply the new settings, or Cancel to cancel.

To apply new humidifier settings

1. Touch the More Settings tab.

2. Touch the appropriate button for Humidification Type.

3. For non-HME humidification types, touch Humidifier Volume, then turn the knob to adjust the (empty) humidifier volume.

4. Touch Accept ALL to apply the changes.

Warning: To ensure the accuracy of PAV+™ breaths and spirometry measurements, run SST following any change to the humidification type or humidification volume settings. Ensure that the intended circuit is used with the SST.

14.4.3 Apnea Parameters Adjustment

After accepting the PAV+™ settings, touch the apnea setup screen. Adjust the apnea parameters as required.

14.4.4 Alarm Settings Adjustment

PAV+™ includes the high inspired tidal volume (

SPONT

⤒ V

) and low exhaled spontaneous tidal volume alarm ( ⤓ V

) alarm limit settings. See

Section 14.4.8, PAV+™ Alarms, page 287 .

Note: Because of the breathing variability that PAV+™ allows, the ⤓ V

TE SPONT

alarm, by default, is turned OFF to minimize nuisance alarms. To monitor adequate ventilation, use the ↓ ⩒

E TOT

alarm condition instead.

To adjust alarm settings

1. Touch the Alarm tab to view the current alarm settings.

2. Touch the button for each alarm limit requiring a change.

3. Turn the knob to adjust the value of the alarm limit. Proposed values are highlighted. You can change more than one alarm limit before applying the changes.

4. Touch Accept or Accept All to apply the changes, or Cancel to cancel.

14.4.5 PAV+™ Ventilator Settings

For a summary of PAV+™ ventilator settings for the following parameters, see

Table 61, page 249

• % Supp

• Expiratory sensitivity (E

SENS

)

• Tube type

• Tube ID

• Trigger type

14.4.6 PAV+™ Alarm Settings

For a summary of the following alarm settings available when PAV+™ is active, see Table 62, page 255 :

• High inspired tidal volume limit ( ⤒ V

)

• Low exhaled spontaneous tidal volume ( ⤓ V

TE SPONT

)

286

14.4.7 Monitored Data

For the following monitored data associated with PAV+™, see Table 63, page 257 :

• PAV-based lung compliance (C

PAV

)

• PAV-based lung elastance (E

PAV

)

• PAV-based lung resistance (R

PAV

)

• PAV-based total airway resistance (R

TOT

)

• Inspired tidal volume (V

)

• Driving Pressure (P

DRIVE

)

See

Table 75 for monitored data absolute limits.

Table 75.

Absolute limits for PAV+™ Monitored Data

PBW (kg)

PAV

(cmH

0 to 50

0 to 44

0 to 31

0 to 24

0 to 20

O/L/s)

115

125

135

145

150

105

0 to 18

0 to 17

0 to 16

0 to 15

0 to 14

PAV

(mL/cmH

2.5 to 29

3.5 to 41

4.5 to 52

5.5 to 64

6.4 to 75

7.4 to 87

8.4 to 98

9.4 to 110

10 to 121

11 to 133

12 to 144

13to 156

14 to 167

15 to 173

O) E

PAV

(cmH

O/L)

34 to 400

24 to 286

19 to 222

16 to 182

13 to 156

11 to 135

10 to 119

9.1 to 106

8.3 to 100

7.5 to 91

6.9 to 83

6.4 to 77

6.0 to 71

5.8 to 67

14.4.8 PAV+™ Alarms

For a summary of the following alarms associated with PAV+™, see Table 36, page 150 :

• High circuit pressure ( ↑ P

PEAK

)

• High ventilator pressure ( ↑ P

VENT

)

• PAV STARTUP TOO LONG

• PAV R & C NOT ASSESSED

• High inspired tidal volume ( ↑ V

)

14.5 Ventilator Settings and Guidance

Warning: For optimal performance of PAV+™, it is important to select the humidification type, tube type, and tube size that match those in use on the patient.

The instantaneous pressure generated at the patient wye during inspiration is a function of the patient effort, %

Supp setting, tube type and size, patient resistance and elastance, and the instantaneously measured gas flow and lung volume. Set ⤒ P

PEAK

to a safe circuit pressure, above which truncation and alarm annunciation are appropriate.

Note: PAV+™ has a built-in high pressure compensation ( ⤒ P

COMP

) limit that is determined by the ⤒ P

PEAK

setting minus 5 cmH

O or 35 cmH

O, whichever is less. If the inspiratory pressure at the patient wye (P i wye

) reaches the

287

⤒ P

COMP

limit, the inspiration is truncated, and the ventilator transitions to exhalation. See

Section 14.5.5

for more details regarding ↑ P

COMP

and ↑ P

PEAK

14.5.1 Specified Performance

Performance using PAV+™ is ±0.5 Joules/liter (J/L), compared to measured, work during inspiration at the 75% support (% Supp) level. Work is computed over the entire inspiratory interval. In ventilation terms, work (W) is expressed as: i

P ith sample interval (5 ms)

Work [J/L]

Synchronous and combined pressures developed by the ventilator and by the patient (P

MUS

), [cmH

V k

Flow [L/s] conversion constant (0.098) [J/cmH

O x L]

14.5.2 Graphics Displays in PAV+™

When PAV+™ is active (the mode is SPONT and the spontaneous breath type is PAV+™), a work of breathing (WOB) graphic is automatically displayed (see

Figure 109 ), which shows:

• An indicator showing the proportion of patient inspiratory work to overcome the elastance (E) of the lung-thorax and the combined resistance (R) of the artificial airway and the patient.

• Estimates of work of breathing relative to normal, subnormal, and above-normal values, including:

– The estimated work of breathing (in Joules/L) during inspiration (WOB

– The estimated total work of breathing (in Joules/L) of the patient and ventilator during inspiration

(WOB

TOT

Additional information in the graphics screen includes:

• A shadow trace of the estimated lung pressure, shown as a solid area superimposed on the circuit pressure waveform

• PAV-based patient data estimates, including patient resistance (R

PAV

PEEP (PEEP

I PAV

)

), lung compliance (C

PAV

), and intrinsic

Note: Graphic displays of lung pressure and patient work of breathing are not actual measurements, and are derived from equations using filtered estimates of pressure and flow.

The WOB graphic is only available when SPONT mode and the PAV+™ breath type are selected. The shadow trace can be enabled or disabled when selecting the graphic display, or after a display is paused.

The act of pausing does not affect the WOB graphic, but does store the shadow trace. Once paused, the operator can enable or disable the shadow trace, then view the paused waveform again with or without the shadow trace.

14.5.3 WOB Terms and Definitions

Table 76 provides a definition and description of each of the work of breathing (WOB) terms.

Table 76.

PAV+™ Work of Breathing Terms

WOB term

WOB

TOT

Definition

Total work of inspiration

Description

With the PAV+™ breath type active, the patient and the ventilator always share the

288

Table 76.

PAV+™ Work of Breathing Terms (continued)

WOB term Definition

WOB

ELASTIC

WOB

RESISTIVE

Patient work of breathing

Inspiratory elastic work

Inspiratory resistive work

Figure 109.

Graphics displays in PAV+™

Description in the work of breathing. The percent

WOB

TOT

performed by the ventilator always equals the % Supp setting and the percent

WOB

TOT

performed by the patient always equals (100 minus the % Supp setting).

WOB

TOT

is the sum of the work to move the breathing gas through the artificial airway and the patient’s own airways plus the work to inflate the patient’s elastic lung-thorax.

That part of WOB

TOT patient.

performed by the

That part of WOB

attributed to inflating the patient’s elastic lung-thorax.

That part of the WOB

PT ments in the gas path.

attributed to mov‐ ing breathing gas through resistive ele‐

1 Total work of breathing (WOB

TOT

)

2 Patient’s work of breathing (WOB

)

3 Shadow trace

14.5.4 Technical Description

When PAV+™ is selected, the ventilator acts as an inspiratory amplifier, proportionally assisting the pressure generating capability of the inspiratory muscles (P

MUS

14.5.4.1 Pressure Gradient Equation of Motion

During spontaneous breathing, P

MUS

generates a pressure gradient that drives breathing gas through the artificial airway and the patient’s airways and into the elastic lung-thorax, and is described by the equation of motion:

289

Figure 110.

EQUATION 1

⩒

MUS

Pressure generating capability of patient’s inspiratory muscles

Flow through the resistance elements and into the lungs

Insufflation volume of the lung

LUNG-

THORAX

Resistance elements (artificial plus patient airways)

Elastance of the lung and thorax (1/C

THORAX

)

LUNG-

14.5.4.2 Estimates of Patient Resistance and Elastance

If the PAV+™ software estimates of patient resistance and elastance (R

PAV could be rewritten as:

and (E

PAV

) remain stable, this equation

Figure 111.

EQUATION 2 i Instantaneous value of pressure, flow, or air‐ way resistance, R flow i airway

being a function of

PAV

P i

MUS

could then be estimated at every control period if V i

, R i airway, and V i

were also known.

14.5.4.3 Valid Individual Pressure Measurements

Throughout any inspiration, the individual pressure elements that make up P

MUS

can be expressed as:

Figure 112.

EQUATION 3

MUS

FLOW

ARTIFICIAL AIRWAY

PATIENT

VOLUME

PATIENT

Pressure generating capability of patient’s inspiratory muscles

Flow based pressure drop across the artificial airway

Flow based pressure drop across the patient

Volume based pressure to overcome the lung-thorax elastance

Equations 2 and 3 provide the structure to explain how PAV+™ operates. The clinician enters the type and size of artificial airway in use, and the software uses this information to estimate the resistance of the artificial airway at any lung flow.

Applying a special pause maneuver at the end of selected inspirations provides the information the software needs to estimate patient resistance (R

PAV

) and compliance (C

PAV

, which is converted to elastance, E

Immediately following the end of the pause event, software captures simultaneous values for P which yield an estimate for R

TOT

at the estimated flow.

LUNG

PAV

, P wye

, and V

All raw data are subjected to logic checks, and the estimates of R

PAV

and C

PAV checks. The estimates of R

PAV

is also rejected.

and C

PAV

are further subjected to physiologic

are discarded if any of the logic or physiologic checks fail. If C

PAV

is rejected,

290

Valid estimates of R

PAV

If new values for R

PAV

and C

PAV

are required for breath delivery, and are constantly updated by averaging new values with previous values. This averaging process smooths data and avoids abrupt changes to breath delivery.

refresh.

and C

PAV

are rejected, the previous values remain active until valid new values are obtained.

PAV+™ software monitors the update process and generates an escalating alarm condition if the old values do not

14.5.4.4 Maneuver Breaths and % Supp

During PAV+™, maneuver breaths are randomly performed every four to 10 breaths after the last maneuver breath.

A maneuver breath is a normal PAV+™ inspiration with a pause at end inspiration. Because muscle activity is delayed for at least 300 ms following the end of neural inspiration, the patient’s respiratory control center does not detect the pause. With this approach, maneuver breaths are delivered randomly so that their occurrence is neither consciously recognized nor predictable.

A PAV+™ breath begins, after the recognition of a trigger signal, with flow detection at the patient wye. The sample and control cycle of the ventilator (the value of i in Equation 2) is frequent enough to yield essentially constant tracking of patient inspiration. At every ith interval, the software identifies instantaneous lung flow (V of instantaneous lung volume, (V i

), which is impeded by the elastic recoil of the lung and thorax).

), which is impeded by the resistances of the artificial airway and patient airways) and integrates this flow to yield an estimate

Using the values for instantaneous lung flow and lung volume, PAV+™ software calculates each of the pressure elements in Equation 2, which gives the value of P

MUS

at each ith interval.

At this point, Equation 2 and the subsequent analysis identifies that an appropriate patient, supported by PAV+™ and with an active P

MUS

(an absolute requirement) will, within a few breaths, enable the algorithm to obtain reasonable estimates of R

PAV

and E

PAV

. Once these physiologic data are captured (and over a relatively brief time as they are improved and stabilized), the PAV+™ algorithm mirrors the patient’s respiratory mechanics, which then allows the ventilator to harmoniously amplify P

MUS

. The key point to recognize is that patient’s continuous breathing effort “drives” the PAV+™ support—no effort, no support.

The % Supp setting specifies the amount of resistance- and elastic-based pressure to be applied at each ith interval at the patient wye.

By taking all of the above information into consideration, EQUATION 2 can be rewritten to include the% Supp setting recognizing that V i

and V i

are driven by the patient, not by the ventilator. (It is important to note that the ventilator is not amplifying its own flow—only the flow generated by P

MUS

Figure 113.

EQUATION 4

P i wye

Pressure generated by the ventilator in response to the instantaneous values of lung flow and lung volume at the wye. This value is the sum of the three individual pres‐ sure elements (in parentheses) in Equation

S % Supp setting/100 (ranges from 0.05 to

0.95)

14.5.4.5 Resulting Pressure Gradient

The pressure gradient driving breathing gas into the patient’s lungs is given by the sum of P inspiratory effort, therefore: i wye

and the patient’s

291

Figure 114.

EQUATION 5

DP i gradient

Instantaneous pressure gradient

P i wye

Pressure generated by the ventilator in response to the instantaneous values of lung flow and lung volume at the wye

P i

MUS

Instantaneous pressure generating capa‐ bility of patient’s inspiratory muscles

14.5.5 Protection Against Hazard

PAV+™ software is designed to reduce the risk that hyperinflation may occur. The potential for hyperinflation could arise if the software were to overestimate actual patient resistance or underestimate actual patient lung-thorax compliance (that is, to overestimate actual elastance). If the software cannot generate valid estimates of R

PAV

, PAV+™ cannot start. If, after startup, the values of R

PAV

and C

PAV previous values become less reliable.

and

cannot be updated with valid new values, the

The stability of PAV+™ is primarily determined by the relationship between the true lung elastance [E the true lung volume [V

L elastic component.

(true)]. Although P i wye

(true)] and

(resistive) also plays a part, the following discussion focuses on the

At all lung volumes, the true state of the lung and thorax is expressed by:

V i

L recoil i

L (true)

True lung recoil pressure

True instantaneous volume of the lung

L (true)

True lung elastance

Over-inflation will not occur as long as P i wye

(elastic)<P i

L recoil

, which is equivalent to the inequality:

S[V i

(estimated) x K

] < V i

(true) x E

(true) where:

= E

PAV

Op 0’’a’W8Ptnsu0adaPuSaT

As long as E

PAV

(estimated) = E

PAV

(true) and V i

Supp (i.e. between 85% and 95%).

(estimated)=V i

(true) then P i recoil

>P i wye

even at high values of %

This means that if the pressure applied to the lung-thorax is never greater than E

L collapse if wye flow vanishes. As long as E

PAV

≤ R

(true), P

MUS

is the modulator of P i wye

(estimated)≤E

(true), V i

(true)× V

(estimated)≤V i

, lung volume will

(true), and R

PAV

(estimated)

Hyperinflation could occur if the estimated E

PAV

P i wye

(elastic) could exceed P i

L recoil

were greater than the true value of E

. At a high % Supp setting,

, causing a self-generating flow at the patient wye, which in turn would cause a self-generating inflation of the lungs. This is part of the reason that the % Supp setting is limited to 95%.

Likewise, if the estimated R

PAV

were to exceed the true value of R

at a high % Supp setting, P i wye

(resistive) could exceed the value necessary to compensate for pressure dissipation across the artificial and patient airways, resulting in early hyperinflation of the lungs. As flow declines after the first third of inspiration, however, the hyperinflating effect would most likely disappear.

PAV+™ software includes these strategies to minimize the possibility of hyperinflation of the lungs:

1. The maximum % Supp setting is limited to 95%.

292

2. The raw data for R

PAV

and C

PAV

are checked for graph/math logic, and estimated mechanics values are checked against PBW-based physiologic boundaries. These checks reduce the possibility of overestimating patient resistance or underestimating patient compliance, which could lead to potential over-inflation.

3. The high inspiratory tidal volume limit ( ⤒ V

) places an absolute limit on the integral of lung flow (including leak flow), which equals lung volume. If the value of V

TI and immediately transitions to exhalation.

reaches this limit, the ventilator truncates inspiration

4. The ( ⤒ V

) setting places an upper limit on the value of the P VOLUME

PATIENT

component of P i wye

3 and 4). At the beginning of each new inspiration, PAV+™ software calculates a value for P follows:

(see Equations

VOLUME

PATIENT

P* wye

(elastic threshold limit) = 0.75 × (V

× E

PAV

) where P*

P i wye wye

is the unique value for the elastic threshold limit of P expand to 75% of ( ⤒ V

). When P i wye i wye

(elastic). This means that any further increase in lung volume must be accomplished by the patient, which tends to hasten the conclusion of inspiratory effort and avoid truncation due to lung volume

limit.

(elastic)=P* wye

that will cause the lung volume to

(elastic threshold limit), the software stops increasing reaching the ⤒ V

5. The high inspiratory pressure limit ( ⤒ P

PEAK

) applies to all breaths, and is used by PAV+™ software to detect the high compensation pressure condition ( ↑ P

COMP

↑ P

COMP

= ⤒ P

PEAK

–5 cmH

O or 35 cmH

O, whichever is less

If the user-adjustable ⤒ P transitions to exhalation. If P

↑ P

⤒ P

COMP

PEAK

PEAK i

limit is reached, the ventilator truncates inspiration and immediately wye

(the targeted wye pressure calculated in Equation 4) equals the ↑ P

COMP

for

500, the inspiration is truncated and exhalation begins. Further, when P i

. Although this freezes the value of P

, causing inspiration to end.

i wye wye= ↑ P

COMP

, P i wye

is limited to

, patient activity such as coughing could drive P i wye

The rapid rise of P i wye

to the ↑ P

COMP were overestimated and % Supp were set above 85%. The ↑ P due to overestimation of R

PAV

limit would likely occur in the first third of inspiration, and only if R

COMP

PAV

condition guards against over-inflation

6. The % Supp setting ranges from 5% to 95% in 5% increments. Reducing the level of support decreases the possibility of over-inflation. A significant decrease could produce a sensation of inadequate support, and the patient would absorb the additional work of inspiration or require an increase in the level of support.

A significant increase could cause a surge in the ventilator generated value for P wye cause P i wye

to reach ⤒ P

COMP

, which in turn could

and lead to temporary patient-ventilator disharmony. To minimize this possibility, PAV+™ software limits the actual increase in support to increments of 10% every other breath until the new setting is reached.

7. Spirometry remains active during PAV+™ operation. ⤒ V

TI breaths, while ⤓⩒

E TOT

and ⤒⩒

E TOT

can be set high enough to allow spontaneous sigh

remain active to reveal changes in minute ventilation.

Because PAV+™ cannot operate without valid estimates of R

PAV unknown when PAV+™ starts, a startup routine obtains these values during four maneuver breaths that include an end inspiratory pause that provides raw data for R

PAV

and C

PAV

maneuver breath at the next breath. See Section 14.4, PAV+™, page 283 .

, and because those values are

, and both estimated values must be valid. If either value is invalid during any of the four startup breaths, the software schedules a substitute

A low-priority alarm becomes active if a 45-second interval elapses without valid estimates for R

PAV

. If the condition persists for 90 seconds, the alarm escalates to medium-priority. If the condition persists for 120 seconds, the alarm escalates to high priority. The ↓ ⩒

E TOT this condition.

and ↑ f

TOT

PAV

and

alarms are also associated with

Similarly, if R

PAV

and C

PAV

cannot be updated with valid values after a successful PAV+™ startup, a low-priority alarm is activated if the condition persists for 15 minutes. If the values still cannot be updated with valid values after 30 minutes, the alarm escalates to medium priority.

293

8. If PAV+™ estimates a high lung resistance following a sharp spike in the expiratory flow waveform, then a

PBW-based resistance value is used. See

Figure 115 and Table 77

Figure 115.

Use of Default Lung Resistance

1 Flow (V)

2 Expiration

3 Inspiration

4 Exhalation with slow, restricted return to zero flow

Table 77.

Default PBW-based Resistance Values

PBW (kg) Resistance

(cmH

/s)

O/L

18.1

17.7

17.4

17.1

16.8

16.5

16.2

15.9

15.7

15.4

15.2

14.9

14.7

14.5

14.3

PBW (kg) Resistance

(cmH

/s)

O/L

14.1

13.9

13.7

13.5

13.3

13.2

13.0

12.9

12.7

12.6

12.4

12.3

12.2

12.1

12.0

5 High peak expiratory flow

6 Exhalation with normal return to zero flow

7 Normal peak expiratory flow

PBW (kg) Resistance

(cmH

/s)

O/L

11.8

11.7

11.6

11.5

11.4

11.3

11.2

11.1

11.0

10.9

10.8

10.7

PBW (kg) Resistance

(cmH

/s)

O/L

10.6

10.5

10.4

10.3

81 to 150

10.3

10.2

10.1

294

15 Appendix NeoMode 2.0

15.1 Overview

This appendix describes how to use NeoMode 2.0 software on the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Neonatal Ventilator.

NeoMode 2.0 enables the use of the ventilator with neonatal patients and is included with all Puritan Bennett™

980 Neonatal Ventilators and Puritan Bennett™ 980 Universal Ventilators. For a Puritan Bennett™ 980

Pediatric–Adult ventilator to be used with neonatal patients, the NeoMode 2.0 software option must be installed.

15.2 Intended Use

NeoMode 2.0 is intended to provide respiratory support to neonatal patients with predicted body weights as low as 0.3 kg (0.66 lb). It is intended to cover a wide variety of clinical patient conditions in hospitals and hospital-type facilities, and may be used during intra-hospital and intra-hospital-type facility transport. It supports delivered tidal volumes as low as 2 mL.

15.3 Description

The ventilator determines values for operational variables and allowable settings based on breathing circuit type and predicted body weight (PBW). The PBW range for neonates is 0.3 kg to 7.0 kg (0.66 lb to 15 lb). Software controls prevent inadvertent mismatching of patient size and breathing circuit type. A neonatal breathing circuit connects to a neonatal exhalation filter that must be used with the neonatal adapter door assembly.

Note: To enable NeoMode 2.0, select the neonatal breathing circuit type in SST. Breathing circuit type can only be changed during SST.

15.4 Safety Information

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

Warning: Neonatal patients are at risk for hypercarbia or hypoxemia during ↓ ⩒

E TOT

alarm conditions.

Warning: Disabling the low exhaled minute volume ( ↓ ⩒

E TOT hypoxemia.

) alarm increases the patient’s risk of hypercarbia or

Warning: When using NIV, the patient’s exhaled tidal volume (V patient data value for V

) could differ from the ventilator’s monitored

due to leaks around the interface. To avoid this, ensure Leak Sync is enabled.

15.5 Neonatal Door and Filter Installation

Warning: Removing the exhalation filter while the patient is connected to the ventilator can cause a loss of circuit pressure, ventilator autotriggering, or direct contact with liquid.

Caution: Do not pull on the door while the exhalation filter latch is closed, as damage to the ventilator can result.

Note: See the inspiratory filter and exhalation filter instructions for use for information on filtration efficiency and filter resistance.

To install the neonatal adapter door

295

1. Remove the expiratory limb of the patient circuit from the exhalation filter.

2. Lift the exhalation filter latch. See

Figure 116 .

3. Remove the existing exhalation filter door by lifting it off of the pivot pins.

4. Fit the neonatal adapter door onto the pivot pins.

To install the neonatal exhalation filter assembly

1. With the door still open, push the neonatal filter straight up into the adapter.

2. Close the door.

3. Lower the exhalation filter latch.

4. Reattach the expiratory limb of the patient circuit to the filter.

Figure 116.

Installing the Neonatal Filter and Door

1 Neonatal exhalation filter

2 Neonatal adapter door

3 Exhalation filter latch

4 Filter door pivot pin

Warning: To ensure all breathing circuit connections are leak-tight, perform a circuit-leak test by running SST every time the filter is installed. The circuit-leak test can be performed as an individual test from the SST startup screen.

Warning: Empty the condensate vial before the liquid level reaches the maximum fill line. Condensate vial overflow can enter the filter or the breathing circuit, and can cause increased expiratory flow resistance. Change the filter if it appears to be saturated.

Warning: The neonatal exhalation filter and condensate vial is a single unit and is for single-patient use, only. Do not attempt to sterilize the filter assembly.

Warning: Adding accessories to or removing accessories from the VBS can change the pressure gradient across the VBS and affect ventilator performance. Ensure that any changes to the ventilator circuit configurations do not exceed the specified values for circuit compliance and for inspiratory or expiratory limb total resistance. See

Table 56, page 246 . If adding accessories to or removing accessories from the VBS, always run SST to establish circuit

compliance and resistance prior to ventilating the patient.

Note: If the ventilator has not reached operating temperature from recent usage, allow it to warm up for at least

15 minutes before running SST to ensure accurate testing.

Note: Check the inspiratory and expiratory limbs of the breathing circuit and in-line water traps regularly for water buildup. Under certain conditions, they can fill quickly. Empty and clean the in-line water traps as necessary. See the manufacturer’s IFU for additional information.

15.6 How to Empty the Condensate Vial

The condensate vial may accumulate liquid, especially if a non-heated wire patient circuit is in use.

296

Warning: To avoid liquid entering the ventilator, empty the condensate vial before the liquid level reaches the maximum fill line.

The condensate vial assembly is integrated with the neonatal exhalation filter and does not contain a drain port.

Empty the condensate vial when liquid reaches the maximum fill line.

To empty the condensate vial

1. While holding the exhalation filter, twist the condensate vial clockwise approximately one quarter turn to remove it.

2. Remove the condensate vial by carefully lowering the vial all the way down to the base of the exhalation compartment and then sliding it out.

3. Quickly empty the condensate vial.

4. Replace the condensate vial by carefully sliding the vial into position, lifting it upward to the filter assembly, and turning counterclockwise until it reaches the stop.

Note: Condensate vial removal may cause the loss of system pressure and a disconnect alarm to sound.

15.7 How to Connect the Breathing Circuit

Warning:

Use one of the ventilator breathing circuits listed. See Table 78, page 298 or their equivalent. This ensures

that maximum pressure and flow values specified by EN794-1 are not exceeded. Using a circuit with a higher resistance does not prevent ventilation, but can cause an SST fault or compromise the patient’s ability to breathe through the circuit.

See

Figure 117, page 297

to connect the breathing circuit.

Figure 117.

How to Connect the Breathing Circuit

297

1 Humidifier

2 Patient circuit inspiratory limb

3 Patient circuit wye

4 Patient circuit expiratory limb

5 Condensate vial

6 From patient port

7 Neonatal exhalation filter (installed in adapter door)

8 To patient port

9 Inspiratory filter

Table 78.

Recommended Breathing Circuits

Patient circuit

Ventilator breathing circuit, neonatal disposable, DAR™

(not available in USA)

Ventilator breathing circuit, neonatal, disposable, Hud‐ son RCI TM* /Teleflex

Ventilator breathing circuit, neonatal, patient circuit

(Evaqua 2) Fisher & Paykel

Ventilator breathing circuit, neonatal, disposable,

Fisher & Paykel

3078447

780-06

RT265

RT235

Part number

Table 79 lists allowable ventilator settings when using NeoMode and ventilating invasively and non-invasively.

Table 79.

Allowable NeoMode Ventilator Settings and Ventilation Type

Ventilation type

Mode

Mandatory type

Spontaneous type

Trigger type

A/C, SIMV, SPONT, BiLevel

PC, VC, VC+

PS, VS

⩒ -Trig

Invasive

A/C, SIMV, SPONT, CPAP

PC, VC

⩒ -Trig

NIV

15.8 Ventilation Features

Ventilation using NeoMode 2.0 is performed as described in Chapter 4, Operation, page 97

. If using a

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Neonatal Ventilator, NeoMode 2.0 is already in use and a neonatal patient circuit is the only choice available when performing SST. If using a Puritan Bennett™ 980 Universal Ventilator, the NeoMode 2.0

software option is already installed and SST must be run using a neonatal circuit to use the option. If using a

Puritan Bennett™ 980 Pediatric–Adult Ventilator, the NeoMode 2.0 software option must be installed and SST must be run using a neonatal patient circuit.

15.8.1 Short Self Test (SST)

Warning: Always run SST prior to patient ventilation, ensuring that all accessories used during ventilation are in the ventilator breathing system when SST is run. This ensures correct calculation of compliance and resistance. See

Section 3.9.1, SST (Short Self Test), page 86 for more information.

If using a humidifier, the appropriate compressible volume must be entered before running SST. Refer to Chapter 3

for instructions on setting the humidification volume to the correct value listed in the shaded column in Table 80

Note: The manufacturer’s published chamber or column compressible volumes typically represent the container volume when empty and may not result in correct system compliance compensation for breath delivery and spirometry.

298

Table 80.

Humidifier Volumes—Neonatal Patients

Manufacturer

Fisher & Paykel TM*

Teleflex TM* (Concha)

Model

MR290

382-10

Description

Neo/adult, disposable, autofeed

ConchaSmart

SST humidifier volume setting(mL)

550

390

a If the following neonatal patient circuits are used with the Fisher & Paykel MR290 humidification chamber, enter 500 mL as the humidifier volume: DAR neonatal patient circuit with single heated wire (DAR 307S9910)-for incubator use, DAR neonatal patient circuit with single heated wire (DAR 307/8682)-not for incubator use

15.8.2 Predicted Body Weight (PBW) vs. Patient Length

See Section 4.6, Predicted Body Weight (PBW) Calculation, page 110 for references to tables of PBW values associated

with patient length in centimeters and inches, respectively.

15.8.3 Elevate O

In NeoMode 2.0, the elevate O

control works as described in Chapter 3 .

15.8.4 CPAP Mode

When using NeoMode 2.0 and ventilating with non-invasive ventilation (NIV), a separate CPAP mode allows spontaneous breathing with a desired PEEP level. To limit inadvertent alarms associated with the absence of returned volumes in CPAP breathing, CPAP does not make volume alarms available. As some neonates don’t trigger breaths, the default apnea interval, T

, is set to OFF. Also, some settings changes will initiate a PEEP restoration breath before phasing in those changes.

Note: In CPAP, apnea time,T also displayed.

, can be adjusted, if desired. It merely defaults to OFF to avoid inadvertent alarms.

The message “APNEA DETECTION DISABLED” is displayed at the bottom of the GUI screen. The attention icons are

To set the ventilator for CPAP

1. Select New Patient from the ventilator’s startup screen or touch the Vent Setup button.

2. Touch PBW and turn the knob to set the PBW.

3. Select NIV as the ventilation type.

4. Touch CPAP.

5. Touch each ventilator setting and turn the knob to select the appropriate ventilator settings. When finished, touch START or Accept ALL .

6. Complete the setup by setting the apnea parameters and alarm limits from their respective tabs.

299

Figure 118.

CPAP Setup Screen

15.8.5 Entering CPAP From Other Ventilation Modes

Entering CPAP mode from other ventilation modes or ventilation types requires using the NIV ventilation type.

Section 4.7, Non-invasive Ventilation (NIV), page 111

explains how the ventilator transitions from invasive to NIV ventilation type.

To enter CPAP mode for an existing patient

1. Touch the Vent Setup button at the lower left of the GUI screen.

2. Touch NIV ventilation type. CPAP is only allowed during NIV.

3. Touch CPAP. The ventilator enters CPAP mode.

4. Set an apnea interval, T

, if appropriate, as it defaults to OFF in CPAP.

Note: Exhaled minute volume ( ⩒ -Trig), exhaled tidal volume (V disabled upon entry into CPAP.

TE SPONT

), and inspired tidal volume (V

) alarms are

15.8.6 Exiting CPAP Mode

When changing the mode from CPAP to any other mode, several transition rules take effect:

• The ⩒

E TOT

, V

TE MAND

, V

TE SPONT

, and V

alarms are set to their respective new patient defaults.

• The apnea interval T

A immediately.

changes from OFF to an apnea interval of 10 s and the new setting is phased in

• The ⩒

E TOT

, V

TE MAND

, V

TE SPONT

, and V applicability to the selected mode.

alarm sliders appear in the alarm settings screen according to their

300

15.8.7 Compliance Compensation

See

Section 10.6.1, Compliance Compensation in Volume-based Breaths, page 205 for a complete discussion of

compliance compensation. Compliance compensation in NeoMode 2.0 is implemented as described in the aforementioned reference.

Note: If the patient’s compliance decreases beyond the limits of compliance compensation, the ventilator relies on the ⤒ P

PEAK

alarm setting to truncate the breath and switch to exhalation.

15.8.8 Settings, Alarms, and Monitored Patient Data

Warning: Monitor the patient closely if alarms are disabled. There are no audible or visual annunciations for out-of-range conditions when volume, pressure, or apnea alarms are disabled (turned OFF).

See Table 61 ,

Table 62 and

Table 63 for the minimum and maximum ranges for each ventilator setting, alarm setting,

or data value. Most settings, however, are also limited by other settings or conditions (for example, a low alarm limit is always limited by the corresponding high alarm limit). Review the prompt area when making settings changes.

Volume accuracy testing in VC+ was conducted to demonstrate performance of delivered and monitored parameters.

Table 81 , Table 82 , and Table 83 provide a summary of the actual results obtained within the range of

2 mL to 25 mL collected during test execution.

The first column (Set tidal volume) represents the desired volume setting in milliliters (mL). The second column represents the total number of test points for test cases executed at that specific setting. The third column is the mean (mean value) of the ventilators and test cases executed for the setting listed. The fourth column represents the standard deviation (SD) of measurements taken for the ventilators and test cases executed at the setting listed.

The measurements were taken using instrumentation located at the patient-connection port. Accessories such as filters and humidifiers were in the circuit during the test. Values were BPTS and compliance compensated. A sample size of five ventilators was used to conduct the testing. Testing was conducted at ambient temperature of 22°C ±5°C.

Table 81.

Delivered Volume Accuracy

Set tidal volume (mL) Number of test points

2 150

270

240

270

Mean value (mL)

2.061

4.853

15.108

24.608

0.198

0.324

0.383

0.607

Table 82.

Monitored Inspired Volume (V

) Accuracy

Set tidal volume (mL) Number of test points

150

270

240

270

Mean value (mL)

2.055

4.872

15.235

24.633

Table 83.

Monitored Exhaled Tidal Volume (V

) Accuracy

Set tidal volume (mL) Number of test points

2 150

270

240

270

Mean value (mL)

2.212

5.892

16.145

25.492

0.192

0.346

0.379

0.566

0.274

0.607

0.851

0.819

301

302

16 Appendix Proximal Flow

16.1 Overview

This appendix describes the operation of the Proximal Flow option for the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator.

The Proximal Flow option is solely used for monitoring flows, pressures, and tidal volumes and does not control these parameters in any way.

The proximal flow sensor is designed to measure the lower flows, pressures and tidal volumes at the patient wye typically associated with invasively ventilated neonatal patients.

For general parameter and general ventilator setup information, see

Chapter 4

16.2 Intended Use

The Proximal Flow option is used for measuring flows, pressures, and tidal volumes of invasively ventilated neonatal patients with predicted body weights (PBW) of 0.3 kg (0.66 lb) to 7.0 kg (15.4 lb) using ET tube sizes from

2.5 mm to 4.0 mm. The NeoMode 2.0 software option must also be installed on the ventilator.

16.3 Safety Information

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

Warning: Inspect the proximal flow sensor prior to use, and do not use it if the sensor body, tubing, or connector are damaged, occluded, or broken.

Warning: Do not use the proximal flow sensor if there are kinks in the tubing.

Warning: Prior to patient ventilation with the Proximal Flow option, run SST with the exact configuration that will be used on the patient. This includes a neonatal patient circuit, proximal flow sensor, and all accessories used with the patient circuit. If SST fails any proximal flow sensor test, check the patient circuit and the proximal flow sensor for leaks or occlusions and replace the flow sensor, if necessary. If SST continues to fail, it may indicate a malfunction or a leak within the proximal flow hardware which could compromise accuracy or increase the likelihood of cross-contamination; thus, replace the Proximal flow hardware.

Warning: Changing ventilator accessories can change the system resistance and compliance. Do not add or remove accessories after running SST.

Warning: If the Proximal Flow option fails to respond as described in this appendix, discontinue use until correct operation is verified by qualified personnel.

Warning: The Proximal flow sensor measures gas flow at the patient wye. The actual volume of gas delivered to the patient may be affected by system leaks between the patient and the proximal flow sensor, such as a leak that could occur from the use of an uncuffed endotracheal tube.

Warning: Position the proximal flow sensor exactly as described in this appendix or the IFU provided with the sensor.

303

Warning: Do not position the Proximal flow sensor cables or tubing in any manner that may cause entanglement, strangulation or extubation which could lead to hypercarbia or hypoxemia. Use the cable management clips supplied to mitigate this risk.

Warning: To reduce the risk of extubation or disconnection, do not apply tension to or rotate the proximal flow sensor by pulling on the proximal flow sensor’s tubing.

Warning: Do not install the proximal flow sensor in the patient circuit if the sensor is not also connected to the

BDU.

Warning: Excessive moisture in the proximal flow sensor tubing may affect the accuracy of the measurements.

Periodically check the sensor and tubing for excessive moisture or secretion build-up.

Warning: The proximal flow sensor is intended for single use only. Do not re-use the sensor. Attempts to clean or sterilize the sensor may result in bioincompatibility, infection, or product failure risks to the patient.

Warning: Install the proximal flow sensor as shown. See

Figure 124, page 311

. Improper orientation of the flow sensor could lead to misinterpretation of data or incorrect ventilator settings.

Caution: Do not use aerosolized medications with the proximal flow sensor. Such medications may damage the sensor.

Caution: To prevent damage to pneumatic lines, use supplied cable management clips.

Caution: Use only Covidien proximal flow sensors with the Proximal Flow option.

16.4 Proximal Flow Option Description

The Proximal Flow option measures pressure, flow, and volume at the patient wye. A printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) containing the electronics and pneumatics for the Proximal Flow option is installed in the ventilator on the option host card. Data measured by the proximal flow sensor are displayed on the GUI for monitoring purposes, not for ventilator control. When the ventilator has a proximal flow sensor installed, both proximal flow and proximal pressure measurements are obtained and displayed on the GUI.

A manual purge control is also provided to clear pneumatic lines for accurate pressure measurements. When a manual purge is requested, the ventilator will not allow another purge for at least 30 seconds. See

Section 16.7,

Sensor Calibration and Sensor Line Purging, page 307

for more information on the purge function.

16.4.1 Proximal Flow Option Components

The Proximal Flow option consists of the following components:

Proximal Flow option PCBA – Installed on the option host card in the BDU, this printed circuit board assembly contains a pressure sensor to measure the pressure difference between the flow sensor lines and the interfaces required to convert analog measurements from the proximal flow sensor into digital data displayed by the ventilator. The PCBA also contains valves and an accumulator for purging the sensor lines from blockages.

Proximal flow sensor – The proximal flow sensor is required for use with the Proximal Flow option. The sensor is installed near the patient circuit wye. The other end of the sensor connects to the ventilator’s front panel behind a clear door designed to protect the connection point from exposure to spills or from sprayed liquids during

cleaning and disinfection. See Figure 119 .

304

Figure 119.

Proximal Flow Sensor

VEN_10297_A

16.5 Hardware Requirements

The Proximal Flow option requires installation of the Proximal Flow hardware. The NeoMode 2.0 software option or a Puritan Bennett™ 980 Neonatal Ventilator must also be used. Details regarding NeoMode 2.0 can be found in

Chapter 15 .

The following hardware is required:

• Option host card

• Proximal flow sensor

Proximal Flow option hardware installation must be performed by qualified service personnel, using separate installation instructions (part number 10084704).

16.6 On-screen Symbols

When using the Proximal Flow option, flow, pressure, and volume waveform data, along with delivered and exhaled volumes are derived from proximal flow sensor measurements at the patient circuit wye. Proximal flow data are displayed on the waveform plot with a Y appearing in inverse video next to the measurement symbol.

305

Figure 120.

Sample GUI screen Showing Proximal Flow Data

1 Data measured using Proximal Flow Sensor P

— Pressure throughout the breath cycle (at the patient circuit wye) ⩒

—Flow throughout the breath cycle (at the patient circuit wye)

Inspired and exhaled flows and volumes at the patient wye are measured and identified by the symbols shown below, and correspond to their non-proximal flow equivalents. These values appear in the patient data panel if so configured. See

Section 3.8.2.7, Vital Patient Data, page 82

, and Figure 120

Table 84.

Proximal Flow Option Patient Data Symbols

Data symbol

TIY

TEY

TE SPONTY

TE MANDY

⩒

E TOTY

⩒

TLY

Description

Inspired tidal volume (mandatory or spontaneous at patient circuit wye)

Exhaled tidal volume (at patient circuit wye)

Exhaled spontaneous tidal volume (at patient circuit wye)

Exhaled mandatory tidal volume (at patient circuit wye)

Exhaled total minute volume (at patient circuit wye)

Flow throughout the breath cycle (at patient circuit wye)

Inspired tidal volume (at patient circuit wye with Leak Sync enabled)

Note:

In the patient data symbols shown in Figure 120

, the “Y” appears in inverse video, as shown.

Note: When the Proximal Flow and Leak Sync functions are enabled, the following parameters are available for display:

• V

TLY

and V

• LEAK and LEAK

When only the Proximal Flow option is enabled, V

TIY

and V

are available for display

When a “Y” appears in the symbol, the data are measured with the proximal flow sensor. When a “Y” is absent from the symbol, the data are measured by the ventilator’s internal flow sensors.

306

16.7 Sensor Calibration and Sensor Line Purging

To ensure accurate pressure and flow measurements, the ventilator performs an autozero function to calibrate the proximal flow sensor. It does this by periodically opening the pressure sensor on the Proximal Flow option PCBA to atmosphere during exhalation, and uses the resulting measurements as offset corrections.

The purge function is designed to clear the pneumatic lines of fluids that may collect, and is performed periodically by sending a brief flow of air through the sensor lines. Autozero and purge functions are only active during exhalation, limiting the effect of the purge gas on delivered oxygen concentration.

During the autozero or automatic purge processes, the measurement and display of proximal flow data is not shown in real time and a brief message appears on the GUI indicating the purge process is occurring.

During autozero or automatic purge processes, the pressure waveforms, when shown display the current PEEP value and the flow waveform, when shown, displays a value of 0.

Figure 121.

Message During Autozero and Purge Processes

16.8 SST Requirements

SST must be run prior to ventilation and all circuit components and accessories must be installed in the configuration to be used on the patient for the ventilator to calculate the correct compliance and resistance. This includes a neonatal patient circuit, proximal flow sensor, and other accessories used during ventilation. See

Section 3.9.1.2

. There is also a table listing the SST tests located in that section. See

Table 85 for a listing of the tests

when running SST with the Proximal Flow option.

Note: Failure of the ventilator to pass SST does not prevent ventilation, but will prevent measurement with the proximal flow sensor. The ventilator will use its internal flow sensors for measurement instead of the proximal flow sensor.

307

Table 85.

Proximal Flow Option SST Tests

Test Step

SST Flow Sensor Cross Check

SST EV Performance

SST Circuit Pressure

SST Leak

SST Exhalation Filter

Tests O

Calibrates the exhalation valve and creates a table for use during calcu‐ lations.

Function

and Air Flow Sensors

Exercises delivery PSOL. Checks inspiratory and expiratory autozero solenoids. Cross-checks inspiratory and expiratory pressure transducers at various pressures.

Tests ventilator breathing system for leaks.

Checks for exhalation filter occlu‐ sion and exhalation compartment occlusion.

SST Circuit Resistance

SST Circuit Compliance

SST Prox

N/A

Comments

Checks for inspiratory and expira‐ tory limb occlusions, and calculates and stores the inspiratory and expir‐ atory limb resistance parameters.

Calculates the attached patient cir‐ cuit compliance.

Verifies functionality of proximal flow system.

Ventilator prompts the user to block the proximal flow sensor outlet dur‐ ing the leak test. When prompted to reconnect the patient to the exha‐ lation filter during the exhalation fil‐ ter test, resume blocking the proxi‐ mal flow sensor outlet.

N/A

Includes tests of barometric pres‐ sure, autozero, purge, and pressure cross check functions.

16.8.1 Attaching the Proximal Flow Sensor for SST

During SST the ventilator prompts to attach the proximal flow sensor.

To attach the proximal flow sensor to the patient circuit

1. Verify the proximal flow sensor, pneumatic lines, and connector are not damaged.

2. Open the connector panel door and firmly attach the sensor connector to the receptacle in the BDUs front connector port labeled Prox Flow.

308

Figure 122.

Attaching Proximal Flow Sensor to Ventilator

1 Proximal flow sensor connector insertion port

2 Proximal flow sensor connector

3. When prompted, block the breathing circuit wye.

4. When prompted to attach the proximal flow sensor, unblock the circuit wye and insert the smaller end of the sensor into the wye.

5. When prompted, cap or seal the larger end of the sensor (marked with “UP” and an arrow).

6. Follow the prompts to complete SST.

If SST fails, check the patient circuit and flow sensor connections for leaks or occlusions and replace the proximal flow sensor, if necessary. Replace the Proximal Flow option hardware if SST continues to fail, then repeat SST to determine circuit compliance and resistance. See the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Hardware

Options Installation Instructions , p/n 10084704 for instructions on replacing the Proximal Flow option hardware.

16.9 Disabling/Enabling the Proximal Flow Option

The proximal flow sensor can function in the Enabled state only if the circuit type is neonatal. Assuming the

Proximal Flow option is available and the ventilation type is invasive, the new patient default value is Enabled.

After SST has been performed, the clinician may disable the Proximal Flow option, if desired.

To disable or enable the Proximal Flow option

1. In the constant access icons area, touch the configure icon.

A menu containing tabs appears.

2. Touch the Options tab. A screen appears containing the Installed Options and Prox tabs.

3. Touch Enabled or Disabled to enable or disable the Prox Flow option.

309

Figure 123.

Enabling/Disabling the Proximal Flow Sensor

Note: If the Proximal Flow option has been disabled or enabled, SST does not have to be re-run unless the breathing circuit or other breathing system accessories have been changed, removed, or added.

16.10 Using the Proximal Flow Sensor

Review and follow all warnings prior to patient ventilation with the proximal flow sensor. See

Section 1.3, Safety

Information, page 14

To connect the proximal flow sensor to the ventilator

1. Verify the proximal flow sensor, pneumatic lines, and connector are not damaged in any way.

2. Open the connector panel door and firmly attach the sensor connector to the right-most receptacle in the

BDU’s front connector port labeled Prox Flow. See Figure 122, page 309 .

To attach the proximal flow sensor between the endotracheal tube and patient circuit

1. Connect the larger end of the sensor (marked with “UP” and an arrow) to the endotracheal tube. See

Figure 124 . Do not force the connection; when the sensor is oriented correctly, insertion requires little effort.

Note: If using a heat-moisture exchanger (HME) on the endotracheal tube, place the proximal flow sensor between the HME and the breathing circuit wye.

310

Figure 124.

Attaching the Proximal Flow Sensor

1 Endotracheal tube

2 Breathing circuit wye

2. Connect the smaller end of the sensor to the breathing circuit wye.

3. Ensure that the sensor tubing is positioned in an upward direction, as shown in Figure 124

If the sensor needs repositioning, DO NOT rotate it by pulling on the tubing. Reposition as follows: a. Grasp the sensor’s plastic body with one hand and the breathing circuit wye with the other hand.

b. Rotate the sensor body and wye towards each other until the sensor tubing is upright.

c. Confirm a tight connection between the sensor and breathing circuit wye.

4. Use the three cable management clips provided with the sensor to attach the sensor tubing to the breathing circuit tubing. Space the clips evenly along the length of the sensor tubing. Twist the ends of each clip to close.

Note: When the ventilator is set up for Proximal Flow option operation, the proximal flow sensor can be switched as necessary. There is no need to run SST after switching sensors unless the breathing circuit or other ventilator accessories have been changed.

16.10.1 How to Perform a Manual Purge

A manual purge may be performed any time the sensor lines contain excessive condensation, moisture, or secretions.

To perform a manual purge

1. Touch the configure icon on the in the constant access icons area of the GUI.

2. Touch the Options tab. A screen appears containing the Installed Options and Prox tabs.

3. Touch the Prox tab. The Prox Setup screen appears.

4. Touch Start that appears next to the text “Prox Manual Purge: To begin touch the Start button”. During the purge, a message appears in the GUI prompt area stating the purge process is being performed. See

Figure 121 .

311

Figure 125.

Manual Purge

16.11 Alarms

If the Proximal Flow option becomes inoperable during ventilation, the ventilator annunciates an alarm and flow sensing reverts to the ventilator’s internal delivery and exhalation flow sensors. This switch over may be triggered by any of the following events:

• The proximal flow sensor is not detected.

• Pressure and flow readings are out of range.

• Hardware problems are reported by the Proximal Flow option PCBA.

• There is a communication failure between the ventilator and the Proximal Flow option.

If any of these conditions occur, the GUI displays an alarm message similar the one shown in Figure 126

. Follow the information contained in the remedy message to troubleshoot the alarm.

312

Figure 126.

Alarm Message—Prox Inoperative

16.12 Ranges, Resolutions, and Accuracies

See Table 63, page 257

for proximal exhaled tidal volume, proximal inspired tidal volume, proximal exhaled minute volume, and proximal flow patient data parameters.

16.12.1 Proximal Flow Sensor Specifications

Table 86.

Proximal Flow Sensor Volume Accuracy

Measurement

Exhaled tidal volume

Inspired tidal volume

±(1.0 mL +10% of reading)

Accuracy a

a The sensor is used as described in this appendix or the instructions for use provided with the sensor.

Table 87.

Proximal Flow Sensor Specifications

Parameter

Weight

Dead space

Pressure drop

Specification

6.6 g

<1 mL

1.5 cmH

O at 10 L/min

16.13 Part Numbers

Table 88 lists the part numbers for the Proximal Flow option kit and individual components.

Table 88.

Proximal Flow Option Component Part Numbers

Item

Proximal flow option kit

Includes:

Part number

10084331

313

Table 88.

Proximal Flow Option Component Part Numbers (continued)

Item

Installation hardware and accessories

Proximal flow sensor, neonatal (package of 10)

NOTE: Includes 3 cable management clips

Proximal flow sensor module

Interconnect PCBA

Purge control cable

Purge supply line

PCBA mounting screws

Proximal Flow option label

Part number

10047078

10087622

10083941

10083940

10083966

10083963

10005748

314

17 Appendix Trending

17.1 Overview

This appendix describes the operation of the Puritan Bennett™ 980 Series Ventilator Trending function.

Trending is a graphically-based ventilator function allowing a combination of a total of six patient data parameters or ventilator settings to be plotted vs. time. Viewing these data allows the clinician to determine the effectiveness of the patient’s therapy.

17.2 Intended Use

The Trending feature is intended to trend a patient’s respiratory parameters and ventilator settings over time, to aid physicians in assessing the effectiveness of current therapy. It is not intended to determine the course of treatment.

17.3 Safety Reminder

Warning: The ventilator offers a variety of breath delivery options. Throughout the patient’s treatment, the clinician should carefully select the ventilation mode and settings to use for that patient based on clinical judgment, the condition and needs of the patient, and the benefits, limitations, and characteristics of the breath delivery options. As the patient’s condition changes over time, periodically assess the chosen modes and settings to determine whether or not those are best for the patient’s current needs.

17.4 Trending Description

Trending enables a combination of up to six patient data parameters and ventilator settings to be plotted at one time. The user can choose from one of eight time scales.

17.5 Setting Up Trending

To set up trending

1. If a patient is not already being ventilated, set up patient ventilation per the instructions given in Chapter 4

2. Swipe the Menu tab on the left side of the GUI and touch Trending.

The default layout appears with two trended parameters displayed on a 2-hour time scale. Alternatively, touch the layout icon and touch Trending on the Graphs tab. The default layout appears with two trended parameters displayed on a 2-hour time scale.

315

Figure 127.

Accessing Trending via the Menu Tab

1 Trending button appears after swiping the menu tab

3. Select the parameters to be trended by double-tapping the trended parameter name at the top of the graph or choose Presets, which automatically populates trended items with preset trended parameters. See

Section 17.8, Trending Presets, page 322

. If you desire a different layout than the two-parameter default, touch

Custom 2 and a drop-down list appears with layouts for one, two, three, four, or six parameters. Choose the trended parameters for each graph by double-tapping the parameter. A list of buttons appears with arrows to let you know more parameters may be selected. Touch the desired button for the parameter to be trended.

To exit Trending

Touch the layout icon, then touch any of the waveform layout buttons (1 through 5).

The screen will exit the Trending layout and return to displaying the selected waveforms.

17.6 Trend Parameters

Both ventilator settings and patient data parameters can be trended. Trended ventilator settings are identified with brackets around the setting. For example, if respiratory rate is chosen as a trended ventilator setting, it would appear on the GUI as [f ]. Trended patient data parameters are not bracketed. If circuit pressure were trended, its value would appear as P subject to change.

PEAK

Table 89

and

Table 90 include trended ventilator settings and parameters and are

Table 89.

Trended Ventilator Settings

Ventilator setting

Expiratory Sensitivity

Respiratory Rate

Peak Inspiratory Flow

I:E Ratio

Oxygen Percentage

PEEP

High Pressure (in BiLevel)

Symbol

SENS

[f ]

]

[ ⩒

MAX

]

[I:E]

[PEEP]

]

316

Table 89.

Trended Ventilator Settings (continued)

Ventilator setting

Low Pressure (in BiLevel)

Inspiratory Pressure

Pressure Support Level

Rise Time%

Flow Sensitivity

Pressure Sensitivity

High Time (in BiLevel)

Low Time (in BiLevel)

Ratio

Inspiratory Time

Expiratory Time

Tidal Volume (in VC, VC+)

Volume Support

Percent Support - PAV

Percent Support - TC

High Spontaneous Inspiratory Time Limit

Apnea Interval

Predicted Body Weight

Alarm Volume

Expiratory Sensitivity - PAV

Tube Size

Plateau Time

Increase O

IE Sync Trigger Threshold

Tidal Volume/PBW Ratio

Support Volume per kg

Humidifier Volume

Table 90.

Trended Patient Data Parameters

Patient data parameter

Dynamic Compliance

PAV-based Lung Compliance

PAV-based Lung Elastance

End Expiratory Flow

Peak Expiratory Flow Rate

Peak Spontaneous Flow Rate

Total Respiratory Rate

I:E Ratio

Negative Inspiratory Force

Oxygen Percentage (monitored)

Occlusion Pressure

317

Symbol

]

SUPP

]

[ ]

[ ⩒

SENS

]

SENS

]

T SUPP

]

[% Supp]

[ ⤒ T

I SPONT

]

[PBW]

[Alarm Volume]

SENS PAV

]

[Tube Size]

]

SYNC

]

/PBW]

T SUPP

/PBW]

[Humid Vol]

Symbol

DYN

PAV

STAT

PAV

EEF

PSF f

TOT

I:E

NIF

0.1

Table 90.

Trended Patient Data Parameters (continued)

Patient data parameter

End Expiratory Pressure

Intrinsic PEEP

PAV-based Intrinsic PEEP

Total PEEP

Mean Circuit Pressure

Peak Circuit Pressure

Plateau Pressure

Spontaneous Rapid Shallow Breathing Index

Dynamic Resistance

PAV-based Patient Resistance

PAV-based Total Airway Resistance

Driving Pressure

Spontaneous Inspiratory Time

Spontaneous Inspiratory Time Ratio

Vital Capacity

Exhaled Total Minute Volume

Exhaled Spontaneous Minute Volume

Exhaled Tidal Volume

Exhaled Spontaneous Tidal Volume

Exhaled Mandatory Tidal Volume

Inspired Tidal Volume

Work of Breathing

Percent Leak

Inspiratory Leak

Exhaled Tidal Volume per kg PBW

End Tidal CO

Compliance Ratio

Inspiratory time constant

Estimated Inspiratory volume during Leak Sync

Leak Rate at PEEP

Exhalation leak at PEEP during Leak Sync measured by the proximal flow sensor

Inspired tidal volume measured by the proximal flow sensor

Inspired tidal volume measured by the proximal flow sensor per kg PBW

Estimated inspiratory volume during Leak Sync per kg

PBW

Exhaled tidal volume measured by the proximal flow sensor

Exhaled tidal volume measured by the proximal flow sensor per kg PBW

318

Symbol

PEEP

I PAV

PEEP

MEAN

PEAK

PL f/V

DYN

STAT

TOT

DRIVE

I SPONT

TOT

⩒

E TOT

⩒

E SPONT

TE SPONT

TE MAND

WOB

TOT

%LEAK

LEAK

/PBW

ETCO

3Tau

LEAK

TIY

/PBW

TEY

/PBW

Table 90.

Trended Patient Data Parameters (continued)

Patient data parameter

Exhaled spontaneous tidal volume measured by the proximal flow sensor

Exhaled spontaneous minute volume measured by the proximal flow sensor

Exhaled mandatory tidal volume when the proximal flow sensor is enabled

Inspiratory tidal volume during Leak Sync measured by the proximal flow sensor

Estimated inspiratory volume per kg PBW during Leak

Sync measured by the proximal flow sensor

Exhaled minute volume when the proximal flow sensor is enabled

Symbol

TE SPONTY

⩒

E SPONTY

TEY MAND

TLY

/PBW

⩒

E TOTY

17.7 Viewing Trended Parameters

The cursor plays an important role when using Trending. Use the cursor to determine the parameter value vs. time and details regarding events. Touch the cursor button and turn the knob to move the cursor. The cursor moves along the waveform with the y-axis displaying the parameter’s value and the x-axis showing the time. As the waveform changes, each value is shown surrounded by a highlighted box as the cursor hovers over the waveform.

If the cursor is at its left-most position on the graph, it remains there and the graph displays the earliest time stamp.

If the cursor is in between left- and right-most positions on the graph, the cursor tracks its time stamp as the graph moves and new data arrive.

If the cursor is at its right-most position on the graph, it remains there and the graph displays the latest time stamp.

Note: If a trend parameter is not selected for a particular graph, the minimum and maximum values appear as dashes (- -).

17.7.1 Time Scales

Eight time scales are available. Time scales of 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 24, 48, and 72 hours can be viewed. The time scale is indicated by the slider track at the bottom of the Trending screen. The complete slider track represents a 72-hour time interval, and the blue shuttle that slides along the track represents the selected time scale. The selected time scale applies to all displayed trend graphs.

Although data are sampled at periodic intervals, as shown in Table 91

, the GUI screen is refreshed every minute for any time scale selected.

Table 91.

Sampling Periods for Selected Time Scales

Time scale

1 hour

2 hours

4 hours

8 hours

12 hours

24 hours

48 hours

72 hours

Sampling period

10 seconds

20 seconds

40 seconds

80 seconds

2 minutes

4 minutes

8 minutes

12 minutes

319

To select a time scale

1. Touch the x-axis of the graph. The time values are surrounded by a highlighted box, indicating the time scale is ready to be changed.

2. Turn the knob to select a time scale. Turning the knob clockwise reduces the time scale, and turning it counter-clockwise increases the time scale. The relative size of the shuttle indicates the time interval selected, and the time interval is displayed along the x-axis.

3. When finished, touch the x-axis again to dismiss the box.

After each time scale change, the graphs refresh with updated parameter values for that time scale.

17.7.2 Events

Events are either automatic or manual and appear as vertical tick marks on the trend graph according to their time of occurrence. When the cursor hovers over a tick mark, Event Details changes from unselectable (gray) to a button containing the event ID numbers associated with the tick mark. Touching this button causes a dialog to appear with the event ID and its description. If many IDs are present for a selected time stamp, the user is notified by an ellipsis (…) indicating more IDs are present.

When the operator modifies the real time clock setting, the system places an event marker in the trend log to denote a time or date change. The time stamp of this automatic event will be the new time setting.

Note:

The events listed in Table 92

are subject to change.

Table 92.

Events

Event ID

Description

Manual events

Suction

Rx: Bronchodilator

Rx: Antihistamine

Rx: Steroid

Rx: Antibiotic

Rx: Muco/Proteolytic

Blood Gas

Circuit Change

Start Weaning

Stop Weaning

Bronchoscopy

X-ray

Recruitment maneuver a

Other 1

Other 2

Other 3

Surfactant administration

Prone position

Supine position b

Left side position b

Right side position

Manual stimulation b

320

Table 92.

Events (continued)

Event ID

Description

Start transport

Stop transport

Start N.O Rx

Stop N.O Rx

Automatic events

Changed ventilation type to Invasive

Changed ventilation type to NIV

Changed mode to A/C

Changed mode to SIMV

Changed mode to SPONT

Changed mode to BiLevel

Changed mandatory type to VC

Changed mandatory type to VC+

Changed mandatory type to PC

Changed spontaneous type to PS

Changed spontaneous type to VS

Changed spontaneous type to PAV+™

Changed spontaneous type to TC a

Time (real-time clock) changed by user

Same Patient selected

Occlusion

Circuit Disconnect

Apnea Ventilation

NIF Accepted

P0.1 Accepted

VC Accepted

Inspiratory Pause Maneuver Completed

Expiratory Pause Maneuver Completed

Changed mode to CPAP b

Elevate O

Alarm volume change

Proximal Flow Sensor state Enabled b

Proximal Flow Sensor state Disabled b

Manual Inspiration

Leak Sync Enabled

Leak Sync Disabled

Changed trigger type to Pressure

Changed trigger type to Flow

Changed trigger type to IE Sync a

Enter Stand-By Ventilation

Exit Stand-By Ventilation

321

Table 92.

Events (continued)

Event ID

91 a c

Not available for neonatal circuit types.

b Only for neonatal circuit types.

Adult only.

Description

Backup Ventilation

Changed humidifier type to Heated

Changed humidifier type to Non-heated

Changed humidifier type to HME

To record a manual event

1. Touch the Manual Event text below the home icon on the GUI screen.

The manual event screen appears with arrows allowing scrolling through the available manual events. See

Table 8, page 36 and

Figure 39, page 98 .

2. Touch Accept to confirm the event or Cancel to cancel the action.

3. View the event by hovering the cursor over the vertical tick mark and touching Event Details which now appears as a button containing event IDs. After touching the button, a dialog appears showing the event

ID and its description.

17.8 Trending Presets

The trending function enables the clinician to view a combination of up to six patient data parameters and ventilation settings that are plotted over time on a clinician-selected time scale. There are two options for how trended values are selected for display on the trending screen:

• The clinician may select each individual trended value that is displayed on the trending screen.

• The clinician may select a trending preset (a preselected group of trended values) for display.

The ventilator offers presets for adult and pediatric patients and a different set of presets for neonatal patients. The trending presets are intended to aid clinicians in assessing the effectiveness of the current therapy but are not intended to determine the course of treatment.

17.8.1 Adult and Pediatric Trending Presets

Adult and pediatric trending presets include but are not limited to:

Weaning — f/V

, P

0.1

, NIF, [V

T SUPP

], [V

T SUPP

], C

STAT

ARDS — P

, [PEEP], V

, R

STAT

, C

STAT

, [V

]

COPD — R

DYN

, EEF, f

TOT

, V

TE SPONT

, ⩒

E TOT

, C

STAT

VC+ — P

PEAK

, V

, C

STAT

, [V

], [T

], R

STAT

PAV+™ — [% Supp], P

PEAK

, WOB

TOT

, f

TOT

, V

, R

PAV

BiLevel — C

STAT

, [P

], [P

], P

MEAN

, PEEP

, f

TOT

LRM — P

PEAK

, PEEP, C

DYN

, V

, C

STAT

, [T

17.8.2 Neonatal Trending Presets

Neonatal trending presets include but are not limited to:

322

VCV — P

PEAK

, PEEP, [V

], P

MEAN

, V

, O

PCV — P

PEAK

, V

, P

MEAN

, [T

], PEEP, O

BPD — P

PEAK

, C

DYN

, P

MEAN

, PEEP, R

DYN

, O

SURF — V

, C

DYN

, R

DYN

, P

MEAN

, [T

], O

Weaning — f

TOT

, V

, C

DYN

, R

DYN

, [f ], O

N SIMV — f

TOT

, [f ], [P

], PEEP, P

MEAN

, O

N SPONT — f

TOT

, PEEP, O

%, I:E ratio, PSF,%LEAK

Leak Sync — %LEAK, LEAK, V

LEAK

, V

, ⩒

E TOT

To select a trending preset

1. Touch Presets. A dialog appears with available choices. Arrows on the dialog indicate more available choices.

2. Touch the desired trending preset. As all trending presets include six parameters, the trend graph changes to a six-graph layout, populated with the six trended preset parameters described above. The chosen trended preset appears on the Presets button.

Note: If a trended preset is selected, it is not possible to change the trended parameters. You must first select a custom layout, by touching Custom, then double-tapping the parameters you desire to change.

17.9 Data Gaps

Data gaps are shown during Apnea ventilation, occlusion, circuit disconnect, Stand-By ventilation, and backup ventilation. Gaps also appear for trended parameters that are not applicable, such as parameters associated with a non-installed option or those that are not active in the current ventilator settings.

323

324

18 Appendix Glossary

18.1 Glossary

analysis message

Ventilation Terms

A message displayed on the GUI screen during an alarm condition, identifying the root cause of the alarm.

assist breath assist-control A/C mode audio paused

A mandatory breath triggered by patient inspiratory effort in A/C and SIMV modes.

A ventilation mode where only mandatory VC, PC, or VC+ breaths are delivered to the patient.

The 2-minute period that begins after the audio paused key is pressed, where the audible portion of an alarm is muted.

augmented alarm The initial cause of an alarm has precipitated one or more related alarms. When an alarm occurs, any subsequent alarm related to the cause of this initial alarm “augments” the initial alarm.

autotriggering background checks Continuously running tests during ventilation that assess the ventilator’s electronics and pneumatics hardware.

backup ventilation

(BUV)

A safety net feature that is invoked if a system fault in the mix subsystem, inspiratory subsystem, or expiratory subsystem occurs compromising the ventilator’s ability to ven‐ tilate the patient as set.

base flow

The ventilator delivers repeated, unintended breaths triggered by fluctuating flows or pressures as opposed to patient demand. Patient circuit leaks and low flow or pressure sensitivity settings are common causes of autotriggering.

base message

A constant flow of gas through the patient circuit during the latter part of exhalation during flow triggering ( ⩒ -Trig). The value of this base flow is 1.5 L/min greater than the operator selected value for flow sensitivity.

A message given by the ventilator during an alarm condition, identifying the alarm.

batch changes battery back-up sys‐ tem

BD, BDU

BiLevel mode

BOC breath stacking

Changes to multiple settings that go into effect at the same time.

The system for supplying battery back-up power to a device. The ventilator’s battery back-up system consists of a single primary battery to provide up to 1 hour of battery power to the ventilator. An optional extended battery with the same characteristics as the primary battery is available.

Breath delivery or breath delivery unit. The ventilator component that includes inspira‐ tory and expiratory pneumatics and electronics.

A mixed ventilation mode combining mandatory and spontaneous breaths, where two levels of pressure are delivered (P

and T

and P

) corresponding to expiratory and inspiratory times T

British Oxygen Company. A standard for high pressure gas inlet fittings.

The delivery of a second inspiration before the previous exhalation is complete.

BTPS Body temperature and pressure, saturated, 37°C, at ambient barometric pressure, at 100% relative humidity.

compliance volume The volume of gas that remains in the patient circuit and does not enter the patient’s respiratory system.

compressor The compressor provides compressed air, which can be used in place of wall or bottled air.

constant during rate change

One of three breath timing variables (inspiratory time, I:E ratio, or expiratory time) the operator can hold constant when the respiratory rate setting changes. Applies only to the pressure control (PC) mandatory breath type (including VC+ and BiLevel).

325

control breath

CPU

A ventilator-initiated mandatory breath delivered in A/C mode

Central processing unit. The electronic components of the ventilator (BD and GUI) responsible for interpreting and executing instructions entered by the operator.

dependent alarm An alarm that arises as a result of another primary alarm (also referred to as an augmen‐ tation).

SENS

Disconnect sensitivity. A setting that specifies the allowable loss (percentage) of delivered tidal volume, which if equaled or exceeded, causes the ventilator to declare a DISCON‐

NECT alarm. The greater the setting, the more returned volume must be lost before

DISCONNECT is detected. If the Leak Sync function is in use, D allowable leak rate and is expressed in terms of L/min.

SENS

is the maximum

DISS

SENS

Diameter index safety standard. A standard for high pressure gas inlet fittings.

Expiratory sensitivity. A setting that determines the percent of peak inspiratory flow (or flow rate expressed in L/min in a PAV breath) at which the ventilator cycles from inspi‐ ration to exhalation for spontaneous breaths. Low settings will result in longer sponta‐ neous inspirations.

EST

EVQ

Extended self test. A comprehensive test of ventilator function, intended to be run by qualified service personnel.

The exhalation flow sensor assembly.

expiratory pause an operator-initiated maneuver that closes the inspiration (proportional solenoid) and exhalation valves during the expiratory phase of a mandatory breath. The maneuver can be used to determine intrinsic (auto) PEEP (PEEP

exhalation valve (EV) The valve in the expiratory limb of the ventilator breathing system that controls PEEP.

f, f

TOT

Failure

Respiratory rate, as a setting (f ) in A/C, SIMV, and BiLevel the minimum number of man‐ datory breaths the patient receives per minute. As a monitored value (f total number of breaths delivered to the patient.

TOT

), the average

A category of condition detected during SST or EST that causes the ventilator to enter the safety valve open state. A ventilator experiencing a failure requires removal from clinical use and immediate service.

flow pattern gold standard test circuit

GUI

A setting that determines the gas flow pattern of mandatory volume-controlled breaths.

Test circuit designed for use with EST.

hard bound

Graphical user interface. The ventilator’s touch screen used to enter patient settings. and alarm settings, including off-screen keys, soft keys, and knobs.

A ventilator setting that has reached its minimum or maximum limit.

high-priority alarm As defined by international standards organizations, an alarm that requires immediate attention to ensure patient safety. When a high-priority alarm is active, the red highpriority LED indicator flashes and the high-priority audible alarm sounds (a repeating sequence of five tones that repeats twice, pauses, then repeats again), and the alarm banner on the GUI screen shows an alarm message with the ( !!! ) symbol.

HME Heat-moisture exchanger. A humidification device, also called an artificial nose.

humidification type A setting for the type of humidification system (HME, non-heated expiratory tube, or heated expiratory tubing) in use on the ventilator.

I:E ratio The ratio of inspiratory time to expiratory time. Also, the operator- set timing variable that applies to PC and VC+ mandatory breaths.

inspiratory pause An operator-initiated maneuver that closes the inspiration (proportional solenoid) and exhalation valves at the end of the inspiratory phase of a mandatory breath. The maneu‐ ver can be used to determine static compliance (C

STAT

) and static resistance (R

STAT invasive ventilation Patient ventilation while intubated with an endotracheal (or tracheostomy) tube.

326

18 latched alarm An alarm whose visual alarm indicator remains illuminated after the alarm has autoreset.

low-priority alarm As defined by international standards organizations, an alarm that indicates a change in the patient-ventilator system. During a low-priority alarm, the yellow low-priority LED indicator lights, the low-priority audible alarm (one tone) sounds, and the GUI screen shows an alarm banner with the ( ! ) symbol.

lockable alarm An alarm that does not terminate an active audio paused function.

maintenance All actions necessary to keep equipment in, or restore it to, serviceable condition. Includes cleaning, servicing, repair, modification, overhaul, inspection, and performance verifica‐ tion.

mandatory breath A breath whose settings and timing are preset; can be triggered by the ventilator, patient, or operator.

mandatory type The type of mandatory breath: volume control (VC), VC+, or pressure control (PC).

manual inspiration An operator-initiated mandatory (OIM) breath.

medium-priority alarm

As defined by international standards organizations, an abnormal condition that requires prompt attention to ensure the safety of the patient. When a medium-priority alarm is active, the yellow medium-priority LED indicator flashes, the medium- priority audible alarm (a repeating sequence of three tones) sounds, and the GUI screen shows an alarm banner with the ( !! ) symbol.

mode

NIST

Ventilatory mode. The algorithm that determines type and sequence of breath delivery.

Non-interchangeable screw thread. A standard for high pressure gas inlet fittings.

non-invasive ventila‐ tion (NIV)

Patient ventilation without the use of an endotracheal tube; instead using interfaces such as masks, nasal prongs, or uncuffed endotracheal tubes.

non-technical alarm An alarm caused due to a fault in the patient-ventilator interaction or a fault in the elec‐ trical or gas supplies that the practitioner may be able to alleviate.

normal ventilation The state of the ventilator when breathing is in progress and no alarms are active.

% Both a ventilator setting and a monitored variable. The R centage of oxygen in the delivered gas. The O

TOT

setting determines the per‐

% monitoreddata is the percentage of oxygen in the gas delivered to the patient, measured at the ventilator outlet upstream of the inspiratory filter.

OIM ongoing back‐ ground checks

OSC

Operator-initiated mandatory breath. A breath delivered when the operator presses the manual inspiration key.

Continuously running tests during ventilation that assess the ventilator’s electronics and pneumatics hardware.

OVERRIDDEN

Occlusion status cycling. A state invoked during a severe occlusion. In this mode, the ventilator periodically attempts to deliver a pressure-based breath while monitoring the inspiratory and expiratory phases for the continuing existence of the occlusion.

The final status of an SST or EST run in which the operator used the override feature. (The ventilator must have ended the test with an ALERT condition.) Failures cannot be over‐ ridden.

patient circuit The entire inspiratory-expiratory conduit, including tubing, humidifier, and water traps.

patient data alarm An alarm condition associated with an abnormal condition of the patient’s respiratory status.

patient problems A definition used by the ventilator’s safety net. Patient problems are declared when patient data are measured equal to or outside of alarm thresholds and are usually selfcorrecting or can be corrected by a practitioner. The alarm monitoring system detects and announces patient problems. Patient problems do not compromise the ventilator’s per‐ formance.

327

PBW

PEEP

I END

PIM

P primary alarm

DRIVE

PEAK

SENS

MEAN

Predicted body weight, a ventilator setting that specifies the patient’s body weight assuming normal fat and fluid levels. Determines absolute limits on tidal volume and peak flow, and allows appropriate matching of ventilator settings to the patient.

Pressure control. A mandatory breath type in which the ventilator delivers an operator-set inspiratory pressure for an operator- set inspiratory time. Available in A/C and SIMV modes, and for operator-initiated mandatory (OIM) breaths in SPONT mode.

Driving pressure (P

PEEP

DRIVE

) is the difference between plateau pressure and estimated

TOT

and represents the amount of pressure required to overcome the elastic recoil of the lungs. P

DRIVE

can also be calculated by dividing V

by CPAV (V

PAV

PAV+™ software automatically performs a 300 ms end-inspiratory hold in a random pat‐ tern every four to ten PAV+™ breaths. Each time the end-inspiratory hold is conducted this pressure change is measured from the end expiratory lung pressure at the beginning of the breath to the pressure at the end of the plateau maneuver.

Expiratory pressure transducer.

Positive end expiratory pressure. The measured circuit pressure (referenced to the patient wye) at the end of the expiratory phase of a breath. If expiratory pause is active, the displayed value reflects the level of any active lung PEEP.

Intrinsic PEEP. Indicates a calculated estimate of the pressure above the PEEP level at the end of exhalation. Determined during an expiratory pause maneuver.

Inspiratory pressure. The operator-set inspiratory pressure at the patient wye (above

PEEP) during a pressure control (PC) mandatory breath.

Inspiratory pressure transducer.

End inspiratory pressure. The pressure at the end of the inspiratory phase ofthe current breath. If plateau is active, the displayed value reflects the level of end-plateau pressure.

Patient-initiated mandatory breath. A mandatory breath triggered by patient inspiratory effort.

Mean circuit pressure, a calculation of the measured average patient circuit pressure over an entire respiratory cycle.

Maximum circuit pressure, the maximum pressure during the inspiratory and expiratory phases of a breath.

An initial alarm.

Pressure support, a spontaneous breath type in which the ventilator delivers an opera‐ tor-set pressure (in addition to PEEP) during the inspiratory phase. Available in SPONT,

SIMV, and BiLevel modes.

Pressure sensitivity. The operator-set pressure drop below PEEP (derived from the patient’s inspiratory flow) required to begin a patient-initiated breath when pressure triggering is selected.

PSOL

SUPP

Proportional solenoid valve.

Pressure support. A setting of the level of inspiratory assist pressure (above PEEP) at the patient wye during a spontaneous breath (when spontaneous breath type is PS).

P-Trig Pressure triggering, a method of recognizing patient inspiratory effort in which the ven‐ tilator monitors pressure in the patient circuit. The ventilator triggers a breath when the airway pressure drops by at least the value selected for pressure sensitivity (P

SENS

remedy message A message displayed on the GUI during an alarm condition suggesting ways to resolve the alarm.

resistance restricted phase of exhalation

The flow-dependent pressure drop across a conduit. Measured in cmH

O/L/s or hPa/L/s.

The time period during the expiratory phase where an inspiration trigger is not allowed.

The restricted phase of exhalation is defined as the first 200 ms of exhalation, or the time it takes for expiratory flow to drop to ≤50% of the peakexpiratory flow, or the time it takes

328

18 rise time% safety net safety valve (SV) safety ventilation service mode

SIMV

SIS soft bound

SPONT for the expiratory flow to drop to ≤0.5 L/min (whichever is longest). The restricted phase of exhalation will end after 5 seconds of exhalation have elapsed regardless of the meas‐ ured expiratory flow rate.

A setting that determines the rise time to achieve the set inspiratory pressure in pressurecontrolled (PC), VC+, BiLevel, volume supported (VS) or pressure supported (PS) breaths.

The larger the value, the more rapid the rise of pressure.

The ventilator’s strategy for responding to patient problems and system faults.

A valve residing in the ventilator’s inspiratory module designed to limit pressure in the patient circuit. When open, it allows the patient to breathe room air (if able to do so).

A mode of ventilation active if the patient circuit is connected before ventilator startup is complete, or when power is restored after a loss of 5 minutes or more.

A ventilator mode providing a set of services tailored to the needs of testing and main‐ tenance personnel. When in the service mode, the ventilator does not provide ventilation.

Synchronized intermittent mandatory ventilation. A ventilatory mode in which the ven‐ tilator delivers one mandatory breath per breath cycle and as many spontaneous breaths as the patient can trigger during the remainder of the breath cycle.

Sleeved index system. A standard for high pressure gas inlet fittings

A ventilator setting that has reached its recommended high or low limit, accompanied by an audible tone. Setting the ventilator beyond this limit requires the operator to acknowl‐ edge a visual prompt to continue.

Spontaneous. A ventilatory mode in which the ventilator delivers only spontaneous breaths. In SPONT mode, the patient triggers all breaths delivered by the ventilator with no set mandatory respiratory rate. The patient controls the breath variables, potentially augmented by support pressure.

spontaneous type A setting that determines whether spontaneous breaths are pressure-supported (PS), tube-compensated (TC), volume-supported (VS), or proportionally assisted (PAV).

SST

STPD

SVO system fault

Short self test. A test that checks circuit integrity, calculates circuit compliance and filter resistance, and checks ventilator function. Operator should run SST at specified intervals and with any replacement or alteration of the patient circuit.

Standard temperature and pressure, dry. Defined as dry gas at a standard atmosphere

(760 mmHg, 101.333 kPa, approximately 1.0 bar) and 0°C.

Safety valve open. An emergency state in which the ventilator opens the safety valve so the patient can breathe room air unassisted by the ventilator (if able to do so). An SVO state does not necessarily indicate a ventilator inoperative condition. The ventilator enters an SVO state if a hardware or software failure occurs that could compromise safe ventilation, with the loss of the air and oxygen supplies, or if the system detects an occlusion.

A definition used by the ventilator’s safety net. System faults include hardware faults

(those that originate inside the ventilator and affect its performance), soft faults (faults momentarily introduced into the ventilator that interfere with normal operation), inad‐ equate supply (AC power or external gas pressure), and patient circuit integrity (blocked or disconnected circuit).

Apnea interval, the operator-set variable that defines the breath-to-breath interval which, if exceeded, causes the ventilator to declare apnea and enter apnea ventilation.

Breath time cycle during mechanical ventilation.

Expiratory time. The expiratory interval of a breath. Also the operator-set timing variable that determines the expiratory period for pressure-controlled (PC) or VC+ mandatory breaths.

329

technical alarm

⩒

E TOT

VBS

⩒

Ventilation Assur‐ ance

Ventilator Inopera‐ tive (vent inop)

VIM

⩒

MAX

SENS

-TRIG

1/min

cmH ft

An alarm occurring due to a violation of any of the ventilator’s self monitoring conditions, or detected by background checks.

Inspiratory time, the inspiratory interval of a breath. Also, the operator-set timing variable that determines the inspiratory interval for pressure-controlled (PC) or VC+ mandatory breaths.

Mandatory interval portion of SIMV breath cycle; it is reserved for a PIM.

Plateau time. The amount of time the inspiratory phase of a mandatory breath is extended after inspiratory flow has ceased and exhalation is blocked. Increases the residence time of gas in the patient’s lungs.

Spontaneous interval portion of SIMV breath cycle; it is reserved for spontaneous breath‐ ing throughout the remainder of the breath cycle.

Minute volume, the expiratory tidal volume normalized to unit time (L/min). The dis‐ played value is compliance- and BTPS-compensated.

Ventilator breathing system. Includes the gas delivery components of the ventilator the patient circuit with tubing, filters, humidifier, and other accessories; and the ventilator’s expiratory metering and measurement components.

Volume control, a mandatory breath type in which the ventilator delivers an operator-set tidal volume, peak flow, and flow pattern. Available in A/C and SIMV modes, and for operator-initiated mandatory (OIM) breaths in SPONT mode.

A feature on the 980 Series Ventilator that enables ventilation to continue when a critical system error occurs, by entering the Backup Ventilation (BUV) state.

An emergency state the ventilator enters if it detects a hardware failure or a critical soft‐ ware error that could compromise safe ventilation. During a ventilator inoperative con‐ dition, the safety valve opens to allow the patient to breathe room air (if able to do so) unassisted by the ventilator. Qualified service personnel must power up the ventilator and run EST before normal ventilation can resume.

Ventilator-initiated mandatory breath. A breath that is delivered at a time determined by the ventilator.

Peak flow. A setting of the peak (maximum) flow of gas delivered during a VC mandatory breath. (Combined with tidal volume, flow pattern, and plateau, constant peak flow defines the inspiratory time.) To correct for compliance volume, the ventilator automat‐ ically increases the peak flow.

Flow sensitivity. A setting that determines the rate of flow inspired by the patient that triggers the ventilator to deliver a mandatory or spontaneous breath (when flow trig‐ gering is selected).

Tidal volume. A setting that determines the volume inspired and expired with each breath. The V

delivered by some Puritan Bennett ventilators is an operator-set variable that determines the volume delivered to the patient during a mandatory, volume-based breath. V

is compliance-compensated and corrected to body temperature and pressure, saturated (BTPS).

Flow triggering. A method of recognizing patient inspiratory effort in which the ventilator monitors the difference between inspiratory and expiratory flow measurements. The ventilator triggers a breath when the difference between inspiratory and expiratory flows increases to a value that is at least the value selected for flow sensitivity ( ⩒

SENS

Units of Measure

Breaths per minute. A unit measuring respiratory rate.

Centimeter. A unit of length.

Centimeters of water. A unit of pressure approximately equal to 1 hPa.

Feet. A unit of length.

330

18 lb

SLPM

hPa

kPa

L/min

AC, also ac

ASCII

CSA

CRC

DC, also dc

EMC

ETO

IEC

ISO

LCD

LED

MRI

NVRAM, also Nov‐

Ram

POST

RAM

Hectopascal. A unit of pressure, approximately equal to 1 cmH

Hertz. A unit of frequency, indicating cycles per second.

Kilogram. A unit of weight.

Kilopascal. A unit of pressure approximately equal to 10 cmH

Liter. A unit of volume.

Liters per minute. A unit of flow or minute volume (volume delivered in one minute).

Pound. A unit of weight.

Meter. A unit of length.

Milliliter. A unit of volume.

Millisecond. A unit of time.

Second. A unit of time.

Standard liters per minute. Flow rate at 1 atm pressure (101.325 kPa) and 70°F (21.1°C).

Volts. A unit of voltage.

Volt-amperes. A unit of power.

Technical Abbreviations

Alternating current. The movement of electrical charge that periodically reverses direc‐ tion.

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A standard character encoding scheme.

A certification mark issued under the authority of the European Common Market that indicates compliance with the Medical Device Directive, 93/42/EEC.

Canadian Standards Association.

Cyclic Redundancy Check or Code. An algorithm or a computational result based on the remainder of a division defined over the ring of polynomials in the Galois field GF(2). CRC algorithms are the basis for data integrity checks.

Direct current. The movement of electrical charge flowing in a single direction.

Electromagnetic compatibility.

European norm (referring to the European Common Market).

Ethylene oxide.

International Electrotechnical Commission. A standards organization.

International Standards Organization. A standards organization.

Liquid crystal display. A type of visual equipment-operator Interface.

Light-emitting diode. A means of providing visual indications.

Magnetic resonance imaging.

Non-volatile random access memory. Memory that is kept active across resets and power cycles and is not normally initialized at startup.

Power-on self test. Software algorithms to verify the integrity of application software and the hardware environment. Power-on self test generally occurs at power on, after power loss, or when the device detects an internal fault.

Random access memory.

331

332